Microsoft Switch ES4612 User Manual

e
r
o
c
t
n
e
n
a
m
r
e
p
o
n
s
i
e
r
e
h
t
t
i
m
i
l
e
g
d
e
o
n
s
i
e
r
e
h
t
Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Management Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management Guide  
Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Layer 3 Workgroup Switch with 8 SFP Ports,  
and 4 Gigabit Combination (RJ-45/SFP) Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ES4612  
F1.0.2.5 E092004-R01  
150000046400A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching and Layer 3  
routing. It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features  
listed in this manual. The default configuration can be used for most of the features  
provided by this switch. However, there are many options that you should configure  
to maximize the switch’s performance for your particular network environment.  
Key Features  
Table 1-1 Key Features  
Feature  
Description  
Configuration Backup Backup to TFTP server  
and Restore  
Authentication  
Console, Telnet, web – User name / password, RADIUS, TACACS+  
Web – HTTPS; Telnet – SSH  
SNMP v1/2c - Community strings  
SNMP version 3 – MD5 or SHA password  
Port – IEEE 802.1x, MAC address filtering  
Access Control Lists  
Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs  
Supported  
DHCP Client, Relay  
and Server  
DNS Server  
Supported  
Port Configuration  
Rate Limiting  
Port Mirroring  
Port Trunking  
Speed, duplex mode and flow control  
Input and output rate limiting per port  
One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port  
Supports up to 6 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking (LACP)  
Supported  
Broadcast Storm  
Control  
Address Table  
Up to 16K MAC addresses in the forwarding table, 1024 static MAC addresses;  
Up to 4K IP entries in ARP cache, 2045 IP entries in routing table, 128 static IP  
routes  
IEEE 802.1D Bridge  
Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning  
Store-and-Forward  
Switching  
Supported to ensure wire-speed switching while eliminating bad frames  
Spanning Tree  
Protocol  
Supports standard STP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), and Multiple  
Spanning Trees (MSTP)  
Virtual LANs  
Up to 255 using IEEE 802.1Q, port-based, protocol-based, or private VLANs  
Traffic Prioritization  
Default port priority, traffic class map, queue scheduling, IP Precedence, or  
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), and TCP/UDP Port  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
1
Table 1-1 Key Features (Continued)  
Description  
Feature  
Router Redundancy  
Router backup is provided with the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)  
and the Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)  
IP Routing  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), static routes  
Static and dynamic address configuration, proxy ARP  
ARP  
Multicast Filtering  
Multicast Routing  
Supports IGMP snooping and query for Layer 2, and IGMP for Layer 3  
Supports DVMRP and PIM-DM  
Description of Software Features  
The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features.  
Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port  
saturation. Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from  
engulfing the network. Untagged (port-based), tagged, and protocol-based VLANs,  
plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and  
efficient use of network bandwidth. CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum  
delay for moving real-time multimedia data across the network. While multicast  
filtering and routing provides support for real-time network applications. Some of the  
management features are briefly described below.  
Configuration Backup and Restore – You can save the current configuration  
settings to a file on a TFTP server, and later download this file to restore the switch  
configuration settings.  
Authentication – This switch authenticates management access via the console  
port, Telnet or web browser. User names and passwords can be configured locally or  
can be verified via a remote authentication server (i.e., RADIUS or TACACS+).  
Port-based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802.1x protocol. This  
protocol uses Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to request  
user credentials from the 802.1x client, and then uses the EAP between the switch  
and the authentication server to verify the client’s right to access the network via an  
authentication server (i.e., RADIUS server).  
Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the  
web, SSH for secure management access over a Telnet-equivalent connection,  
SNMP Version 3, IP address filtering for SNMP/web/Telnet management access,  
and MAC address filtering for port access.  
Access Control Lists – ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on  
address, protocol, TCP/UDP port number or TCP control code) or any frames  
(based on MAC address or Ethernet type). ACLs can by used to improve  
performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security  
controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description of Software Features  
1
DHCP Server and DHCP Relay – A DHCP server is provided to assign IP  
addresses to host devices. Since DHCP uses a broadcast mechanism, a DHCP  
server and its client must physically reside on the same subnet. Since it is not  
practical to have a DHCP server on every subnet, DHCP Relay is also supported to  
allow dynamic configuration of local clients from a DHCP server located in a different  
network.  
Port Configuration – You can manually configure the speed, duplex mode, and  
flow control used on specific ports, or use auto-negotiation to detect the connection  
settings used by the attached device. Use the full-duplex mode on ports whenever  
possible to double the throughput of switch connections. Flow control should also be  
enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss  
of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded. The switch supports flow  
control based on the IEEE 802.3x standard.  
Rate Limiting – This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or  
received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a  
network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is  
transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.  
Port Mirroring – The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a  
monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to  
perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.  
Port Trunking – Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection. Trunks can  
be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation  
Control Protocol (LACP). The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput  
across any connection, and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in  
the trunk should fail. The switch supports up to 6 trunks.  
Broadcast Storm Control – Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from  
overwhelming the network. When enabled on a port, the level of broadcast traffic  
passing through the port is restricted. If broadcast traffic rises above a pre-defined  
threshold, it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold.  
Static Addresses – A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this  
switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.  
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and  
will not be written to the address table. Static addresses can be used to provide  
network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port.  
IEEE 802.1D Bridge – The switch supports IEEE 802.1D transparent bridging. The  
address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses, and then filtering or  
forwarding traffic based on this information. The address table supports up to 16K  
addresses.  
Store-and-Forward Switching – The switch copies each frame into its memory  
before forwarding them to another port. This ensures that all frames are a standard  
Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check  
(CRC). This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
To avoid dropping frames on congested ports, the switch provides 1 MB for frame  
buffering. This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested  
networks.  
Spanning Tree Protocol – The switch supports these spanning tree protocols:  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D) – This protocol adds a level of fault  
tolerance by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a  
pair of LAN segments. When there are multiple physical paths between segments,  
this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one  
route exists between any two stations on the network. This prevents the creation of  
network loops. However, if the chosen path should fail for any reason, an alternate  
path will be activated to maintain the connection.  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w) – This protocol reduces the  
convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of that required by the  
older IEEE 802.1D STP standard. It is intended as a complete replacement for STP,  
but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically  
reconfiguring ports to STP-compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages  
from attached devices.  
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, IEEE 802.1s) – This protocol is a direct  
extension of RSTP. It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs.  
It simplifies network management, provides for even faster convergence than RSTP  
by limiting the size of each region, and prevents VLAN members from being  
segmented from the rest of the group (as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802.1D STP).  
Virtual LANs – The switch supports up to 255 VLANs. A Virtual LAN is a collection  
of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical  
location or connection point in the network. The switch supports tagged VLANs  
based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically  
learned via GVRP, or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs.  
This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been  
assigned. By segmenting your network into VLANs, you can:  
• Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network.  
• Simplify network management for node changes/moves by remotely configuring  
VLAN membership for any port, rather than having to manually change the network  
connection.  
• Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN, except where  
a connection is explicitly defined via the switch’s routing service.  
• Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink  
ports, thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN, and allowing you to  
limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured.  
• Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type.  
Traffic Prioritization – This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required  
level of service, using eight priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin  
Queuing. It uses IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on  
input from the end-station application. These functions can be used to provide  
independent priorities for delay-sensitive data and best-effort data.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of Software Features  
1
This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to  
meet application requirements. Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in  
the IP frame’s Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the TCP/UDP port.  
When these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service  
value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.  
IP Routing – The switch provides Layer 3 IP routing. To maintain a high rate of  
throughput, the switch forwards all traffic passing within the same segment, and  
routes only traffic that passes between different subnetworks. The wire-speed  
routing provided by this switch lets you easily link network segments or VLANs  
together without having to deal with the bottlenecks or configuration hassles  
normally associated with conventional routers.  
Routing for unicast traffic is supported with the Routing Information Protocol (RIP)  
and the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol.  
RIP – This protocol uses a distance-vector approach to routing. Routes are  
determined on the basis of minimizing the distance vector, or hop count, which  
serves as a rough estimate of transmission cost.  
OSPF – This approach uses a link state routing protocol to generate a shortest-path  
tree, then builds up its routing table based on this tree. OSPF produces a more  
stable network because the participating routers act on network changes predictably  
and simultaneously, converging on the best route more quickly than RIP.  
Router Redundancy – Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) and Virtual Router  
Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) both use a virtual IP address to support a primary  
router and multiple backup routers. The backups can be configured to take over the  
workload if the master fails or to load share the traffic. The primary goal of these  
protocols is to allow a host device which has been configured with a fixed gateway to  
maintain network connectivity in case the primary gateway goes down.  
Address Resolution Protocol – The switch uses ARP and Proxy ARP to convert  
between IP addresses and MAC (i.e., hardware) addresses. This switch supports  
conventional ARP, which locates the MAC address corresponding to a given IP  
address. This allows the switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the  
corresponding MAC addresses to forward packets from one hop to the next. You can  
configure either static or dynamic entries in the ARP cache.  
Proxy ARP allows hosts that do not support routing to determine the MAC address  
of a device on another network or subnet. When a host sends an ARP request for a  
remote network, the switch checks to see if it has the best route. If it does, it sends  
its own MAC address to the host. The host then sends traffic for the remote  
destination via the switch, which uses its own routing table to reach the destination  
on the other network.  
Multicast Filtering – Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to  
ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee  
real-time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN. The  
switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query at Layer 2 and IGMP at Layer 3 to manage  
multicast group registration.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
Multicast Routing – Routing for multicast packets is supported by the Distance  
Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) and Protocol-Independent Multicasting -  
Dense Mode (PIM-DM). These protocols work in conjunction with IGMP to filter and  
route multicast traffic. DVMRP is a more comprehensive implementation that  
maintains its own routing table, but is gradually being replacing by most network  
managers with PIM, Dense Mode and Sparse Mode. PIM is a very simple protocol  
that uses the routing table of the unicast routing protocol enabled on an interface.  
Dense Mode is designed for areas where the probability of multicast clients is  
relatively high, and the overhead of frequent flooding is justified. While Sparse mode  
is designed for network areas, such as the Wide Area Network, where the probability  
of multicast clients is low. This switch currently supports DVMRP and PIM-DM.  
System Defaults  
The switch’s system defaults are provided in the configuration file  
“Factory_Default_Config.cfg.” To reset the switch defaults, this file should be set as  
the startup configuration file (page 3-23).  
The following table lists some of the basic system defaults.  
Table 1-2 System Defaults  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
Console Port  
Connection  
Baud Rate  
auto  
Data bits  
8
Stop bits  
1
Parity  
none  
Local Console Timeout  
Privileged Exec Level  
0 (disabled)  
Authentication  
Username “admin”  
Password “admin”  
Normal Exec Level  
Username “guest”  
Password “guest”  
Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Password “super”  
Exec Level  
RADIUS Authentication  
TACACS Authentication  
802.1x Port Authentication  
HTTPS  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
SSH  
Port Security  
IP Filtering  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Defaults  
1
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
Enabled  
80  
Web Management  
HTTP Server  
HTTP Port Number  
HTTP Secure Server  
HTTP Secure Port Number  
Community Strings  
Enabled  
443  
SNMP  
“public” (read only)  
“private” (read/write)  
Traps  
Authentication traps: enabled  
Link-up-down events: enabled  
SNMP V3  
View: defaultview  
Group: public (read only), private (read/write)  
Port Configuration  
Admin Status  
Auto-negotiation  
Flow Control  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Port Capability  
1000BASE-T –  
10 Mbps half duplex  
10 Mbps full duplex  
100 Mbps half duplex  
100 Mbps full duplex  
1000 Mbps full duplex  
Full-duplex flow control disabled  
Symmetric flow control disabled  
SFP/Module Port Capability  
1000BASE-SX/LX/LH –  
1000 Mbps full duplex  
Full-duplex flow control disabled  
Symmetric flow control disabled  
100BASE-FX –  
100 Mbps full duplex  
Full-duplex flow control disabled  
Symmetric flow control disabled  
Rate Limiting  
Port Trunking  
Input and output limits  
Static Trunks  
Disabled  
None  
LACP (all ports)  
Status  
Disabled  
Broadcast Storm  
Protection  
Enabled (all ports)  
500 packets per second  
Broadcast Limit Rate  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
Spanning Tree  
Protocol  
Status  
Enabled, MSTP  
(Defaults: All values based on IEEE 802.1s)  
Fast Forwarding (Edge Port)  
Aging Time  
Disabled  
Address Table  
Virtual LANs  
300 seconds  
Default VLAN  
1
PVID  
1
Acceptable Frame Type  
Ingress Filtering  
All  
Disabled  
Switchport Mode (Egress Mode)  
GVRP (global)  
Hybrid: tagged/untagged frames  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
GVRP (port interface)  
Ingress Port Priority  
Weighted Round Robin  
Traffic Prioritization  
Queue: 0 1 2 3 4  
5
6
7
Weight: 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14  
IP Precedence Priority  
IP DSCP Priority  
IP Port Priority  
Management. VLAN  
IP Address  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
IP Settings  
Any VLAN configured with an IP address  
0.0.0.0  
Subnet Mask  
255.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Default Gateway  
DHCP  
Client: Enabled  
Relay: Disabled  
Server: Disabled  
DNS  
Server: Disabled  
Disabled  
BOOTP  
ARP  
Enabled  
Cache Timeout: 20 minutes  
Proxy: Disabled  
Unicast Routing  
RIP  
Disabled  
Disabled  
OSPF  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Defaults  
1
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Router Redundancy  
HSRP  
VRRP  
Multicast Filtering  
IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)  
Snooping: Enabled  
Querier: Disabled  
IGMP (Layer 3)  
DVMRP  
Disabled  
Multicast Routing  
System Log  
Disabled  
PIM-DM  
Disabled  
Status  
Enabled  
Messages Logged  
Messages Logged to Flash  
Event Handler  
Clock Synchronization  
Levels 0-7 (all)  
Levels 0-3  
Disabled  
SMTP Email Alerts  
SNTP  
Disabled  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2: Initial Configuration  
Connecting to the Switch  
Configuration Options  
The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent offers a variety  
of management options, including SNMP, RMON and a web-based interface. A PC  
may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a  
command line interface (CLI).  
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To change this  
The switch’s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters, monitor  
port connections, and display statistics using a standard web browser such as  
Netscape Navigator version 6.2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5.0 and higher.  
The switch’s web management interface can be accessed from any computer  
attached to the network.  
The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232 serial  
console port on the switch, or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network.  
The switch’s management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network  
Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from  
any system in the network using network management software such as  
HP OpenView.  
The switch’s web interface, CLI configuration program, and SNMP agent allow you  
to perform the following management functions:  
• Set user names and passwords  
• Set an IP interface for any VLAN  
• Configure SNMP parameters  
• Enable/disable any port  
• Set the speed/duplex mode for any port  
• Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates  
• Control port access through IEEE 802.1x security or static address filtering  
• Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs)  
• Configure up to 255 IEEE 802.1Q VLANs  
• Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration  
• Configure IP routing for unicast or multicast traffic  
• Configure router redundancy  
• Configure IGMP multicast filtering  
• Upload and download system firmware via TFTP  
• Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Configuration  
2
• Configure Spanning Tree parameters  
• Configure Class of Service (CoS) priority queuing  
• Configure up to 6 static or LACP trunks  
• Enable port mirroring  
• Set broadcast storm control on any port  
• Display system information and statistics  
Required Connections  
The switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or  
terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch. A null-modem console cable is  
provided with the switch.  
Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program  
to the switch. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a  
null-modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the  
Installation Guide.  
To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:  
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running  
terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the  
DB-9 connector.  
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-232 serial port on the switch.  
3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:  
• Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).  
• Set to any of the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200  
(Note: Set to 9600 baud if want to view all the system initialization messages.).  
• Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.  
• Set flow control to none.  
• Set the emulation mode to VT100.  
• When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.  
®
®
Notes: 1. When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000, make sure that  
you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed. Windows 2000  
Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in  
HyperTerminal’s VT100 emulation. See www.microsoft.com for information  
on Windows 2000 service packs.  
2. Refer to “Line Commands” on page 4-11 for a complete description of  
console configuration options.  
3. Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login screen will be  
displayed.  
For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line Interface” on  
page 4-1. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Configuration  
2
Remote Connections  
Prior to accessing the switch’s onboard agent via a network connection, you must  
first configure it with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using a  
console connection, DHCP or BOOTP protocol.  
The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To manually  
configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP,  
Notes: 1. This switch supports four concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions.  
2. Each VLAN group can be assigned its own IP interface address (page 2-4).  
You can manage the switch via any of these addresses.  
After configuring the switch’s IP parameters, you can access the onboard  
configuration program from anywhere within the attached network. The onboard  
configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to  
the network. The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web  
browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above), or  
from a network computer using SNMP network management software.  
Note: The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions. To  
access the full range of SNMP management functions, you must use  
SNMP-based network management software.  
Basic Configuration  
Console Connection  
The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal access level  
(Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec). The commands  
available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the  
Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic  
utilities. To fully configure the switch parameters, you must access the CLI at the  
Privileged Exec level.  
Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords. The switch  
has a default user name and password for each level. To log into the CLI at the  
Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password, perform these  
steps:  
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The “User Access  
Verification” procedure starts.  
2. At the Username prompt, enter “admin.”  
3. At the Password prompt, also enter “admin.” (The password characters are not  
displayed on the console screen.)  
4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt indicating  
you have access at the Privileged Exec level.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Configuration  
2
Setting Passwords  
Note: If this is your first time to log into the CLI program, you should define new  
passwords for both default user names using the “username” command, record  
them and put them in a safe place.  
Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.  
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, set the passwords as follows:  
1. Open the console interface with the default user name and password “admin” to  
access the Privileged Exec level.  
2. Type “configure” and press <Enter>.  
3. Type “username guest password 0 password,” for the Normal Exec level, where  
password is your new password. Press <Enter>.  
4. Type “username admin password 0 password,” for the Privileged Exec level,  
where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.  
Username: admin  
Password:  
CLI session with the switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password]  
Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password]  
Console(config)#  
Setting an IP Address  
You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management  
access through the network. This can be done in either of the following ways:  
Manual You have to input the information, including IP address and subnet mask.  
If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch, you will also  
need to specify the default gateway router.  
Dynamic — The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP  
address allocation servers on the network.  
Manual Configuration  
You can manually assign an IP address to the switch. You may also need to specify  
a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that  
exist on another network segment (if routing is not enabled on this switch). Valid IP  
addresses consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.  
Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program.  
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Basic Configuration  
2
Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the following  
information from your network administrator:  
• IP address for the switch  
• Default gateway for the network  
• Network mask for this network  
To assign an IP address to the switch, complete the following steps:  
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type  
“interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.  
2. Type “ip address ip-address netmask,” where “ip-address” is the switch IP  
address and “netmask” is the network mask for the network. Press <Enter>.  
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press <Enter>.  
4. To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch  
belongs, type “ip default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway” is the IP address  
of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254  
Console(config)#  
Dynamic Configuration  
If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, IP will be enabled but will not function until  
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. You therefore need to use the “ip dhcp  
restart client” command to start broadcasting service requests. Requests will be sent  
periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information. (BOOTP and DHCP  
values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)  
If the “bootp” or “dhcp” option is saved to the startup-config file (step 6), then the  
switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on.  
To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP  
address allocation servers on the network, complete the following steps:  
1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access  
the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.  
2. At the interface-configuration mode prompt, use one of the following commands:  
• To obtain IP settings via DHCP, type “ip address dhcp” and press <Enter>.  
• To obtain IP settings via BOOTP, type “ip address bootp” and press <Enter>.  
3. Type “end” to return to the Privileged Exec mode. Press <Enter>.  
4. Type “ip dhcp restart client” to begin broadcasting service requests.  
Press <Enter>.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Configuration  
2
5. Wait a few minutes, and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the  
“show ip interface” command. Press <Enter>.  
6. Then save your configuration changes by typing “copy running-config  
startup-config.” Enter the startup file name and press <Enter>.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#ip dhcp restart client  
Console#show ip interface  
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,  
and address mode: User specified.  
Console#copy running-config startup-config  
Startup configuration file name []: startup  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Enabling SNMP Management Access  
The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as HP OpenView. You  
can configure the switch to (1) respond to SNMP requests or (2) generate SNMP  
traps.  
When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to return  
information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the requested data or sets the  
specified parameter. The switch can also be configured to send information to  
SNMP managers (without being requested by the managers) through trap  
messages, which inform the manager that certain events have occurred.  
The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1, 2c, and 3  
clients. To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients, you must specify  
a community string. The switch provides a default MIB View (i.e., an SNMPv3  
construct) for the default “public” community string that provides read access to the  
entire MIB tree, and a default view for the “private” community string that provides  
read/write access to the entire MIB tree. However, you may assign new views to  
version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements (see  
Community Strings (for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients)  
Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and  
2c stations, as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from  
the switch. You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users, and  
set the access level.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
2
The default strings are:  
public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to  
retrieve MIB objects.  
private - with read-write access. Authorized management stations are able to both  
retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients, it is  
recommended that you change the default community strings.  
To configure a community string, complete the following steps:  
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type  
“snmp-server community string mode,” where “string” is the community access  
string and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read only). Press <Enter>. (Note that  
the default mode is read only.)  
2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community string,”  
where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press <Enter>.  
Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw  
Console(config)#snmp-server community private  
Console(config)#  
Note: If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients, we  
recommend that you delete both of the default community strings. If there are no  
community strings, then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c  
clients is disabled.  
Trap Receivers  
You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch. To  
configure a trap receiver, use the “snmp-server host” command. From the Privileged  
Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type:  
“snmp-server host host-address community-string  
[version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}]”  
where “host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver, “community-string”  
specifies access rights for a version 1/2c host, or is the user name of a version 3  
host, “version” indicates the SNMP client version, and “auth | noauth | priv” means  
that authentication, no authentication, or authentication and privacy is used for v3  
clients. Then press <Enter>. For a more detailed description of these parameters,  
see “snmp-server host” on page 4-117. The following example creates a trap host  
for each type of SNMP client.  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.98 robin version 2c  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.34 barbie version 3 auth  
Console(config)#  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Configuration  
2
Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients  
To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients, you need to first create a  
view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write, assign the view  
to a group, and then assign the user to a group. The following example creates one  
view called “mib-2” that includes the entire MIB-2 tree branch, and then another view  
that includes the IEEE 802.1d bridge MIB. It assigns these respective read and read/  
write views to a group call “r&d” and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA.  
In the last step, it assigns a v3 user to this group, indicating that MD5 will be used for  
authentication, provides the password “greenpeace” for authentication, and the  
password “einstien” for encryption.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included  
Console(config)#snmp-server view 802.1d 1.3.6.1.2.1.17 included  
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth mib-2 802.1d  
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace  
priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#  
For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from  
refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4-113.  
Saving Configuration Settings  
Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not  
saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration changes in  
nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration file to the start-up  
configuration file using the “copy” command.  
To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:  
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config  
startup-config” and press <Enter>.  
2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.  
Console#copy running-config startup-config  
Startup configuration file name []: startup  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Managing System Files  
2
Managing System Files  
The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed  
by the CLI program, web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file system allows files to  
be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and set as a start-up file.  
The three types of files are:  
Configuration — This file stores system configuration information and is created  
when configuration settings are saved. Saved configuration files can be selected  
as a system start-up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup. A file  
named “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings and  
cannot be deleted from the system. See “Saving or Restoring Configuration  
Settings” on page 3-22 for more information.  
Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up, also known as  
run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web  
management interfaces. See “Managing Firmware” on page 3-19 for more  
information.  
Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also known as  
POST (Power On Self-Test).  
Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation  
code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration  
files as available flash memory space allows.  
In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the start-up file.  
During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start-up file  
are run, and then the start-up configuration file is loaded.  
Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the  
contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly to the running-config,  
the system will reboot, and the settings will have to be copied from the  
running-config to a permanent file.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial Configuration  
2
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Configuring the Switch  
Using the Web Interface  
This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent. Using a web browser you can  
configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity. The web agent  
can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser  
(Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above).  
Note: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage the switch over a  
serial connection to the console port or via Telnet. For more information on using  
Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser, be sure you have first performed  
the following tasks:  
1. Configure the switch with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway  
using an out-of-band serial connection, BOOTP or DHCP protocol. (See  
2. Set user names and passwords using an out-of-band serial connection. Access  
to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the  
onboard configuration program. (See “Setting Passwords” on page 2-4.)  
3. After you enter a user name and password, you will have access to the system  
configuration program.  
Notes: 1. You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password; on the third  
failed attempt the current connection is terminated.  
2. If you log into the web interface as guest (Normal Exec level), you can view  
the configuration settings or change the guest password. If you log in as  
“admin” (Privileged Exec level), you can change the settings on any page.  
3. If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass  
through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm, then you can set  
the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding (i.e.,  
enable Admin Edge Port) to improve the switch’s response time to  
management commands issued through the web interface. See “Configuring  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Navigating the Web Browser Interface  
To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and  
password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration parameters  
and statistics. The default user name and password for the administrator is “admin.”  
Home Page  
When your web browser connects with the switch’s web agent, the home page is  
displayed as shown below. The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side  
of the screen and System Information on the right side. The Main Menu links are  
used to navigate to other menus, and display configuration parameters and  
statistics.  
Figure 3-1 Home Page  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Navigating the Web Browser Interface  
3
Configuration Options  
Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a configuration  
change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm  
the new setting. The following table summarizes the web page configuration  
buttons.  
Table 3-1 Web Page Configuration Buttons  
Button  
Action  
Revert  
Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to  
pressing “Apply” or “Apply Changes.”  
Refresh  
Apply  
Help  
Immediately updates values for the current page.  
Sets specified values to the system.  
Links directly to web help.  
Notes: 1. To ensure proper screen refresh, be sure that Internet Explorer 5.x is  
configured as follows: Under the menu “Tools / Internet Options / General /  
Temporary Internet Files / Settings,” the setting for item “Check for newer  
versions of stored pages” should be “Every visit to the page.”  
2. When using Internet Explorer 5.0, you may have to manually refresh the  
screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser’s refresh  
button.  
Panel Display  
The web agent displays an image of the switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to  
display different information for the ports, including Active (i.e., up or down), Duplex  
(i.e., half or full duplex), or Flow Control (i.e., with or without flow control). Clicking on  
the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3-81.  
Figure 3-2 Front Panel Indicators  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring the Switch  
3
Main Menu  
Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and  
control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. The following  
table briefly describes the selections available from this program.  
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
System  
System Information  
Provides basic system description, including contact information  
Switch Information  
Shows the number of ports, hardware/firmware version  
numbers, and power status  
Bridge Extension  
File Management  
Copy Operation  
Delete  
Shows the bridge extension parameters  
Allows the transfer and copying files  
Allows deletion of files from the flash memory  
Sets the startup file  
Set Startup  
Line  
Console  
Sets console port connection parameters  
Sets Telnet connection parameters  
Telnet  
Log  
Logs  
Sends error messages to a logging process  
Stores and displays error messages  
System Logs  
Remote Logs  
Reset  
Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process  
Restarts the switch  
SNTP  
Configuration  
Configures SNTP client settings, including broadcast mode or a  
specified list of servers  
Clock Time Zone  
Sets the local time zone for the system clock  
SNMP  
Configuration  
Agent Status  
SNMPv3  
Engine ID  
Users  
Configures community strings and related trap functions  
Enables or disables SNMP  
Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID  
Configures SNMP v3 users  
Configures SNMP v3 groups  
Configures SNMP v3 views  
Groups  
Views  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Navigating the Web Browser Interface  
3
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
Security  
User Accounts  
Configures user names, passwords, and access levels  
Configures authentication sequence, RADIUS and TACACS  
Configures secure HTTP settings  
Authentication Settings  
HTTPS Settings  
SSH  
Settings  
Configures Secure Shell server settings  
Host-Key Settings  
Port Security  
Generates the host key pair (public and private)  
Configures per port security, including status, response for  
security breach, and maximum allowed MAC addresses  
802.1x  
Port authentication  
Information  
Configuration  
Port Configuration  
Statistics  
Displays global configuration settings  
Configures protocol parameters  
Sets the authentication mode for individual ports  
Displays protocol statistics for the selected port  
ACL  
Configuration  
Mask Configuration  
Port Binding  
IP Filter  
Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses  
Controls the order in which ACL rules are checked  
Binds a port to the specified ACL  
Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access  
Port  
Port Information  
Trunk Information  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
Trunk Membership  
LACP  
Displays port connection status  
Displays trunk connection status  
Configures port connection settings  
Configures trunk connection settings  
Specifies ports to group into static trunks  
Configuration  
Allows ports to dynamically join trunks  
Aggregation Port  
Port Counters  
Configures parameters for link aggregation group members  
Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages  
Displays settings and operational state for the local side  
Port Internal Information  
Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side  
Port Broadcast Control  
Mirror Port Configuration  
Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port  
Sets the source and target ports for mirroring  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
Rate Limit  
Input Port Configuration  
Sets the input rate limit for each port  
Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk  
Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each port  
Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunk  
Port Statistics  
Address Table  
Static Addresses  
Dynamic Addresses  
Address Aging  
Spanning Tree  
STA  
Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics  
Displays entries for interface, address or VLAN  
Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table  
Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries  
Information  
Displays STA values used for the bridge  
Configuration  
Configures global bridge settings for STA, RSTP and MSTP  
Displays individual port settings for STA  
Port Information  
Trunk Information  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
MSTP  
Displays individual trunk settings for STA  
Configures individual port settings for STA  
Configures individual trunk settings for STA  
VLAN Configuration  
Port Information  
Trunk Information  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
VLAN  
Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance  
Displays port settings for a specified MST instance  
Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance  
Configures port settings for a specified MST instance  
Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance  
802.1Q VLAN  
GVRP Status  
Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol  
Basic Information  
Current Table  
Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3-126  
Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or  
not the port is tagged or untagged  
Static List  
Used to create or remove VLAN groups  
Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN  
Static Table  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigating the Web Browser Interface  
3
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Static Membership  
Description  
Page  
Configures membership type for interfaces, including tagged,  
untagged or forbidden  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
Private VLAN  
Status  
Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes  
Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes  
Enables or disables the private VLAN  
Configures the private VLAN  
Link Status  
Protocol VLAN  
Configuration  
Creates a protocol group, specifying the supported protocols  
Maps a protocol group to a VLAN  
NA  
Port Configuration  
Priority  
Default Port Priority  
Default Trunk Priority  
Traffic Classes  
Sets the default priority for each port  
Sets the default priority for each trunk  
Maps IEEE 802.1p priority tags to output queues  
Enables/disables traffic class priorities (not implemented)  
Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin  
Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing  
Traffic Classes Status  
Queue Mode  
Queue Scheduling  
IP Precedence/  
DSCP Priority Status  
Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, or disables  
both.  
IP Precedence Priority  
IP DSCP Priority  
Sets IP Type of Service priority, mapping the precedence tag to  
a class-of-service value  
Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority, mapping a  
DSCP tag to a class-of-service value  
IP Port Priority Status  
IP Port Priority  
Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority  
Sets TCP/UDP port priority, defining the socket number and  
associated class-of-service value  
ACL CoS Priority  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets 3-149  
matching an ACL rule  
ACL Marker  
Change traffic priorities for frames matching an ACL rule  
IGMP Snooping  
IGMP Configuration  
Enables multicast filtering; configures parameters for multicast  
query  
Multicast Router  
Port Information  
Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast  
router for each VLAN ID  
Static Multicast Router  
Port Configuration  
Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3-157  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
IP Multicast Registration  
Table  
Displays all multicast groups active on this switch, including  
multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID  
IGMP Member Port Table  
Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected  
VLAN  
DNS  
General Configuration  
Enables DNS; configures domain name and domain list; and  
specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup  
Static Host Table  
Cache  
Configures static entries for domain name to address mapping  
Displays cache entries discovered by designated name servers 3-168  
DHCP  
Relay Configuration  
Server  
Specifies DHCP relay servers; enables or disables relay service 3-169  
Configures DHCP server parameters  
General  
Enables DHCP server; configures excluded address range  
Configures address pools for network groups or a specific host  
Displays addresses currently bound to DHCP clients  
Pool Configuration  
IP Binding  
IP  
General  
Global Settings  
Routing Interface  
ARP  
Enables or disables routing, specifies the default gateway  
Configures the IP interface for the specified VLAN  
General  
Sets the protocol timeout, and enables or disables proxy ARP for 3-200  
the specified VLAN  
Static Addresses  
Dynamic Addresses  
Other Addresses  
Statistics  
Statically maps a physical address to an IP address  
Shows dynamically learned entries in the IP routing table  
Shows internal addresses used by the switch  
Shows statistics on ARP requests sent and received  
IGMP  
Interface Settings  
Group Membership  
Statistics  
Configures Layer 3 IGMP for specific VLAN interfaces  
Displays the current multicast groups learned via IGMP  
IP  
Shows statistics for IP traffic, including the amount of traffic,  
address errors, routing, fragmentation and reassembly  
ICMP  
Shows statistics for ICMP traffic, including the amount of traffic,  
protocol errors, and the number of echoes, timestamps, and  
address masks  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigating the Web Browser Interface  
3
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
UDP  
Description  
Page  
Shows statistics for UDP, including the amount of traffic and  
errors  
TCP  
Shows statistics for TCP, including the amount of traffic and TCP 3-210  
connection activity  
Routing  
Static Routes  
Configures and display static routing entries  
Routing Table  
Shows all routing entries, including local, static and dynamic  
routes  
Multicast Routing  
General Settings  
Multicast Routing Table  
VRRP  
Globally enables multicast routing  
Shows each multicast route this switch has learned  
Group Configuration  
Configures VRRP groups, including virtual interface address,  
advertisement interval, preemption, priority, and authentication  
Global Statistics  
Group Statistics  
Displays global statistics for VRRP protocol packet errors  
Displays statistics for VRRP protocol events and errors on the  
specified VRRP group and interface  
HSRP  
Group Configuration  
Configures HSRP groups, including virtual interface address,  
advertisement interval, preemption, priority, authentication, and  
interface tracking  
Routing Protocol  
RIP  
General Settings  
Enables or disables RIP, sets the global RIP version and timer  
values  
Network Addresses  
Interface Settings  
Configures the network interfaces that will use RIP  
Configures RIP parameters for each interface, including send  
and receive versions, message loopback prevention, and  
authentication  
Statistics  
Displays general information on update time, route changes and  
number of queries, as well as a list of statistics for known  
interfaces and neighbors  
OSPF  
General Configuration  
Enables or disables OSPF; also configures the Router ID and  
various other global settings  
Area Configuration  
Specifies rules for importing routes into each area  
Area Range Configuration Configures route summaries to advertise at an area boundary  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
Interface Configuration  
Shows area ID and designated router; also configures OSPF  
protocol settings and authentication for each interface  
Virtual Link Configuration Configures a virtual link through a transit area to the backbone  
Network Area Address  
Configuration  
Defines OSPF areas and associated interfaces  
Summary Address  
Configuration  
Aggregates routes learned from other protocols for advertising  
into other autonomous systems  
Redistribute Configuration Redistributes routes from one routing domain to another  
NSSA Settings  
Configures settings for importing routes into or exporting routes  
out of not-so-stubby areas  
Link State Database  
Information  
Shows information about different OSPF Link State  
Advertisements (LSAs) stored in this router’s database  
Border Router Information Displays routing table entries for area border routers and  
autonomous system boundary routers  
Neighbor Information  
Displays information about neighboring routers on each  
interface within an OSPF area  
DVMRP  
General Settings  
Configure global settings for prune and graft messages, and the  
exchange of routing information  
Interface Settings  
Neighbor Information  
Routing Table  
Enables/disables DVMRP per interface and sets the route metric 3-256  
Displays neighboring DVMRP routers  
Displays DVMRP routing information  
PIM-DM  
General Settings  
Interface Settings  
Enables or disables PIM-DM globally for the switch  
Enables or disables PIM-DM per interface, configures protocol  
settings for hello, prune and graft messages  
Interface Information  
Neighbor Information  
Displays summary information for each interface  
Displays neighboring PIM-DM routers  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Configuration  
3
Basic Configuration  
Displaying System Information  
You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name, location and  
contact information.  
Field Attributes  
System Name – Name assigned to the switch system.  
Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem.  
Location – Specifies the system location.  
Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.  
System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been up.  
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.  
MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.  
Web server – Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.  
Web server port – Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface.  
Web secure server – Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled.  
Web secure server port – Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface.  
Telnet server – Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled.  
Telnet server port – Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface.  
Jumbo Frame – Shows if jumbo frames are enabled.  
POST result – Shows results of the power-on self-test  
Web – Click System, System Information. Specify the system name, location, and  
contact information for the system administrator, then click Apply. (This page also  
includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet.)  
Figure 3-3 System Information  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Specify the hostname, location and contact information.  
Console(config)#hostname R&D 5  
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC 9  
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Ted  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show system  
System description: 8 SFP ports + 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2/L3/L4 managed  
standalone switch  
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.57  
System information  
System Up time: 0 days, 2 hours, 4 minutes, and 7.13 seconds  
System Name  
: R&D 5  
System Location  
System Contact  
MAC address  
Web server  
Web server port  
: WC 9  
: Ted  
: 00-30-f1-47-58-3a  
: enable  
: 80  
Web secure server  
: enable  
Web secure server port : 443  
Telnet server  
Telnet server port  
Jumbo Frame  
: enable  
: 23  
: Disabled  
POST result  
DUMMY Test 1.................PASS  
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS  
DRAM Test....................PASS  
Timer Test...................PASS  
PCI Device 1 Test............PASS  
PCI Device 2 Test............PASS  
I2C bus Initialization.......PASS  
RTC Initialization...........PASS  
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS  
Done All Pass.  
Console#  
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions  
Use the Switch Information page to display hardware/firmware version numbers for  
the main board and management software, as well as the power status of the  
system.  
Field Attributes  
Main Board  
Serial Number – The serial number of the switch.  
Number of Ports – Number of built-in ports.  
Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board.  
Internal Power Status – Displays the status of the internal power supply.  
Management Software  
Loader Version – Version number of loader code.  
Boot-ROM Version – Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and boot code.  
Operation Code Version – Version number of runtime code.  
Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master (i.e., operating stand-alone).  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
3
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.  
Unit ID – Unit number in stack.  
Redundant Power Status – Displays the status of the redundant power supply.  
Web – Click System, Switch Information.  
Figure 3-4 Switch Information  
CLI – Use the following command to display version information.  
Console#show version  
Unit1  
Serial number  
: A322043872  
: R01  
:12  
Hardware version  
Number of ports  
Main power status  
:up  
Redundant power status :down  
Agent (master)  
Unit ID  
: 1  
Loader version  
Boot ROM version  
: 2.1.0.0  
: 2.0.2.1  
Operation code version : 1.0.2.5  
Console#  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities  
The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast  
Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these extensions to  
display default settings for the key variables.  
Field Attributes  
Extended Multicast Filtering Services – This switch does not support the filtering  
of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration  
Protocol).  
Traffic Classes – This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic  
Static Entry Individual Port – This switch allows static filtering for unicast and  
multicast addresses. (Refer to “Setting Static Addresses” on page 3-101.)  
VLAN Learning – This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning (IVL), where each  
port maintains its own filtering database.  
Configurable PVID Tagging – This switch allows you to override the default Port  
VLAN ID (PVID used in frame tags) and egress status (VLAN-Tagged or  
Untagged) on each port. (Refer to “VLAN Configuration” on page 3-123.)  
Local VLAN Capable – This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside  
of the scope of 802.1Q defined VLANs.  
GMRP – GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) allows network devices to  
register endstations with multicast groups. This switch does not support GMRP; it  
uses the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) to provide automatic  
multicast filtering.  
Web – Click System, Bridge Extension.  
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
3
CLI – Enter the following command.  
Console#show bridge-ext  
Max support vlan numbers: 255  
Max support vlan ID: 4094  
Extended multicast filtering services: No  
Static entry individual port: Yes  
VLAN learning: IVL  
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes  
Local VLAN capable: Yes  
Traffic classes: Enabled  
Global GVRP status: Disabled  
GMRP: Disabled  
Console#  
Setting the Switch’s IP Address  
This section describes how to configure an initial IP interface for management  
access over the network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by  
default. To manually configure an address, you need to change the switch’s default  
settings to values that are compatible with your network. You may also need to a  
establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist  
on another network segment (if routing is not enabled on this switch).  
You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an  
address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal  
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be  
accepted by the CLI program.  
Command Usage  
• This section describes how to configure a single local interface for initial access to  
the switch. To configure multiple IP interfaces on this switch, you must set up an  
IP interface for each VLAN (page 3-197).  
• To enable routing between the different interfaces on this switch, you must enable  
IP routing (page 3-196).  
• To enable routing between the interfaces defined on this switch and external  
network interfaces, you must configure static routes (page 3-211) or use dynamic  
routing; i.e., either RIP (page 3-213) or OSPF (page 3-223).  
• The precedence for configuring IP interfaces is the IP / General / Routing Interface  
menu (page 3-197), static routes (page 3-211), and then dynamic routing.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Attributes  
• VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes). By default, all  
ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1. However, the management station  
can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN, as long as that VLAN has been  
assigned an IP address.  
IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual  
configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or Boot  
Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply has  
been received from the server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by the  
switch for an IP address. (DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address,  
subnet mask, and default gateway.)  
IP Address – Address of the VLAN to which the management station is attached.  
(Note you can manage the switch through configured IP interface.) Valid IP  
addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.  
(Default: 0.0.0.0)  
Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to  
specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)  
Default Gateway – IP address of the gateway router between this device and  
management stations that exist on other network segments. (Default: 0.0.0.0)  
Manual Configuration  
Web – Click IP, General, Routing Interface. Select the VLAN through which the  
management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “Static,” and specify a  
“Primary” interface. Enter the IP address, subnet mask and gateway, then click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-6 IP Interface Configuration - Manual  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
Click IP, Global Setting. If this switch and management stations exist on other  
network segments, then specify the default gateway, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-7 Default Gateway  
CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.253 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254  
Console(config)#  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Using DHCP/BOOTP  
If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the switch to be  
dynamically configured by these services.  
Web – Click IP, General, Routing Interface. Specify the VLAN to which the  
management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP. Click  
Apply to save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new  
address. Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration  
settings on each power reset.  
Figure 3-8 IP Interface Configuration - DHCP  
Note: If you lose your management connection, use a console connection and enter  
“show ip interface” to determine the new switch address.  
CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to DHCP or  
BOOTP, and then enter the “ip dhcp restart client” command.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#ip dhcp restart client  
Console#show ip interface  
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,  
and address mode: User specified.  
Console#  
Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a  
specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another  
network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you  
can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
3
Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be  
able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP  
service via the web interface if the current address is still available.  
CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.  
Console#ip dhcp restart client  
Managing Firmware  
You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server. By saving runtime  
code to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to  
restore operation. You can also set the switch to use new firmware without  
overwriting the previous version. You must specify the method of file transfer, along  
with the file type and file names as required.  
Command Attributes  
• File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these options:  
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.  
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.  
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.  
1
- file to unit – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.  
- unit to file1 – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.  
TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.  
File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.  
File Name The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of  
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on  
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch.  
(Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)  
Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored  
in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this  
file cannot be deleted.  
1. These operations are not supported for this switch.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Downloading System Software from a Server  
When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to  
replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the  
current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.  
Web – Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to file” as the  
file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, set the file type to  
“opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the switch  
to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current  
firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the  
system via the System/Reset menu.  
Figure 3-9 Copy Firmware  
If you download to a new destination file, go to the File Management, Set Start-Up  
menu, mark the operation code file used at startup, and click Apply. To start the new  
firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.  
Figure 3-10 Setting the Startup Code  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
To delete a file select System, File, Delete. Select the file name from the given list by  
checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the  
startup code cannot be deleted.  
Figure 3-11 Deleting Files  
CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP address of the  
TFTP server, select “config” as the file type, then enter the source and destination  
file names. When the file has finished downloading, set the new file to start up the  
system, and then restart the switch.  
To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the system  
Console#copy tftp file  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19  
Choose file type:  
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2  
Source file name: V1025.bix  
Destination file name: V1025  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
-Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#boot system opcode:V1025  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#reload  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings  
You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server. The  
configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.  
Command Attributes  
• File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes these options:  
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.  
- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration.  
- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration.  
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.  
- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.  
- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the startup config.  
- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server.  
- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch.  
- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the running config.  
- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server.  
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.  
- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config.  
- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config.  
2
- file to unit – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.  
- unit to file2 – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.  
TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.  
File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration settings.  
File Name — The configuration file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the  
leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length  
for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on  
the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)  
Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by  
available flash memory space.  
2. These operations are not supported for this switch.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server  
You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the  
startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination  
file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be  
copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.  
Web – Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Choose “tftp to  
startup-config” or “tftp to file,” and enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify  
the name of the file to download, select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a  
new file name, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-12 Copy Configuration Settings  
If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file  
is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot  
the system via the System/Reset menu. You can also select any configuration file as  
the start-up configuration by using the System/File/Set Start-Up page.  
Figure 3-13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server,  
set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.  
Console#copy tftp startup-config  
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19  
Source configuration file name: config-1  
Startup configuration file name [] : startup  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
-Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#reload  
To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the boot system  
command and then restart the switch.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#boot system config: startup-new  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#reload  
Console Port Settings  
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100  
compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through  
the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password, timeouts,  
and basic communication settings. These parameters can be configured via the  
Web or CLI interface.  
Command Attributes  
Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the  
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is  
terminated for the session. (Range: 0 - 300 seconds; Default: 0)  
Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.  
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is  
terminated. (Range: 0 - 65535 seconds; Default: 600 seconds)  
Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the  
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the  
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent  
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt. (Range: 0-120; Default: 3  
attempts)  
Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible  
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded.  
(Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)  
Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and  
generated by the console port. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per  
character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)  
Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication protocols provided  
by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting. Specify Even, Odd, or  
None. (Default: None)  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and receive  
(from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to  
the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud, Auto;  
Default: Auto)  
Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.  
(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)  
3
Password – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is  
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.  
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No  
password)  
Login3 – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a  
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by  
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts (the default).  
Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection parameters  
as required, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-14 Configuring the Console Port  
3. CLI only.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the connection  
parameters as required. To display the current console port settings, use the show  
line command from the Normal Exec level.  
Console(config)#line console  
Console(config-line)#login local  
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret  
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0  
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0  
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5  
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60  
Console(config-line)#databits 8  
Console(config-line)#parity none  
Console(config-line)#speed auto  
Console(config-line)#stopbits 1  
Console(config-line)#end  
Console#show line  
Console configuration:  
Password threshold: 5 times  
Interactive timeout: Disabled  
Login timeout: Disabled  
Silent time:  
60  
Baudrate:  
Databits:  
auto  
8
Parity:  
Stopbits:  
none  
1
VTY configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: 600 sec  
Login timeout: 300 sec  
Console#  
Telnet Settings  
You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet  
(i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and  
other various parameters set, including the TCP port number, timeouts, and a  
password. These parameters can be configured via the Web or CLI interface.  
Command Attributes  
Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch.  
(Default: 23)  
Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the  
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is  
terminated for the session. (Range: 0 - 300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)  
Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.  
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is  
terminated. (Range: 0 - 65535 seconds; Default: 600 seconds)  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the  
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the  
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent  
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt. (Range: 0-120;  
Default: 3 attempts)  
4
Password – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is  
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.  
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No  
password)  
Login4 – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a  
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by  
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts (the default).  
Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for Telnet  
access, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-15 Configuring the Telnet Interface  
4. CLI only.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify the  
connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual terminal settings,  
use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.  
Console(config)#line vty  
Console(config-line)#login local  
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret  
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0  
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600  
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3  
Console(config-line)#end  
Console#show line  
Console configuration:  
Password threshold: 5 times  
Interactive timeout: Disabled  
Login timeout: Disabled  
Silent time:  
Baudrate:  
Databits:  
Parity:  
60  
auto  
8
none  
1
Stopbits:  
VTY configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: 600 sec  
Login timeout: 300 sec  
Console#  
Configuring Event Logging  
The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of  
events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote System Log (syslog)  
server, and displays a list of recent event messages.  
System Log Configuration  
The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify which levels  
are logged to RAM or flash memory.  
Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in  
the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to 4096 log entries can  
be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the  
available log memory (256 kilobytes) has been exceeded.  
The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are  
logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to  
flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM.  
Command Attributes  
System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to  
the logging process.  
Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent flash memory  
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all  
messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Configuration  
3
Table 3-3 Logging Levels  
Level Description  
Level Name  
debugging  
informational  
notifications  
warnings  
errors  
7
6
5
4
3
2
Debugging messages  
Informational messages only  
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start  
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)  
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)  
critical  
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free  
memory error - resource exhausted)  
alerts  
1
0
Immediate action needed  
System unusable  
emergencies  
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.  
RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary RAM memory  
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all  
messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM. (Range: 0-7, Default: 7)  
Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.  
Web – Click System, Logs, System Logs. Specify System Log Status, set the level of  
event messages to be logged, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-16 System Logs  
CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to  
RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to display the current  
settings.  
Console(config)#logging on  
Console(config)#logging history ram 0  
Console(config)#  
Console#show logging flash  
Syslog logging: Disable  
History logging in FLASH: level errors  
Console#  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Remote Log Configuration  
The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are  
sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the event  
messages sent to only those messages at or above a specified level.  
Command Attributes  
Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages  
to the remote logging process. (Default: enabled)  
Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.  
There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23. The facility type is  
used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service.  
The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC  
3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch.  
However, it may be used by the syslog server to process messages, such as  
sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23,  
Default: 23)  
Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for  
all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages  
from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)  
Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that will receive  
syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.  
Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Web – Click System, Logs, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host IP List,  
type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click Add. To delete  
an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then click Remove.  
Figure 3-17 Remote Logs  
CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and set the  
logging trap.  
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.9  
Console(config)#logging facility 23  
Console(config)#logging trap 4  
Console(config)#logging trap  
Console(config)#  
Console#show logging trap  
Syslog logging: Enable  
REMOTELOG status: enable  
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7  
REMOTELOG level type: Warning conditions  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 10.1.0.9  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
Console#  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Log Messages  
Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages. The  
switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory (RAM;  
i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash  
memory.  
Web – Click System, Log, Logs.  
Figure 3-18 Displaying Logs  
CLI – This example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for  
flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is  
“debugging” (i.e., default level 7 - 0), and lists one sample error.  
Console#show logging flash  
Syslog logging: Enable  
History logging in FLASH: level errors  
Console#show logging ram  
Syslog logging: Enable  
History logging in RAM: level debugging  
[0] 0:0:5 1/1/1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails."  
level: 3, module: 13, function: 0, and event no.: 0  
Console#  
Resetting the System  
Web – Click System, Reset. Click the Reset button to restart the switch. When  
prompted, confirm that you want reset the switch.  
Figure 3-19 Resetting the System  
CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch.  
Console#reload  
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>?  
Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic Configuration  
3
Setting the System Clock  
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock  
based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an  
accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and  
times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock using the CLI. (See  
“calendar set” on page 4-57.) If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the  
time from the factory default set at the last bootup.  
When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time  
update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP  
addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.  
Configuring SNTP  
You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers.  
Command Attributes  
SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client. This requires  
at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field. (Default: Disabled)  
SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update  
from a time server. (Range: 16-16384 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)  
SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The switch  
attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it attempts an update  
from the next server in the sequence.  
Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-20 SNTP Configuration  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then  
displays the current time and settings.  
Console(config)#sntp client  
Console(config)#sntp poll 16  
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show sntp  
Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004  
Poll interval: 60  
Current mode: unicast  
SNTP status : Enabled  
SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2  
Current server: 128.250.36.2  
Console#  
Setting the Time Zone  
SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time,  
or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To  
display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of  
hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.  
Command Attributes  
• Current Time – Displays the current time.  
Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)  
Hours (0-12) – The number of hours before/after UTC.  
Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.  
Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after (west) UTC.  
Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to  
the UTC, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-21 Clock Time Zone  
CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.  
Console(config)#clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC  
Console#  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Simple Network Management Protocol  
3
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol  
designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly  
managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is  
typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network  
environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential  
problems.  
Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the  
device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as managed  
objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These  
objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB) that provides a  
standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent. SNMP defines both  
the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information  
over the network.  
The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3.  
This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware, as well as the  
traffic passing through its ports. A network management station can access this  
information using software such as HP OpenView. Access to the onboard agent  
from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings. To  
communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid  
community string for authentication.  
Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security  
features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as  
controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree.  
The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models, with each model having  
it’s own security levels. There are three security models defined, SNMPv1,  
SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. Users are assigned to “groups” that are defined by a  
security model and specified security levels. Each group also has a defined security  
access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing, which are known as “views.”  
The switch has a default view (all MIB objects) and default groups defined for  
security models v1 and v2c. The following table shows the security models and  
levels available and the system default settings.  
Table 3-4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels  
Model Level  
Group  
Read View  
defaultview  
defaultview  
Write View  
none  
Security  
v1  
noAuthNoPriv public  
Community string only  
Community string only  
v1  
noAuthNoPriv private  
noAuthNoPriv user defined  
noAuthNoPriv public  
defaultview  
v1  
user defined user defined Community string only  
v2c  
v2c  
v2c  
v3  
defaultview  
defaultview  
none  
Community string only  
Community string only  
noAuthNoPriv private  
noAuthNoPriv user defined  
noAuthNoPriv user defined  
defaultview  
user defined user defined Community string only  
user defined user defined A user name match only  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels (Continued)  
Model Level  
Group  
Read View  
Write View  
Security  
v3  
AuthNoPriv  
user defined  
user defined user defined Provides user  
authentication via MD5  
or SHA algorithms  
v3  
AuthPriv  
user defined  
user defined user defined Provides user  
authentication via MD5  
or SHA algorithms and  
data privacy using DES  
56-bit encryption  
Note: The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system. You can  
then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access.  
Enabling the SNMP Agent  
Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients (i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3).  
Command Attributes  
SNMP Agent Status – Enables SNMP on the switch.  
Web – Click SNMP, Agent Status. Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled  
checkbox, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-22 Enabling the SNMP Agent  
CLI – The following example enables SNMP on the switch.  
Console(config)#snmp-server  
Console(config)#  
Setting Community Access Strings  
You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access  
by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c. All community strings used for IP Trap Managers  
should be listed in this table. For security reasons, you should consider removing the  
default strings.  
Command Attributes  
SNMP Community Capability – The switch supports up to five community strings.  
Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits  
access to the SNMP protocol.  
Default strings: “public” (read-only access), “private” (read/write access)  
Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Simple Network Management Protocol  
3
Access Mode – Specifies the access rights for the community string:  
- Read-Only – Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB  
objects.  
- Read/Write – Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and  
modify MIB objects.  
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select  
the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.  
Figure 3-23 Configuring SNMP Community Strings  
CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.  
Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw  
Console(config)#  
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types  
Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers.  
You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to  
your management station (using network management platforms such as HP  
OpenView). You can specify up to five management stations that will receive  
authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.  
Command Attributes  
Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.  
Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of a new management station to receive  
trap messages.  
Trap Manager Community String – Specifies a valid community string for the  
new trap manager entry. Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table,  
we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page (for  
Version 1 or 2c clients), or define a corresponding “User Name” in the SNMPv3  
Users page (for Version 3 clients). (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)  
Trap UDP Port – Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager.  
Trap Version – Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1, v2c, or v3. (Default: v1)  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a trap message to specified IP trap  
managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails. (Default: Enabled)  
Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues a trap message whenever a port  
link is established or broken. (Default: Enabled)  
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Enter the IP address and community string for  
each management station that will receive trap messages, specify the UDP port and  
SNMP version, and then click Add. Select the trap types required using the check  
boxes for Authentication and Link-up/down traps, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-24 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers  
CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps.  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman private version 2c  
udp-port 162  
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps authentication  
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch, follow these steps:  
1. Configure an SNMP engine ID.  
2. Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree.  
3. Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1,  
v2c or v3) and security level (i.e., authentication and privacy).  
4. Assign SNMP users to groups, along with their specific authentication and  
privacy passwords.  
Setting an Engine ID  
An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch. This  
engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The engine ID is  
also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for  
authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Simple Network Management Protocol  
3
A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This is  
referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engineID is deleted or changed, all  
SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all existing users.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Engine ID. Enter an ID of up to 26 hexadecimal  
characters and then click Save.  
Figure 3-25 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID  
CLI – This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID.  
Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 12345abcdef  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp engine-id  
Local SNMP engineID: 12345abcdef000000000000000  
Local SNMP engineBoots: 1  
Console#  
Configuring SNMPv3 Users  
Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a  
specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to  
a specific read and a write view.  
Command Attributes  
User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent. (Range: 1-32  
characters)  
Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned.  
(Range: 1-32 characters)  
Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.  
Level – The security level used for the user:  
- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP  
communications.  
- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not  
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only  
available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
Authentication – The method used for user authentication; MD5 or SHA  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Privacy – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only 56-bit DES is  
currently available  
Actions – Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Users. Click New to configure a user name. In the  
New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save the  
configuration and return to the User Name list. To delete a user, check the box next  
to the user name, then click Delete. To change the assigned group of a user, click  
Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group.  
Figure 3-26 Configuring SNMPv3 Users  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Simple Network Management Protocol  
3
CLI – Use the snmp-server user command to configure a new user name and  
assign it to a group.  
Console(config)#snmp-server user chris group r&d v3 auth md5  
greenpeace priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp user  
EngineId: 80000034030001f488f5200000  
User Name: chris  
Authentication Protocol: md5  
Privacy Protocol: des56  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Configuring SNMPv3 Groups  
An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users, restricting them to  
specific read and write views. You can use the pre-defined default groups or create  
new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views.  
Command Attributes  
Group Name – The name of the SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)  
Model – The group security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.  
Level – The security level used for the group:  
- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP  
communications.  
- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not  
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only  
available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
Read View – The configured view for read access. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Write View – The configured view for write access. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Groups. Click New to configure a new group. In the  
New Group page, define a name, assign a security model and level, and then select  
read and write views. Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list.  
To delete a group, check the box next to the group name, then click Delete.  
Figure 3-27 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups  
CLI – Use the snmp-server group command to configure a new group, specifying  
the security model and level, and restricting MIB access to defined read and write  
views.  
Console(config)#snmp-server group v3secure v3 priv read  
defaultview write defaultview  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp group  
Group Name: v3secure  
Security Model: v3  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: defaultview  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Simple Network Management Protocol  
3
Setting SNMPv3 Views  
SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree.  
The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.  
Command Attributes  
View Name – The name of the SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
View OID Subtrees – Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches  
within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view.  
Edit OID Subtrees – Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches  
within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID  
string.  
Type – Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included  
or excluded from the SNMP view.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Views. Click New to configure a new view. In the New  
View page, define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included  
or excluded in the view. Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3  
Views list. For a specific view, click on View OID Subtrees to display the current  
configuration, or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings. To  
delete a view, check the box next to the view name, then click Delete.  
Figure 3-28 Configuring SNMPv3 Views  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Use the snmp-server view command to configure a new view. This example  
view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the wildcard mask selects all index  
entries.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.*  
included  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp view  
View Name: ifEntry.a  
Subtree OID: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.*  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
View Name: readaccess  
Subtree OID: 1.3.6.1.2  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
View Name: defaultview  
Subtree OID: 1  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
User Authentication  
You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options:  
• User Accounts – Manually configure access rights for specified users.  
• Authentication Settings – Use remote authentication to configure access rights.  
• HTTPS Settings – Provide a secure web connection.  
• SSH Settings – Provide a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).  
• Port Security – Configure secure addresses for individual ports.  
• 802.1x – Use IEEE 802.1x port authentication to control access to specific ports.  
• IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet interface.  
Configuring User Accounts  
The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters. However, the  
administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You  
should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and  
store it in a safe place.  
The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default  
administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
User Authentication  
3
Command Attributes  
Account List – Shows the list of users that are allowed management access.  
(Defaults: admin, and guest)  
New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.  
- User Name – The name of the user.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 16)  
- Access Level – Specifies the user level.  
(Options: Normal and Privileged)  
- Password – Specifies the user password.  
(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)  
Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user.  
Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account, enter the  
user name, access level, and password, then click Add. To change the password for  
a specific user, enter the user name and new password, confirm the password by  
entering it again, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-29 User Accounts  
CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the  
password.  
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15  
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith  
Console(config)#  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication  
Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on  
specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access rights on  
the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS  
or TACACS+ protocols.  
Remote Authentication Dial-in  
User Service (RADIUS) and  
Terminal Access Controller  
Access Control System Plus  
Web  
Telnet  
console  
(TACACS+) are logon  
authentication protocols that use  
software running on a central  
server to control access to  
RADIUS-aware or TACACS-  
aware devices on the network.  
An authentication server contains  
1. Client attempts management access.  
2. Switch contacts authentication server.  
3. Authentication server challenges client.  
4. Client responds with proper password or key.  
5. Authentication server approves access.  
6. Switch grants management access.  
RADIUS/  
TACACS+  
server  
a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for  
each user that requires management access to the switch.  
RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,  
while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts  
only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while  
TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.  
Command Usage  
• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication  
database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used, you  
must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for  
the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication control  
management access via the console port, web browser, or Telnet.  
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for  
each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level  
must be configured on the authentication server.  
• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the  
authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1) RADIUS, (2) TACACS and  
(3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the  
RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted using the  
TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is checked.  
Command Attributes  
Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required:  
- Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.  
- Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.  
- TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.  
- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three  
authentication methods in the indicated sequence.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
User Authentication  
3
• RADIUS Settings  
- Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (Default: 10.1.0.1)  
- Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server used for  
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1812)  
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for  
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
- Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate  
logon access via the authentication server. (Range: 1-30; Default: 2)  
- Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from  
the RADIUS server before it resends the request. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)  
• TACACS Settings  
- Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default: 10.11.12.13)  
- Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for  
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)  
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for  
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names  
and passwords using the CLI. (See “username” on page 4-27.)  
Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote  
authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence (i.e., one to three  
methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS+ authentication if selected,  
and click Apply.  
Figure 3-30 Authentication Server Settings  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.  
Console(config)#authentication login radius  
Console(config)#radius-server host 192.168.1.25  
Console(config)#radius-server port 181  
Console(config)#radius-server key green  
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5  
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10  
Console#show radius-server  
Server IP address: 192.168.1.25  
Communication key with radius server:  
Server port number: 181  
Retransmit times: 5  
Request timeout: 10  
Console(config)#authentication login tacacs  
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40  
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200  
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green  
Console#show tacacs-server  
Server IP address: 10.20.30.40  
Communication key with tacacs server: green  
Server port number: 200  
Console(config)#  
Configuring HTTPS  
You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol  
(HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an  
encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.  
Command Usage  
• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.  
However, you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port.  
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your  
browser: https://device[:port_number]  
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:  
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.  
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the  
connection.  
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.  
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.  
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x or above  
and Netscape Navigator 4.x or above.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:  
Table 3-5 HTTPS System Support  
Web Browser  
Operating System  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP  
Netscape Navigator 4.76 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6  
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site  
Command Attributes  
HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the  
switch.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/  
SSL connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default: Port 443)  
Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number,  
then click Apply.  
Figure 3-31 HTTPS Settings  
CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.  
Console(config)#ip http secure-server  
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 441  
Console(config)#  
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate  
When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a Secure  
Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that  
Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the  
site is not recognized as a secure site. This is because the certificate has not been  
signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced  
by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must  
obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized  
certification authority.  
Caution: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets  
Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default  
certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use the  
following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace the default  
(unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:  
Console#copy tftp https-certificate  
TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>  
Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>  
Source private file name: <private key file name>  
Private password: <password for private key>  
Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the  
switch, type “reload” at the command prompt: Console#reload  
Configuring the Secure Shell  
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix  
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows  
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote  
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.  
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure  
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide  
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.  
When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a  
public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access  
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and  
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the  
network arrives unaltered.  
Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the  
switch for management via the SSH protocol.  
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.  
Command Usage  
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key  
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the  
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote  
authentication server, as specified on the Authentication Settings page  
(page 3-46). If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must  
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the  
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password  
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH  
Host Key Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).  
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:  
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a host  
public/private key pair.  
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically  
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Authentication  
3
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management  
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known  
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:  
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254  
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233  
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206  
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545  
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117  
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key  
command (page 4-64) to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH  
client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients  
must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as  
described on page 3-44.) The clients are subsequently authenticated using  
these keys. The current firmware only accepts public key files based on  
standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1  
key:  
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880  
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199  
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938  
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671  
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19  
4. Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the  
optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries,  
and the server key size.  
5. Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server on  
the switch.  
6. Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact  
the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key  
and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to  
the public keys stored on the switch can access it. The following exchanges  
take place during this process:  
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.  
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.  
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random  
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.  
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the  
decrypted bytes back to the switch.  
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the  
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an  
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Notes: 1. To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still  
be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into  
the known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.  
2. The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number  
of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.  
Generating the Host Key Pair  
A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an  
SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host  
public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as  
described in the preceding section (Command Usage).  
Field Attributes  
Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.  
- RSA (Version 1): The first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the  
second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 65537), and the last string is  
the encoded modulus.  
- DSA (Version 2): The first field indicates that the encryption method used by  
SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS). The last string is the  
encoded modulus.  
Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e., public and  
private keys). (Range: RSA (Version 1), DSA (Version 2), Both: Default: RSA)  
The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first  
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to  
select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.  
Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from RAM (i.e.,  
volatile memory to flash memory). Otherwise, the host key pair is stored to RAM  
by default. Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host-key pair.  
Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that you must  
first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH  
Server Settings page.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
Web – Click Security, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type from the  
drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from memory to flash (if  
required) prior to generating the key, and then click Generate.  
Figure 3-32 SSH Host-Key Settings  
CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and DSA  
algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the host’s public keys.  
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate  
Console#ip ssh save host-key  
Console#show public-key host  
Host:  
RSA:  
1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761  
82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033  
86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127  
60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025  
190932104328579045764891  
DSA:  
ssh-dssAAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3869jYVXlME1sHL0EcE/Re6hlasfEthIwmj  
hLY4O0jqJZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka+Py9ieGWQ8f2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBi  
KviDa+2OrIz6UK+6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo+h5v8r0ea2rpnO6DkZAAAAFQCNZn/x17dwpW8RrV  
DQnSWw4Qk+6QAAAIEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO9OqRPUMbCAkCC+uzxatOo7  
drnIZypMx+Sx5RUdMGgKS+9ywsa1cWqHeFY5ilc3lDCNBueeLykZzVS+RS+azTKIk/zrJh8GLG  
Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn/Q7IphPqyJ3o9MK8LFDfmJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP2OFqX7VGoEbzVDSOI  
RTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc3lMtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5a//f8TUAg  
PNWKV6W0hqmshQdotVzDR1e+XKNTZj0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl/DMdAfjnte8MZZs=  
Console#  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring the SSH Server  
The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.  
Field Attributes  
SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on the switch.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the  
switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients.  
SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the  
SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.  
(Range: 1 to 120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)  
SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts  
that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the  
authentication process. (Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)  
SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size. (Range: 512-896 bits)  
- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.  
- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.  
Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication  
parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you must first generate the host  
key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server.  
Figure 3-33 SSH Server Settings  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays  
the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via  
SHH, and then disables this connection.  
Console(config)#ip ssh server  
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100  
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5  
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show ip ssh  
SSH Enabled - version 2.0  
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3  
Server key size: 768 bits  
Console#show ssh  
Information of secure shell  
Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state  
------- -------- ------- -------------- -----------------  
0
admin  
2.0  
cipher-3des  
session-started  
Console#disconnect 0  
Console#  
Configuring Port Security  
Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more  
device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.  
When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new MAC  
addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum  
number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic  
or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through  
that port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch  
port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by  
disabling the port and sending a trap message.  
To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port  
and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC address, VLAN> pair for  
frames received on the port. Note that you can also manually add secure addresses  
to the port using the Static Address Table (page 3-101). When the port has reached  
the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The  
MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out.  
Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the  
switch.  
Command Usage  
• A secure port has the following restrictions:  
- It cannot use port monitoring.  
- It cannot be a multi-VLAN port.  
- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.  
- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.  
• The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero.  
You must configure a maximum address count from 1 - 1024 for the port to allow  
access.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be manually  
re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page (page 3-81).  
Command Attributes  
• Port – Port number.  
• Name – Descriptive text (page 4-150).  
Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:  
- None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)  
- Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.  
- Shutdown: Disable the port.  
- Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.  
Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port. (Default: Disabled)  
Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned  
on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024)  
Trunk – Trunk number if port is a member (page 3-84 and 3-85).  
Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid address is  
detected on a port, mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a  
port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-34 Port Security  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
CLI – This example sets the command mode to Port 5, sets the port security action  
to send a trap and disable the port, and specifies a maximum address count, and  
then enables port security for the port.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown  
Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20  
Console(config-if)#port security  
Console(config-if)#  
Configuring 802.1x Port Authentication  
Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by  
simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a  
desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and  
possibly gain access to sensitive network data.  
The IEEE 802.1x (dot1x) standard defines a port-based access control procedure  
that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit  
credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be  
centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the  
same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.  
This switch uses the  
Extensible Authentication  
Protocol over LANs (EAPOL)  
to exchange authentication  
802.1x  
client  
protocol messages with the  
client, and a remote RADIUS  
authentication server to verify  
user identity and access  
rights. When a client (i.e.,  
Supplicant) connects to a  
switch port, the switch (i.e.,  
1. Client attempts to access a switch port.  
2. Switch sends client an identity request.  
3. Client sends back identity information.  
RADIUS  
4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.  
5. Authentication server challenges client.  
server  
6. Client responds with proper credentials.  
7. Authentication server approves access.  
8. Switch grants client access to this port.  
Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client provides its  
identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch, which it  
forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and  
sends an access challenge back to the client. The EAP packet from the RADIUS  
server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be used.  
The client can reject the authentication method and request another, depending on  
the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The authentication  
method must be MD5. (TLS, TTLS and PEAP will be supported in future releases.)  
The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials, such as a  
password or certificate. The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and  
responds with an accept or reject packet. If authentication is successful, the switch  
allows the client to access the network. Otherwise, network access is denied and the  
port remains blocked.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
The operation of dot1x on the switch requires the following:  
• The switch must have an IP address assigned.  
• RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the  
RADIUS server specified.  
• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x “Auto” mode.  
• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software  
installed and properly configured.  
• The RADIUS server and 802.1x client support EAP. (The switch only supports  
EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)  
• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication  
type – MD5. (Some clients have native support in Windows, otherwise the dot1x  
client must support it.)  
Displaying 802.1x Global Settings  
The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication  
process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as  
the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication  
server. These parameters are described in this section.  
Command Attributes  
802.1X Re-Authentication – Indicates if switch port requires a client to be  
re-authenticated after a certain period of time.  
802.1X Max Request Count – The maximum number of times the switch port will  
retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication  
session.  
Timeout for Quiet Period – Indicates the time that a switch port waits after the  
Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client.  
Timeout for Re-Authentication Period – Indicates the time period after which a  
connected client must be re-authenticated.  
Timeout for Tx Period – The time period during an authentication session that the  
switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet.  
Supplicant Timeout – The time the switch waits for a client response to an EAP  
request.  
Server Timeout – The time the switch waits for a response from the authentication  
server (RADIUS) to an authentication request.  
Re-Authentication Max Count – The number of times the switch will attempt to  
re-authenticate a connected client before the port becomes unauthorized.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
Web – Click 802.1x, Information.  
Figure 3-35 802.1X Information  
CLI – This example shows the default protocol settings for dot1x. For a description  
of the additional entries displayed in the CLI, see “show dot1x” on page 4-85.  
Console#show dot1x  
Global 802.1X Parameters  
reauth-enabled: yes  
reauth-period: 300  
quiet-period:  
tx-period:  
supp-timeout:  
350  
300  
30  
server-timeout: 30  
reauth-max:  
2
max-req:  
2
802.1X Port Summary  
Port Name  
1/1  
Status  
disabled  
disabled  
Operation Mode  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
Mode  
ForceAuthorized  
ForceAuthorized  
Authorized  
n/a  
1/2  
n/a  
.
.
.
1/23  
1/24  
disabled  
enabled  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
ForceAuthorized  
Auto  
yes  
yes  
802.1X Port Details  
802.1X is disabled on port 1  
.
.
.
802.1X is enabled on port 24  
Status  
Authorized  
Operation mode  
Max count  
Single-Host  
5
Port-control  
Auto  
Supplicant  
00-e0-29-94-34-65  
Current Identifier 4  
Authenticator State Machine  
State  
Authenticated  
Reauth Count  
0
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Backend State Machine  
State  
Idle  
Request Count  
0
Identifier(Server) 3  
Reauthentication State Machine  
State  
Initialize  
Console#  
Configuring 802.1x Global Settings  
The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication  
process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as  
the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication  
server. The configuration options for these parameters are described in this section.  
Command Attributes  
802.1X Re-Authentication – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the  
interval specified by the Timeout for Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication  
can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port. (Default:  
Disabled)  
802.1X Max Request Count – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port  
will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the  
authentication session. (Range: 1-10; Default 2)  
Timeout for Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the dot1X  
Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client.  
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60 seconds)  
Timeout for Re-Authentication Period – Sets the time period after which a  
connected client must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;  
Default: 3600 seconds)  
Timeout for Tx Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that  
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet. (Range: 1-65535; Default:  
30 seconds)  
5
• authentication dot1x default – Sets the default authentication server type. Note  
that the specified authentication server type must be enabled and properly  
configured for dot1x to function properly. (Options: radius).  
5. CLI only.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
Web – Select Security, 802.1x, Configuration. Enable dot1x globally for the switch,  
modify any of the parameters required, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-36 802.1X Configuration  
CLI – This enables re-authentication and sets all of the global parameters for dot1x.  
Console(config)#dot1x re-authentication  
Console(config)#dot1x max-req 5  
Console(config)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 40  
Console(config)#dot1x timeout re-auth 5  
Console(config)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40  
Console(config)#authentication dot1x default radius  
Console(config)#  
Configuring Port Authorization Mode  
When dot1x is enabled, you need to specify the dot1x authentication mode  
configured for each port.  
Command Attributes  
Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.  
• Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an  
802.1X-authorized port. (Range: Single-Host, Multi-Host; Default: Single-Host)  
• Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the  
Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)  
Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:  
- Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication  
server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.  
- Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either  
dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
- Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either  
dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
Authorized –  
- Yes – Connected client is authorized.  
- No – Connected client is not authorized.  
- Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.  
Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.  
Web – Click Security, 802.1x, Port Configuration. Select the authentication mode  
from the drop-down box and click Apply.  
Figure 3-37 802.1X Port Configuration  
CLI – This example sets the authentication mode to enable 802.1x on port 2, and  
allows up to ten clients to connect to this port.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto  
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10  
Console(config-if)#  
Displaying 802.1x Statistics  
This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.  
Table 3-6 802.1x Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Rx EAPOL Start  
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
Rx EAPOL Logoff  
Rx EAPOL Invalid  
Rx EAPOL Total  
Rx EAP Resp/Id  
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.  
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received  
by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Authentication  
3
Table 3-6 802.1x Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Rx EAP Resp/Oth  
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames)  
that have been received by this Authenticator.  
Rx EAP LenError  
Rx Last EAPOLVer  
Rx Last EAPOLSrc  
Tx EAPOL Total  
Tx EAP Req/Id  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid.  
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL  
frame.  
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL  
frame.  
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by  
this Authenticator.  
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this  
Authenticator.  
Tx EAP Req/Oth  
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have  
been transmitted by this Authenticator.  
Web – Select Security, 802.1x, Statistics. Select the required port and then click  
Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.  
Figure 3-38 802.1X Statistics  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example displays the dot1x statistics for port 4.  
Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4  
Eth 1/4  
Rx: EXPOL  
EAPOL  
Logoff  
0
EAPOL  
Invalid  
0
EAPOL  
Total  
1007  
EAP  
Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError  
672  
EAP  
EAP  
Start  
2
0
0
Last  
EAPOLVer  
1
Last  
EAPOLSrc  
00-00-E8-98-73-21  
Tx: EAPOL  
Total  
EAP  
Req/Id  
1005  
EAP  
Req/Oth  
0
2017  
Console#  
Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access  
You can specify the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the  
switch through the web interface, SNMP, or Telnet.  
Command Usage  
• The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you add  
an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified  
addresses.  
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid  
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the  
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.  
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each  
of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual  
addresses or address ranges.  
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the  
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for  
different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.  
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete  
the entire range, and reenter the addresses.  
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by  
specifying both the start address and end address.  
Command Attributes  
• Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.  
• SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.  
• Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.  
• IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to this interface.  
• Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.  
• End IP Address – The end address of a range.  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that  
are allowed management access to an interface, and click Add IP Filtering Entry.  
Figure 3-39 IP Filter  
CLI – This example restricts management access for Telnet clients.  
Console(config)#management telnet-client 192.168.1.19  
Console(config)#management telnet-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show management all-client  
Management IP Filter  
HTTP-Client:  
Start IP address  
End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
SNMP-Client:  
Start IP address  
End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
TELNET-Client:  
Start IP address  
End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
Console#  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Access Control Lists  
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,  
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based  
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter incoming packets, first create an access  
list, add the required rules, specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the  
rules are checked, and then bind the list to a specific port.  
Configuring Access Control Lists  
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,  
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress  
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as  
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no  
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match  
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.  
You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the  
queue or frame priorities associated with the rule. This is done by specifying masks  
that control the order in which ACL rules are checked. The switch includes two  
system default masks that pass/filter packets matching the permit/deny rules  
specified in an ingress ACL. You can also configure up to seven user-defined masks  
for an ingress or egress ACL.  
Command Usage  
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:  
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.  
• The maximum number of ACLs is also 32.  
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the  
ports should not exceed 20.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set  
the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.  
• When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter, all entries in the ACL  
must be deny rules. Otherwise, the bind operation will fail.  
• The switch does not support the explicit “deny any any” rule for the egress IP ACL  
or the egress MAC ACLs. If these rules are included in an ACL, and you attempt  
to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking, the bind operation will fail.  
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:  
1. User-defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports.  
2. User-defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports.  
3. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
4. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
5. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
6. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
7. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control Lists  
3
Setting the ACL Name and Type  
Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL.  
Command Attributes  
Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Type – There are three filtering modes:  
- Standard: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address.  
- Extended: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP  
address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the “TCP” protocol  
is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.  
- MAC: MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination  
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).  
Web – Click Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the Name field,  
select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and click Add to open the  
configuration page for the new list.  
Figure 3-40 ACL Configuration  
CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill.  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard bill  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
Configuring a Standard IP ACL  
Command Attributes  
Action – An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules.  
(Default: Permit rules)  
Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible  
addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP” to  
specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any,  
Host, IP; Default: Any)  
IP Address – Source IP address.  
Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each  
separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to  
indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address,  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring the Switch  
3
and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this  
ACL has been assigned.  
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type (Any, Host,  
or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet  
address and the mask for an address range. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-41 ACL Configuration - Standard IP  
CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21  
and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Control Lists  
3
Configuring an Extended IP ACL  
Command Attributes  
Action – An ACL can contain either all permit rules or all deny rules.  
(Default: Permit rules)  
Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP  
address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific  
host address in the Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the  
Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)  
Source/Destination IP Address – Source or destination IP address.  
Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or destination  
address. (See the description for SubMask on page 3-67.)  
Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:  
- Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)  
- TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)  
- DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)  
Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or Others, where  
others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255). (Options: TCP, UDP, Others;  
Default: TCP)  
Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the specified  
protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)  
Source/Destination Port Bitmask – Decimal number representing the port bits to  
match. (Range: 0-65535)  
Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits  
in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)  
Control Code Bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.  
The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent binary bit mask) that is  
applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary  
bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may  
be specified:  
- 1 (fin) – Finish  
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize  
- 4 (rst) – Reset  
- 8 (psh) – Push  
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement  
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer  
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the  
following flags set:  
- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2  
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18  
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or  
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you select  
“Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the  
mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as service type,  
protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-42 ACL Configuration - Extended IP  
CLI – This example adds three rules:  
1. Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x. For  
example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0) equals  
the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.  
2. Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination  
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).  
3. Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP control  
code set to “SYN.”  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
destination-port 80  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
control-flag 2 2  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Control Lists  
3
Configuring a MAC ACL  
Command Attributes  
Action – An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules.  
(Default: Permit rules)  
Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,  
“Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or “MAC” to specify an address range  
with the Address and Bitmask fields. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)  
Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC address.  
Source/Destination MAC Bitmask – Hexidecimal mask for source or destination  
MAC address.  
VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4095)  
VID Bitmask – VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4095)  
Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted  
packets. (Range: 600-fff hex.)  
A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few of the  
more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP), 8137 (IPX).  
Ethernet Type Bitmask – Protocol bitmask. (Range: 600-fff hex.)  
Packet Format – This attribute includes the following packet types:  
- Any – Any Ethernet packet type.  
- Untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.  
- Untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.  
- Tagged-eth2 – Tagged Ethernet II packets.  
- Tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.  
Command Usage  
Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination-mac-known packets, not for multicast,  
broadcast, or destination-mac-unknown packets.  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or  
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you select  
“Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you select “MAC,” enter  
a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range. Set any other  
required criteria, such as VID, Ethernet type, or packet format. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-43 ACL Configuration - MAC  
CLI – This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination  
address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.  
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de  
ethertype 0800  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Control Lists  
3
Configuring ACL Masks  
You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked. The  
switch includes two system default masks that pass/filter packets matching the  
permit/deny rules specified in an ingress ACL. You can also configure up to seven  
user-defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL. A mask must be bound  
exclusively to one of the basic ACL types (i.e., Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL,  
Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL), but a mask can be bound to up to four  
ACLs of the same type.  
Command Usage  
• Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask.  
• Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match  
is found. The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask,  
and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered.  
• First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an  
ACL to an interface.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set  
the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.  
Specifying the Mask Type  
Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL,  
Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL.  
Web – Click Security, ACL, ACL Mask Configuration. Click Edit for one of the basic  
mask types to open the configuration page.  
Figure 3-44 ACL Mask Configuration  
CLI – This example creates an IP ingress mask, and then adds two rules. Each rule  
is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries. The first  
entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet.  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring an IP ACL Mask  
This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header.  
Command Usage  
• Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port  
can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes.  
Command Attributes  
Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP  
address. Use “Any” to match any address, “Host” to specify a host address (not a  
subnet), or “IP” to specify a range of addresses. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default:  
Any)  
Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Source or destination address of rule must  
match this bitmask. (See the description for SubMask on page 3-67.)  
Protocol Bitmask – Check the protocol field.  
Service Type Mask – Check the rule for the specified priority type.  
(Options: Precedence, TOS, DSCP; Default: TOS)  
Source/Destination Port Bitmask – Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask.  
(Range: 0-65535)  
Control Code Bitmask – Control flags of rule must match this bitmask.  
(Range: 0-63)  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Control Lists  
3
Web – Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress  
ACLs. Set the mask to check for any source or destination address, a specific host  
address, or an address range. Include other criteria to search for in the rules, such  
as a protocol type or one of the service types. Or use a bitmask to search for specific  
protocol port(s) or TCP control code(s). Then click Add.  
Figure 3-45 ACL Mask Configuration - IP  
CLI – This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the  
rules are entered into the ACL. In the following example, packets with the source  
address 10.1.1.1 are dropped because the “deny 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255” rule  
has the higher precedence according the “mask host any” entry.  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard A2  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-std-acl)#deny 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255  
Console(config-std-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring a MAC ACL Mask  
This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header.  
Command Usage  
You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.  
Command Attributes  
Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to match any address, “Host” to  
specify the host address for a single node, or “MAC” to specify a range of  
addresses. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)  
Source/Destination Bitmask – Address of rule must match this bitmask.  
VID Bitmask – VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask.  
Ethernet Type Bitmask – Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask.  
Packet Format Mask – A packet format must be specified in the rule.  
Web – Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress  
ACLs. Set the mask to check for any source or destination address, a host address,  
or an address range. Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID(s) or Ethernet  
type(s). Or check for rules where a packet format was specified. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-46 ACL Mask Configuration - MAC  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Access Control Lists  
3
CLI – This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port.  
You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask.  
Console(config)#access-list mac M4  
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any any  
Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-eth2 00-11-11-11-11-11  
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid 3  
Console(config-mac-acl)#end  
Console#show access-list  
MAC access-list M4:  
permit any any  
deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3  
Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence in  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#mask pktformat ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid4-106  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group M4 in  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show access-list  
MAC access-list M4:  
deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3  
permit any any  
MAC ingress mask ACL:  
mask pktformat host any vid  
Console#  
Binding a Port to an Access Control List  
After configuring the Access Control Lists (ACL), you should bind them to the ports  
that need to filter traffic. You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type – IP  
ingress, IP egress, MAC ingress and MAC egress.  
Command Usage  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.  
• This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering. However, you can  
only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering, and one  
IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering. In other words, only four  
ACLs can be bound to an interface – Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC  
ACL and Egress MAC ACL.  
• When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter, all entries in the ACL  
must be deny rules. Otherwise, the bind operation will fail.  
• The switch does not support the explicit “deny any any” rule for the egress IP ACL  
or the egress MAC ACLs. If these rules are included in an ACL, and you attempt  
to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking, the bind operation will fail.  
Command Attributes  
• Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-12)  
IP – Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port.  
MAC – Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port.  
IN – ACL for ingress packets.  
OUT – ACL for egress packets.  
ACL Name – Name of the ACL.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Mark the Enable field for the port you want  
to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic, select the required ACL from the  
drop-down list, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-47 ACL Port Binding  
CLI – This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1, and an IP  
ingress ACL to port 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in  
Console(config-if)#  
Port Configuration  
Displaying Connection Status  
You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current  
connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and  
auto-negotiation.  
Field Attributes (Web)  
Name – Interface label.  
Type – Indicates the port type. (1000BASE-T or SFP)  
Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.  
Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.  
Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.  
(Auto, or fixed choice)  
Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.  
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)  
Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Port Configuration  
3
6
Media Type – Shows the forced/preferred port type to use for combination ports  
9-12. (Copper-Forced, Copper-Preferred-Auto, SFP-Forced, SFP-Preferred-Auto)  
Trunk Member6 – Shows if port is a trunk member.  
7
Creation – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP.  
Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.  
Figure 3-48 Port - Port Information  
Field Attributes (CLI)  
Basic information:  
Port type – Indicates the port type. (1000BASE-T or SFP)  
MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access this item on  
Configuration:  
Name – Interface label.  
Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).  
Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed choice)  
Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during  
auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see “Configuring Interface  
Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.  
10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control  
FC - Supports flow control  
Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.  
Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold. (500 - 262143  
packets per second)  
6. Port Information only.  
7. Trunk Information only.  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.  
LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.  
Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.  
Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be  
learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)  
Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is  
detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown)  
Combo forced mode – Shows the forced/preferred port type to use for  
combination ports 9-12. (copper forced, copper preferred auto, SFP forced, SFP  
preferred auto)  
Current status:  
Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.  
Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.  
Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.  
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)  
CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.  
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5  
Information of Eth 1/13  
Basic information:  
Port type: 1000T  
Mac address: 00-30-f1-47-58-46  
Configuration:  
Name:  
Port admin: Up  
Speed-duplex: Auto  
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full,  
Broadcast storm: Enabled  
Broadcast storm limit: 500 packets/second  
Flow control: Disabled  
Lacp: Disabled  
Port security: Disabled  
Max MAC count: 0  
Port security action: None  
Combo forced mode: None  
Current status:  
Link status: Down  
Operation speed-duplex: 100full  
Flow control type: None  
Console#  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Configuring Interface Connections  
You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an  
interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually  
fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.  
Command Attributes  
Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an interface  
due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the  
problem has been resolved. You may also disable an interface for security  
reasons.  
Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode.  
Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.  
Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/  
disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities to  
be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings for  
speed, mode, and flow control.The following capabilities are supported.  
- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames, or  
clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames.  
(The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames.)  
- FC - Supports flow control  
Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or  
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,  
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex  
operation. (Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is  
actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals  
may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.)  
(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for 1000BASE-T –  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full; 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH – 1000full)  
Media Type – Shows the forced/preferred port type to use for the combination  
ports 9-12.  
- Copper-Forced - Always uses the built-in RJ-45 port.  
-
Copper-Preferred-Auto - Uses the built-in RJ-45 port if both combination types  
are functioning and the RJ-45 port has a valid link.  
-
-
SFP-Forced - Always uses the SFP port (even if module is not installed).  
SFP-Preferred-Auto - Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning  
and the SFP port has a valid link.  
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks and select port  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface  
to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow Control options.  
Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required  
interface settings, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-49 Port - Port Configuration  
CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13  
Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13  
Console(config-if)#shutdown  
.
Console(config-if)#no shutdown  
Console(config-if)#no negotiation  
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half  
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol  
.
Console(config-if)#negotiation  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full  
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/21  
Console(config-if)#combo-forced-mode copper-forced  
Console(config-if)#  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Creating Trunk Groups  
You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate  
link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments  
where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two  
devices. You can create up to six trunks at a time.  
The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control  
Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the  
link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. On the  
other hand, LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with  
LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure any number of ports  
on the switch as LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static  
trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the  
other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk consists of  
more than four ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby mode. Should one  
link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to  
replace it.  
Command Usage  
Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide  
redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails. However, before  
making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to  
specify the trunk on the devices at both ends. When using a port trunk, take note of  
the following points:  
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network  
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.  
• You can create up to six trunks on the switch, with up to eight ports per trunk.  
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.  
• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be  
compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.  
• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner,  
including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN  
assignments, and CoS settings.  
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added  
or deleted from a VLAN.  
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Statically Configuring a Trunk  
Command Usage  
• When configuring static trunks, you may not be  
able to link switches of different types,  
depending on the manufacturer’s  
statically  
configured  
implementation. However, note that the static  
trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel  
compatible.  
active  
links  
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure  
you add a static trunk via the configuration  
interface before connecting the ports, and also  
disconnect the ports before removing a static  
trunk via the configuration interface.  
Web – Click Trunk, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-6 in the Trunk field,  
select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you  
have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.  
Figure 3-50 Static Trunk Configuration  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port Configuration  
3
CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 9 and 10. Just connect these ports to  
two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.  
Console(config)#interface port-channel 2  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/9  
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10  
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1  
Information of Trunk 1  
Basic information:  
Port type: 1000T  
Mac address: 00-00-E8-AA-AA-01  
Configuration:  
Name:  
Port admin: Up  
Speed-duplex: Auto  
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full,  
Flow control: Disabled  
Port security: Disabled  
Max MAC count: 0  
Port security action: None  
Combo forced mode: None  
Current status:  
Created by: User  
Link status: Down  
Operation speed-duplex: 1000full  
Flow control type: None  
Member Ports: Eth1/9, Eth1/10,  
Console#  
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports  
Command Usage  
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure  
dynamically  
enabled  
you enable LACP before connecting the ports,  
and also disconnect the ports before disabling  
LACP.  
active  
links  
backup  
link  
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the  
connected ports, the trunk will be activated  
automatically.  
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP  
will automatically be assigned the next available  
trunk ID.  
configured  
members  
• If more than four ports attached to the same target  
switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode,  
and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.  
• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either  
by forced mode or auto-negotiation.  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports from the  
scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the  
member list, click Apply.  
Figure 3-51 LACP Trunk Configuration  
CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6. Just connect these ports  
to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1  
Information of Trunk 1  
Basic information:  
Port type: 1000T  
Mac address: 22-22-22-22-22-2d  
Configuration:  
Name:  
Port admin status: Up  
Speed-duplex: Auto  
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full,  
Flow control status: Disabled  
Port security: Disabled  
Max MAC count: 0  
Port security action: None  
Combo forced mode: None  
Current status:  
Created by: Lacp  
Link status: Up  
Port operation status: Up  
Operation speed-duplex: 1000full  
Flow control type: None  
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,  
Console#  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Configuring LACP Parameters  
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –  
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:  
• Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.  
• Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.  
Command Attributes  
Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on  
this switch.  
• Port – Port number. (Range: 1-12)  
System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation  
group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG  
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)  
- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.  
- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG  
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP  
negotiations with other systems.  
• Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports  
that belong to the same LAG. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)  
• Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select a backup  
link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)  
Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the  
ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as  
those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP settings for the partner  
only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take  
effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin Key, and  
Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure these settings for the  
Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the  
partner, and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with  
this device.) After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.  
Figure 3-52 LACP - Aggregation Port  
CLI – This function is not supported by the CLI.  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Displaying LACP Port Counters  
You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.  
Table 3-7 LACP Port Counters  
Parameter  
Description  
LACPDUs Sent  
LACPDUs Received  
Marker Sent  
Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.  
Number of valid LACPDUs received by this channel group.  
Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.  
Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.  
Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols  
Marker Received  
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts  
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed  
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow  
Protocols Ethernet Type.  
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts  
Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but  
contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.  
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member port to display  
the corresponding information.  
Figure 3-53 LACP - Port Counters Information  
CLI – This function is not supported by the CLI.  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side  
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of  
an link aggregation.  
Table 3-8 Internal Configuration Information  
Field  
Description  
Oper Key  
Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.  
Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.  
Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.  
Admin Key  
LACPDUs Internal  
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.  
LACP Port Priority  
LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.  
Admin State,  
Oper State  
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:  
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;  
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner  
information, administratively configured for the partner.  
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,  
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence  
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.  
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection  
is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of  
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.  
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has  
been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been  
associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation  
Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information  
transmitted.  
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential  
candidate for aggregation.  
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.  
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.  
(0: Passive; 1: Active)  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port Configuration  
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel to display  
the corresponding information.  
Figure 3-54 LACP - Port Internal Information  
CLI – This function is not supported by the CLI.  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side  
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side  
of an link aggregation.  
Table 3-9 Neighbor Configuration Information  
Field  
Description  
Partner Admin System ID  
Partner Oper System ID  
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.  
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.  
Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.  
Partner Oper Port Number  
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s  
protocol partner.  
Port Admin Priority  
Port Oper Priority  
Admin Key  
Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.  
Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.  
Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.  
Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.  
Oper Key  
Admin State  
Oper State  
Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)  
Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)  
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port channel to  
display the corresponding information.  
Figure 3-55 LACP - Port Neighbors Information  
CLI – This function is not supported by the CLI.  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Port Configuration  
3
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds  
Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if  
application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too  
much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or  
everything can come to complete halt.  
You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for  
broadcast traffic for each port. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified  
threshold will then be dropped.  
Command Usage  
• Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.  
• The default threshold is 500 packets per second.  
• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.  
• The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch.  
Command Attributes  
Port – Port number.  
Type – Indicates the port type. (1000BASE-T or SFP)  
Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Threshold – Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth. (Options: 500-262143  
packets per second; Default: 500 packets per second)  
Trunk – Shows if port is a trunk member.  
Web – Click Port, Broadcast Control. Check the Enabled box for any interface, set  
the threshold, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-56 Port Broadcast Control  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables  
broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 600  
packets per second for port 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2  
Information of Eth 1/2  
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 600 packets/second  
Lacp status: Disabled  
Ingress rate limit: disable,1000M bits per second  
Egress rate limit: disable,1000M bits per second  
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid  
Ingress rule: Disabled  
Acceptable frame type: All frames  
Native VLAN: 1  
Priority for untagged traffic: 0  
Gvrp status: Disabled  
Allowed Vlan:  
Forbidden Vlan:  
Console#  
1(u),  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port Configuration  
3
Configuring Port Mirroring  
You can mirror traffic from any source port to a  
target port for real-time analysis. You can then  
attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the  
target port and study the traffic crossing the  
source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.  
Source  
port(s)  
Single  
target  
port  
Command Usage  
• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic  
may be dropped from the monitor port.  
• All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port.  
• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN as  
the source port.  
Command Attributes  
Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.  
Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored.  
Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx (receive),  
Tx (transmit), or Both.  
Target Port – The port that will “duplicate” or “mirror” the traffic on the source port.  
Web – Click Port, Mirror. Specify the source port, the traffic type to be mirrored, and  
the monitor port, then click Add.  
Figure 3-57 Mirror Port Configuration  
CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port  
monitor command to specify the source port. Note that default mirroring under the  
CLI is for both received and transmitted packets.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10  
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13  
Console(config-if)#  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Rate Limits  
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic  
transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at  
the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch. Traffic that falls within  
the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of  
traffic are dropped.  
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is  
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to  
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded  
without any changes.  
Command Attribute  
Rate Limit – Sets the output rate limit for an interface.  
Default Status – Disabled  
Default Rate – 1000 Mbps  
Range – 1 - 1000 Mbps  
Web - Click Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration. Set the Input Rate  
Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status, then set the rate limit for the individual  
interfaces, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-58 Rate Limit Configuration  
CLI - This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through  
port 1 to 600 Mbps.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 600  
Console(config-if)#rate-limit output 600  
Console(config-if)#  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port Configuration  
3
Showing Port Statistics  
You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and  
Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON  
MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing  
through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with  
the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics  
provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different  
frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been  
accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second.  
Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.  
Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management  
software such as HP OpenView.  
Table 3-10 Port Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Statistics  
Received Octets  
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing  
characters.  
Received Unicast Packets  
Received Multicast Packets  
Received Broadcast Packets  
Received Discarded Packets  
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer  
protocol.  
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,  
which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.  
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,  
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.  
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a  
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet  
could be to free up buffer space.  
Received Unknown Packets  
Received Errors  
The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded  
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.  
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them  
from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.  
Transmit Octets  
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including  
framing characters.  
Transmit Unicast Packets  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were  
discarded or not sent.  
Transmit Multicast Packets  
Transmit Broadcast Packets  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this  
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this  
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-10 Port Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Transmit Discarded Packets  
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.  
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up  
buffer space.  
Transmit Errors  
The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of  
errors.  
Etherlike Statistics  
Alignment Errors  
Late Collisions  
The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).  
The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times  
into the transmission of a packet.  
FCS Errors  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral  
number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does  
not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.  
Excessive Collisions  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due  
to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the  
interface is operating in full-duplex mode.  
Single Collision Frames  
Internal MAC Transmit Errors  
Multiple Collision Frames  
Carrier Sense Errors  
The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is  
inhibited by exactly one collision.  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due  
to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.  
A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is  
inhibited by more than one collision.  
The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never  
asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.  
SQE Test Errors  
A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the  
PLS sublayer for a particular interface.  
Frames Too Long  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the  
maximum permitted frame size.  
Deferred Transmissions  
Internal MAC Receive Errors  
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular  
interface is delayed because the medium was busy.  
A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to  
an internal MAC sublayer receive error.  
RMON Statistics  
Drop Events  
The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of  
resources.  
Jabbers  
The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS  
or alignment error.  
Received Bytes  
Collisions  
Total number of bytes of data received on the network. This statistic can  
be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.  
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet  
segment.  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port Configuration  
3
Table 3-10 Port Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Received Frames  
Broadcast Frames  
The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.  
The total number of good frames received that were directed to the  
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.  
Multicast Frames  
The total number of good frames received that were directed to this  
multicast address.  
CRC/Alignment Errors  
Undersize Frames  
The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).  
The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well  
formed.  
Oversize Frames  
Fragments  
The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well  
formed.  
The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS  
or alignment error.  
64 Bytes Frames  
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and  
transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
65-127 Byte Frames  
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and  
transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range  
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
128-255 Byte Frames  
256-511 Byte Frames  
512-1023 Byte Frames  
1024-1518 Byte Frames  
1519-1536 Byte Frames  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click Query. You  
can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.  
Figure 3-59 Port Statistics  
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Address Table Settings  
3
CLI – This example shows statistics for port 12.  
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/12  
Ethernet 1/12  
Iftable stats:  
Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122  
Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658  
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0  
Error input: 0, Error output: 0  
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0  
Extended iftable stats:  
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027  
Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7  
Ether-like stats:  
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0  
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0  
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0  
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0  
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0  
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0  
Symbol errors: 0  
RMON stats:  
Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552  
Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033  
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0  
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0  
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0  
Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616  
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449  
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871  
Address Table Settings  
Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass  
traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned  
by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually  
configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.  
Setting Static Addresses  
A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static  
addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static  
address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be  
written to the address table.  
Command Attributes  
8
Static Address Counts – The number of manually configured addresses.  
Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.  
Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.  
MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
8. Web Only.  
3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the MAC  
address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.  
Figure 3-60 Static Addresses  
CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be  
deleted when the switch is reset.  
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface  
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset  
Console(config)#  
Displaying the Address Table  
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the  
source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for  
inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are  
forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.  
MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on MAC  
address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).  
Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically learned.  
Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.  
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Address Table Settings  
3
Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type (i.e., mark  
the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the  
displayed addresses, and then click Query.  
Figure 3-61 Dynamic Addresses  
CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.  
Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1  
Interface Mac Address Vlan Type  
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------  
Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE  
1 Permanent  
Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60  
2 Learned  
Console#  
3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Changing the Aging Time  
You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.  
Command Attributes  
Aging Status – Enables/disables the aging function.  
Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.  
(Range: 10-1000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)  
Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.  
Figure 3-62 Address Aging  
CLI – This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds.  
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400  
Console(config)#  
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network  
loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows  
the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch,  
bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any  
two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over  
when a primary link goes down.  
The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:  
• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)  
• MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)  
STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STA-compliant switch,  
bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a  
root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest  
path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it  
selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path  
cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected  
to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After determining  
the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and  
disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root  
ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.  
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Designated  
Root  
Root  
Port  
x
x
Designated  
Port  
x
Designated  
Bridge  
x
x
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello  
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge  
does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge  
assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate  
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid  
network topology.  
RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP. RSTP is  
also incorporated into MSTP. RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e.,  
around one tenth of the time required by STP) by reducing the number of state  
changes before active ports start learning, predefining an alternate route that can be  
used when a node or port fails, and retaining the forwarding database for ports  
insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs.  
When using STP or RSTP, it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all  
VLAN members. Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of  
the group members. MSTP (an extension of RSTP) is designed to support  
independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups. Once you specify the VLANs to  
include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI), the protocol will automatically  
build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs. MSTP  
maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an  
RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree (CST).  
Displaying Global Settings  
You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the  
entire switch using the STA Information screen.  
Field Attributes  
Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an  
STA-compliant network.  
Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority and  
MAC address (where the address is taken from the switch system).  
Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a  
configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except  
for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals.  
Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration  
message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a  
new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.  
(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports  
and trunks.)  
3-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a  
configuration message.  
Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before  
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required  
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it  
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting  
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary  
data loops might result.  
Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning  
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.  
- Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This  
switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root  
port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree  
network.  
- Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root  
device.  
Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been  
reconfigured.  
Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.  
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:  
Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:  
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)  
- MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)  
Instance* – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (This is always 0 for the CIST.)  
VLANs configuration – VLANs assigned to the CIST.  
Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and  
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.  
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC  
address will then become the root device.  
Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a  
configuration message.  
Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait  
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All  
device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages  
at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information (provided in the last  
configuration message), a new root port is selected from among the device ports  
attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,”  
which includes both ports and trunks.)  
Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before  
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required  
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it  
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting  
3-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary  
data loops might result.  
Root Hold Time – The interval (in seconds) during which no more than two bridge  
configuration protocol data units shall be transmitted by this node.  
Max hops – The max number of hop counts for the MST region.  
Remaining hops – The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance.  
Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of  
consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs.  
Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between  
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can  
be assigned to each interface.  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.  
Figure 3-63 STA Information  
3-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port  
.
Console#show spanning-tree  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode  
Spanning tree enable/disable  
Instance  
:MSTP  
:enable  
:0  
Vlans configuration  
Priority  
:1-4094  
:32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.)  
Bridge Max Age (sec.)  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)  
Root Hello Time (sec.)  
Root Max Age (sec.)  
Root Forward Delay (sec.)  
Max hops  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:20  
Remaining hops  
:20  
Designated Root  
:32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
Current root port  
Current root cost  
Number of topology changes  
:1  
:200000  
:1  
Last topology changes time (sec.):13380  
Transmission limit  
Path Cost Method  
:3  
:long  
.
.
.
Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not  
connected to the network.  
Configuring Global Settings  
Global settings apply to the entire switch.  
Command Usage  
• Spanning Tree Protocol  
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs. This  
creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple VLANs are  
implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be  
inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group members.  
When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend selecting the MSTP option.  
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the  
incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol  
messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:  
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP BPDU) after a  
port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an  
802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.  
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP  
BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer  
and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.  
3-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  
- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must configure  
a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration, allowing them to  
participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.  
- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN  
instance assignments.  
- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes  
stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system  
in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.  
Command Attributes  
Basic Configuration of Global Settings  
Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch. (Default: Enabled)  
Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:  
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); i.e., when this option is selected,  
the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).  
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.  
- MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)  
Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and  
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.  
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC  
address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values indicate  
higher priority.)  
• Default: 32768  
• Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096  
• Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,  
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440  
Root Device Configuration  
Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a  
configuration message.  
• Default: 2  
• Minimum: 1  
• Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]  
Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without  
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device  
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at  
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last  
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is  
a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the  
network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes  
both ports and trunks.)  
• Default: 20  
• Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].  
• Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]  
3-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before  
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required  
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it  
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting  
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary  
data loops might result.  
• Default: 15  
• Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]  
• Maximum: 30  
Configuration Settings for RSTP  
The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP:  
Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between  
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can  
be assigned to each interface.  
- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.  
(This is the default.)  
- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.  
Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by  
setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol  
messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)  
Configuration Settings for MSTP  
Max Instance Numbers – The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this  
switch can be assigned. (Default: 65)  
Configuration Digest – An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST  
ID mapping table. In other words, this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST.  
9
Region Revision – The revision for this MSTI. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)  
Region Name9 – The name for this MSTI. (Maximum length: 32 characters)  
Maximum Hop Count – The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region  
before a BPDU is discarded. (Range: 1-40; Default: 20)  
9. The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region.  
3-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-64 STA Configuration  
3-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to MST, and  
then configures the STA and MSTP parameters.  
Console(config)#spanning-tree  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode mst  
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000  
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5  
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38  
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20  
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long  
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4  
Console(config)#Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration  
Console(config-mstp)#revision 1  
Console(config-mstp)#name R&D  
Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Displaying Interface Settings  
The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current  
status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.  
Field Attributes  
Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.  
STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree:  
- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward  
packets.  
- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by  
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port  
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.  
- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.  
The rules defining port status are:  
- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is  
always forwarding.  
- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other  
STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards  
packets and the other is discarding.  
- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change  
state to learning, and then to forwarding.  
Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the  
Learning state to the Forwarding state.  
Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the  
current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.  
Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through  
which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree.  
Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated  
bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the  
Spanning Tree.  
3-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment  
attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration or  
by auto-detection, as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on  
Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port  
in STA Port Configuration on page 3-115 (i.e., true or false), but will be set to false  
if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this port.  
Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active  
topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., root port), connecting a LAN  
through the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., designated port), or is the MSTI regional  
root (i.e., master port); or is an alternate or backup port that may provide  
connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs fail or are removed. The role is  
set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has no role within the spanning tree.  
R: Root Port  
Alternate port receives more  
useful BPDUs from another  
bridge and is therefore not  
selected as the designated  
port.  
A: Alternate Port  
D: Designated Port  
B: Backup Port  
R
A
R
D
B
x
Backup port receives more  
useful BPDUs from the same  
bridge and is therefore not  
selected as the designated  
port.  
R
R
A
D
B
x
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.  
(STA Port Information only)  
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:  
Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.  
External path cost – The path cost for the IST. This parameter is used by the  
STA to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should  
be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports  
with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.)  
Internal path cost – The path cost for the MST. See the preceding item.  
3-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm. If  
the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the port with the highest priority  
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This  
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree  
Algorithm is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the  
highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning  
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.  
Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port,  
and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.  
Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN  
segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes  
cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree  
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices  
such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce  
the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during  
reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the  
interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems.  
However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to  
an end-node device.  
Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.  
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.  
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.  
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a  
point-to-point link or to shared media.  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk Information.  
Figure 3-65 STA Port Information  
3-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.  
Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5  
Eth 1/ 5 information  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status  
Role  
: enable  
: disable  
State  
: discarding  
External path cost  
Internal path cost  
Priority  
: 10000  
: 10000  
: 128  
Designated cost  
Designated port  
Designated root  
Designated bridge  
Fast forwarding  
: 200000  
: 128.5  
: 61440.0.0000E9313131  
: 61440.0.0000E9313131  
: enable  
Forward transitions : 0  
Admin edge port  
Oper edge port  
Admin Link type  
Oper Link type  
: enable  
: enable  
: auto  
: point-to-point  
Spanning Tree Status : enable  
Configuring Interface Settings  
You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port  
priority, path cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path  
cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to  
indicate a point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to  
indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding.  
Command Attributes  
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:  
STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.  
(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-112 for additional information.)  
Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward  
packets.  
Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by  
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port  
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.  
Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.  
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.  
(STA Port Configuration only)  
The following interface attributes can be configured:  
Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface. (Default: Enabled).  
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If  
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority  
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This  
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree  
3-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the  
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
• Default: 128  
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16  
Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path  
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to  
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost  
takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method is set  
to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.  
• Range –  
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
• Default –  
- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.  
• Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.  
• Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.  
• Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a  
point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting.)  
Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an interface is  
attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node.  
Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to  
the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker  
convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current  
forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild  
address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to  
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes  
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should  
only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)  
Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration  
or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected  
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the Protocol  
Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or  
STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces. (Default: Disabled)  
3-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify  
the required attributes, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-66 STA Port Configuration  
CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7  
Console(config-if)#no no spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto  
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree protocol-migration  
Console(config-if)#  
Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees  
MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple  
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing  
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and allowing for  
faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.  
By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MST Instance 0)  
that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up  
to 65 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area  
of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges within the  
same MSTI Region (page 3-110) with the same set of instances, and the same  
instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that RSTP treats  
each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the Common Spanning  
Tree.  
To use multiple spanning trees:  
1. Set the spanning tree type to MSTP (STA Configuration, page 3-108).  
2. Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance (MSTP VLAN  
Configuration).  
3. Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI (MSTP VLAN Configuration).  
Note: All VLANs are automatically added to the IST (Instance 0).  
3-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network, you must  
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings.  
Command Attributes  
MST Instance – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (Default: 0)  
Priority – The priority of a spanning tree instance. (Range: 0-61440 in steps of  
4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,  
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440; Default: 32768)  
VLANs in MST Instance – VLANs assigned this instance.  
MST ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-57; Default: 0)  
VLAN ID – VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance. (Range: 1-4094)  
The other global attributes are described under “Displaying Global Settings,” page 3-108. The  
attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under “Displaying Interface  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, VLAN Configuration. Select an instance  
identifier from the list, set the instance priority, and click Apply. To add the VLAN  
members to an MSTI instance, enter the instance identifier, the VLAN identifier, and  
click Add.  
Figure 3-67 MSTP VLAN Configuration  
3-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 1, followed by settings for each port.  
Console#show spanning-tree mst 2  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode  
Spanning tree enable/disable  
Instance  
:MSTP  
:enable  
:2  
Vlans configuration  
:2  
Priority  
:4096  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:20  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.)  
Bridge Max Age (sec.)  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)  
Root Hello Time (sec.)  
Root Max Age (sec.)  
Root Forward Delay (sec.)  
Max hops  
Remaining hops  
:20  
Designated Root  
:4096.2.0000E9313131  
Current root port  
Current root cost  
Number of topology changes  
:0  
:0  
:0  
Last topology changes time (sec.):646  
Transmission limit  
:3  
Path Cost Method  
:long  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 7 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status  
Role  
State  
External path cost  
Internal path cost  
Priority  
: enable  
: disable  
: discarding  
: 10000  
: 10000  
: 128  
Designated cost  
Designated port  
Designated root  
Designated bridge  
Fast forwarding  
: 0  
: 128.7  
: 4096.2.0000E9313131  
: 4096.2.0000E9313131  
: enable  
Forward transitions : 0  
Admin edge port  
Oper edge port  
Admin Link type  
Oper Link type  
: enable  
: enable  
: auto  
: point-to-point  
Spanning Tree Status : enable  
.
.
.
CLI – This example sets the priority for MSTI 1, and adds VLANs 1-5 to this MSTI.  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration  
Console(config-mst)#mst 1 priority 4096  
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 1-5  
Console(config-mst)#  
3-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP  
The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current  
status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance.  
Field Attributes  
MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-57; Default: 0)  
The other attributes are described under “Displaying Interface Settings,” page 3-112.  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Information or Trunk Information. Select the  
required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values.  
Figure 3-68 MSTP Port Information  
CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 0, followed by settings for each port.  
The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST (page 3-105), the  
settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree.  
Console#show spanning-tree mst 0  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode  
Spanning tree enable/disable  
Instance  
:MSTP  
:enable  
:0  
Vlans configuration  
Priority  
:1-4094  
:32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.)  
Bridge Max Age (sec.)  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)  
Root Hello Time (sec.)  
Root Max Age (sec.)  
Root Forward Delay (sec.)  
Max hops  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:20  
Remaining hops  
:20  
Designated Root  
:32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
Current root port  
Current root cost  
Number of topology changes  
:1  
:200000  
:1  
Last topology changes time (sec.):645  
Transmission limit  
Path Cost Method  
:3  
:long  
3-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status  
Role  
: enable  
: root  
State  
: forwarding  
External path cost  
Internal path cost  
Priority  
: 100000  
: 100000  
: 128  
Designated cost  
Designated port  
Designated root  
Designated bridge  
Fast forwarding  
: 200000  
: 128.24  
: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
: 32768.0.0030F1552000  
: disable  
Forward transitions : 1  
Admin edge port  
Oper edge port  
Admin Link type  
Oper Link type  
: enable  
: disable  
: auto  
: point-to-point  
Spanning Tree Status : enable  
.
.
.
Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP  
You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP  
Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages.  
Field Attributes  
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:  
STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.  
(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-112 for additional information.)  
Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward  
packets.  
Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by  
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port  
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.  
Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.  
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.  
(STA Port Configuration only)  
The following interface attributes can be configured:  
MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-57; Default: 0)  
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If  
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority  
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This  
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree  
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the  
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
• Default: 128  
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16  
3-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
MST Path Cost – This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path  
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to  
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost  
takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method is set  
to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.  
• Range –  
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
• Default –  
- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Enter  
the priority and path cost for an interface, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-69 MSTP Port Configuration  
CLI – This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst port-priority 0  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst cost 50  
Console(config-if)  
3-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
VLAN Configuration  
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q VLANs  
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into  
separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs  
to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs  
confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast  
storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network  
environment.  
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the  
network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.  
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a  
new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily  
organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups  
(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as  
videoconferencing).  
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow  
you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets.  
VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass  
through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.  
This switch supports the following VLAN features:  
• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard  
• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging  
and GVRP protocol  
• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs  
• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs  
• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices  
• Priority tagging  
Assigning Ports to VLANs  
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN  
group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as  
untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or  
more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of  
the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware  
network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either  
manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to  
participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor  
the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add  
this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.  
3-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network  
interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it  
on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.  
tagged frames  
VA  
VA  
VA: VLAN Aware  
VU: VLAN Unaware  
tagged  
frames  
untagged  
frames  
VA  
VA  
VU  
VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in  
one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an  
associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the  
frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast  
domain of the frame.  
Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly  
shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or  
printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to  
communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.  
Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce  
broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a  
VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the  
switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same  
VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.  
However, you should use IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible  
to fully automate VLAN registration.  
Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)  
defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which  
each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or its network adapter)  
supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be configured to broadcast a  
message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join. When this  
switch receives these messages, it will automatically place the receiving port in the  
specified VLANs, and then forward the message to all other ports. When the  
message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the  
receiving port in the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports.  
VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This allows  
GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based  
solely on endstation requests.  
To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the required VLANs  
(using the operating system or other application software), so that these VLANs can  
be propagated onto the network. For both the edge switches attached directly to  
3-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
these hosts, and core switches in the network, enable GVRP on the links between  
these devices. You should also determine security boundaries in the network and  
disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being  
propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.  
Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should configure static or  
untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices (as described in  
enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core switches in the  
network.  
Port-based VLAN  
2
1
9
3
4
5
6
7
8
13  
14  
18  
19  
10 11  
15 16  
12  
Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames  
If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a  
single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN. However, to  
participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a  
VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.  
Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port on the  
switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. When forwarding  
a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN-aware devices, the  
switch should include VLAN tags. When forwarding a frame from this switch along a  
path that does not contain any VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host),  
the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the  
switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by  
the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame from a  
VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a  
VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.  
3-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting)  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange  
VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network.  
VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices  
and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic  
VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.  
(Default: Disabled)  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable GVRP, click  
Apply  
Figure 3-70 Enabling GVRP  
CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.  
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp  
Console(config)#  
Displaying Basic VLAN Information  
The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type  
supported by the switch.  
Field Attributes  
10  
VLAN Version Number – The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in  
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.  
Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.  
Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of VLANs that can  
be configured on this switch.  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.  
Figure 3-71 VLAN Basic Information  
10. Web Only.  
3-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
VLAN Configuration  
3
CLI – Enter the following command.  
Console#show bridge-ext  
Max support vlan numbers: 255  
Max support vlan ID: 4094  
Extended multicast filtering services: No  
Static entry individual port: Yes  
VLAN learning: IVL  
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes  
Local VLAN capable: Yes  
Traffic classes: Enabled  
Global GVRP status: Disabled  
GMRP: Disabled  
Console#  
Displaying Current VLANs  
The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and  
whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN  
group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging. However, if you just  
want to create a small port-based VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable  
tagging.  
Command Attributes (Web)  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up Time).  
Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.  
- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP.  
- Permanent: Added as a static entry.  
Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.  
Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down  
list.  
Figure 3-72 VLAN Current Table  
3-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Attributes (CLI)  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.  
- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP.  
- Static: Added as a static entry.  
Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).  
Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.  
- Active: VLAN is operational.  
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.  
CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.  
Console#show vlan id 1  
VLAN Type Name  
---- ------- ----------- ------  
Status  
Ports/Channel groups  
------------------------------------  
1
Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1/1 Eth1/2 Eth1/3 Eth1/4 Eth1/5  
Eth1/6 Eth1/7 Eth1/8 Eth1/9 Eth1/10  
Eth1/11 Eth1/12  
Console#  
Creating VLANs  
Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate  
information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you  
must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.  
Command Attributes  
Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system. Up to 255  
VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN.  
New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN  
group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not  
added to the VLAN tag.)  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).  
Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.  
- Enable: VLAN is operational.  
- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.  
- Active: VLAN is operational.  
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.  
Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned to  
this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged.  
3-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN Configuration  
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the  
VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and  
then click Add.  
Figure 3-73 VLAN Static List - Creating VLANs  
CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active  
Console(config-vlan)#end  
Console#show vlan  
VLAN Type  
Name  
Status  
Ports/Channel groups  
---- ------- ---------------- --------- ----------------------------------  
1 Static  
2 Static  
DefaultVlan  
R&D  
Active Eth1/ 1 Eth1/ 2 Eth1/ 3 Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5  
Eth1/ 6 Eth1/ 7 Eth1/ 8 Eth1/ 9 Eth1/10  
Eth1/11 Eth1/12  
Active  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)  
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index.  
Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q VLAN compliant devices, or  
untagged they are not connected to any VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port  
as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the  
GVRP protocol.  
Notes: 1. You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure  
VLAN groups based on the port index (page 3-131). However, note that this  
configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.  
2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and  
can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as  
3-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Attributes  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).  
Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.  
- Enable: VLAN is operational.  
- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
Port – Port identifier.  
Trunk – Trunk identifier.  
Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the  
appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:  
- Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port  
will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.  
- Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the  
port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or  
CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group  
as an untagged port.  
- Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via  
GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN Registration” on page  
3-124.  
- None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this  
VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.  
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the  
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the  
scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the  
membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or  
trunks. Click Apply.  
Figure 3-74 VLAN Static Table - Adding Static Members  
3-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged  
Console(config-if)#  
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)  
Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the  
selected interface as a tagged member.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Port or trunk identifier.  
Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.  
Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.  
Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an interface  
from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership  
information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the  
interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After  
configuring VLAN membership for each interface, click Apply.  
Figure 3-75 VLAN Static Membership  
CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes Port 3  
from VLAN 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2  
Console(config-if)#  
3-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces  
You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN  
identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering, GVRP status, and GARP  
timers.  
Command Usage  
GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to  
exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on  
interfaces across the network.  
GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or  
deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default  
values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data  
rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties  
with GVRP registration/deregistration.  
Command Attributes  
PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface. (Default: 1)  
- If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN,  
the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For  
all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member  
before you can assign its PVID to that group.  
Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types, including  
tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to receive all frame  
types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.  
(Option: All, Tagged; Default: All)  
Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which  
the ingress port is not a member. (Default: Disabled)  
- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.  
- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except  
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).  
- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.  
-
Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP  
or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.  
GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP must be globally  
enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect. (See “Displaying Bridge  
Extension Capabilities” on page 3-14.) When disabled, any GVRP packets  
received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be  
propagated from other ports. (Default: Disabled)  
11  
GARP Join Timer – The interval between transmitting requests/queries to  
participate in a VLAN group. (Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)  
GARP Leave Timer11 – The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group.  
This time should be set to more than twice the join time. This ensures that after a  
11. Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer  
3-132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VLAN Configuration  
3
Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the  
port actually leaves the group. (Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)  
GARP LeaveAll Timer11 – The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query  
message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval  
should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic  
generated by nodes rejoining the group.  
(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)  
Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface. (Default: Hybrid)  
- 1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct  
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the  
source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e.,  
associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.  
- Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or  
untagged frames.  
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the  
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration.  
Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.  
Figure 3-76 VLAN Port Configuration  
3-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns PVID 3 as the  
native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport  
mode to hybrid.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged  
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering  
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp  
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20  
Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90  
Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid  
Console(config-if)#  
Configuring Private VLANs  
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the  
assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,  
uplink ports. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously  
within the same switch.)  
Uplink Ports  
Primary VLAN  
(promiscuous ports)  
Downlink Ports  
Secondary VLAN  
(private ports)  
x
Enabling Private VLANs  
Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable/disable the Private VLAN function.  
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Status. Select Enable or Disable from the  
scroll-down box, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-77 Private VLAN Status  
CLI – This example enables private VLANs.  
Console(config)#pvlan  
Console(config)#  
3-134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VLAN Configuration  
3
Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports  
Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports.  
Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the  
switch except for the uplink ports. Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports  
on the switch and with any designated downlink ports.  
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Link Status. Mark the ports that will serve as  
uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-78 Private VLAN Link Status  
CLI – This configures ports 3 and 4 as uplinks and ports 5 and 6 as downlinks.  
Console(config)#pvlan uplink 1/3-4 downlink 1/5-6  
Console(config)#  
Configuring Protocol-Based VLANs  
The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped  
into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic  
between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a  
specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of  
VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.  
To avoid these problems, you can configure this switch with protocol-based VLANs  
that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol.  
When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined  
based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets.  
Command Usage  
To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps:  
1. First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use (page 3-128).  
Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each  
major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this time.  
2. Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN  
using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page.  
3. Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the  
Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page.  
3-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Protocol Groups  
Create a protocol group for one or more protocols.  
Command Attributes  
Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group.  
(Range: 1-2147483647)  
Frame Type – Frame type used by this protocol. (Options: Ethernet, RFC_1042,  
SNAP_8021h, SNAP_other, LLC_other)  
Protocol Type – The only option for the LLC_other frame type is IPX_raw. The  
options for all other frames types include: IP, ARP, RARP.  
Web – Click VLAN, Protocol VLAN, Configuration. Enter a protocol group ID, frame  
type and protocol type, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-79 Protocol VLAN Configuration  
CLI – The following creates protocol group 1, and then specifies Ethernet frames  
with IP and ARP protocol types.  
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1  
add frame-type ethernet protocol-type ip  
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1  
add frame-type ethernet protocol-type arp  
Console(config)#  
Mapping Protocols to VLANs  
Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the group.  
Command Usage  
• When creating a protocol-based VLAN, only assign interfaces using this  
configuration screen. If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN  
commands such as VLAN Static Table (page 3-129) or VLAN Static Membership  
(page 3-131), these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the  
associated VLAN.  
• When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN, it is  
processed in the following manner:  
- If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules applied  
to tagged frames.  
3-136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VLAN Configuration  
3
- If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is forwarded  
to the appropriate VLAN.  
- If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is  
forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Port or trunk identifier.  
Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group.  
(Range: 1-2147483647)  
VLAN ID – VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded. (Range: 1-4094)  
Web – Click VLAN, Protocol VLAN, Port Configuration. Select a a port or trunk,  
enter a protocol group ID, the corresponding VLAN ID, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-80 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration  
CLI – The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type  
specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#  
3-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Class of Service Configuration  
Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater  
precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch  
supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s  
high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You  
can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame  
priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.  
Layer 2 Queue Settings  
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces  
You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch. All untagged  
packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and  
then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.  
Command Usage  
• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It uses Weighted Round  
Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.  
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept  
all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This priority does  
not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE  
802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.  
• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are  
stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.  
Command Attributes  
12  
Default Priority – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on  
the specified interface. (Range: 0 - 7, Default: 0)  
Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for  
each port.  
12. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”  
3-138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority. Modify the default  
priority for any interface, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-81 Default Port Priority  
CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/5  
Information of Eth 1/5  
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 500 packets/second  
Lacp status: Disabled  
Ingress rate limit: disable,1000M bits per second  
Egress rate limit: disable,1000M bits per second  
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid  
Ingress rule: Disabled  
Acceptable frame type: All frames  
Native VLAN: 1  
Priority for untagged traffic: 5  
Gvrp status: Disabled  
Allowed Vlan:  
Forbidden Vlan:  
Console#  
1(u),  
3-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues  
This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using eight  
priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted  
Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE  
802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in  
the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.  
Table 3-11 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues  
Queue  
0
2
1
0
2
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Priority  
The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network  
applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority  
levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for  
your own network.  
Table 3-12 CoS Priority Levels  
Priority Level  
Traffic Type  
1
Background  
2
(Spare)  
0 (default)  
Best Effort  
3
4
5
6
7
Excellent Effort  
Controlled Load  
Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter  
Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter  
Network Control  
Command Attributes  
Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)  
13  
Traffic Class – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest CoS  
priority queue)  
13. CLI shows Queue ID.  
3-140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. Mark an interface and click Select to display  
the current mapping of CoS values to output queues. Assign priorities to the traffic  
classes (i.e., output queues) for the selected interface, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-82 Traffic Classes  
CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a  
one-to-one mapping.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config)#queue cos-map 0 0  
Console(config)#queue cos-map 1 1  
Console(config)#queue cos-map 2 2  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Information of Eth 1/2  
Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
.
.
.
*
Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration  
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.  
3-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Selecting the Queue Mode  
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all  
traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are  
serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative  
weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that  
determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before  
moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur  
with strict priority queuing.  
Command Attributes  
WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using  
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively.  
(This is the default selection.)  
Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the  
higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.  
Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-83 Queue Mode  
CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.  
Console(config)#queue mode strict  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show queue mode  
Queue mode: strict  
Console#  
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes  
This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the  
frequency at which it services each priority queue. As described in “Mapping CoS  
Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-140, the traffic classes are mapped to one of  
the eight egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of  
these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets  
the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently  
affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.  
Command Attributes  
14  
WRR Setting Table – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class (i.e., queue).  
Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class. (Range: 1-15)  
14. CLI shows Queue ID.  
3-142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Select the interface, highlight a traffic class  
(i.e., output queue), enter a weight, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-84 Queue Scheduling  
CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the  
priority queues.  
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show queue bandwidth  
Information of Eth 1/1  
Queue ID Weight  
-------- ------  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
3
5
7
9
11  
13  
15  
Information of Eth 1/2  
Queue ID Weight  
.
.
.
3-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings  
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values  
This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet  
application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a  
frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the  
TCP port. If priority bits are used, the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP  
Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When  
these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by  
the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.  
Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch  
maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority, IP Precedence or DSCP  
Priority, and then Default Port Priority.  
• IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these  
priority types will automatically disable the other.  
Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority  
The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority.  
Select one of the methods or disable this feature.  
Command Attributes  
Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)  
IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.  
IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point  
Mapping.  
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select Disabled,  
IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu.  
Figure 3-85 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status  
CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch.  
Console(config)#map ip precedence  
Console(config)#  
3-144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Mapping IP Precedence  
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits  
defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control  
packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The default IP Precedence values are  
mapped one-to-one to Class of Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to  
CoS value 0, and so forth). Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other  
bits for various application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.  
Table 3-13 Mapping IP Precedence  
Priority Level  
Traffic Type  
Priority Level  
Traffic Type  
Flash  
7
6
5
4
Network Control  
Internetwork Control  
Critical  
3
2
1
0
Immediate  
Priority  
Flash Override  
Routine  
Command Attributes  
IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map.  
Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value.  
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.  
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP Precedence  
Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-86 IP Precedence Priority  
3-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch,  
maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and then displays the IP  
Precedence settings.  
Console(config)#map ip precedence  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1  
Precedence mapping status: disabled  
Port  
Precedence COS  
--------- ---------- ---  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
Console#  
*
Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration  
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.  
Mapping DSCP Priority  
The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding  
behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains backward compatibility  
with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP compliant, ToS-enabled devices,  
will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Based on network policies, different kinds of  
traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are  
defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified  
are mapped to CoS value 0.  
Table 3-14 Mapping DSCP Priority  
IP DSCP Value  
CoS Value  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10, 12, 14, 16  
18, 20, 22, 24  
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36  
38, 40, 42  
48  
46, 56  
Command Attributes  
DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.  
Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value.  
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.  
Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.  
3-146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a  
value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-87 IP DSCP Priority  
CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch,  
maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority  
settings.  
Console(config)#map ip dscp  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1  
DSCP mapping status: disabled  
Port  
DSCP COS  
--------- ---- ---  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
61  
62  
63  
0
0
0
Console#  
*
Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration  
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.  
3-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Mapping IP Port Priority  
You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP  
port number (i.e., TCP/UDP port number) in the frame header. Some of the more  
common TCP service ports include: HTTP: 80, FTP: 21, Telnet: 23 and POP3: 110.  
Command Attributes  
IP Port Priority Status – Enables or disables the IP port priority.  
Interface – Selects the port or trunk interface to which the settings apply.  
IP Port Priority Table – Shows the IP port to CoS map.  
IP Port Number (TCP/UDP) – Set a new IP port number.  
Class of Service Value – Sets a CoS value for a new IP port. Note that “0”  
represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.  
Note: IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces.  
Web – Click Priority, IP Port Status. Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled.  
Figure 3-88 IP Port Priority Status  
Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Enter the port number for a network application in the  
IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box, and then  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-89 IP Port Priority  
3-148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Class of Service Configuration  
3
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch,  
maps HTTP traffic (on port 1) to CoS value 0, and then displays the IP Port Priority  
settings.  
Console(config)#map ip port  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show map ip port ethernet 1/5  
TCP port mapping status: disabled  
Port  
--------- -------- ---  
Eth 1/ 1 80  
Console#  
Port no. COS  
0
*
Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration  
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.  
Mapping CoS Values to ACLs  
Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an  
ACL rule as shown in the following table. Note that the specified CoS value is only  
used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it is not written to the packet  
itself. For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues, see page 3-140.  
Table 3-15 Mapping CoS Values to IP ACLs  
Priority  
Queue  
0
1
1
2
2
0
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Command Usage  
You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule.  
Command Attributes  
Port – Port identifier.  
15  
• Name – Name of ACL.  
Type – Type of ACL (IP or MAC).  
CoS Priority – CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule. (Range: 0-7)  
15. For information on configuring ACLs, see page 3-66.  
3-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Priority, ACL CoS Priority. Select a port, select an ACL rule, specify a  
CoS priority, then click Add.  
Figure 3-90 ACL CoS Priority  
CLI – This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within  
the specified ACL on port 1.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules  
You can change traffic priorities for frames matching the defined ACL rule. (This  
feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking.) This switch can change the  
IEEE 802.1p priority, IP Precedence, or DSCP Priority of IP frames; or change the  
IEEE 802.1p priority of Layer 2 frames.  
Command Usage  
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can change priorities based on a rule.  
• Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802.1p priority tag. This tag is also  
incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag. The 802.1p priority may  
be set for either Layer 2 or IP frames.  
• The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS) octet.  
The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for  
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. Note that the IP frame header  
can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type.  
• The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP  
Priority, and then 802.1p priority.  
3-150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Command Attributes  
Port – Port identifier.  
16  
Name – Name of ACL.  
Type – Type of ACL (IP or MAC).  
Precedence – IP Precedence value. (Range: 0-7)  
DSCP – Differentiated Services Code Point value. (Range: 0-63)  
802.1p Priority – Class of Service value in the IEEE 802.1p priority tag.  
(Range: 0-7; 7 is the highest priority)  
Web – Click Priority, ACL Marker. Select a port and an ACL rule. To specify a ToS  
priority, mark the Precedence/DSCP check box, select Precedence or DSCP from  
the scroll-down box, and enter a priority. To specify an 802.1p priority, mark the  
802.1p Priority check box, and enter a priority. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-91 ACL Marker  
CLI – This example changes the DSCP priority for packets matching an IP ACL rule,  
and the 802.1p priority for packets matching a MAC ACL rule.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#match access-list ip bill set dscp 0  
Console(config-if)#match access-list mac mike set priority 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show marking  
Interface ethernet 1/1  
match access-list IP bill set DSCP 0  
match access-list MAC a set priority 0  
Console#  
16. For information on configuring ACLs, see page 3-66.  
3-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Multicast Filtering  
Multicasting is used to support real-time  
Unicast  
Flow  
applications such as videoconferencing or  
streaming audio. A multicast server does not have  
to establish a separate connection with each  
client. It merely broadcasts its service to the  
network, and any hosts that want to receive the  
multicast register with their local multicast switch/  
router. Although this approach reduces the  
network overhead required by a multicast server,  
the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at  
every multicast switch/router it passes through to  
ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts  
which subscribed to this service.  
Multicast  
Flow  
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group  
Management Protocol) to query for any attached  
hosts that want to receive a specific multicast  
service. It identifies the ports containing hosts  
requesting to join the service and sends data out  
to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring  
multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.  
This procedure is called multicast filtering.  
The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s  
performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing  
multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all  
ports in the subnet (VLAN).  
This switch not only supports IP multicast filtering by passively monitoring IGMP  
query and report messages and multicast routing probe messages to register  
end-stations as multicast group members, but also supports the DVMRP and  
PIM-DM multicast routing protocols required to forward multicast traffic to other  
IGMP Protocol  
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) runs between hosts and their  
immediately adjacent multicast router/switch. IGMP is a multicast host registration  
protocol that allows any host to inform its local router that it wants to receive  
transmissions addressed to a specific multicast group.  
A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to  
receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN  
performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes  
the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service  
requests on to any adjacent multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to  
receive the multicast service.  
3-152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering  
3
Based on the group membership information learned from IGMP, a router/switch can  
determine which (if any) multicast traffic needs to be forwarded to each of its ports.  
At Layer 3, multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing  
protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.  
Note that IGMP neither alters nor routes IP multicast packets. A multicast routing  
protocol must be used to deliver IP multicast packets across different subnetworks.  
Therefore, when DVMRP or PIM routing is enabled for a subnet on this switch, you  
also need to enable IGMP.  
L3 - network core  
(multicast routing)  
L2 - edge switches  
(snooping and query)  
L2 switch to end nodes  
(snooping on IGMP clients)  
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)  
IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches  
in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query (page 3-154) to  
monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers, and  
dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.  
Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier,  
you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch)  
connected over the network to an interface on your switch (page 3-157). This  
interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached  
router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces  
within the switch.  
Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control  
more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on  
the switch (page 3-159).  
IGMP Query (Layer 2 or 3) – IGMP Query can only be enabled globally at Layer 2,  
but can be enabled for individual VLAN interfaces at Layer 3 (page 3-159). However,  
note that Layer 2 query is disabled if Layer 3 query is enabled.  
3-153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters  
You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently. Based on the  
IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that  
request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all  
ports and possibly disrupting network performance.  
Command Usage  
IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report  
packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host  
groups to identify the IP multicast group members. It simply monitors the IGMP  
packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and  
configures the multicast filters accordingly.  
IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their  
hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch  
on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier”  
and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates  
the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will  
continue to receive the multicast service.  
Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such  
as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.  
Command Attributes  
IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine  
which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to as IGMP  
Snooping. (Default: Enabled)  
Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the Querier,  
which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.  
(Default: Disabled)  
IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which  
there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the  
multicast group. (Range: 2-10, Default: 2)  
IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP  
host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds, Default: 125)  
IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP  
multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port  
and removes the entry from its list. (Range: 5-30 seconds, Default: 10)  
IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops  
before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving  
query packets) to have expired. (Range: 300-500 seconds, Default: 300)  
IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on  
the network. (Range: 1-2; Default: 2)  
Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.  
2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2, including IGMP Report Delay  
and IGMP Query Timeout.  
3-154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering  
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as  
required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)  
Figure 3-92 IGMP Configuration  
CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the  
current status.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-time-out 300  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show ip igmp snooping  
Service status  
Querier status  
Query count  
: Enabled  
: Enabled  
: 10  
Query interval  
: 100 sec  
Query max response time : 20 sec  
Router port expire time: 300 sec  
IGMP snooping version  
Console#  
: Version 2  
3-155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router  
Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained  
from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to  
support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically  
discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.  
You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this  
switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or  
those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required  
VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.  
Figure 3-93 Multicast Router Port Information  
CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port  
attached to a multicast router.  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type  
---- ------------------ -------  
1
Eth 1/11 Static  
3-156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering  
3
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router  
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to  
locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/  
switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you  
can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current  
multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast  
traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.  
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the  
attached multicast router.  
Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration. Specify the  
interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the  
corresponding multicast traffic, and then click Add. After you have finished adding  
interfaces to the list, click Apply.  
Figure 3-94 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration  
CLI – This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type  
---- ------------------ -------  
1
Eth 1/11 Static  
3-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services  
You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast  
service.  
Command Attribute  
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.  
Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.  
Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been  
assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a VLAN ID and  
the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will  
display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.  
Figure 3-95 IP Multicast Registration Table  
CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1,  
along with the ports propagating the corresponding services. The Type field shows if  
this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured.  
Console#show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type  
---- --------------- ------------ -------  
1
1
224.1.1.12  
224.1.2.3  
Eth1/12  
Eth1/12  
USER  
IGMP  
Console#  
3-158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Filtering  
3
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services  
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP  
Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query  
Parameters” on page 3-154. For certain applications that require tighter control, you  
may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the  
ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the  
multicast service to that VLAN group.  
Command Usage  
• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.  
• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the  
corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.  
Command Attribute  
Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.  
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the  
attached multicast router/switch.  
Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service  
Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/switch.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface  
attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router),  
indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP  
address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list,  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-96 IGMP Member Port Table  
CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the  
known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12  
ethernet 1/12  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type  
---- --------------- ------------ -------  
1
224.1.1.12  
Eth1/12  
USER  
1
224.1.2.3  
Eth1/12  
IGMP  
Console#  
3-159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Layer 3 IGMP (Query used with Multicast Routing)  
IGMP Snooping – IGMP Snooping is a Layer 2 function (page 3-154) that can be  
used to provide multicast filtering when no other switches in the network support  
multicast routing. (Note that IGMP Snooping can only be globally enabled.)  
IGMP Query – Multicast query is used to poll each known multicast group for  
active members, and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward  
multicast traffic. Although the implementation differs slightly, IGMP Query is used in  
conjunction with both Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and multicast routing. Note that when  
using IGMP Snooping, multicast query is automatically enabled. (See “Configuring  
Layer 3 IGMP – This protocol includes a form of  
multicast query specifically designed to work with  
multicast routing. A router periodically asks its hosts if  
they want to receive multicast traffic. It then  
propagates service requests on to any upstream  
multicast router to ensure that it will continue to  
receive the multicast service. Layer 3 IGMP can be  
L3 - network core  
multicast routing  
and L3 IGMP query  
(
(
enabled for individual VLAN interfaces (page 3-159). (Note that Layer 2 snooping  
and query is disabled if Layer 3 IGMP is enabled.)  
Configuring IGMP Interface Parameters  
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any  
attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. The hosts may  
respond with several types of IP multicast messages. Hosts respond to queries with  
report messages that indicate which groups they want to join or the groups to which  
they already belong. If a router does not receive a report message within a specified  
period of time, it will prune that interface from the multicast tree. A host can also  
submit a join message at any time without waiting for a query from the router. Host  
can also signal when they no longer want to receive traffic for a specific group by  
sending a leave-group message.  
These IGMP messages are used by the router to identify ports containing multicast  
hosts and to restrict the downstream flow of multicast data to only these ports. If  
more than one router on the LAN is performing IP multicasting, one of these is  
elected as the “querier” and assumes the role of querying for group members. It then  
propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast router to ensure that  
it will continue to receive the multicast service. The following parameters are used to  
control Layer 3 IGMP and query functions.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN (Interface) – VLAN interface bound to a primary IP address.  
(Range: 1-4094)  
IGMP Protocol Status (Admin Status) – Enables IGMP on a VLAN interface.  
(Default: Disabled)  
3-160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering  
3
Last Member Query Interval – A multicast client sends an IGMP leave message  
when it leaves a group. The router then checks to see if this was the last host in  
the group by sending an IGMP query and starting a timer based on this command.  
If no reports are received before the timer expires, the group is deleted.  
(Range: 0-25 seconds; Default: 1 second)  
- This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced  
value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.  
Max Query Response Time – Configures the maximum response time advertised  
in IGMP queries. (Range: 0-25 seconds; Default: 10 seconds)  
- The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.  
- This command defines how long any responder (i.e., client or router) still in the  
group has to respond to a query message before the router deletes the group.  
- By varying the Maximum Query Response Time, you can tune the burstiness of  
IGMP messages passed on the subnet; where larger values make the traffic less  
bursty, as host responses are spread out over a larger interval.  
- The number of seconds represented by the maximum response interval must be  
less than the Query Interval.  
Query Interval – Configures the frequency at which host query messages are  
sent. (Range: 1-255; Default: 125 seconds)  
- Multicast routers send host query messages to determine the interfaces that are  
connected to downstream hosts requesting a specific multicast service. Only the  
designated multicast router for a subnet sends host query messages, which are  
addressed to the multicast address 224.0.0.1.  
- For IGMP Version 1, the designated router is elected according to the multicast  
routing protocol that runs on the LAN. But for IGMP Version 2, the designated  
querier is the lowest IP-addressed multicast router on the subnet.  
Robustness Variable – Specifies the robustness (i.e., expected packet loss) for  
this interface. The robustness value is used in calculating the appropriate range for  
other IGMP variables, such as the Group Membership Interval  
(Last Member  
Query Interval , as well as the Other Querier Present Interval, and the Startup  
)
Query Count (RFC 2236). (Range: 1-255; Default: 2)  
Version – Configures the IGMP version used on an interface.  
(Options: Version 1 or 2; Default: Version 2)  
- All routers on the subnet must support the same version. However, the multicast  
hosts on the subnet may support either IGMP version 1 or 2.  
- The switch must be set to version 2 to enable the Max Query Response Time.  
Querier – Device currently serving as the IGMP querier for this multicast service.  
3-161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click IP, IGMP, Interface Settings. Specify each interface that will support  
IGMP (Layer 3), specify the IGMP parameters for each interface, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-97 IGMP Interface Settings  
CLI – This example configures the IGMP parameters for VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp last-memb-query-interval 10  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-resp-interval 20  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp query-interval 100  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp robustval 3  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp version 1  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip igmp interface vlan 1  
Vlan 1 is up  
IGMP is enable, version is 2  
Robustness variable is 2  
Query interval is 125 sec  
Query Max Response Time is 10 sec, Last Member Query Interval is 1 sec  
Querier is 10.1.0.253  
Console#  
3-162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast Filtering  
3
Displaying Multicast Group Information  
When IGMP (Layer 3) is enabled on this switch the current multicast groups learned  
via IGMP can be displayed in the IP/IGMP/Group Information page. When IGMP  
(Layer 3) is disabled and IGMP (Layer 2) is enabled, you can view the active  
multicast groups in the IGMP Snooping/IP Multicast Registration Table (see  
Command Attributes  
Group Address – IP multicast group address with subscribers directly attached or  
downstream from this switch.  
Interface – The interface on this switch that has received traffic directed to the  
multicast group address.  
Last Reporter – The IP address of the source of the last membership report  
received for this multicast group address on this interface. If no membership report  
has been received, this object has the value 0.0.0.0.  
Up time – The time elapsed since this entry was created.  
Expire – The time remaining before this entry will be aged out.  
(Default: 260 seconds)  
V1 Timer – The time remaining until the switch assumes that there are no longer  
any IGMP Version 1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface.  
(Default: 400 seconds)  
- If the switch receives an IGMP Version 1 Membership Report, it sets a timer to  
note that there are Version 1 hosts present which are members of the group for  
which it heard the report.  
- If there are Version 1 hosts present for a particular group, the switch will ignore  
any Leave Group messages that it receives for that group.  
Web – Click IP, IGMP, IGMP Group Membership.  
Figure 3-98 IGMP Group Membership  
CLI – The following shows the IGMP groups currently active on VLAN 1.  
Console#show ip igmp groups vlan 1  
GroupAddress InterfaceVlan Lastreporter  
Uptime  
Expire  
V1Timer  
--------------- --------------- --------------- -------- -------- ---------  
234.5.6.8  
Console#  
1
10.1.5.19  
7068  
220  
0
3-163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Domain Name Service  
The Domain Naming System (DNS) service on this switch allows host names to be  
mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name  
servers on the network. When a client device designates this switch as a DNS  
server, the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding  
DNS queries to the switch, and waiting for a response.  
You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain  
names to IP addresses, configure default domain names, or specify one or more  
name servers to use for domain name to address translation.  
Configuring General DNS Server Parameters  
Command Usage  
To enable DNS service on this switch, first configure one or more name servers,  
and then enable domain lookup status.  
To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client  
(i.e., not formatted with dotted notation), you can specify a default domain name or  
a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order.  
• If there is no domain list, the default domain name is used. If there is a domain list,  
the default domain name is not used.  
• When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch and  
a domain name list has been specified, the switch will work through the domain list,  
appending each domain name in the list to the host name, and checking with the  
specified name servers for a match.  
• When more than one name server is specified, the servers are queried in the  
specified sequence until a response is received, or the end of the list is reached  
with no response.  
• Note that if all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled.  
Command Attributes  
Domain Lookup Status – Enables DNS host name-to-address translation.  
17  
Default Domain Name – Defines the default domain name appended to  
incomplete host names. (Range: 1-64 alphanumeric characters)  
Domain Name List17 – Defines a list of domain names that can be appended to  
incomplete host names. (Range: 1-64 alphanumeric characters. 1-5 names)  
Name Server List – Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers  
to use for name-to-address resolution. (Range: 1-6 IP addresses)  
17. Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name.  
3-164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Domain Name Service  
3
Web – Select DNS, General Configuration. Set the default domain name or list of  
domain names, specify one or more name servers to use to use for address  
resolution, enable domain lookup status, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-99 DNS General Configuration  
CLI - This example sets a default domain name and a domain list. However,  
remember that if a domain list is specified, the default domain name is not used.  
Console(config)#ip domain-name sample.com  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.uk  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.jp  
Console(config)#ip domain-server 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#ip domain-lookup  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS enabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.uk  
.sample.com.jp  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
3-165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries  
You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map  
domain names to IP addresses.  
Command Usage  
• Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached  
network, or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network.  
• Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via  
multiple IP addresses. If more than one IP address is associated with a host name  
in the static table or via information returned from a name server, a DNS client can  
try each address in succession, until it establishes a connection with the target  
device.  
Field Attributes  
Host Name – Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses.  
(Range: 1-64 characters)  
IP Address – Internet address(es) associated with a host name.  
(Range: 1-8 addresses)  
Alias – Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address(es) as a  
previously configured entry.  
3-166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Domain Name Service  
3
Web – Select DNS, Static Host Table. Enter a host name and one or more  
corresponding addresses, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-100 DNS Static Host Table  
CLI - This example maps two address to a host name, and then configures an alias  
host name for the same addresses.  
Console(config)#ip host rd5 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#ip host rd6 10.1.0.55  
Console#show host  
Hostname  
rd5  
Inet address  
10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55  
Alias  
1.rd6  
3-167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying the DNS Cache  
You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated  
name servers.  
Field Attributes  
• No – The entry number for each resource record.  
Flag – The flag is always “4” indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable.  
Type – This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name  
for the owner, and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are  
mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry.  
IP – The IP address associated with this record.  
TTL – The time to live reported by the name server.  
Domain – The domain name associated with this record.  
Web – Select DNS, Cache.  
Figure 3-101 DNS Cache  
3-168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
3
CLI - This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated  
name servers.  
Console#show dns cache  
NO  
FLAG  
TYPE  
IP  
TTL  
DOMAIN  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
CNAME  
207.46.134.222 51  
207.46.134.190 51  
207.46.134.155 51  
207.46.249.222 51  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.com  
msn.com.tw  
207.46.249.27  
POINTER TO:4  
207.46.68.27  
POINTER TO:6  
65.54.131.192  
POINTER TO:8  
51  
51  
71964  
71964  
605  
www.msn.com.tw  
8
9
10  
passportimages.com  
www.passportimages.com  
global.msads.net  
605  
165.193.72.190 87  
Console#  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can dynamically allocate an  
IP address and other configuration information to network clients when they boot up.  
If a subnet does not already include a BOOTP or DHCP server, you can relay DHCP  
client requests to a DHCP server on another subnet, or configure the DHCP server  
on this switch to support that subnet.  
When configuring the DHCP server on this switch, you can configure an address  
pool for each unique IP interface, or manually assign a static IP address to clients  
based on their hardware address or client identifier. The DHCP server can provide  
the host’s IP address, domain name, gateway router and DNS server, information  
about the host’s boot image including the TFTP server to access for download and  
the name of the boot file, or boot information for NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming  
Service (WINS).  
Configuring DHCP Relay Service  
This switch supports DHCP relay  
service for attached host devices.  
If DHCP relay is enabled, and this  
switch sees a DHCP request  
broadcast, it inserts its own IP  
address into the request so that  
the DHCP server will know the  
subnet where the client is located.  
Then, the switch forwards the  
packet to the DHCP server. When  
DHCP  
Server  
Provides IP address  
compatible with switch  
segment to which client  
is attached  
the server receives the DHCP request, it allocates a free IP address for the DHCP  
client from its defined scope for the DHCP client’s subnet, and sends a DHCP  
response back to the DHCP relay agent (i.e., this switch). This switch then  
broadcasts the DHCP response received from the server to the client.  
3-169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Usage  
You must specify the IP address for at least one DHCP server. Otherwise, the  
switch’s DHCP relay agent will not forward client requests to a DHCP server.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN.  
VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN.  
Server IP Address – Addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the switch’s  
DHCP relay agent in order of preference.  
Web – Click DHCP, Relay Configuration. Enter up to five IP addresses for any  
VLAN, then click Restart DHCP Relay to start the relay service.  
Figure 3-102 DHCP Relay Configuration  
CLI – This example specifies one DHCP relay server for VLAN 1, and enables the  
relay service.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#dhcp relay server 10.1.0.99  
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp relay  
Console(config-if)#  
3-170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
3
Configuring the DHCP Server  
This switch includes a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server that can  
assign temporary IP addresses to any attached host requesting service. It can also  
provide other network settings such as the domain name, default gateway, Domain  
Name Servers (DNS), Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) name servers, or  
information on the bootup file for the host device to download.  
Addresses can be assigned to clients from a common address pool configured for a  
specific IP interface on this switch, or fixed addresses can be assigned to hosts  
based on the client identifier code or MAC address.  
Address  
Pool  
8 network  
address pools  
32 static addresses  
Static  
Addresses  
(all within the confines  
of configured network  
address pools)  
Command Usage  
• First configure any excluded addresses, including the address for this switch.  
• Then configure address pools for the network interfaces. You can configure up to  
8 network address pools. You can also manually bind an address to a specific  
client if required. However, any fixed addresses must fall within the range of an  
existing network address pool. You can configure up to 32 fixed host addresses  
(i.e., entering one address per pool).  
Enabling the Server, Setting Excluded Addresses  
Enable the DHCP Server and specify the IP addresses that it should not be  
assigned to clients.  
Command Attributes  
DHCP Server – Enables or disables the DHCP server on this switch.  
(Default: Disabled)  
Excluded Addresses – Specifies IP addresses that the DHCP server should not  
assign to DHCP clients. You can specify a single address or an address range.  
Note: Be sure you exclude the address for this switch and other key network devices.  
3-171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click DHCP, Server, General. Enter a single address or an address range,  
and click Add.  
Figure 3-103 DHCP Server General Configuration  
CLI – This example enables the DHCP and sets an excluded address range.  
Console(config)#service dhcp  
Console(config)#ip dhcp excluded-address 10.1.0.250 10.1.0.254  
Console#  
3-172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
3
Configuring Address Pools  
You must configure IP address pools for each IP interface that will provide  
addresses to attached clients via the DHCP server.  
Command Usage  
• First configure address pools for the network interfaces. Then you can manually  
bind an address to a specific client if required. However, note that any static host  
address must fall within the range of an existing network address pool. You can  
configure up to 8 network address pools, and up to 32 manually bound host  
address pools (i.e., one address per host pool).  
• When a client request is received, the switch first checks for a network address  
pool matching the gateway where the request originated (i.e., if the request was  
forwarded by a relay server). If there is no gateway in the client request (i.e., the  
request was not forwarded by a relay server), the switch searches for a network  
pool matching the interface through which the client request was received. It then  
searches for a manually configured host address that falls within the matching  
network pool. If no manually configured host address is found, it assigns an  
address from the matching network address pool. However, if no matching address  
pool is found the request is ignored.  
• When searching for a manual binding, the switch compares the client identifier and  
then the hardware address for DHCP clients. Since BOOTP clients cannot transmit  
a client identifier, you must configure a hardware address for this host type. If no  
manual binding has been specified for a host entry with a hardware address or  
client identifier, the switch will assign an address from the first matching network  
pool.  
• If the subnet mask is not specified for network or host address pools, the class A,  
B, or C natural mask is used (see page 3-216). The DHCP server assumes that all  
host addresses are available. You can exclude subsets of the address space by  
using the IP Excluded Address field on the DHCP Server General configuration  
page.  
Command Attributes  
Creating a New Address Pool  
Pool Name – A string or integer. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
Setting the Network Parameters  
IP – The IP address of the DHCP address pool.  
Subnet Mask – The bit combination that identifies the network (or subnet) and the  
host portion of the DHCP address pool.  
Setting the Host Parameters  
IP – The IP address of the DHCP address pool.  
Subnet Mask – Specifies the network mask of the client.  
Hardware Address – Specifies the MAC address and protocol used on the client.  
(Options: Ethernet, IEEE802, FDDI; Default: Ethernet)  
3-173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Client-Identifier – A unique designation for the client device, either a text string  
(1-15 characters) or hexadecimal value.  
Setting the Optional Parameters  
Default Router – The IP address of the primary and alternate gateway router.  
The IP address of the router should be on the same subnet as the client.  
DNS Server – The IP address of the primary and alternate DNS server. DNS  
servers must be configured for a DHCP client to map host names to IP addresses.  
Netbios Server – IP address of the primary and alternate NetBIOS Windows  
Internet Naming Service (WINS) name server used for Microsoft DHCP clients.  
Netbios Type – NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients.  
(Options: Broadcast, Hybrid, Mixed, Peer to Peer; Default: Hybrid)  
Domain Name – The domain name of the client. (Range: 1-32 characters)  
Bootfile – The default boot image for a DHCP client. This file should placed on the  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server specified as the Next Server.  
Next Server – The IP address of the next server in the boot process, which is  
typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.  
Lease Time – The duration that an IP address is assigned to a DHCP client.  
(Options: fixed period, Infinite; Default: 1 day)  
Examples  
Creating a New Address Pool  
Web – Click DHCP, Server, Pool Configuration. Specify a pool name, then click Add.  
Figure 3-104 DHCP Server Pool Configuration  
CLI – This example adds an address pool and enters DHCP pool configuration  
mode  
.
Console(config)#ip dhcp pool mgr  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
3-174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
3
Configuring a Network Address Pool  
Web – Click DHCP, Server, Pool Configuration. Click the Configure button for any  
entry. Click the radio button for “Network.” Enter the IP address and subnet mask for  
the network pool. Configure the optional parameters such as gateway server and  
DNS server. Then click Apply.  
Figure 3-105 DHCP Server Pool - Network Configuration  
CLI – This example configures a network address pool.  
Console(config)#ip dhcp pool tps  
Console(config-dhcp)#network 10.1.0.0 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-dhcp)#default-router 10.1.0.253  
Console(config-dhcp)#dns-server 10.2.3.4  
Console(config-dhcp)#netbios-name-server 10.1.0.33  
Console(config-dhcp)#netbios-node-type hybrid  
Console(config-dhcp)#domain-name example.com  
Console(config-dhcp)#bootfile wme.bat  
Console(config-dhcp)#next-server 10.1.0.21  
Console(config-dhcp)#lease infinite  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
3-175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring a Host Address Pool  
Web – Click DHCP, Server, Pool Configuration. Click the Configure button for any  
entry. Click the radio button for “Host.” Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and  
hardware address for the client device. Configure the optional parameters such as  
gateway server and DNS server. Then click Apply.  
Figure 3-106 DHCP Server Pool - Host Configuration  
CLI – This example configures a host address pool.  
Console(config)#ip dhcp pool mgr  
Console(config-dhcp)#host 10.1.0.19 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-dhcp)#hardware-address 00-e0-29-94-34-28 ethernet  
Console(config-dhcp)#client-identifier text bear  
Console(config-dhcp)#default-router 10.1.0.253  
Console(config-dhcp)#dns-server 10.2.3.4  
Console(config-dhcp)#netbios-name-server 10.1.0.33  
Console(config-dhcp)#netbios-node-type hybrid  
Console(config-dhcp)#domain-name example.com  
Console(config-dhcp)#bootfile wme.bat  
Console(config-dhcp)#next-server 10.1.0.21  
Console(config-dhcp)#lease infinite  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
3-176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
3
Displaying Address Bindings  
You can display the host devices which have acquired an IP address from this  
switch’s DHCP server.  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – IP address assigned to host.  
Mac Address – MAC address of host.  
Lease time – Duration that this IP address can be used by the host.  
Start time – Time this address was assigned by the switch.  
Delete – Clears this binding to the host. This command is normally used after  
modifying the address pool, or after moving DHCP service to another device.  
Entry Count – Number of hosts that have been given addresses by the switch.  
Note: More than one DHCP server may respond to a service request by a host. In this  
case, the host generally accepts the first address assigned by any DHCP server.  
Web – Click DHCP, Server, IP Binding. You may use the Delete button to clear an  
address from the DHCP server’s database.  
Figure 3-107 DHCP Server - IP Binding  
CLI – This example displays the current binding, and then clears all automatic  
binding.  
Console#show ip dhcp binding  
IP  
MAC  
Lease Time  
Start  
--------------- ----------------- ------------ -----------  
10.1.0.20 00-00-e8-98-73-21  
Console#clear ip dhcp binding *  
Console#  
86400 Dec 25 08:01:57 2002  
3-177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Router Redundancy  
Router redundancy protocols use a virtual IP address to support a primary router  
and multiple backup routers. The backup routers can be configured to take over the  
workload if the master router fails, or can also be configured to share the traffic load.  
The primary goal of router redundancy is to allow a host device which has been  
configured with a fixed gateway to maintain network connectivity in case the primary  
gateway goes down.  
This switch supports both the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) and Hot  
Standby Router Protocol (HSRP). These protocols are very similar. The primary  
difference is that VRRP requires you to specify the interface of one of the routers  
participating in the virtual group as the address for the master virtual router, while  
HSRP requires you to configure an arbitrary address for the virtual master router.  
Both protocols then select the backup routers based on the specified virtual router  
priority. HSRP also includes the ability to dynamically modify the virtual router  
priority based on the operational state of other interfaces on the router.  
Router redundancy can be set up in any of the following configurations. The  
following examples show configuration settings for VRRP. The only difference for  
HSRP is that the virtual router IP address is never a real address, and the master  
router is selected based on priority only.  
• A master virtual router with one or more backup routers.  
Virtual Router (VR23)  
VRIP = 192.168.1.3  
Master Router  
Backup Router  
VRID 23  
VRID 23  
IP(R2) = 192.168.1.5  
VRIP(VR23) = 192.168.1.3  
VR Priority = 100  
IP(R1) = 192.168.1.3  
IP(VR23) = 192.168.1.3  
VR Priority = 255  
• Several virtual master routers using the same set of backup routers.  
Master Router  
Backup Router  
VRID 23  
IP(R1) = 192.168.1.3  
IP(VR23) = 192.168.1.3  
VR Priority = 255  
VRID 23  
IP(R3) = 192.168.1.4  
IP(VR23) = 192.168.1.3  
VR Priority = 100  
Master Router  
VRID 25  
IP(R3) = 192.168.2.18  
IP(VR23) = 192.168.2.17  
VR Priority = 100  
VRID 25  
IP(R2) = 192.168.2.17  
IP(VR25) = 192.168.2.17  
VR Priority = 255  
3-178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
• Several virtual master routers configured for mutual backup and load sharing.  
Load sharing can be accomplished by assigning a subset of addresses to different  
host address pools using the DHCP server. (See “Configuring Address Pools” on  
Router 1  
Router 2  
VRID 23 (Master)  
VRID 23 (Backup)  
IP(R1) = 192.168.1.3  
IP(VR23) = 192.168.1.3  
VR Priority = 255  
IP(R1) = 192.168.1.5  
IP(VR23) = 192.168.1.3  
VR Priority = 100  
VRID 25 (Backup)  
VRID 25 (Master)  
IP(R1) = 192.168.1.3  
IP(VR25) = 192.168.1.5  
VR Priority = 100  
IP(R1) = 192.168.1.5  
IP(VR25) = 192.168.1.5  
VR Priority = 255  
LAN Segment A  
LAN Segment B  
Hosts (192.168.1.10-99)  
Hosts (192.168.1.100-250)  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) allows you to configure a group of  
routers as a single virtual router. The virtual router group is configured with a single  
virtual IP address that can be used as the default gateway for host devices on the  
attached network.  
Configuring VRRP Groups  
To configure VRRP, select an interface on one router in the group to serve as the  
master virtual router. This physical interface is used as the virtual address for the  
router group. Now set the same virtual address and a priority on the backup routers,  
and configure an authentication string. You can also enable the preempt feature  
which allows a router to take over as the master router when it comes on line.  
Command Usage  
Address Assignment –  
• The IP address assigned to the virtual router must already be configured on the  
router that will be the Owner. In other words, the IP address for the virtual router  
exists on one, and only one, router in the virtual router group, and the network  
mask for the virtual router address is derived from the Owner. The Owner will also  
assume the role of the Master virtual router in the group.  
• If you have multiple secondary addresses configured on the current VLAN  
interface, you can add any of these addresses to the virtual router group.  
• The interfaces of all routers participating in a virtual router group must be within the  
same IP subnet.  
3-179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
• VRRP creates a virtual MAC address for the master router based on a standard  
prefix, with the last octet equal to the group ID. When a backup router takes over  
as the master, it continues to forward traffic addressed to this virtual MAC address.  
However, the backup router cannot reply to ICMP pings sent to addresses  
associated with the virtual group because the IP address owner is off line.  
Virtual Router Priority –  
• The Owner of the virtual IP address is automatically assigned the highest possible  
virtual router priority of 255. The backup router with the highest priority will become  
the master router if the current master fails. However, because the priority of the  
virtual IP address Owner is the highest, the original master router will always  
become the active master router when it recovers.  
• If two or more routers are configured with the same VRRP priority, the router with  
the higher IP address is elected as the new master router if the current master fails.  
Preempting the Acting Master –  
• The virtual IP Owner has the highest priority, so no other router can preempt it, and  
it will always resume control as the master virtual router when it comes back on  
line. The preempt function only allows a backup router to take over from another  
backup router that is temporarily acting as the group master. If preemption is  
enabled and this router has a higher priority than the current acting master when it  
comes on line, it will take over as the acting group master.  
• You can add a delay to the preempt function to give additional time to receive an  
advertisement message from the current master before taking control. If the router  
attempting to become the master has just come on line, this delay also gives it time  
to gather information for its routing table before actually preempting the currently  
active master router.  
Field Attributes (VRRP Group Configuration)  
• VLAN ID – ID of a VLAN configured with an IP interface. (Range: 1-4094; Default: 1)  
• VRID – VRRP group identifier. (Range: 1-255)  
• State – VRRP router role. (Values: Master, Backup)  
• Virtual Address – Virtual IP address for this group.  
• Interval – Interval at which the master virtual router sends advertisements  
communicating its state as the master.  
• Preemption – Shows if this router is allowed to preempt the acting master.  
• Priority – Priority of this router in the VRRP group.  
• AuthType – Authentication mode used to verify VRRP packets from other routers.  
3-180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
Command Attributes (VRRP Group Configuration Detail)  
Associated IP Table – IP interfaces associated with this virtual router group.  
Associated IP – IP address of the virtual router, or secondary IP addresses  
assigned to the current VLAN interface that are supported by this VRRP group. If  
this address matches a real interface on this switch, then this interface will become  
the virtual master router for this VRRP group.  
Advertisement Interval – Interval at which the master virtual router sends  
advertisements communicating its state as the master. (Range: 1-255 seconds;  
Default: 1 second)  
- VRRP advertisements from the current master virtual router include information  
about its priority and current state as the master.  
- VRRP advertisements are sent to the multicast address 224.0.0.8. Using a  
multicast address reduces the amount of traffic that has to be processed by  
network devices that are not part of the designated VRRP group.  
- If the master router stops sending advertisements, backup routers will bid to  
become the master router based on priority. The dead interval before attempting  
to take over as the master is three times the hello interval plus half a second.  
Preempt Mode – Allows a backup router to take over as the master virtual router  
if it has a higher priority than the acting master virtual router (i.e., another backup  
router that has taken over from the VRRP group address owner.) (Default: Enabled)  
Preempt Delay – Time to wait before issuing a claim to become the master.  
(Range: 0-120 seconds; 0 seconds)  
Priority – The priority of this router in a VRRP group. (Range: 1-254; Default: 100)  
- The priority for the VRRP group address owner is automatically set to 255.  
- The priority for backup routers is used to determine which router will take over  
as the acting master router if the current master fails.  
Authentication Type – Authentication mode used to verify VRRP packets  
received from other routers. (Options: None, Simple Text)  
- If simple text authentication is selected, then you must also enter an  
authentication string.  
- All routers in the same VRRP group must be set to the same authentication  
mode, and be configured with the same authentication string.  
- Plain text authentication does not provide any real security. It is supported only  
to prevent a misconfigured router from participating in VRRP.  
Authentication String – Key used to authenticate VRRP packets received from  
other routers. (Range: 1-8 alphanumeric characters)  
- When a VRRP packet is received from another router in the group, its  
authentication string is compared to the string configured on this router. If the  
strings match, the message is accepted. Otherwise, the packet is discarded.  
3-181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click IP, VRRP, Group Configuration. Select the VLAN ID, enter the VRID  
group number, and click Add.  
Figure 3-108 VRRP Group Configuration  
3-182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
Click the Edit button for a group entry to open the detailed configuration window.  
Enter the IP address of a real interface on this router to make it the master virtual  
router for the group. Otherwise, enter the virtual address for an existing group to  
make it a backup router. Click Add IP to enter an IP address into the Associated IP  
Table. Then set any of the other parameters as required, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-109 VRRP Group Configuration Detail  
3-183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example creates VRRP group 1, sets this switch as the master virtual  
router by assigning the primary interface address for the selected VLAN to the virtual  
IP address. It then adds a secondary IP address to the VRRP group, sets all of the  
other VRRP parameters, and then displays the configured settings.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 ip 192.168.1.6  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 ip 192.168.2.6 secondary  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 timers advertise 5  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 preempt delay 10  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 priority 1  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 authentication bluebird  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show vrrp  
Vlan 1 - Group 1,  
state  
Master  
Virtual IP address  
Virtual MAC address  
Advertisement interval  
Preemption  
192.168.1.6  
00-00-5E-00-01-01  
5 sec  
enabled  
10 sec  
Min delay  
Priority  
1
Authentication  
Authentication key  
Master Router  
Master priority  
Master Advertisement interval  
Master down interval  
Console#  
SimpleText  
bluebird  
192.168.1.6  
255  
5 sec  
15  
Displaying VRRP Global Statistics  
The VRRP Global Statistics page displays counters for errors found in VRRP  
protocol packets.  
Field Attributes  
VRRP Packets with Invalid Checksum – The total number of VRRP packets  
received with an invalid VRRP checksum value.  
VRRP Packets with Unknown Error – The total number of VRRP packets  
received with an unknown or unsupported version number.  
VRRP Packets with Invalid VRID – The total number of VRRP packets received  
with an invalid VRID for this virtual router.  
Web – Click IP, VRRP, Global Statistics.  
Figure 3-110 VRRP Global Statistics  
3-184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
CLI – This example displays counters for protocol errors for all the VRRP groups  
configured on this switch.  
Console#show vrrp router counters  
VRRP Packets with Invalid Checksum : 0  
VRRP Packets with Unknown Error  
: 0  
VRRP Packets with Invalid VRID  
: 0  
Console#  
Displaying VRRP Group Statistics  
The VRRP Group Statistics page displays counters for VRRP protocol events and  
errors that have occurred on a specific VRRP interface.  
Field Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of a VLAN configured with an IP interface. (Range: 1-4094; Default: 1)  
VRID – VRRP group identifier. (Range: 1-255)  
Times Become Master – Number of times this router has transitioned to master.  
Received Packets – Number of VRRP advertisements received by this router.  
Error Interval Packets – Number of VRRP advertisements received for which the  
advertisement interval is different from the one configured for the local virtual router.  
Authentication Failures – Number of VRRP packets received that do not pass the  
authentication check.  
Error IP TTL Packets – Number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with  
IP TTL (Time-To-Live) not equal to 255.  
Received Priority 0 Packets – Number of VRRP packets received by the virtual  
router with priority set to 0.  
Error Packet Length Packets – Number of packets received with a packet length  
less than the length of the VRRP header.  
Invalid Type Packets – Number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router  
with an invalid value in the “type” field.  
Error Address List Packets – Number of packets received for which the address  
list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router.  
Invalid Authentication Type Packets – Number of packets received with an  
unknown authentication type.  
Mismatch Authentication Type Packets – Number of packets received with “Auth  
Type” not equal to the locally configured authentication method.  
Sent Priority 0 Packets – Number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with  
priority set to 0.  
3-185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click IP, VRRP, Group Statistics. Select the VLAN and virtual router group.  
Figure 3-111 VRRP Group Statistics  
CLI – This example displays VRRP protocol statistics for group 1, VLAN 1.  
Console#show vrrp 1 interface vlan 1 counters  
Total Number of Times Transitioned to MASTER  
: 6  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 5  
: 0  
: 0  
Total Number of Received Advertisements Packets  
Total Number of Received Error Advertisement Interval Packets  
Total Number of Received Authentication Failures Packets  
Total Number of Received Error IP TTL VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Priority 0 VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Sent Priority 0 VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Invalid Type VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Error Address List VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Invalid Authentication Type VRRP Packets : 0  
Total Number of Received Mismatch Authentication Type VRRP Packets : 0  
Total Number of Received Error Packet Length VRRP Packets  
Console#  
: 0  
Hot Standby Router Protocol  
Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) allows you to configure a group of routers as a  
single virtual router. The virtual router group is configured with a single virtual IP  
address that can be used as the default gateway for host devices on the attached  
network.  
Configuring HSRP Groups  
To configure HSRP, assign the same virtual router address to each router in the  
group. Set the highest virtual router priority on the router that will serve as the  
master. Enable the preempt feature to allow a router to take over as the master  
when it comes on line (if it has a higher priority). To configure the backup routers  
with an order of precedence for assuming the role of master, set the appropriate  
priority on each of these routers.Then configure an authentication string to ensure  
that HSRP messages are only be exchanged between authorized routers. You can  
also dynamically adjust the virtual router priority by tracking the availability of any IP  
interfaces on the router.  
3-186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
Command Usage  
Address Assignment –  
• The designated virtual IP address must be configured on at least one router in the  
virtual router group. If an IP address is not specified, the designated address is  
learned through the exchange of HSRP messages. Note that the designated  
address cannot be the same as a physical address.  
• The subnet mask for the physical interface on which the designated address is  
configured is used as the subnet mask of the designated address. The interfaces  
of all routers participating in a virtual router group must be within the same IP  
subnet.  
• Configuring a new designated address on the current master router will override  
the designated address currently is use.  
• If multiple secondary addresses are configured on the current VLAN interface,  
these addresses can also be supported on the virtual router by selecting the  
“Secondary” Virtual IP mode.  
• HSRP is enabled once the designated address and priority are configured, and the  
master and standby routers are elected based on highest priority. If you need to  
customize any of the other parameters for HSRP such as authentication, tracking,  
or advertisement interval, then first configure these parameters before enabling  
HSRP.  
• HSRP creates a virtual MAC address for the master router based on a standard  
prefix, with the last octet equal to the group ID. When a backup router takes over  
as the master, it continues to forward traffic addressed to this virtual MAC address.  
However, the backup router cannot reply to ICMP pings sent to addresses  
associated with the virtual group because the IP address owner is off line.  
Virtual Router Priority –  
• The router with the highest priority is elected as the master virtual router. The router  
with the next highest priority is elected as the standby router. The standby router  
will become the master router if the current master fails. When the original master  
router recovers, it will become the active master router again if the configured  
priorities have not been changed.  
• If two or more routers are configured with the same HSRP priority, the router with  
the higher IP address is elected as the new master router if the current master fails.  
• The priority setting takes precedence over authentication. In other words, if a router  
with a higher priority than any other router comes on line, but is not configured with  
an authentication string, or is configured with the wrong string, it will still take over  
as the active master.  
• The HSRP priority can change dynamically depending on the availability of a  
tracked interface.  
Preempting the Master –  
• If preempt is enabled, and this router has a priority higher than the current acting  
master, it will take over as the new master. If preempt is not enabled, this router  
will only take over if it has the highest priority in the group and the current master  
3-187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
stops sending hello messages or sends other messages indicating that it is no  
longer acting as the designated router.  
• You can add a delay to the preempt function to give additional time to receive an  
advertisement message from the current master before taking control. If the router  
attempting to become the master has just come on line, this delay also gives it time  
to gather information for its routing table before actually preempting the currently  
active master router.  
Field Attributes (HSRP Group Configuration)  
VLAN ID – ID of a VLAN configured with an IP interface. (Range: 1-4094; Default: 1)  
Group – HSRP group identifier. (Range: 1-255)  
State – HSRP router role. (Values: Master, Backup)  
Virtual Address – Virtual IP address for this group.  
Hellotime – Interval at which the master and standby virtual routers send  
advertisements communicating their state.  
Holdtime – Time before the master or standby router is declared down.  
Preemption – Shows if this router is allowed to preempt the acting master.  
Priority – Priority of this router in the HSRP group.  
Command Attributes (HSRP Group Configuration Detail)  
Hellotime – Interval at which the master and standby virtual routers send  
advertisements communicating their state. (Range: 1-254 seconds; Default: 3)  
- HSRP advertisements from the master and standby virtual router include  
information about their priority, timer values, and current state as the master or  
standby router.  
- Routers on which the timer settings have not been configured can learn the  
current timer values from the master or standby router. Timers configured on the  
master router always override any other timer settings. All routers in an HSRP  
group should be configured with the same timer values.  
- HSRP advertisements are sent to the multicast address 224.0.0.2. Using a  
multicast address reduces the amount of traffic that has to processed by network  
devices that are not part of the designated HSRP group.  
Holdtime – Time before the master or standby router is declared down.  
(Range: Hellotime+1 to 255 seconds; Default: 10 seconds)  
- If the master router stops sending advertisements, backup routers will bid to  
become the master based on priority. The hold time before declaring a router  
dead should be normally be set to a value 3 times or more than the hello time.  
Preempt Mode – Allows a backup router to take over as the master virtual router  
if it has a higher priority than the acting master virtual router. (Default: Disabled)  
Preempt Delay – Time to wait before issuing a claim to become the master.  
(Range: 0-3600 seconds; 0 seconds)  
Priority – Priority of this router in an HSRP group. (Range: 1-255; Default: 100)  
3-188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
Authentication String – Key used to authenticate HSRP packets received from  
other routers. (Range: 1-8 alphanumeric characters)  
- All routers in the same HSRP group must be configured with the same  
authentication string. When a HSRP packet is received from another router in  
the group, its authentication string is compared to the string configured on this  
router. If the strings match, the message is accepted. Otherwise, the packet is  
discarded.  
- Plain text authentication does not provide any real security. It is supported only  
to prevent a misconfigured router from participating in HSRP.  
Virtual IP – IP address of the virtual router, or secondary IP addresses assigned  
to the current VLAN interface that are supported by the HSRP group.  
Mode – Sets this entry as the virtual IP address for the HSRP group (i.e., Primary),  
or as a secondary IP addresses assigned to the current VLAN interface that is also  
supported by the HSRP group. (Range: Primary, Secondary: Default: Primary)  
Tracking Interface – Specifies an interface to track. The HSRP priority of this  
router will be changed whenever the interface goes down or comes back up by the  
corresponding tracking priority.  
- You can specify up to 32 IP interfaces to be tracked by this command.  
- If you specify a VLAN interface that has not been configured with an IP address,  
tracking will not affect the HSRP router priority.  
• (Tracking) Priority – Amount by which the HSRP router priority is decremented (or  
incremented) when the interface goes down (or comes back up). (Range: 1-255;  
Default: 10)  
- If you configure multiple tracked interfaces, and also set the interface priority, the  
effect on HSRP router priority is cumulative when one or more interfaces go up  
or down. However, if you configure multiple tracked interfaces, but do not set the  
interface priority, HSRP router priority will only be changed by the default  
interface priority value of 10; i.e., the effect is not cumulative.  
3-189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click IP, HSRP, Group Configuration. Select the VLAN ID, enter the HSRP  
group number, and click Add.  
Figure 3-112 HSRP Group Configuration  
3-190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Router Redundancy  
3
Click the Edit button for a group entry to open the detailed configuration window. Set  
the values for the advertisement interval, preemption, priority, and authentication as  
required. Enter the virtual IP address for the group. You can also enter secondary IP  
addresses that will be supported by the group. Enter any IP interfaces for which the  
status should be tracked, and the corresponding value by which to adjust the priority  
when the interface state changes. Then click Apply.  
Figure 3-113 HSRP Group Configuration Detail  
3-191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example creates HSRP group 1, sets the virtual router’s address, adds a  
secondary IP address to the group, specifies an interface for tracking, sets all the  
other HSRP parameters, and then displays the configured settings.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 ip 192.168.1.7  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 ip 192.168.2.6 secondary  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 track vlan 3 100  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 timers 2 5  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 preempt delay 10  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 priority 10  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 authentication bluebird  
Console#show standby  
Vlan 1 - Group 1  
Local State is Active, priority 5 (confgd 10), may preempt  
Preemption delayed for 10 secs  
Hellotime 6 sec, holdtime 18 sec  
Next hello sent in 0: 0: 5  
Host standby IP address is 192.168.1.7 configured  
Active router is local  
Standby router is unknown  
Standby virtual mac address is 0- 0- C- 7-AC- 1  
Authentication text "bluebird"  
Tracking interface states for 1 interfaces, 0 up  
Down  
Vlan2  
5
Console#  
3-192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
3
IP Routing  
Overview  
This switch supports IP routing and routing path management via static routing  
definitions (page 3-211) and dynamic routing such as RIP (page 3-213) or OSPF  
(page 3-223). When IP routing is enabled (page 3-214), this switch acts as a  
wire-speed router, passing traffic between VLANs using different IP interfaces, and  
routing traffic to external IP networks. However, when the switch is first booted, no  
default routing is defined. As with all traditional routers, the routing functions must  
first be configured to work.  
Initial Configuration  
In the default configuration, all ports belong to the same VLAN and the switch  
provides only Layer 2 functionality. Therefore, you should first create VLANs for  
each unique user group or application traffic (page 3-128), assign all ports that  
belong to the same group to these VLANs (page 3-129), and then assign an IP  
interface to each VLAN (page 3-197). By separating the network into different  
VLANs, it can be partitioned into subnetworks that are disconnected at Layer 2.  
Network traffic within the same subnet is still switched using Layer 2 switching. And  
the VLANs can now be interconnected (only as required) with Layer 3 switching.  
Each VLAN represents a virtual interface to Layer 3. You just need to provide the  
network address for each virtual interface, and the traffic between different  
subnetworks will be routed by Layer 3 switching.  
Inter-subnet traffic (Layer 3 switching)  
Routing  
ntagged  
ntagged  
VLAN 1  
VLAN 2  
a
g
g
e
d
o
r
U
ntagged  
a
g
g
e
d
o
r
U
ntagged  
Intra-subnet traffic (Layer 2 switching)  
3-193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
IP Switching  
IP Switching (or packet forwarding) encompasses tasks required to forward packets  
for both Layer 2 and Layer 3, as well as traditional routing. These functions include:  
• Layer 2 forwarding (switching) based on the Layer 2 destination MAC address  
• Layer 3 forwarding (routing):  
- Based on the Layer 3 destination address  
- Replacing destination/source MAC addresses for each hop  
- Incrementing the hop count  
- Decrementing the time-to-live  
- Verifying and recalculating the Layer 3 checksum  
If the destination node is on the same subnetwork as the source network, then the  
packet can be transmitted directly without the help of a router. However, if the MAC  
address is not yet known to the switch, an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)  
packet with the destination IP address is broadcast to get the destination MAC  
address from the destination node. The IP packet can then be sent directly with the  
destination MAC address.  
If the destination belongs to a different subnet on this switch, the packet can be  
routed directly to the destination node. However, if the packet belongs to a subnet  
not included on this switch, then the packet should be sent to a router (with the MAC  
address of the router itself used as the destination MAC address, and the  
destination IP address of the destination node). The router will then forward the  
packet to the destination node via the correct path. The router can also use the ARP  
protocol to find out the MAC address of the destination node of the next router as  
necessary.  
Note: In order to perform IP switching, the switch should be recognized by other network  
nodes as an IP router, either by setting it as the default gateway or by redirection  
from another router via the ICMP process.  
When the switch receives an IP packet addressed to its own MAC address, the  
packet follows the Layer 3 routing process. The destination IP address is checked  
against the Layer 3 address table. If the address is not already there, the switch  
broadcasts an ARP packet to all the ports on the destination VLAN to find out the  
destination MAC address. After the MAC address is discovered, the packet is  
reformatted and sent out to the destination. The reformat process includes  
decreasing the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header, recalculating the IP header  
checksum, and replacing the destination MAC address with either the MAC address  
of the destination node or that of the next hop router.  
When another packet destined to the same node arrives, the destination MAC can  
be retrieved directly from the Layer 3 address table; the packet is then reformatted  
and sent out the destination port. IP switching can be done at wire-speed when the  
destination address entry is already in the Layer 3 address table.  
If the switch determines that a frame must be routed, the route is calculated only  
during setup. Once the route has been determined, all packets in the current flow  
are simply switched or forwarded across the chosen path. This takes advantage of  
3-194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
the high throughput and low latency of switching by enabling the traffic to bypass the  
routing engine once the path calculation has been performed.  
Routing Path Management  
Routing Path Management involves the determination and updating of all the routing  
information required for packet forwarding, including:  
• Handling routing protocols  
• Updating the routing table  
• Updating the Layer 3 switching database  
Routing Protocols  
The switch supports both static and dynamic routing.  
• Static routing requires routing information to be stored in the switch either manually  
or when a connection is set up by an application outside the switch.  
• Dynamic routing uses a routing protocol to exchange routing information, calculate  
routing tables, and respond to changes in the status or loading of the network.  
The switch supports RIP, RIP-2 and OSPFv2 dynamic routing protocols.  
RIP and RIP-2 Dynamic Routing Protocols  
The RIP protocol is the most widely used routing protocol. RIP uses a  
distance-vector-based approach to routing. Routes are determined on the basis of  
minimizing the distance vector, or hop count, which serves as a rough estimate of  
transmission cost. Each router broadcasts its advertisement every 30 seconds,  
together with any updates to its routing table. This allows all routers on the network  
to learn consistent tables of next hop links which lead to relevant subnets.  
OSPFv2 Dynamic Routing Protocol  
OSPF overcomes all the problems of RIP. It uses a link state routing protocol to  
generate a shortest-path tree, then builds up its routing table based on this tree.  
OSPF produces a more stable network because the participating routers act on  
network changes predictably and simultaneously, converging on the best route more  
quickly than RIP. Moreover, when several equal-cost routes to a destination exist,  
traffic can be distributed equally among them.  
Non-IP Protocol Routing  
The switch supports IP routing only. Non-IP protocols such as IPX and Appletalk  
cannot be routed by this switch, and will be confined within their local VLAN group  
unless bridged by an external router.  
To coexist with a network built on multilayer switches, the subnetworks for non-IP  
protocols must follow the same logical boundary as that of the IP subnetworks. A  
separate multi-protocol router can then be used to link the subnetworks by  
connecting to one port from each available VLAN on the network.  
3-195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Basic IP Interface Configuration  
To allow routing between different IP subnets, you must enable IP Routing as  
described in this section. You also need to you define a VLAN for each IP subnet  
that will be connected directly to this switch. Note that you must first create a VLAN  
as described under “Creating VLANs” on page 3-128 before configuring the  
corresponding subnet. Remember that if you need to manage the switch in-band  
then you must define the IP subnet address for at least one VLAN.  
Command Attributes  
IP Routing Status – Configures the switch to operate as a Layer 2 switch or as a  
multilayer routing switch. (Options: Disable this field to restrict operation to Layer 2  
switching; enable it to allow multilayer operation at either Layer 2 or 3 as required.)  
- This command affects both static and dynamic unicast routing.  
- If IP routing is enabled, all IP packets are routed using either static routing or  
dynamic routing via RIP or OSPF, and other packets for all non-IP protocols  
(e.g., NetBuei, NetWare or AppleTalk) are switched based on MAC addresses.  
If IP routing is disabled, all packets are switched, with filtering and forwarding  
decisions based strictly on MAC addresses.  
Default Gateway – The routing device to which the switch will pass packets for all  
unknown subnets; i.e., packets that do not match any routing table entry. (Valid IP  
addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.)  
Web - Click IP, General, Global Settings. Set IP Routing Status to Disabled to restrict  
operation to Layer 2, or Enabled to allow multilayer switching, specify the default  
gateway which will be forwarded packets for all unknown subnets, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-114 IP Global Settings  
CLI - This example enables IP routing, and sets the default gateway.  
Console(config)#ip routing  
Console(config)#ip route default 10.1.0.254  
3-196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IP Routing  
3
Configuring IP Routing Interfaces  
You can specify the IP subnets connected to this router by manually assigning an  
IP address to each VLAN, or by using the RIP or OSPF dynamic routing protocol to  
identify routes that lead to other interfaces by exchanging protocol messages with  
other routers on the network.  
Command Usage  
• If this router is directly connected to end node devices (or connected to end nodes  
via shared media) that will be assigned to a specific subnet, then you must create  
a router interface for each VLAN that will support routing. The router interface  
consists of an IP address and subnet mask. This interface address defines both  
the network number to which the router interface is attached and the router’s host  
number on that network. In other words, a router interface address defines the  
network and subnetwork numbers of the segment that is connected to that  
interface, and allows you to send IP packets to or from the router.  
• Before you configure any network interfaces on this router, you should first create  
a VLAN for each unique user group, or for each network application and its  
associated users. Then assign the ports associated with each of these VLANs.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
IP Address Mode – Specifies whether the IP address for this interface is statically  
assigned, or obtained from a network address server. (Options: Static, DHCP -  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, BOOTP - Boot Protocol; Default: Static)  
- If Static address type is selected, then you must also specify whether the IP  
address is the primary IP address on the VLAN or a secondary IP address. An  
interface can have only one primary IP address, but can have multiple  
secondary IP addresses. In other words, you will need to specify secondary  
addresses if more than one IP subnet can accessed via this interface.  
- If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply has been received  
from the address server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by the router  
for an IP address. (DHCP/BOOTP values include the IP address and subnet  
mask.)  
IP Address – Address of the VLAN interface. Valid IP addresses consist of four  
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.  
Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to  
specific subnets.  
3-197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web - Click IP, General, Routing Interface. Specify an IP interface for each VLAN  
that will support routing to other subnets. First specify a primary address, and click  
Set IP Configuration. If you need to assign secondary addresses, enter these  
addresses one at a time, and click Set IP Configuration after entering each address.  
Figure 3-115 IP Routing Interface  
CLI - This example sets a primary IP address for VLAN 1, and then adds a  
secondary IP address for a different subnet also attached to this router interface.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.253 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.9.253 255.255.255.0 secondary  
Console(config-if)#  
3-198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Address Resolution Protocol  
If IP routing is enabled (page 3-196), the router uses its routing tables to make  
routing decisions, and uses Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to forward traffic  
from one hop to the next. ARP is used to map an IP address to a physical layer (i.e.,  
MAC) address. When an IP frame is received by this router (or any standards-  
based router), it first looks up the MAC address corresponding to the destination IP  
address in the ARP cache. If the address is found, the router writes the MAC  
address into the appropriate field in the frame header, and forwards the frame on to  
the next hop. IP traffic passes along the path to its final destination in this way, with  
each routing device mapping the destination IP address to the MAC address of the  
next hop toward the recipient, until the packet is delivered to the final destination.  
If there is no entry for an IP address in the ARP cache, the router will broadcast an  
ARP request packet to all devices on the network. The ARP request contains the  
following fields similar to that shown in this example:  
Table 3-16 Address Resolution Protocol  
destination IP address  
destination MAC address  
source IP address  
10.1.0.19  
?
10.1.0.253  
00-00-ab-cd-00-00  
source MAC address  
When devices receive this request, they discard it if their address does not match  
the destination IP address in the message. However, if it does match, they write their  
own hardware address into the destination MAC address field and send the  
message back to the source hardware address. When the source device receives a  
reply, it writes the destination IP address and corresponding MAC address into its  
cache, and forwards the IP traffic on to the next hop. As long as this entry has not  
timed out, the router will be able forward traffic directly to the next hop for this  
destination without having to broadcast another ARP request.  
Proxy ARP  
When a node in the attached subnetwork does not have routing or a default gateway  
configured, Proxy ARP can be used to forward ARP requests to a remote subnetwork.  
When the router receives an ARP request for a remote network and Proxy ARP is  
enabled, it determines if it has the best route to the remote network, and then  
answers the ARP request by sending its own MAC address to the requesting node.  
That node then sends traffic to the router, which in turn uses its own routing table to  
forward the traffic to the remote destination.  
Proxy ARP  
ARP  
request  
no routing,  
no default  
gateway  
Remote  
ARP Server  
3-199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring the Switch  
3
Basic ARP Configuration  
You can use the ARP General configuration menu to specify the timeout for ARP  
cache entries, or to enable Proxy ARP for specific VLAN interfaces.  
Command Usage  
• The aging time determines how long dynamic entries remain the cache. If the  
timeout is too short, the router may tie up resources by repeating ARP requests for  
addresses recently flushed from the table.  
• End stations that require Proxy ARP must view the entire network as a single  
network. These nodes must therefore use a smaller subnet mask than that used  
by the router or other relevant network devices.  
• Extensive use of Proxy ARP can degrade router performance because it may lead  
to increased ARP traffic and increased search time for larger ARP address tables.  
Command Attributes  
Timeout – Sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the ARP cache.  
(Range: 300 - 86400 seconds; Default: 1200 seconds or 20 minutes)  
Proxy ARP – Enables or disables Proxy ARP for specified VLAN interfaces.  
Web - Click IP, ARP, General. Set the timeout to a suitable value for the ARP cache,  
enable Proxy ARP for subnetworks that do not have routing or a default gateway,  
and click Apply.  
Figure 3-116 ARP General  
CLI - This example sets the ARP cache timeout for 15 minutes (i.e., 900 seconds),  
and enables Proxy ARP for VLAN 3.  
Console(config)#arp-timeout 900  
Console(config)#interface vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#ip proxy-arp  
Console(config-if)#  
3-200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
3
Configuring Static ARP Addresses  
For devices that do not respond to ARP requests, traffic will be dropped because the  
IP address cannot be mapped to a physical address. If this occurs, you can  
manually map an IP address to the corresponding physical address in the ARP.  
Command Usage  
• You can define up to 128 static entries in the ARP cache.  
• Static entries will not be aged out or deleted when power is reset. You can only  
remove a static entry via the configuration interface.  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – IP address statically mapped to a physical MAC address. (Valid IP  
addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.)  
MAC Address – MAC address statically mapped to the corresponding IP address.  
(Valid MAC addresses are hexadecimal numbers in the format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.)  
Entry Count – The number of static entries in the ARP cache.  
Web - Click IP, ARP, Static Addresses. Enter the IP address, the corresponding  
MAC address, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-117 ARP Static Addresses  
CLI - This example sets a static entry for the ARP cache.  
Console(config)#arp 10.1.0.11 00-11-22-33-44-55  
Console(config)#  
3-201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Dynamically Learned ARP Entries  
The ARP cache contains entries that map IP addresses to the corresponding  
physical address. Most of these entries will be dynamically learned through replies to  
broadcast messages. You can display all of the dynamic entries in the ARP cache,  
change specific dynamic entries into static entries, or clear all dynamic entries from  
the cache.  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – IP address of a dynamic entry in the cache.  
MAC Address – MAC address mapped to the corresponding IP address.  
Interface – VLAN interface associated with the address entry.  
18  
Dynamic to Static – Changes a selected dynamic entry to a static entry.  
Clear All18 – Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache.  
Entry Count – The number of dynamic entries in the ARP cache.  
Web - Click IP, ARP, Dynamic Addresses. You can use the buttons provided to  
change a dynamic entry to a static entry, or to clear all dynamic entries in the cache.  
Figure 3-118 ARP Dynamic Addresses  
18. These buttons take effect immediately. You are not prompted to confirm the action.  
3-202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
3
CLI - This example shows all entries in the ARP cache.  
Console#show arp  
Arp cache timeout: 1200 (seconds)  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
Type  
Interface  
--------------- ----------------- --------- -----------  
10.1.0.0 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
10.1.0.11 00-11-22-33-44-55  
10.1.0.12 01-02-03-04-05-06  
10.1.0.19 00-10-b5-62-03-74  
10.1.0.253 00-00-ab-cd-00-00  
10.1.0.255 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
other  
static  
static  
dynamic  
other  
1
1
1
1
1
1
other  
Total entry : 6  
Console#clear arp-cache  
This operation will delete all the dynamic entries in ARP Cache.  
Are you sure to continue this operation (y/n)?y  
Console#  
Displaying Local ARP Entries  
The ARP cache also contains entries for local interfaces, including subnet, host, and  
broadcast addresses.  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – IP address of a local entry in the cache.  
MAC Address – MAC address mapped to the corresponding IP address.  
Interface – VLAN interface associated with the address entry.  
Entry Count – The number of local entries in the ARP cache.  
Web - Click IP, ARP, Other Addresses.  
Figure 3-119 ARP Other Addresses  
3-203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI - This router uses the Type specification “other” to indicate local cache entries in  
the ARP cache.  
Console#show arp  
Arp cache timeout: 1200 (seconds)  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
Type  
Interface  
--------------- ----------------- --------- -----------  
10.1.0.0 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
10.1.0.11 00-11-22-33-44-55  
10.1.0.12 01-02-03-04-05-06  
10.1.0.19 00-10-b5-62-03-74  
10.1.0.253 00-00-ab-cd-00-00  
10.1.0.255 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
other  
static  
static  
dynamic  
other  
1
1
1
1
1
1
other  
Total entry : 6  
Console#  
Displaying ARP Statistics  
You can display statistics for ARP messages crossing all interfaces on this router.  
Table 3-17 ARP Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Received Request  
Received Reply  
Sent Request  
Sent Reply  
Number of ARP Request packets received by the router.  
Number of ARP Reply packets received by the router.  
Number of ARP Request packets sent by the router.  
Number of ARP Reply packets sent by the router.  
Web - Click IP, ARP, Statistics.  
Figure 3-120 ARP Statistics  
3-204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing  
3
CLI - This example provides detailed statistics on common IP-related protocols.  
Console#show ip traffic  
IP statistics:  
Rcvd: 5 total, 5 local destination  
0 checksum errors  
0 unknown protocol, 0 not a gateway  
Frags: 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts  
0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment  
Sent: 9 generated  
0 no route  
ICMP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 checksum errors, 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo  
5 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench  
0 parameter, 0 timestamp  
Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply  
0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp  
0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem  
UDP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port  
Sent: 0 total  
TCP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors  
Sent: 0 total  
ARP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 requests, 1 replies  
Sent: 1 requests, 0 replies  
Displaying Statistics for IP Protocols  
IP Statistics  
The Internet Protocol (IP) provides a mechanism for transmitting blocks of data  
(often called packets or frames) from a source to a destination, where these network  
devices (i.e., hosts) are identified by fixed length addresses. The Internet Protocol  
also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long packets, if necessary, for  
transmission through “small packet” networks.  
Table 3-18 IP Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Packets Received  
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including  
those received in error.  
Received Address Errors  
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in the  
header's destination field was not a valid address for this entity.  
Received Packets Discarded  
The number of input datagrams for which no problems were encountered  
to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for  
lack of buffer space).  
Output Requests  
The total number of datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including  
ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission.  
Output Packet No Route  
The number of datagrams discarded because no route could be found to  
transmit them to their destination. Note that this includes any datagrams  
which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.  
3-205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-18 IP Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Datagrams Forwarded  
The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP  
destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to  
forward them to that final destination.  
Reassembly Required  
Reassembly Failures  
The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at  
this entity.  
The number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly algorithm (for  
whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc.).  
Datagrams Failing  
Fragmentation  
The number of datagrams that have been discarded because they needed  
to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, e.g., because their “Don't  
Fragment” flag was set.  
Received Header Errors  
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP  
headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other  
format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their  
IP options, etc.  
Unknown Protocols Received  
Received Packets Delivered  
Discarded Output Packets  
The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but  
discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.  
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP  
user-protocols (including ICMP).  
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was  
encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which  
were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space).  
Fragments Created  
Routing Discards  
The number of datagram fragments that have been generated as a result  
of fragmentation at this entity.  
The number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even  
though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry  
could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.  
Reassembly Successful  
The number of datagrams successfully re-assembled.  
Datagrams Successfully  
Fragmented  
The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at  
this entity.  
3-206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click IP, Statistics, IP.  
Figure 3-121 IP Statistics  
CLI - See the example on page 3-204.  
ICMP Statistics  
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a network layer protocol that transmits  
message packets to report errors in processing IP packets. ICMP is therefore an  
integral part of the Internet Protocol. ICMP messages may be used to report various  
situations, such as when a datagram cannot reach its destination, when the gateway  
does not have the buffering capacity to forward a datagram, and when the gateway  
can direct the host to send traffic on a shorter route. ICMP is also used by routers to  
feed back information about more suitable routes (i.e., the next hop router) to use for  
a specific destination.  
Table 3-19 ICMP Statistics  
Parameter  
Messages  
Errors  
Description  
The total number of ICMP messages which the entity received/sent.  
The number of ICMP messages which the entity received/sent but  
determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad  
length, etc.).  
Destination Unreachable  
Time Exceeded  
Parameter Problems  
Source Quenches  
Redirects  
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received/sent.  
Echos  
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received/sent.  
Echo Replies  
3-207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-19 ICMP Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Timestamps  
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received/sent.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received/sent.  
Timestamp Replies  
Address Masks  
Address Mask Replies  
Web - Click IP, Statistics, ICMP.  
Figure 3-122 ICMP Statistics  
CLI - See the example on page 3-204.  
3-208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
UDP Statistics  
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) provides a datagram mode of packet-switched  
communications. It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism, providing  
access to IP-like services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets –  
connection-less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets.  
UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.  
Table 3-20 USP Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Datagrams Received  
Datagrams Sent  
Receive Errors  
The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.  
The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.  
The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for  
reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.  
No Ports  
The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no  
application at the destination port.  
Web - Click IP, Statistics, UDP.  
Figure 3-123 UDP Statistics  
CLI - See the example on page 3-204.  
3-209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
TCP Statistics  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) provides highly reliable host-to-host  
connections in packet-switched networks, and is used in conjunction with IP to  
support a wide variety of Internet protocols.  
Table 3-21 TCP Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Segments Received  
The total number of segments received, including those received in error.  
This count includes segments received on currently established  
connections.  
Segments Sent  
The total number of segments sent, including those on current  
connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.  
Active Opens  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the  
SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.  
Failed Connection Attempts  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the  
CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state,  
plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition  
to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.  
Current Connections  
Receive Errors  
The number of TCP connections for which the current state is either  
ESTABLISHED or CLOSE- WAIT.  
The total number of segments received in error (e.g., bad TCP  
checksums).  
Segments Retransmitted  
The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP  
segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted  
octets.  
Passive Opens  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the  
SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.  
Reset Connections  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the  
CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT  
state.  
Web - Click IP, Statistics, TCP.  
Figure 3-124 TCP Statistics  
CLI - See the example on page 3-204.  
3-210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing  
3
Configuring Static Routes  
This router can dynamically configure routes to other network segments using  
dynamic routing protocols (i.e., RIP or OSPF). However, you can also manually  
enter static routes in the routing table. Static routes may be required to access  
network segments where dynamic routing is not supported, or can be set to force the  
use of a specific route to a subnet, rather than using dynamic routing. Static routes  
do not automatically change in response to changes in network topology, so you  
should only configure a small number of stable routes to ensure network  
accessibility.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Index number of the IP interface.  
IP Address – IP address of the destination network, subnetwork, or host.  
Netmask – Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies the  
host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
Gateway – IP address of the gateway used for this route.  
Metric – Cost for this interface. This cost is only used if a route is imported by a  
dynamic routing protocol such as OSPF. (Range: 1-5, default: 1)  
Entry Count – The number of table entries.  
Web - Click IP, Routing, Static Routes.  
Figure 3-125 IP Static Routes  
CLI - This example forwards all traffic for subnet 192.168.1.0 to the router  
192.168.5.254, using the default metric of 1.  
Console(config)#ip route 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.5.254  
Console(config)#  
3-211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying the Routing Table  
You can display all the routes that can be accessed via the local network interfaces,  
via static routes, or via a dynamically learned route. If route information is available  
through more than one of these methods, the priority for route selection is local,  
static, and then dynamic. Also note that the route for a local interface is not enabled  
(i.e., listed in the routing table) unless there is at least one active link connected to  
that interface.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Index number of the IP interface.  
IP Address – IP address of the destination network, subnetwork, or host.  
Note that the address 0.0.0.0 indicates the default gateway for this router.  
Netmask – Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies the  
host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
Next Hop – The IP address of the next hop (or gateway) in this route.  
Protocol – The protocol which generated this route information.  
(Options: local, static, RIP, OSPF)  
Metric – Cost for this interface.  
Entry Count – The number of table entries.  
Web - Click IP, Routing, Routing Table.  
Figure 3-126 IP Routing Table  
3-212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
3
CLI - This example shows routes obtained from various methods.  
Console#show ip route  
Ip Address  
Netmask  
Next Hop  
Protocol Metric Interface  
--------------- --------------- --------------- -------- ------ ---------  
0.0.0.0  
10.1.0.0  
10.1.1.0  
0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
10.1.0.254  
10.1.0.253  
10.1.0.254  
static  
local  
RIP  
1
1
2
1
1
1
Total entries: 3  
Console#  
Configuring the Routing Information Protocol  
The RIP protocol is the most widely used routing protocol. The RIP protocol uses a  
distance-vector-based approach to routing. Routes are determined on the basis of  
minimizing the distance vector, or hop count, which serves as a rough estimate of  
transmission cost. Each router broadcasts its advertisement every 30 seconds,  
together with any updates to its routing table. This allows all routers on the network  
to learn consistent tables of next hop links which lead to relevant subnets.  
A
A
B
C
D
E
Link Cost  
A
B
C
1
2
0
1
1
3
1
0
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
E
Cost = 1 for all links  
Routing table for node A  
Command Usage  
• Just as Layer 2 switches use the Spanning Tree Algorithm to prevent loops, routers  
also use methods for preventing loops that would cause endless retransmission of  
data traffic. RIP utilizes the following three methods to prevent loops from occurring:  
- Split horizon – Never propagate routes back to an interface port from which they  
have been acquired.  
- Poison reverse – Propagate routes back to an interface port from which they  
have been acquired, but set the distance-vector metrics to infinity. (This provides  
faster convergence.)  
-
Triggered updates  
Whenever a route gets changed, broadcast an update  
message after waiting for a short random delay, but without waiting for the  
periodic cycle.  
• RIP-2 is a compatible upgrade to RIP. RIP-2 adds useful capabilities for plain text  
authentication, multiple independent RIP domains, variable length subnet masks,  
and multicast transmissions for route advertising (RFC 1723).  
• There are several serious problems with RIP that you should consider. First of all,  
RIP (version 1) has no knowledge of subnets, both RIP versions can take a long  
time to converge on a new route after the failure of a link or router during which time  
3-213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
routing loops may occur, and its small hop count limitation of 15 restricts its use to  
smaller networks. Moreover, RIP (version 1) wastes valuable network bandwidth  
by propagating routing information via broadcasts; it also considers too few  
network variables to make the best routing decision.  
Configuring General Protocol Settings  
RIP is used to specify how routers exchange routing information. When RIP is  
enabled on this router, it sends RIP messages to all devices in the network every 30  
seconds (by default), and updates its own routing table when RIP messages are  
received from other routers. To communicate properly with other routers using RIP,  
you need to specify the RIP version used globally by the router, as well as the RIP  
send and receive versions used on specific interfaces (page 3-217).  
Command Usage  
• When you specify a Global RIP Version, any VLAN interface not previously set to  
a specific Receive or Send Version (page 3-217) is set to the following values:  
- RIP Version 1 configures previously unset interfaces to send RIPv1 compatible  
protocol messages and receive either RIPv1 or RIPv2 protocol messages.  
- RIP Version 2 configures previously unset interfaces to use RIPv2 for both  
sending and receiving protocol messages.  
• The update timer is the fundamental timer used to control all basic RIP processes.  
- Setting the update timer to a short interval can cause the router to spend an  
excessive amount of time processing updates. On the other hand, setting it to an  
excessively long time will make the routing protocol less sensitive to changes in  
the network configuration.  
- The timers must be set to the same values for all routers in the network.  
Command Attributes  
Global Settings  
RIP Routing Process – Enables RIP routing for all IP interfaces on the router.  
(Default: Disabled)  
Global RIP Version – Specifies a RIP version used globally by the router. (Default:  
RIP Version 1)  
Timer Settings  
Update – Sets the rate at which updates are sent. This value will also set the  
timeout timer to 6 times the update time, and the garbage-collection timer to 4  
times the update time. (Range: 15-60 seconds; Default: 30 seconds)  
Timeout – Sets the time after which there have been no update messages that a  
route is declared dead. The route is marked inaccessible (i.e., the metric set to  
infinite) and advertised as unreachable. However, packets are still forwarded on  
this route. (Default: 180 seconds)  
Garbage Collection – After the timeout interval expires, the router waits for an  
interval specified by the garbage-collection timer before removing this entry from  
the routing table. This timer allows neighbors to become aware of an invalid route  
prior to purging. (Default: 120 seconds)  
3-214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, RIP, General Settings. Enable or disable RIP, set the  
RIP version used on previously unset interfaces to RIPv1 or RIPv2, set the basic  
update timer, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-127 RIP General Settings  
CLI - This example sets the router to use RIP Version 2, and sets the basic timer to  
15 seconds.  
Console(config)#router rip  
Console(config-router)#version 2  
Console(config-router)#timers basic 15  
Console(config-router)#end  
Console#show rip globals  
RIP Process: Enabled  
Update Time in Seconds: 15  
Number of Route Change: 0  
Number of Queries: 1  
Console#  
3-215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Specifying Network Interfaces for RIP  
You must specify network interfaces that will be included in the RIP routing process.  
Command Usage  
• RIP only sends updates to interfaces specified by this command.  
• Subnet addresses are interpreted as class A, B or C, based on the first field in the  
specified address. In other words, if a subnet address nnn.xxx.xxx.xxx is entered,  
the first field (nnn) determines the class:  
0 - 127 is class A, and only the first field in the network address is used.  
128 - 19 is class B, and the first two fields in the network address are used.  
192 - 223 is class C, and the first three fields in the network address are used.  
Command Attributes  
Subnet Address – IP address of a network directly connected to this router.  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, RIP, Network Addresses. Add all interfaces that will  
participate in RIP, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-128 RIP Network Addresses  
CLI - This example includes network interface 10.1.0.0 in the RIP routing process.  
Console(config)#router-rip  
Console(config-router)#network 10.1.0.0  
Console(config-router)#end  
Console#show ip rip status  
Peer  
UpdateTime  
Version  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
--------------- ------------ --------- --------------- --------------  
10.1.0.253  
10.1.1.253  
0
0
0
0
73  
66  
Console#  
3-216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing  
3
Configuring Network Interfaces for RIP  
For each interface that participates in the RIP routing process, you must specify the  
protocol message type accepted (i.e., RIP version) and the message type sent (i.e.,  
RIP version or compatibility mode), the method for preventing loopback of protocol  
messages, and whether or not authentication is used (i.e., authentication only  
applies if RIPv2 messages are being sent or received).  
Command Usage  
Specifying Receive and Send Protocol Types  
• Setting the RIP Receive Version or Send Version for an interface overrides the  
global setting specified by the RIP / General Settings, Global RIP Version field.  
• You can specify the Receive Version based on these options:  
- Use “RIPv1” or “RIPv2” if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or  
RIPv2, respectively.  
- Use “RIPv1 or RIPv2” if some routers in the local network are using RIPv2, but  
there are still some older routers using RIPv1.  
- Use “Do Not Receive” if you do not want to add any dynamic entries to the  
routing table for an interface. (For example, you may only want to allow static  
routes for a specific interface.)  
• You can specify the Send Version based on these options:  
- Use “RIPv1” or “RIPv2” if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or  
RIPv2, respectively.  
- Use “RIPv1 Compatible” to propagate route information by broadcasting to other  
routers on the network using the RIPv2 advertisement list, instead of  
multicasting as normally required by RIPv2. (Using this mode allows RIPv1  
routers to receive these protocol messages, but still allows RIPv2 routers to  
receive the additional information provided by RIPv2, including subnet mask,  
next hop and authentication information.)  
- Use “Do Not Send” to passively monitor route information advertised by other  
routers attached to the network.  
Loopback Prevention  
Just as Layer 2 switches use the Spanning Tree Algorithm to prevent loops, routers  
also use methods for preventing loops that would cause endless retransmission of  
data traffic. When protocol packets are caught in a loop, links will be congested, and  
protocol packets may be lost. However, the network will slowly converge to the new  
state. RIP utilizes the following three methods that can provide faster convergence  
when the network topology changes and prevent most loops from occurring:  
• Split Horizon – Never propagate routes back to an interface port from which they  
have been acquired.  
• Poison Reverse – Propagate routes back to an interface port from which they have  
been acquired, but set the distance-vector metrics to infinity. (This provides faster  
convergence.)  
Triggered Updates  
Whenever a route gets changed, broadcast an update  
message after waiting for a short random delay, but without waiting for the periodic  
cycle.  
3-217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Protocol Message Authentication  
RIPv1 is not a secure protocol. Any device sending protocol messages from UDP  
port 520 will be considered a router by its neighbors. Malicious or unwanted protocol  
messages can be easily propagated throughout the network if no authentication is  
required. RIPv2 supports authentication via a simple password. When a router is  
configured to exchange authentication messages, it will insert the password into all  
transmitted protocol packets, and check all received packets to ensure that they  
contain the authorized password. If any incoming protocol messages do not contain  
the correct password, they are simply dropped.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Receive Version – The RIP version to receive on an interface.  
- RIPv1: Accepts only RIPv1 packets.  
- RIPv2: Accepts only RIPv2 packets.  
- RIPv1 or RIPv2: Accepts RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets. (Default)  
- Do Not Receive: Does not accept incoming RIP packets.  
(The default depends on the setting specified under RIP / General Settings,  
Global RIP Version: RIPv1 - RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets, RIPv2 - RIPv2 packets)  
Send Version – The RIP version to send on an interface.  
- RIPv1: Sends only RIPv1 packets.  
- RIPv2: Sends only RIPv2 packets.  
- RIPv1 Compatible: Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2.  
(Default)  
- Do Not Send: Does not transmit RIP updates.  
(The default depends on the setting specified under RIP / General Settings,  
Global RIP Version: RIPv1 - RIPv1 Compatible, RIPv2 - RIPv2 packets)  
Instability Preventing – Specifies the method used to reduce the convergence  
time when the network topology changes, and to prevent RIP protocol messages  
from looping back to the source router. (Default: Split Horizon)  
- None: No method is used. If a loop occurs, the hop count for a route may be  
gradually incremented to infinity (i.e., 16) before the route is deemed  
unreachable.  
- Split Horizon: This method never propagates routes back to an interface from  
which they have been acquired.  
- Poision Reverse: This method propagates routes back to an interface port from  
which they have been acquired, but set the distance-vector metrics to infinity.  
(This provides faster convergence.)  
Authentication Type – Specifies whether or not authentication is required for  
exchanging protocol messages. (Default: No Authentication)  
- No Authentication: No authentication is required.  
- Simple Password: Requires the interface to exchange routing information with  
other routers based on an authorized password. (Note that authentication only  
applies to RIPv2.)  
3-218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
3
Authentication Key – Specifies the key to use for authenticating RIPv2 packets.  
For authentication to function properly, both the sending and receiving interface  
must use the same password. (Range: 1-16 characters, case sensitive)  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, RIP, Interface Settings. Select the RIP protocol  
message types that will be received and sent, the method used to provide faster  
convergence and prevent loopback (i.e., prevent instability in the network topology),  
and the authentication option and corresponding password. Then click Apply.  
Figure 3-129 RIP Interface Settings  
CLI - This example sets the receive version to accept both RIPv1 or RIPv2  
messages, the send mode to RIPv1 compatible (i.e., called v2-broadcast in the CLI),  
sets the method of preventing instability in the network topology to Split Horizon,  
enables authentication via a simple password (i.e., called text mode in the CLI).  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip rip receive version 1 2  
Console(config-if)#ip rip send version v2-broadcast  
Console(config-if)#ip split-horizon  
Console(config-if)#ip rip authentication mode text  
Console(config-if)#ip rip authentication key mighty  
Console#  
3-219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying RIP Information and Statistics  
You can display basic information about the current global configuration settings for  
RIP, statistics about route changes and queries, information about the interfaces on  
this router that are using RIP, and information about known RIP peer devices.  
Table 3-22 RIP Information and Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Globals  
RIP Routing Process  
Update Time in Seconds  
Indicates if RIP has been enabled or disabled.  
The interval at which RIP advertises known route information.  
(Default: 30 seconds)  
Number of Route Changes  
Number of Queries  
Interface Information  
Interface  
Number of times routing information has changed.  
Number of router database queries received by this router.  
IP address of the interface.  
SendMode  
RIP version sent on this interface (none, RIPv1, RIPv2, rip1Compatible).  
RIP version received on this interface (none, RIPv1, RIPv2, RIPv1Orv2).  
ReceiveMode  
InstabilityPreventing  
Shows if split-horizon, poison-reverse, or no instability prevention method  
is in use.  
AuthType  
Shows if authentication is set to simple password or none.  
Number of bad RIP packets received.  
Number of bad routes received.  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
SendUpdates  
Peer Information  
PeerAddress  
UpdateTime  
Version  
Number of route changes.  
IP address of a neighboring RIP router.  
Last time a route update was received from this peer.  
Whether RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets were received from this peer.  
Number of bad RIP packets received from this peer.  
Number of bad routes received from this peer.  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
3-220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, RIP, Statistics.  
Figure 3-130 RIP Statistics  
3-221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI - The information displayed by the RIP Statistics screen via the web interface  
can be accessed from the CLI using the following commands.  
Console#show rip globals  
RIP Process: Enabled  
Update Time in Seconds: 30  
Number of Route Change: 4  
Number of Queries: 0  
Console#show ip rip configuration  
Interface  
SendMode  
ReceiveMode  
Poison  
Authentication  
--------------- --------------- ------------- -------------- ------------------  
10.1.0.253 rip1Compatible  
10.1.1.253 rip1Compatible  
Console#show ip rip status  
RIPv1Orv2  
RIPv1Orv2  
SplitHorizon  
SplitHorizon  
noAuthentication  
noAuthentication  
Interface  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
SendUpdates  
--------------- --------------- -------------- ---------------  
10.1.0.253  
0
0
60  
10.1.1.253  
0
0
63  
Console#show ip rip peer  
Peer  
UpdateTime  
Version  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
--------------- ------------ --------- --------------- --------------  
10.1.0.254  
4610  
2
0
0
10.1.1.254  
4610  
2
0
0
Console#  
3-222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
3
Configuring the Open Shortest Path First Protocol  
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is more suited for large area networks which  
experience frequent changes in the links. It also handles subnets much better than  
RIP. OSPF protocol actively tests the status of each link to its neighbors to generate  
a shortest path tree, and builds a routing table based on this information. OSPF then  
utilizes IP multicast to propagate routing information. A separate routing area  
scheme is also used to further reduce the amount of routing traffic.  
Note: The OSPF protocol implemented in this device is based on Version 2 (RFC 2328).  
It also supports Version 1 (RFC 1583) compatibility mode to ensure that the same  
method is used to calculate summary route costs throughout the network when  
older OSPF routers exist; as well as the not-so-stubby area option (RFC 1587).  
isolated  
area  
stub  
ABR  
ABR  
virtual  
link  
backbone  
ABR  
normal  
area  
ABR  
ASBR  
NSSA  
Autonomous System A  
ASBR  
ASBR  
Router  
external network  
Autonomous System B  
Command Usage  
• OSPF looks at more than just the simple hop count. When adding the shortest path  
to any node into the tree, the optimal path is chosen on the basis of delay,  
throughput and connectivity. OSPF utilizes IP multicast to reduce the amount of  
routing traffic required when sending or receiving routing path updates. The  
separate routing area scheme used by OSPF further reduces the amount of routing  
traffic, and thus inherently provides another level of routing protection. In addition,  
all routing protocol exchanges can be authenticated. Finally, the OSPF algorithms  
have been tailored for efficient operation in TCP/IP Internets.  
3-223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
• OSPFv2 is a compatible upgrade to OSPF. It involves enhancements to protocol  
message authentication, and the addition of a point-to-multipoint interface which  
allows OSPF to run over non-broadcast networks, as well as support for  
overlapping area ranges.  
• When using OSPF, you must organize your network (i.e., autonomous system) into  
normal, stub, or not-so-stubby areas; configure the ranges of subnet addresses  
that can be aggregated by link state advertisements; and configure virtual links for  
areas that do not have direct physical access to the OSFP backbone.  
- To implement OSPF for a large network, you must first organize the network into  
logical areas to limit the number of OSPF routers that actively exchange Link  
State Advertisements (LSAs). You can then define an OSPF interface by  
assigning an IP interface configured on this router to one of these areas. This  
OSPF interface will send and receive OSPF traffic to neighboring OSPF routers.  
- You can further optimize the exchange of OSPF traffic by specifying an area  
range that covers a large number of subnetwork addresses. This is an important  
technique for limiting the amount of traffic exchanged between Area Border  
Routers (ABRs).  
- And finally, you must specify a virtual link to any OSPF area that is not physically  
attached to the OSPF backbone. Virtual links can also be used to provide a  
redundant link between contiguous areas to prevent areas from being  
partitioned, or to merge backbone areas.  
Configuring General Protocol Settings  
To implement dynamic OSPF routing, first assign VLAN groups to each IP subnet to  
which this router will be attached, then use the OSPF / General Configuration menu  
to enable OSPF, assign an Router ID to this device, and set the other basic protocol  
parameters.  
Command Attributes  
General Information –  
OSPF Routing Process – Enables or disables OSPF routing for all IP interfaces  
on the router. (Default: Disabled)  
OSPF Router ID – Assigns a unique router ID for this device within the  
autonomous system. (Default: The lowest interface address)  
19  
Version Number – This router only supports OSPF Version 2.  
Area Border Router19 – Indicates if this  
router connect directly to networks in two  
or more areas. An area border router runs  
area,  
stub,  
NSSA  
a separate copy of the Shortest Path First  
algorithm, maintaining a separate routing  
database for each area.  
backbone  
ABR  
19. These items are read only.  
3-224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing  
3
20  
AS Boundary Router – Allows  
this router to exchange routing  
informationwithboundary routers  
in other autonomous systems to  
which it may be attached. If a  
router is enabled as an ASBR,  
then every other router in the  
autonomous system can learn  
AS 1  
AS 2  
ASBR  
ASBR  
about external routes from this device. (Default: Disabled)  
Rfc1583 Compatible – If one or more routers in a routing domain are using OSPF  
Version 1, this router should use RFC 1583 (OSPFv1) compatibility mode to ensure  
that all routers are using the same RFC for calculating summary route costs.  
Enable this field to force the router to calculate summary route costs using RFC  
1583. (Default: Disabled)  
SPF Hold Time (seconds) – The hold time between making two consecutive  
shortest path first (SPF) calculations. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 10)  
Area Numbers19 – The number of OSPF areas configured on this router.  
Default Route Information –  
Originate Default Route20 – Generates a default external route into an  
autonomous system. Note that the AS Boundary Router field must be enabled,  
and the Advertise Default Route field properly configured. (Default: Disabled)  
Advertise Default Route20 – The router can advertise a default external route into  
the autonomous system (AS). (Options: NotAlways, Always; Default: NotAlways)  
Always – The router will advertise itself as a default external route for the AS,  
even if a default external route does not actually exist.  
NotAlways – It can only advertise a default external route into the AS if it has  
been configured to import external routes via RIP or static configuration, and  
External Metric Type20 – The external link type used to advertise the default  
route. Type 1 route advertisements add the internal cost to the external route  
metric. Type 2 routes do not add the internal cost metric. When comparing Type 2  
routes, the internal cost is only used as a tie-breaker if several Type 2 routes have  
the same cost. (Default: Type 2)  
Default External Metric20 – The Metric assigned to the default route.  
(Range: 1-65535; Default: 10)  
20. CLI - These are configured with the default-information originate command (page 4-262).  
3-225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, General Configuration. Enable OSPF, specify  
the Router ID, configure the other global parameters as required, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-131 OSPF General Configuration  
CLI - This example configures the router with the same settings as shown in the  
screen capture for the web interface.  
Console(config)#router ospf  
Console(config-router)#router-id 10.1.1.253  
Console(config-router)#no compatible rfc1583  
Console(config-router)#default-information originate always  
metric 10 metric-type 2  
Console(config-router)#timers spf 10  
Console(config-router)#  
3-226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Configuring OSPF Areas  
An autonomous system must be configured with a backbone area, designated by  
area identifier 0.0.0.0. By default, all other areas are created as normal transit areas.  
Routers in a normal area may import or export routing information about individual  
nodes. To reduce the amount of routing traffic flooded onto the network, you can  
configure an area to export a single summarized route that covers a broad range of  
network addresses within the area (page 3-230). To further reduce the amount of  
routes passed between areas, you can configure an area as a stub or a  
not-so-stubby area (NSSA).  
Normal Area – A large OSPF domain should be  
broken up into several areas to increase network  
area  
stability and reduce the amount of routing traffic  
ABR  
required through the use of route summaries that  
aggregate a range of addresses into a single  
backbone  
route. The backbone or any normal area can pass  
traffic between other areas, and are therefore  
known as transit areas. Each router in an area  
ABR  
area  
has identical routing tables. These tables may  
include area links, summarized links, or external  
links that depict the topology of the autonomous  
system.  
Stub – A stub does not accept external routing  
information. Instead, an area border router  
adjacent to a stub can be configured to send a  
default external route into the stub for all  
destinations outside the local area or the  
autonomous system. This route will also be  
advertised as a single entry point for traffic  
entering the stub. Using a stub can significantly  
reduce the amount of topology data that has to  
be exchanged over the network.  
backbone  
stub  
ABR  
default  
external  
route  
• By default, a stub can only pass traffic to other areas in the autonomous system  
via the default external route. However, you also can configure an area border  
router to send Type 3 summary link advertisements into the stub.  
NSSA – A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) is similar to a stub. It blocks most external  
routing information, and can be configured to advertise a single default route for  
traffic passing between the NSSA and other areas within the autonomous system  
(AS). However, an NSSA can also import external routes from one or more small  
routing domains that are not part of the AS, such as a RIP domain or locally  
configured static routes. This external AS routing information is generated by the  
NSSA’s ASBR and advertised only within the NSSA. By default, these routes are not  
flooded onto the backbone or into any other area by area border routers. However,  
the NSSA’s ABRs will convert NSSA external LSAs (Type 7) into external LSAs  
(Type-5) which are propagated into other areas within the AS.  
3-227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
default external  
route for another  
routing domain  
5
7
backbone  
NSSA  
ASBR  
ABR  
Router  
default external  
route for local AS  
external network  
AS  
• Routes that can be advertised with NSSA external LSAs include network  
destinations outside the AS learned via OSPF, the default route, static routes,  
routes derived from other routing protocols such as RIP, or directly connected  
networks that are not running OSPF.  
• Also, note that unlike stub areas, all Type-3 summary LSAs are always imported  
into NSSAs to ensure that internal routes are always chosen over Type-7 NSSA  
external routes.  
Default Cost – This specifies a cost for the default summary route sent into a stub or  
not-so-stubby area (NSSA) from an Area Border Router (ABR).  
Command Usage  
• Before you create a stub or NSSA, first specify the address range for an area using  
the Network Area Address Configuration screen (page 3-238).  
• Stubs and NSSAs cannot be used as a transit area, and should therefore be placed  
at the edge of the routing domain.  
• A stub or NSSA can have multiple ABRs or exit points. However, all of the exit  
points and local routers must contain the same external routing data so that the exit  
point does not need to be determined for each external destination.  
Command Attributes  
Area ID – Identifier for an area, stub or NSSA.  
Area Type – Specifies a normal area, stub area, or not-so-stubby area (NSSA).  
Area ID 0.0.0.0 is set to the backbone by default. (Default: Normal area)  
Default Cost – Cost for the default summary route sent into a stub from an area  
border router (ABR). (Range: 0-16777215; Default: 1)  
- Note that if you set the default cost to “0,” the router will not advertise a default  
route into the attached stub.  
Summary – Makes an ABR send a Type-3 summary link advertisement into a stub.  
(Default: Summary)  
- A stub is designed to save routing table space by blocking Type-4 AS summary  
LSAs and Type 5 external LSAs. If you use the “NoSummary” option to also  
block Type-3 summary LSAs that advertise the default route for destinations  
external to the local area or the AS, the stub will become completely isolated.  
Note: This router supports up to 16 total areas (either normal transit areas, stubs, or  
NSSAs).  
3-228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Area Configuration. Set any area to a stub or  
NSSA as required, specify the cost for the default summary route sent into a stub,  
and click Apply.  
Figure 3-132 OSPF Area Configuration  
CLI - This example configures area 0.0.0.1 as a normal area, area 0.0.0.2 as a stub,  
and area 0.0.0.3 as an NSSA. It also configures the router to propagate a default  
summary route into the stub and sets the cost for this default route to 10.  
Console(config-router)#network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 area 0.0.0.1  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.2 stub summary  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.2 default-cost 10  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.3 nssa  
Console(config-router)#end  
3-229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Console#show ip ospf  
Routing Process with ID 192.168.1.253  
Supports only single TOS(TOS0) route  
Number of area in this router is 3  
Area 0.0.0.0 (BACKBONE)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 40 times  
Area 0.0.0.2 (STUB)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 8 times  
Area 0.0.0.3 (NSSA)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 40 times  
Console#  
Configuring Area Ranges (Route Summarization for ABRs)  
An OSPF area can include a large number of nodes.  
If the Area Border Router (ABR) has to advertise  
route information for each of these nodes, this  
wastes a lot of bandwidth and processor time.  
area  
area  
ABR  
Instead, you can configure an ABR to advertise a  
single summary route that covers all the individual  
networks within its area. When using route  
summary  
route  
summaries, local changes do not have to be propagated to other area routers. This  
allows OSPF to be easily scaled for larger networks, and provides a more stable  
network topology.  
Command Usage  
• Use the Area Range Configuration page to summarize the routes for an area. The  
summary route for an area is defined by an IP address and network mask. You  
therefore need to structure each area with a contiguous set of addresses so that  
all routes in the area fall within an easily specified range. This router also supports  
Variable Length Subnet Masks (VLSMs), so you can summarize an address range  
on any bit boundary in a network address.  
• To summarize the external LSAs imported into your autonomous system (i.e., local  
routing domain), use the Summary Address Configuration screen (page 3-241).  
Command Attributes  
Area ID – Identifies an area for which the routes are summarized. (The area  
ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
Range Network – Base address for the routes to summarize.  
Range Netmask – Network mask for the summary route.  
Advertising – Indicates whether or not to advertise the summary route. If the  
summary is not sent, the routes remain hidden from the rest of the network.  
(Default: Advertise)  
Note: This router supports up 64 summary routes for area ranges.  
3-230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Area Range Configuration. Specify the area  
identifier, the base address and network mask, select whether or not to advertise the  
summary route to other areas, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-133 OSPF Range Configuration  
CLI - This example summarizes all the routes for area 1. Note that the default for the  
area range command is to advertise the route summary. The configured summary  
route is shown in the list of information displayed for area 1.  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.1 range 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-router)#end  
Console#show ip ospf  
Routing Process with ID 10.1.1.253  
Supports only single TOS(TOS0) route  
Number of area in this router is 4  
Area 0.0.0.0 (BACKBONE)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 0  
SPF algorithm executed 47 times  
Area 0.0.0.1  
Number of interfaces in this area is 3  
SPF algorithm executed 14 times  
Area ranges are  
255.255.255.0/24 Active  
Console#  
3-231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring OSPF Interfaces  
You should specify a routing interface for any local subnet that needs to  
communicate with other network segments located on this router or elsewhere in the  
network. First configure a VLAN for each subnet that will be directly connected to  
this router, assign IP interfaces to each VLAN (i.e., one primary interface and one or  
more secondary interfaces), and then use the OSPF / Network Area Address  
Configuration page to assign an interface address range to an OSPF area.  
After assigning a routing interface to an OSPF area, you need to use the OSPF /  
Interface Configuration page to configure the interface-specific parameters used by  
OSPF to select the designated router, control the timing of link state advertisements,  
set the cost used to select preferred paths, and specify the method used to  
authenticate routing messages.  
Field Attributes  
OSPF Interface List  
VLAN ID – The VLAN to which an IP interface has been assigned.  
Interface IP – The IP interface associated with the selected VLAN.  
Area ID – The area to which this interface has been assigned.  
Designated Router – Designated router for this area.  
Backup Designated Router – Designated backup router for this area.  
Entry Count – The number of IP interfaces assigned to this VLAN.  
Note: This router supports up 64 OSPF interfaces.  
Detail Interface Configuration  
VLAN ID – The VLAN corresponding to the selected interface.  
Rtr Priority – Sets the interface priority for this router. (Range: 0-255; Default: 1)  
- A designated router (DR) and backup designated router (BDR) is elected for  
each OSPF area based on Router Priority. The DR forms an active adjacency to  
all other routers in the area to exchange routing topology information. If for any  
reason the DR fails, the BDR takes over this role.  
- The router with the highest priority becomes the DR and the router with the next  
highest priority becomes the BDR. If two or more routers are set to the same  
priority, the router with the higher ID will be elected. You can set the priority to  
zero to prevent a router from being elected as a DR or BDR.  
- If a DR already exists for an area when this interface comes up, the new router  
will accept the current DR regardless of its own priority. The DR will not change  
until the next time the election process is initiated.  
Transmit Delay – Sets the estimated time to send a link-state update packet over  
an interface. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 1)  
- LSAs have their age incremented by a delay before transmission. You should  
consider both the transmission and propagation delays for an interface when  
estimating this delay. Set the transmit delay according to link speed, using larger  
values for lower-speed links.  
- The transmit delay must be the same for all routers in an autonomous system.  
3-232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
- On slow links, the router may send packets more quickly than devices can  
receive them. To avoid this problem, you can use the transmit delay to force the  
router to wait a specified interval between transmissions.  
Retransmit Interval – Sets the time between resending link-state advertisements.  
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 1)  
- A router will resend an LSA to a neighbor if it receives no acknowledgment. The  
retransmit interval should be set to a conservative value that provides an  
adequate flow of routing information, but does not produce unnecessary protocol  
traffic. Note that this value should be larger for virtual links.  
- Set this interval to a value that is greater than the round-trip delay between any  
two routers on the attached network to avoid unnecessary retransmissions.  
Hello Interval – Sets the interval between sending hello packets on an interface.  
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 10)  
- This interval must be set to the same value for all routers on the network.  
- Using a smaller Hello interval allows changes in the network topology to be  
discovered more quickly, but may result in more routing traffic.  
Rtr Dead Interval – Sets the interval at which hello packets are not seen before  
neighbors declare the router down. This interval must be set to the same value for  
all routers on the network. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 40, or 4 times the  
Hello Interval)  
Cost – Sets the cost of sending a packet on an interface, where higher values  
indicate slower ports. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1)  
- This router uses a default cost of 1 for all ports. Therefore, if you install a Gigabit  
module, you need to reset the cost for all of the 100 Mbps ports to some value  
greater than 1.  
- Routes are subsequently assigned a metric equal to the sum of all metrics for  
each interface link in the route.  
Authentication Type – Specifies the authentication type used for an interface.  
(Options: None, Simple password, MD5; Default: None)  
- Use authentication to prevent routers from inadvertently joining an unauthorized  
area. Configure routers in the same area with the same password or key.  
- When using simple password authentication, a password is included in the  
packet. If it does not match the password configured on the receiving router, the  
packet is discarded. This method provides very little security as it is possible to  
learn the authentication key by snooping on routing protocol packets.  
- When using Message-Digest 5 (MD5) authentication, the router uses the MD5  
algorithm to verify data integrity by creating a 128-bit message digest from the  
authentication key. Without the proper key and key-id, it is nearly impossible to  
produce any message that matches the prespecified target message digest.  
- The Authentication Key and Message Digest Key-id must be used consistently  
throughout the autonomous system. (Note that the Message Digest Key-id field  
is disabled when this authentication type is selected.)  
Authentication Key – Assign a plain-text password used by neighboring routers  
to verify the authenticity of routing protocol messages. (Range: 1-8 characters for  
simple password or 1-16 characters for MD5 authentication; Default: no key)  
3-233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
- You can assign a unique password to each network (i.e., autonomous system)  
to improve the security of the routing database. However, the password must be  
used consistently on all neighboring routers throughout a network.  
Message Digest Key-id – Assigns a key-id used in conjunction with the  
authentication key to verify the authenticity of routing protocol messages sent to  
neighboring routers. (Range: 1-255; Default: none)  
- Normally, only one key is used per interface to generate authentication  
information for outbound packets and to authenticate incoming packets.  
Neighbor routers must use the same key identifier and key value.  
- When changing to a new key, the router will send multiple copies of all protocol  
messages, one with the old key and another with the new key. Once all the  
neighboring routers start sending protocol messages back to this router with the  
new key, the router will stop using the old key. This rollover process gives the  
network administrator time to update all the routers on the network without  
affecting the network connectivity. Once all the network routers have been  
updated with the new key, the old key should be removed for security reasons.  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Interface Configuration. Select the required  
interface from the scroll-down box, and click Detailed Settings.  
Figure 3-134 OSPF Interface Configuration  
3-234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Change any of the interface-specific protocol parameters, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-135 OSPF Interface Configuration - Detailed  
CLI - This example configures the interface parameters for VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf priority 5  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf transmit-delay 6  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf retransmit-interval 7  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf hello-interval 5  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf dead-interval 50  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf cost 10  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf authentication message-digest  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf message-digest-key 1 md5 aiebel  
Console#  
3-235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Virtual Links  
All OSPF areas must connect to the  
backbone. If an area does not have a  
direct physical connection to the  
backbone, you can configure a  
virtual link that provides a logical  
path to the backbone. To connect an  
isolated area to the backbone, the  
logical path can cross a single  
isolated  
area  
ABR  
non-backbone area (i.e., transit area)  
to reach the backbone. To define this  
path, you must configure an ABR  
that serves as an endpoint  
virtual  
link  
backbone  
ABR  
normal  
area  
connecting the isolated area to the  
common transit area, and specify a  
neighboring ABR as the other  
endpoint connecting the common transit area to the backbone itself. (Note that you  
cannot configure a virtual link that runs through a stub or NSSA area.)  
Virtual links can also be used to create a redundant link between any area and the  
backbone to help prevent partitioning, or to connect two existing backbone areas  
into a common backbone.  
Command Attributes  
Area ID – Identifies the transit area for the virtual link.  
(The area ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
Neighbor Router ID – Neighbor router at other end of the virtual link. This must be  
an Area Border Router (ABR) that is adjacent to both the backbone and the transit  
area for the virtual link.  
Events – The number of state changes or error events on this virtual link.  
The other items are described under “Configuring OSPF Interfaces,” page 3-232.  
Note: This router supports up 64 virtual links.  
3-236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Virtual Link Configuration. To create a new  
virtual link, specify the Area ID and Neighbor Router ID, configure the link attributes,  
and click Add. To modify the settings for an existing link, click the Detail button for  
the required entry, modify the link settings, and click Set.  
Figure 3-136 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration  
CLI - This example configures a virtual link from the ABR adjacent to area 0.0.0.4,  
through a transit area to the neighbor router 10.1.1.252 at the other end of the link  
which is adjacent to the backbone.  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.0 virtual-link 10.1.1.252  
Console(config-router)#  
3-237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Network Area Addresses  
OSPF protocol broadcast messages (i.e., Link State Advertisements or LSAs) are  
restricted by area to limit their impact on network performance. A large network  
should be split up into separate OSPF areas to increase network stability, and to  
reduce protocol traffic by summarizing routing information into more compact  
messages. Each router in an area shares the same view of the network topology,  
including area links, route summaries for directly connected areas, and external  
links to other areas.  
Command Usage  
• Use the Network Area Address Configuration page to specify an Area ID and the  
corresponding network address range. Each area identifies a logical group of  
OSPF routers that actively exchange LSAs to ensure that they share an identical  
view of the network topology.  
• Each area must be connected to a backbone area. This area passes routing  
information between other areas in the autonomous system. The default value  
0.0.0.0 is used as the Area ID for the backbone. All routers must be connected to  
the backbone, either directly, or through a virtual link if a direct physical connection  
is not possible.  
• An area initially configured via the Network Area Address Configuration page is set  
as a normal area (or transit area) by default. A normal area can send and receive  
external Link State Advertisements (LSAs). If necessary, you can use the Area  
Configuration page to configure an area as a stubby area that cannot send or  
receive external LSAs, or a not-so-stubby area (NSSA) that can import external  
route information into its area (page 3-227).  
• An area must be assigned a range of subnetwork addresses. This area and the  
corresponding address range forms a routing interface, and can be configured to  
aggregate LSAs from all of its subnetwork addresses and exchange this  
information with other routers in the network (page 3-230).  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – Address of the interfaces to add to the area.  
Netmask – Network mask of the address range to add to the area.  
Area ID – Area to which the specified address or range is assigned. An OSPF area  
identifies a group of routers that share common routing information. (The area ID  
must be in the form of an IP address.)  
Note: This router supports up to 16 total areas (either normal transit areas, stubs, or  
NSSAs).  
3-238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Network Area Address Configuration.  
Configure a backbone area that is contiguous with all the other areas in your  
network, configure an area for all of the other OSPF interfaces, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-137 OSPF Network Area Address Configuration  
3-239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI - This example configures the backbone area and one transit area.  
Console(config-router)#network 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 area 0.0.0.0  
Console(config-router)#network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 area 0.0.0.1  
Console(config-router)#end  
Console#show ip ospf  
Routing Process with ID 10.1.1.253  
Supports only single TOS(TOS0) route  
Number of area in this router is 4  
Area 0.0.0.0 (BACKBONE)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 8 times  
Area 0.0.0.1  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 5 times  
Area 0.0.0.2 (STUB)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 13 times  
Area 0.0.0.3 (NSSA)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 12 times  
Console#  
3-240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
3
Configuring Summary Addresses (for External AS Routes)  
An Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) can redistribute routes learned  
from other protocols into all attached autonomous systems. (See “Redistributing  
External Routes” on page 3-242) To reduce the amount of external LSAs imported  
into your local routing domain, you can configure the router to advertise an  
aggregate route that consolidates a broad range of external addresses.  
Command Usage  
• If you are not sure what address ranges to consolidate, first enable external route  
redistribution via the Redistribute Configuration screen, view the routes imported  
into the routing table, and then configure one or more summary addresses to  
reduce the size of the routing table and consolidate these external routes for  
advertising into the local domain.  
• To summarize routes sent between OSPF areas, use the Area Range  
Configuration screen (page 3-230).  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – Summary address covering a range of addresses.  
Netmask – Network mask for the summary route.  
Note: This router supports up 16 Type-5 summary routes.  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Summary Address Configuration. Specify the  
base address and network mask, then click Add.  
Figure 3-138 OSPF Summary Address Configuration  
3-241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI - This example This example creates a summary address for all routes  
contained in 192.168.x.x.  
Console(config-router)#summary-address 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0  
Console(config-router)#  
Redistributing External Routes  
You can configure this router to import external routing information from other  
routing protocols into the autonomous system.  
OSPF  
AS  
Router  
ASBR  
RIP, or  
static routes  
Command Usage  
• This router supports redistribution for both RIP and static routes.  
• When you redistribute external routes into an OSPF autonomous system (AS), the  
router automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR).  
• However, if the router has been manually configured as an ASBR via the General  
Configuration screen, but redistribution is not enabled, the router will only generate  
a “default” external route into the AS if it has been configured to “always” advertise  
a default route even if an external route does not actually exist (page 3-224).  
• Metric type specifies the way to advertise routes to destinations outside the  
autonomous system (AS) via External LSAs. Specify Type 1 to add the internal  
cost metric to the external route metric. In other words, the cost of the route from  
any router within the AS is equal to the cost associated with reaching the  
advertising ASBR, plus the cost of the external route. Specify Type 2 to only  
advertise external route metric.  
• The metric value specified for redistributed routes supersedes the Default External  
Metric specified in the OSPF / General Configuration screen (page 3-224).  
Command Attributes  
Redistribute Protocol – Specifies the external routing protocol type for which  
routing information is to be redistributed into the local routing domain. (Options:  
RIP, Static; Default: RIP)  
Redistribute Metric Type – Indicates the method used to calculate external route  
costs. (Options: Type 1, Type 2; Default: Type 1)  
Redistribute Metric – Metric assigned to all external routes for the specified  
protocol. (Range: 1-65535: Default: 10)  
3-242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Redistribute. Specify the protocol type to  
import, the metric type and path cost, then click Add.  
Figure 3-139 OSPF Redistribute Configuration  
CLI - This example redistributes routes learned from RIP as Type 1 external routes.  
Console(config-router)#redistribute rip metric-type 1  
Console(config-router)#  
Configuring NSSA Settings  
Use the OSPF / NSSA Settings page to configure a not-so-stubby area (NSSA), and  
to control the use of default routes for ABRs and ASBRs, or external routes learned  
from other routing domains and imported via an ABR. (For a detailed description of  
Command Attributes  
Area ID – Identifier for an not-so-stubby area (NSSA).  
Default Information Originate – An NSSA ASBR originates and floods Type-7  
external LSAs throughout its area for known network destination outside of the AS.  
However, you can also configure an NSSA ASBR to generate a Type-7 “default”  
route to areas outside of the AS, or an NSSA ABR to generate a Type-7 “default”  
route to other areas within the AS. (Default: Disabled)  
No Redistribution – The Redistribute Configuration page (page 3-242) is used to  
import information from other routing domains (or protocols) into the AS. However,  
when the router is an NSSA ABR, you can choose whether or not to accept external  
routes learned from routers in other OSPF areas into the NSSA. (Default: Enabled)  
3-243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Note: This router supports up 16 areas, either normal transit areas, stubs, or NSSAs.  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, NSSA Settings. Create a new NSSA or modify  
the routing behavior for an existing NSSA, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-140 OSPF NSSA Settings  
CLI - This example configures area 0.0.0.1 as a stub and sets the cost for the default  
summary route to 10.  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.1 nssa  
default-information- originate  
Console(config-router)#area 0.0.0.2 nssa no-redistribution  
Console(config-router)#  
3-244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Displaying Link State Database Information  
OSPF routers advertise routes using Link State Advertisements (LSAs). The full  
collection of LSAs collected by a router interface from the attached area is known as  
a link state database. Routers that are connected to multiple interfaces will have a  
separate database for each area. Each router in the same area should have an  
identical database describing the topology for that area, and the shortest path to  
external destinations.  
The full database is exchanged between neighboring routers as soon as a new  
router is discovered. Afterwards, any changes that occur in the routing tables are  
synchronized with neighboring routers through a process called reliable flooding.  
You can show information about different LSAs stored in this router’s database,  
which may include any of the following types:  
• Router (Type 1) – All routers in an OSPF area originate Router LSAs that describe  
the state and cost of its active interfaces and neighbors.  
• Network (Type 2) – The designated router for each area originates a Network LSA  
that describes all the routers that are attached to this network segment.  
• Summary (Type 3) – Area border routers can generate Summary LSAs that give  
the cost to a subnetwork located outside the area.  
• AS Summary (Type 4) – Area border routers can generate AS Summary LSAs that  
give the cost to an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR).  
• AS External (Type 5) – An ASBR can generate an AS External LSA for each known  
network destination outside the AS.  
• NSSA External (Type 7) – An ASBR within an NSSA generates an NSSA external  
link state advertisement for each known network destination outside the AS.  
Command Attributes  
Area ID – Area defined for which you want to view LSA information.  
(This item must be entered in the form of an IP address.)  
Link ID – The network portion described by an LSA. The Link ID should be:  
- An IP network number for Type 3 Summary and Type 5 AS External LSAs.  
(When an Type 5 AS External LSA is describing a default route, its Link ID  
is set to the default destination 0.0.0.0.)  
- A Router ID for Router, Network, and Type 4 AS Summary LSAs.  
Self-Originate – Shows LSAs originated by this router.  
LS Type – LSA Type (Options: Type 1-5, 7). See the preceding description.  
Adv Router – IP address of the advertising router. If not entered, information about  
all advertising routers is displayed.  
21  
Age – Age of LSA (in seconds).  
Seq21 – Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs).  
CheckSum21 – Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA.  
21. These items are read only.  
3-245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Link State Database Information. Specify  
parameters for the LSAs you want to display, then click Query.  
Figure 3-141 OSPF Link State Database Information  
CLI - The CLI provides a wider selection of display options for viewing the Link State  
3-246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
3
Displaying Information on Border Routers  
You can display entries in the local routing table for Area Border Routers (ABR) and  
Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBR) known by this device.  
Field Attributes  
Destination – Identifier for the destination router.  
Next Hop – IP address of the next hop toward the destination.  
Cost – Link metric for this route.  
Type – Router type of the destination; either ABR, ASBR or both.  
Rte Type – Route type; either intra-area or interarea route (INTRA or INTER).  
Area – The area from which this route was learned.  
SPF No – The number of times the shortest path first algorithm has been executed  
for this route.  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Border Router Information.  
Figure 3-142 OSPF Border Router Information  
CLI - This example shows one router that serves as both the ABR for the local area  
and the ASBR for the autonomous system.  
Console#show ip ospf border-routers  
Destination Next Hop Cost  
Type RteType  
Area  
SPF No  
--------------- --------------- ------ ----- -------- --------------- -------  
10.2.44.5  
10.2.44.5  
10.2.44.88  
10.2.44.88  
1
1
ABR  
ASBR  
INTRA  
INTER  
0.0.0.1  
0.0.0.1  
5
5
Console#  
3-247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Information on Neighbor Routers  
You can display about neighboring routers on each interface within an OSPF area.  
Field Attributes  
ID – Neighbor’s router ID.  
Priority – Neighbor’s router priority.  
State – OSPF state and identification flag.  
States include:  
- Down – Connection down  
- Attempt – Connection down, but attempting contact (non-broadcast networks)  
- Init – Have received Hello packet, but communications not yet established  
- Two-way – Bidirectional communications established  
- ExStart – Initializing adjacency between neighbors  
- Exchange – Database descriptions being exchanged  
- Loading – LSA databases being exchanged  
- Full – Neighboring routers now fully adjacent  
Identification flags include:  
- D – Dynamic neighbor  
- S – Static neighbor  
- DR – Designated router  
- BDR – Backup designated router  
Address – IP address of this interface.  
Web - Click Routing Protocol, OSPF, Neighbor Information.  
Figure 3-143 OSPF Neighbor Information  
CLI - This shows a designated router and backup designated router as neighbors.  
Console#show ip ospf neighbor  
ID  
Pri  
State  
Address  
--------------- ------ ---------------- ---------------  
10.2.44.5  
10.2.44.6  
1
2
FULL/DR  
FULL/BDR  
10.2.44.88  
10.2.44.88  
Console#  
3-248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Routing  
3
Multicast Routing  
This router can route multicast traffic to different subnetworks using either Distance  
Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) or Protocol-Independent Multicasting -  
Dense Mode (PIM-DM). These protocols flood multicast traffic downstream, and  
calculate the shortest-path, source-rooted delivery tree between each source and  
destination host group. They also rely on messages sent from IGMP-enabled Layer  
2 switches and hosts to determine when hosts want to join or leave multicast groups.  
DVMRP builds a source-rooted multicast delivery tree that allows it to prevent  
looping and determine the shortest path to the source of the multicast traffic. PIM  
also builds a source-rooted multicast delivery tree for each multicast source, but  
uses information from the router’s unicast routing table instead of maintaining its  
own multicast routing table, making it routing protocol independent. Also note that  
the Dense Mode version of PIM is supported on this router because it is suitable for  
densely populated multicast groups which occur primarily in the LAN environment.  
If DVMRP and PIM-DM are not enabled on this router or another multicast routing  
protocol is used on your network, you can manually configure the switch ports  
attached to a multicast router (page 3-157).  
Configuring Global Settings for Multicast Routing  
To use multicast routing on this router, you must first globally enable multicast  
routing as described in this section, globally enable DVRMP (page 3-253) or PIM  
(page 3-260), and specify the interfaces that will participate (page 3-256 or 3-261).  
Note that you can only enable one multicast routing protocol on any given interface.  
Web – Click IP, Multicast Routing, General Setting. Set Multicast Forwarding Status  
to Enabled, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-144 Multicast Routing General Settings  
CLI – This example enables multicast routing globally for the router.  
Console(config)#ip multicast-routing  
Console(config)#  
3-249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying the Multicast Routing Table  
You can display information on each multicast route this router has learned via  
DVMRP or PIM. The router learns multicast routes from neighboring routers, and  
also advertises these routes to its neighbors. The router stores entries for all paths  
learned by itself or from other routers, without considering actual group membership  
or prune messages. The routing table therefore does not indicate that the router has  
processed multicast traffic from any particular source listed in the table. It uses these  
routes to forward multicast traffic only if group members appear on directly-attached  
subnetworks or on subnetworks attached to downstream routers.  
Field Attributes  
Group Address – IP group address for a multicast service.  
Source Address – Subnetwork containing the IP multicast source.  
Netmask – Network mask for the IP multicast source.  
Interface – Interface leading to the upstream neighbor.  
Owner – The associated multicast protocol (i.e., DVMRP or PIM).  
Flags – The flags associated with each interface indicate prune (P) if the  
downstream interface has been recently terminated or forwarding (F) if the  
interface is still active.  
Detail – This button displays detailed information for the selected entry.  
22  
Upstream Router – The multicast router immediately upstream for this group.  
Downstream22 – Interface(s) on which multicast subscribers have been recorded.  
22. These items are displayed in the IP Multicast Routing Entry (Detail) table.  
3-250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Routing  
3
Web – Click IP, Multicast Routing, Multicast Routing Table. Click Detail to display  
additional information for any entry.  
Figure 3-145 Multicast Routing Table  
3-251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example shows that multicast forwarding is enabled. The multicast  
routing table displays one entry for a multicast source routed by DVMRP, and  
another source routed via PIM.  
Console#show ip mroute  
IP Multicast Forwarding is enabled.  
IP Multicast Routing Table  
Flags: P - Prune, F - Forwarding  
(234.5.6.7, 10.1.0.0, 255.255.255.0)  
Owner: DVMRP  
Upstream Interface: vlan2  
Upstream Router: 10.1.0.0  
Downstream:  
(234.5.6.8, 10.1.5.19, 255.255.255.255)  
Owner: PIM-DM  
Upstream Interface: vlan3  
Upstream Router: 10.1.5.19  
Downstream:  
Console#  
3-252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicast Routing  
3
Configuring DVMRP  
The Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) behaves somewhat  
similarly to RIP. A router supporting DVMRP periodically floods its attached networks  
to pass information about supported multicast services along to new routers and  
hosts. Routers that receive a DVMRP packet send a copy out to all paths (except the  
path back to the origin). These routers then send a prune message back to the  
source to stop a data stream if the router is attached to a LAN which does not want  
to receive traffic from a particular multicast group. However, if a host attached to this  
router issues an IGMP message indicating that it wants to subscribe to the  
concerned multicast service, this router will use DVMRP to build up a source-rooted  
multicast delivery tree that allows it to prevent looping and determine the shortest  
path to the source of this multicast traffic.  
source  
branch  
leaf  
leaf  
When this router receives the multicast message, it checks its unicast routing table  
to locate the port that provides the shortest path back to the source. If that path  
passes through the same port on which the multicast message was received, then  
this router records path information for the concerned multicast group in its routing  
table and forwards the multicast message on to adjacent routers, except for the port  
through which the message arrived. This process eliminates potential loops from the  
tree and ensures that the shortest path (in terms of hop count) is always used.  
Configuring Global DVMRP Settings  
DVMRP is used to route multicast traffic to nodes which have requested a specific  
multicast service via IGMP. This router uses Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) to  
build a shortest-path delivery tree that begins at the source and spreads out to reach  
group members through the network. RPF uses three different techniques to  
dynamically reconfigure the multicast spanning tree: broadcasting, pruning, and  
grafting.  
3-253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Usage  
Broadcasting periodically floods the network with  
traffic from any active multicast server. If IGMP  
snooping is disabled, multicast traffic is flooded to  
all ports on the router. However, if IGMP snooping is  
enabled, then the first packet for any source group  
pair is flooded to all DVMRP downstream  
source  
flooding  
neighbors. If a packet is received through an  
interface that the router determines to be the  
shortest path back to the source (based on interface  
metrics), then the router forwards the packet on all  
interfaces except for the incoming interface.  
potential  
hosts  
The router will transmit a prune message back out  
the receiving interface (i.e., the parent interface) to  
its upstream neighboring router if there are no group  
members on its child interfaces. A prune message  
tells the upstream router to stop forwarding packets  
for a particular source-group pair for the prune  
lifetime.  
source  
If the router that previously sent a prune message  
now discovers a new group member on one of its  
connections, it sends a graft message to the  
upstream router. When an upstream router receives  
this message, it cancels the prune message. If  
necessary, graft messages are propagated back  
toward the source until reaching the nearest live  
branch in the multicast tree.  
pruning  
The global settings that control the prune and graft  
messages (i.e., prune lifetime) should be configured  
to the same values on all routers throughout the  
network to allow DVMRP to function properly.  
However, if you encounter problems in maintaining  
a multicast flow, then you may need to modify the  
protocol variables which control the exchange of  
topology information between DVMRP routers; such  
as the probe interval, neighbor timeout or report  
interval.  
source  
Command Attributes  
DVMRP Protocol – Enables/disables DVMRP  
grafting  
globally. (Default: Disabled)  
Probe Interval – Sets the interval for sending  
neighbor probe messages to the multicast group  
address for all DVMRP routers. Probe messages  
are sent to neighboring DVMRP routers from  
3-254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicast Routing  
3
which this device has received probes, and is used to verify whether or not these  
neighbors are still active members of the multicast tree. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;  
Default: 10 seconds)  
Neighbor Timeout Interval – Sets the interval to wait for messages from a  
DVMRP neighbor before declaring it dead. This command is used for timing out  
routes, and for setting the children and leaf flags. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;  
Default: 35 seconds)  
Report Interval – Specifies how often to propagate the complete set of routing  
tables to other neighbor DVMRP routers. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;  
Default: 60 seconds)  
Flash Update Interval – Specifies how often to send trigger updates, which reflect  
changes in the network topology.  
Prune Lifetime – Specifies how long a prune state will remain in effect for a  
multicast tree. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 7200 seconds)  
23  
Default Gateway – Specifies the default DVMRP gateway for IP multicast traffic.  
(Default: none)  
- The specified interface advertises itself as a default route to neighboring  
DVMRP routers. It advertises the default route out through its other interfaces.  
Neighboring routers on the other interfaces return Poison Reverse messages for  
the default route back to the router. When the router receives these messages,  
it records all the downstream routers for the default route.  
- When multicast traffic with an unknown source address (i.e., not found in the  
route table) is received on the default upstream route interface, the router  
forwards this traffic out through the other interfaces (with known downstream  
routers). However, when multicast traffic with an unknown source address is  
received on another interface, the router drops it because only the default  
upstream interface can forward multicast traffic from an unknown source.  
23. CLI only.  
3-255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Routing Protocol, DVMRP, General Settings. Enable or disable  
DVMRP. Set the global parameters that control neighbor timeout, the exchange of  
routing information, or the prune lifetime, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-146 DVMRP General Settings  
CLI – This sets the global parameters for DVMRP and displays the current settings.  
Console(config)#router dvmrp  
Console(config-router)#probe-interval 30  
Console(config-router)#nbr-timeout 40  
Console(config-router)#report-interval 90  
Console(config-router)#flash-update-interval 10  
Console(config-router)#prune-lifetime 5000  
Console(config-router)#default-gateway 10.1.0.253  
Console(config-router)#end  
Console#show router dvmrp  
Admin Status  
Probe Interval  
Nbr expire  
Minimum Flash Update Interval  
prune lifetime  
route report  
: enable  
: 10  
: 35  
: 5  
: 7200  
: 60  
:
Default Gateway  
Console#  
Configuring DVMRP Interface Settings  
To fully enable DVMRP, you need to enable multicast routing globally for the router  
(page 3-249), enable DVMRP globally for the router (page 3-253), and also enable  
DVMRP for each interface that will participate in multicast routing.  
Command Attributes  
DVMRP Interface Information  
Interface – VLAN interface on this router that has enabled DVMRP.  
Address – IP address of this VLAN interface.  
Metric – The metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors.  
Status – Shows that DVMRP is enabled on this interface.  
3-256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Routing  
3
DVMRP Interface Settings  
VLAN – Selects a VLAN interface on this router.  
Metric – Sets the metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors.  
Status – Enables or disables DVMRP.  
- If DVMRP is enabled on any interface, Layer 3 IGMP should also be enabled on  
the router (page 3-159).  
- If DVMRP is disabled, the interface cannot propagate IP multicast routing  
information. However, as long as IGMP snooping is enabled, the interface will  
still forward multicast traffic to downstream group members within the VLAN. But  
if IGMP snooping is disabled, then the interface will flood incoming multicast  
traffic to all ports in the attached VLAN.  
Web – Click Routing Protocol, DVMRP, Interface Settings. Select a VLAN from the  
drop-down box under DVMRP Interface Settings, modify the Metric if required, set  
the Status to Enabled or Disabled, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-147 DVMRP Interface Settings  
CLI – This example enables DVMRP and sets the metric for VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip dvmrp  
Console(config-if)#ip dvmrp metric 2  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip dvmrp interface  
Vlan 1 is up  
DVMRP is enabled  
Metric is 2  
Console#  
3-257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Neighbor Information  
You can display all the neighboring DVMRP routers.  
Command Attributes  
Neighbor Address – The IP address of the network device immediately upstream  
for this multicast delivery tree.  
Interface – The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor.  
Up time – The time since this device last became a DVMRP neighbor to this router.  
Expire – The time remaining before this entry will be aged out.  
Capabilities – A hexadecimal value that indicates the neighbor’s capabilities.  
Each time a probe message is received from a neighbor, the router compares the  
capabilities bits with the previous version for that neighbor to check for changes in  
neighbor capabilities. (Refer to DVMRP IETF Draft v3-10 section 3.2.1 for a  
detailed description of these bits). These bits are described below:  
- Leaf (bit 0) - Neighbor has only one interface with neighbors.  
- Prune (bit 1) - Neighbor supports pruning.  
- Generation ID (bit 2) - Neighbor sends its Generation ID in probe messages.  
- Mtrace (bit 3) - Neighbor can handle multicast trace requests.  
- SNMP (bit 4) - Neighbor is SNMP capable.  
- Netmask - (bit 5) - Neighbor will accept network masks appended to the prune,  
graft, and graft acknowledgement messages.  
- Reserved (bit 6 and 7) - Reserved for future use.  
Web – Click Routing Protocol, DVMRP, Neighbor Information.  
Figure 3-148 DVMRP Neighbor Information  
CLI – This example displays the only neighboring DVMRP router.  
Console#show ip dvmrp neighbor  
Address  
---------------- --------------- -------- -------- -------------  
10.1.0.254 vlan1 79315 32  
Console#  
Interface  
Uptime  
Expire  
Capabilities  
6
3-258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Routing  
3
Displaying the Routing Table  
The router learns source-routed information from neighboring DVMRP routers and  
also advertises learned routes to its neighbors. The router merely records path  
information it has learned on its own or from other routers. It does not consider  
group membership or prune messages. Information stored in the routing table  
includes subnetworks from which IP multicast traffic originates, upstream routers  
that have sent multicast traffic in the past or have been learned through routing  
messages exchanged with other routers, interfaces connected to an upstream  
router, or outgoing interfaces that are connected to multicast hosts.  
The DVMRP routing table contains multicast route information learned via DVMRP  
route updates, and is used to forward IP multicast traffic. The routes listed in the  
table do not reflect actual multicast traffic flows. For this information, you should look  
at the IGMP Member Port Table (page 3-159) or the IGMP Group Membership Table  
Command Attributes  
IP Address – IP subnetwork that contains a multicast source, an upstream router,  
or an outgoing interface connected to multicast hosts.  
Netmask – Subnet mask that is used for the source address. This mask identifies  
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
Upstream Neighbor – IP address of the network device immediately upstream for  
each multicast group.  
Interface – The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor.  
Metric – The metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors.  
Up time – The time elapsed since this entry was created.  
Expire – The time remaining before this entry will be aged out.  
Web – Click Routing Protocol, DVMRP, DVMRP Routing Table.  
Figure 3-149 DVMRP Routing Table  
3-259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example displays known DVMRP routes.  
Console#show ip dvmrp route  
Source  
Mask  
Upstream_nbr  
Interface Metric UpTime Expire  
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------- ------ ------ ------  
10.1.0.0  
10.1.1.0  
10.1.8.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
10.1.0.253  
10.1.1.253  
10.1.0.254  
vlan1  
vlan2  
vlan1  
1 84438  
1 84987  
2 19729  
0
0
97  
Console#  
Configuring PIM-DM  
Protocol-Independent Multicasting (PIM) provides two different modes of operation:  
sparse mode and dense mode. Sparse mode (SM) is designed for networks where  
the probability of multicast group members is low, such as the Internet. Dense mode  
(DM), on the other hand, is designed for networks where the probability of multicast  
group members is high, such as a local network.  
PIM-DM is a simple multicast routing protocol that uses flood and prune to build a  
source-routed multicast delivery tree for each multicast source-group pair. It is  
simpler than DVMRP because it does not maintain it’s own routing table. Instead, it  
uses the routing table provided by the unicast routing protocol enabled on the router  
interface. When the router receives a multicast packet for a source-group pair,  
PIM-DM checks the unicast routing table on the inbound interface to determine if this  
is the same interface used for routing unicast packets to the multicast source  
network. If it is not, the router drops the packet and sends a prune message back out  
the source interface. If it is the same interface used by the unicast protocol, then the  
router forwards a copy of the packet to all the other interfaces for which is has not  
already received a prune message for this specific source-group pair.  
DVMRP holds the prune state for about two hours, while PIM-DM holds it for only  
about three minutes. This results in more flooding than encountered with DVMRP,  
but this the only major trade-off for the lower processing overhead and simplicity of  
configuration for PIM-DM.  
Configuring Global PIM-DM Settings  
PIM-DM is used to route multicast traffic to nodes which have requested a specific  
multicast service via IGMP. It uses the router’s unicast routing table to determine if  
the interface through which a packet is received provides the shortest path back to  
the source. This is done on a per hop basis back toward the source of the multicast  
delivery tree. PIM-DM uses three different techniques to dynamically reconfigure the  
multicast spanning tree: broadcasting, pruning, and grafting.  
To use PIM-DM, you must enable it globally for the router as described below, and  
for each interface that will support multicast routing as described in the next section.  
Also note that IGMP must be enabled to allow the router to determine the location of  
group members.  
3-260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Routing  
3
Web – Click Routing Protocol, PIM-DM, General Settings. Enable or disable  
PIM-DM globally for the router, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-150 PIM-DM General Settings  
CLI – This example enables PIM-DM globally and displays the current status.  
Console(config)#router pim  
Console#show router pim  
Admin Status: Enabled  
Console#  
Configuring PIM-DM Interface Settings  
To fully enable PIM-DM, you need to enable multicast routing globally for the router  
(page 3-249), enable PIM-DM globally for the router (page 3-260), and also enable  
PIM-DM for each interface that will participate in multicast routing.  
Command Usage  
• PIM-DM functions similar to DVMRP by periodically flooding the network with traffic  
from any active multicast server (page 3-253). It also uses IGMP to determine the  
presence of multicast group members. The main difference, is that it uses the  
router’s unicast routing table to determine if the interface through which a packet  
is received provides the shortest path back to the source.  
• Dense-mode interfaces are subject to multicast flooding by default, and are only  
removed from the multicast routing table when the router determines that there are  
no group members or downstream routers, or when a prune message is received  
from a downstream router.  
• The interface settings that control the prune and graft messages (i.e., prune  
holdtime) should be configured to the same values on all routers throughout the  
network to allow PIM to function properly.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN – Selects a VLAN interface on this router.  
PIM-DM Protocol Status – Enables/disables PIM-DM. (Default: Disabled)  
Hello Interval – Sets the frequency at which PIM hello messages are transmitted.  
Hello messages are sent to neighboring PIM routers from which this device has  
received probes, and are used to verify whether or not these neighbors are still  
active members of the multicast tree. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 30)  
Hello Holdtime – Sets the interval to wait for hello messages from a neighboring  
PIM router before declaring it dead. Note that the hello holdtime should be 3.5  
times the value of Hello Interval. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 105)  
3-261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Trigger Hello Interval – Configures the maximum time before transmitting a  
triggered PIM hello message after the router is rebooted or PIM is enabled on an  
interface. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 5)  
- When a router first starts or PIM is enabled on an interface, the hello-interval is  
set to random value between 0 and the Trigger Hello Interval. This prevents  
synchronization of Hello messages on multi-access links if multiple routers are  
powered on simultaneously.  
- Also, if a Hello message is received from a new neighbor, the receiving router  
will send its own Hello message after a random delay between 0 and the Trigger  
Hello Interval.  
Prune Holdtime – Configures of the hold time for the prune state. The multicast  
interface that first receives a multicast stream from a particular source forwards this  
traffic to all other PIM interfaces on the router. If there are no requesting groups on  
that interface, the leaf node sends a prune message upstream and enters a prune  
state for this multicast stream. The prune state is maintained until the prune  
holdtime timer expires or a graft message is received for the forwarding entry.  
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 210)  
Graft Retry Interval – Configures the time to wait for a graft acknowledgement  
before resending a graft. A graft message is sent by a router to cancel a prune  
state. When a router receives a graft message, it must respond with an graft  
acknowledgement message. If this acknowledgement message is lost, the router  
that sent the graft message will resend it a maximum number of times as defined  
by Max Graft Retries. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 3)  
Max Graft Retries – Configures the maximum number of times to resend a graft  
message if it has not been acknowledged. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 2)  
3-262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicast Routing  
3
Web – Click Routing Protocol, PIM-DM, Interface Settings. Select a VLAN, enable or  
disable PIM-DM for the selected interface, modify any of the protocol parameters as  
required, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-151 PIM-DM Interface Settings  
CLI – This example sets the PIM-DM protocol parameters for VLAN 2, and displays  
the current settings.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 2  
Console(config-if)#ip pim dense-mode  
Console(config-if)#ip pim hello-interval 60  
Console(config-if)#ip pim hello-holdtime 210  
Console(config-if)#ip pim trigger-hello-interval 10  
Console(config-if)#ip pim join-prune-holdtime 60  
Console(config-if)#ip pim graft-retry-interval 9  
Console(config-if)#ip pim max-graft-retries 5  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip pim interface 2  
Vlan 2 is up  
PIM is enabled, mode is Dense.  
Internet address is 10.1.1.253.  
Hello time interval is 60 sec, trigger hello time interval is 10 sec.  
Hello holdtime is 210 sec.  
Join/Prune holdtime is 60 sec.  
Graft retry interval is 9 sec, max graft retries is 5.  
DR Internet address is 10.1.1.253, neighbor count is 0.  
Console#  
3-263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Interface Information  
You can display a summary of the current interface status for PIM-DM, including the  
number of neighboring PIM routers, and the address of the designated PIM router.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – A VLAN interface on this router.  
Address – The IP address for this interface.  
Mode – The PIM mode in use. (This router only supports Dense Mode at this time.)  
Neighbor Count – The number of PIM neighbors detected on this interface.  
DR Address – The designated PIM router for this interface.  
Web – Click Routing Protocol, PIM-DM, Interface Information.  
Figure 3-152 PIM-DM Interface Information  
CLI – This example shows the PIM-DM interface summary for VLAN 1.  
Console#show ip pim interface 1  
Vlan 1 is up  
PIM is enabled, mode is Dense.  
Internet address is 10.1.0.253.  
Hello time interval is 30 sec, trigger hello time interval is 5 sec.  
Hello holdtime is 105 sec.  
Join/Prune holdtime is 210 sec.  
Graft retry interval is 3 sec, max graft retries is 2.  
DR Internet address is 10.1.0.253, neighbor count is 1.  
Console#  
Displaying Neighbor Information  
You can display all the neighboring PIM-DM routers.  
Command Attributes  
Neighbor Address – IP address of the next-hop router.  
Interface – VLAN that is attached to this neighbor.  
Up time – The duration this entry has been active.  
Expire – The time before this entry will be removed.  
Mode – PIM mode used on this interface. (Only Dense Mode is supported.)  
3-264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Routing  
3
Web – Click Routing Protocol, PIM-DM, Neighbor Information.  
Figure 3-153 PIM-DM Neighbor Information  
CLI – This example displays the only neighboring PIM-DM router.  
Console#show ip pim neighbor  
Address  
VLAN Interface  
Uptime  
Expire  
Mode  
--------------- ---------------- -------- -------- -------  
10.1.0.253  
Console#  
1
613  
91  
Dense  
3-265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
3-266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Command Line Interface  
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).  
Using the Command Line Interface  
Accessing the CLI  
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection  
to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed  
by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's  
command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX  
system.  
Console Connection  
To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:  
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user  
names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and  
“guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI  
displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode  
(i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered,  
the CLI displays the “Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode  
(i.e., Normal Exec).  
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.  
3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.  
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:  
User Access Verification  
Username: admin  
Password:  
CLI session with the switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#  
Telnet Connection  
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your  
management station and any network device you want to manage over the network  
must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,  
separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion.  
For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, consists of a network  
portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).  
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Command Line Interface  
4
To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for  
the switch, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a  
different IP subnet. For example,  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254  
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to  
the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are  
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the  
network segment to which you are attached.  
After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by  
performing these steps:  
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the  
device you want to access.  
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display  
the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged  
access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the guest to show that you  
are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal Exec), where n indicates the  
number of the current Telnet session.  
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.  
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.  
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:  
Username: admin  
Password:  
CLI session with the switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Vty-0#  
Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Commands  
4
Entering Commands  
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.  
Keywords and Arguments  
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a  
command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the  
command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are  
keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5  
specifies the unit/port.  
You can enter commands as follows:  
• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.  
• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For  
example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup  
configuration, enter:  
Console>enable  
Console#show startup-config  
• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after  
the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator,  
enter:  
Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith  
Minimum Abbreviation  
The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a  
command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an  
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.  
Command Completion  
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a  
partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “logging history” example, typing  
log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”  
Getting Help on Commands  
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help  
command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list  
keywords or parameters.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Showing Commands  
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of  
keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or Privileged Exec) or  
configuration class (Global, ACL, DHCP, Interface, Line, Router, VLAN Database, or  
MSTP). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For  
example, the command “show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:  
Console#show ?  
access-group  
access-list  
arp  
bridge-ext  
calendar  
dns  
Access groups  
Access lists  
Information of ARP cache  
Bridge extend information  
Date information  
DNS information  
dot1x  
garp  
Show 802.1x content  
GARP property  
gvrp  
history  
hosts  
Show GARP information of interface  
Information of history  
Host information  
interfaces  
ip  
Information of interfaces  
IP information  
line  
logging  
mac  
TTY line information  
Show the contents of logging buffers  
MAC access lists  
mac-address-table Set configuration of the address table  
management  
map  
Show management IP filter  
Map priority  
marking  
port  
protocol-vlan  
public-key  
pvlan  
queue  
radius-server  
rip  
Specify marker  
Characteristics of the port  
Protocol-VLAN information  
Show information of public key  
Information of private VLAN  
Information of priority queue  
RADIUS server information  
RIP  
router  
Router  
running-config  
snmp  
The system configuration of running  
SNMP statistics  
sntp  
SNTP  
spanning-tree  
ssh  
Specify spanning-tree  
Secure shell  
standby  
startup-config  
system  
tacacs-server  
users  
version  
vlan  
vrrp  
Display HSRP information  
The system configuration of starting up  
Information of system  
Login by TACACS server  
Display information about terminal lines  
System hardware and software status  
Switch VLAN Virtual Interface  
Show vrrp  
Console#show  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Entering Commands  
4
The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:  
Console#show interfaces ?  
counters  
Information of interfaces counters  
protocol-vlan Protocol-vlan information  
status  
Information of interfaces status  
switchport  
Information of interfaces switchport  
Console#  
Partial Keyword Lookup  
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the  
initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command  
and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”  
Console#show s?  
snmp  
sntp  
spanning-tree  
ssh  
startup-config  
system  
Console#sh s  
Negating the Effect of Commands  
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel  
the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example,  
the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable  
logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect  
for all applicable commands.  
Using Command History  
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll  
back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command  
displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then  
executed.  
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed  
commands.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Understanding Command Modes  
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands  
generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.  
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable  
certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.  
Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a  
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the  
current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the  
following table:  
Table 4-1 General Command Modes  
Class  
Exec  
Mode  
Normal  
Privileged  
a
Configuration  
Global  
Access Control List  
DHCP  
Interface  
Line  
Multiple Spanning Tree  
Router  
VLAN Database  
a You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.  
You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.  
Exec Commands  
When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and  
password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest  
mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt. Only a limited number of the  
commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the  
Privileged Exec command mode (or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec  
mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The  
system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter  
Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable  
command, followed by the privileged level password “super” (page 4-28).  
To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:  
Username: admin  
Password: [admin login password]  
CLI session with the switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Entering Commands  
4
Username: guest  
Password: [guest login password]  
CLI session with the switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#enable  
Password: [privileged level password]  
Console#  
Configuration Commands  
Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch  
settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved  
when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile  
storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.  
The configuration commands are organized into different modes:  
• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration,  
and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community.  
• Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.  
• DHCP Configuration - These commands are used to configure the DHCP server.  
• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such as  
speed-duplex and negotiation.  
• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and Telnet  
configuration, and include command such as parity and databits.  
• Router Configuration - These commands configure global settings for unicast and  
multicast routing protocols.  
• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.  
• Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration - These commands configure settings for the  
selected multiple spanning tree instance.  
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged  
Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Console(config)#” which gives you  
access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following  
commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.  
Table 4-2 Configuration Command Modes  
Mode  
Command  
Prompt  
Page  
Line  
line {console | vty}  
Console(config-line)#  
Access  
Control List  
access-list ip standard  
Console(config-std-acl)  
access-list ip extended  
Console(config-ext-acl)  
access-list ip mask-precedence  
access-list mac  
access-list mac mask-precedence  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)  
Console(config-mac-acl)  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)  
DHCP  
Interface  
VLAN  
ip dhcp pool  
Console(config-dhcp)  
interface {ethernet port | port-channel id| vlan id} Console(config-if)#  
vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Console(config-router)  
MSTP  
Router  
spanning-tree mst-configuration  
router {rip | ospf | dvmrp | pim}  
For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration  
mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
.
.
.
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entering Commands  
4
Command Line Processing  
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters  
as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently  
available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial  
commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list  
of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for  
command-line processing:  
Table 4-3 Keystroke Commands  
Keystroke  
Function  
Ctrl-A  
Shifts cursor to start of command line.  
Shifts cursor to the left one character.  
Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.  
Shifts cursor to end of command line.  
Shifts cursor to the right one character.  
Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.  
Repeats current command line on a new line.  
Enters the next command line in the history buffer.  
Enters the last command.  
Ctrl-B  
Ctrl-C  
Ctrl-E  
Ctrl-F  
Ctrl-K  
Ctrl-L  
Ctrl-N  
Ctrl-P  
Ctrl-R  
Repeats current command line on a new line.  
Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.  
Deletes the last word typed.  
Ctrl-U  
Ctrl-W  
Esc-B  
Moves the cursor back one word.  
Esc-D  
Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.  
Moves the cursor forward one word.  
Esc-F  
Delete key or backspace key  
Erases a mistake when entering a command.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Groups  
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below.  
Table 4-4 Command Group Index  
Command Group  
Description  
Page  
Line  
Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet,  
including baud rate and console time-out  
General  
Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the  
system, or quitting the CLI  
System Management  
Controls system logs, system passwords, user name, browser  
management options, and a variety of other system information  
Flash/File  
Manages code image or switch configuration files  
Authentication  
Configures logon access using local or remote authentication;  
also configures port security and IEEE 802.1x port access control  
Access Control List  
SNMP  
Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP  
port number or TCP control code) or non-IP frames (based on MAC  
address or Ethernet type)  
Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access  
strings, and trap managers; also configures IP address filtering  
DHCP  
DNS  
Configures DHCP client, relay and server functions  
Configures DNS services.  
Interface  
Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports,  
aggregated links, and VLANs  
Mirror Port  
Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data  
passing through or the performance of the monitored port  
Rate Limiting  
Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4-162  
Link Aggregation  
Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks  
Address Table  
Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays  
current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time  
Spanning Tree  
VLANs  
Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch  
Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN  
groups; also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs  
GVRP and  
Bridge Extension  
Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning;  
shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB  
Priority  
Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted 4-207  
round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority for  
TCP traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP  
Multicast Filtering  
IP Interface  
Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, and specifies  
ports attached to a multicast router  
Configures IP address for the switch interfaces; also configures ARP  
parameters and static entries  
IP Routing  
Configures static and dynamic unicast routing  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Line Commands  
4
Table 4-4 Command Group Index (Continued)  
Command Group  
Multicast Routing  
Router Redundancy  
Description  
Page  
Configures multicast routing protocols DVMRP and PIM-DM  
Configures router redundancy to create primary and backup routers  
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:  
NE (Normal Exec)  
PE (Privileged Exec)  
VC (VLAN Database Configuration)  
MST (Multiple Spanning Tree)  
GC (Global Configuration)  
LC (Line Configuration)  
IC (Interface Configuration)  
ACL (Access Control List Configuration)  
DC (DHCP Server Configuration)  
RC (Router Configuration)  
Line Commands  
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100  
compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set  
communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).  
Table 4-5 Line Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
line  
Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line  
configuration mode  
GC  
login  
Enables password checking at login  
LC  
LC  
LC  
password  
Specifies a password on a line  
timeout login  
response  
Sets the interval that the system waits for a login attempt  
exec-timeout  
Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user  
input is detected  
LC  
password-thresh  
Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number of LC  
failed logon attempts  
a
Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible LC  
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the  
threshold set by the password-thresh command  
silent-time  
Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and LC  
generated by hardware  
databits  
Defines the generation of a parity bit  
Sets the terminal baud rate  
LC  
parity  
LC  
speed  
Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte  
Terminates a line connection  
LC  
stopbits  
disconnect  
show line  
PE  
Displays a terminal line's parameters  
NE, PE  
a These commands only apply to the serial port.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
line  
This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent  
line configuration commands.  
Syntax  
line {console | vty}  
console - Console terminal line.  
vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).  
Default Setting  
There is no default line.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “Vty” in  
screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication  
parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.  
Example  
To enter console line mode, enter the following command:  
Console(config)#line console  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
login  
This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable  
password checking and allow connections without a password.  
Syntax  
login [local]  
no login  
local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the  
user name specified with the username command.  
Default Setting  
login local  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Line Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:  
- login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the  
password line configuration command. When using this method, the  
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.  
- login local selects authentication via the user name and password  
specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this  
method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) or Privileged  
Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15  
respectively).  
- no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the  
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.  
• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure  
user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use  
the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.  
Example  
Console(config-line)#login local  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
password  
This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the  
password.  
Syntax  
password {0 | 7} password  
no password  
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password  
password - Character string that specifies the line password.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)  
Default Setting  
No password is specified.  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system  
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system  
shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system  
terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.  
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password  
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file  
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP  
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.  
Example  
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
timeout login response  
This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI.  
Use the no form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
timeout login response [seconds]  
no timeout login response  
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.  
(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)  
Default Setting  
• CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)  
• Telnet: 300 seconds  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is  
terminated for the session.  
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.  
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.  
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.  
Example  
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120  
Console(config-line)#  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Commands  
4
exec-timeout  
This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
exec-timeout [seconds]  
no exec-timeout  
seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.  
(Range: 0 - 65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)  
Default Setting  
CLI: No timeout  
Telnet: 10 minutes  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open;  
otherwise the session is terminated.  
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.  
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.  
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.  
Example  
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120  
Console(config-line)#  
password-thresh  
This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of  
failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.  
Syntax  
password-thresh [threshold]  
no password-thresh  
threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.  
(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)  
Default Setting  
The default value is three attempts.  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes  
silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt.  
(Use the silent-time command to set this interval.) When this threshold is  
reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.  
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.  
Example  
To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
silent-time  
This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible  
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the  
password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.  
Syntax  
silent-time [seconds]  
no silent-time  
seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.  
(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)  
Default Setting  
The default value is no silent-time.  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Example  
To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Commands  
4
databits  
This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and  
generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
databits {7 | 8}  
no databits  
• 7 - Seven data bits per character.  
• 8 - Eight data bits per character.  
Default Setting  
8 data bits per character  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from  
devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated,  
specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per  
character.  
Example  
To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#databits 7  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
parity  
This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the  
default setting.  
Syntax  
parity {none | even | odd}  
no parity  
none - No parity  
even - Even parity  
odd - Odd parity  
Default Setting  
No parity  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems  
often require a specific parity bit setting.  
Example  
To specify no parity, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#parity none  
Console(config-line)#  
speed  
This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the  
transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore  
the default setting.  
Syntax  
speed bps  
no speed  
bps - Baud rate in bits per second.  
(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps)  
Default Setting  
auto  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial  
port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be  
supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported. If  
you select the “auto” option, the switch will automatically detect the baud rate  
configured on the attached terminal, and adjust the speed accordingly.  
Example  
To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#speed 57600  
Console(config-line)#  
stopbits  
This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no  
form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
stopbits {1 | 2}  
• 1 - One stop bit  
• 2 - Two stop bits  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Line Commands  
4
Default Setting  
1 stop bit  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Example  
To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#stopbits 2  
Console(config-line)#  
disconnect  
This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.  
Syntax  
disconnect session-id  
session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console  
connection. (Range: 0-4)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection.  
Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or  
Telnet connection.  
Example  
Console#disconnect 1  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show line  
This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.  
Syntax  
show line [console | vty]  
console - Console terminal line.  
vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).  
Default Setting  
Shows all lines  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
To show all lines, enter this command:  
Console#show line  
Console configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: Disabled  
Silent time: Disabled  
Baudrate: 9600  
Databits: 8  
Parity: none  
Stopbits: 1  
Vty configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: 65535  
General Commands  
Table 4-6 General Commands  
Command  
enable  
Function  
Mode  
NE  
Page  
Activates privileged mode  
disable  
Returns to normal mode from privileged mode  
Activates global configuration mode  
Shows the command history buffer  
Restarts the system  
PE  
configure  
show history  
reload  
PE  
NE, PE  
PE  
end  
Returns to Privileged Exec mode  
any  
config.  
mode  
exit  
quit  
help  
?
Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI  
Exits a CLI session  
any  
NA  
NE, PE  
any  
Shows how to use help  
Shows options for command completion (context sensitive)  
any  
NA  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Commands  
4
enable  
This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional  
commands are available, and certain commands display additional information. See  
Syntax  
enable [level]  
level - Privilege level to log into the device.  
The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,  
15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.  
Default Setting  
Level 15  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec  
Command Usage  
• “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from  
Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable  
password command on page 4-28.)  
• The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the  
system is in privileged access mode.  
Example  
Console>enable  
Password: [privileged level password]  
Console#  
Related Commands  
disable  
This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal  
access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or  
Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the  
system is in normal access mode.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#disable  
Console>  
Related Commands  
configure  
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to  
modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global Configuration mode  
prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface  
Configuration, Line Configuration, VLAN Database Configuration, and Multiple  
Spanning Tree Configuration. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-6.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
show history  
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and  
10 Configuration commands.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Commands  
4
Example  
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command  
history buffer:  
Console#show history  
Execution command history:  
2 config  
1 show history  
Configuration command history:  
4 interface vlan 1  
3 exit  
2 interface vlan 1  
1 end  
Console#  
The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer  
when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the  
Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration  
modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the  
Execution history buffer (config).  
Console#!2  
Console#config  
Console(config)#  
reload  
This command restarts the system.  
Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also  
retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy  
running-config startup-config command.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command resets the entire system.  
Example  
This example shows how to reset the switch:  
Console#reload  
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
end  
This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, VLAN  
Database Configuration, and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration.  
Example  
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface  
Configuration mode:  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#  
exit  
This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the configuration  
program.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Any  
Example  
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global  
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#exit  
Press ENTER to start session  
User Access Verification  
Username:  
quit  
This command exits the configuration program.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
This example shows how to quit a CLI session:  
Console#quit  
Press ENTER to start session  
User Access Verification  
Username:  
System Management Commands  
These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, browser  
configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.  
Table 4-7 System Management Commands  
Command Group  
Device Designation  
User Access  
IP Filter  
Function  
Page  
Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch  
Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access  
Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access  
Enables management access via a web browser  
Enables management access via Telnet  
Web Server  
Telnet Server  
Secure Shell  
Event Logging  
SMTP Alerts  
Provides secure replacement for Telnet  
Controls logging of error messages  
Configures SMTP email alerts  
Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually  
System Status  
Frame Size  
Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information  
Enables support for jumbo frames  
Device Designation Commands  
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands  
Function  
Command  
prompt  
Mode Page  
Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode  
Specifies the host name for the switch  
Sets the system contact string  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
hostname  
snmp-server contact  
snmp-server location Sets the system location string  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
prompt  
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default  
prompt.  
Syntax  
prompt string  
no prompt  
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum  
length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
Console  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#prompt RD2  
RD2(config)#  
hostname  
This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form  
to restore the default host name.  
Syntax  
hostname name  
no hostname  
name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#hostname RD#1  
Console(config)#  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
User Access Commands  
The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section.  
This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a  
Telnet connection (page 4-11), user authentication via a remote authentication  
server (page 4-70), and host access authentication for specific ports (page 4-79).  
Table 4-9 User Access Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
username  
Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login GC  
Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC  
enable password  
username  
This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or  
changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or  
changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.  
Syntax  
username name {access-level level | nopassword |  
password {0 | 7} password}  
no username name  
name - The name of the user.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)  
access-level level - Specifies the user level.  
The device has two predefined privilege levels:  
0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.  
nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.  
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.  
password password - The authentication password for the user.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)  
Default Setting  
• The default access level is Normal Exec.  
• The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:  
Table 4-10 Default Login Settings  
username  
access-level  
password  
guest  
0
guest  
admin  
15  
admin  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password  
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during  
system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server.  
There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.  
Example  
This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user.  
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15  
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith  
Console(config)#  
enable password  
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password.  
Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the  
Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the  
default password.  
Syntax  
enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password  
no enable password [level level]  
level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)  
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.  
password - password for this privilege level.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)  
Default Setting  
• The default is level 15.  
• The default password is “super”  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change  
the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable  
command (page 4-21).  
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password  
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file  
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP  
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.  
Example  
Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin  
Console(config)#  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Related Commands  
IP Filter Commands  
Table 4-11 IP Filter Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
management  
show management  
Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC  
Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a  
browser  
PE  
management  
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management  
access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the  
default setting.  
Syntax  
[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}  
start-address [end-address]  
all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.  
• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.  
• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.  
telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.  
• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.  
• end-address - The end address of a range.  
Default Setting  
All addresses  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid  
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the  
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.  
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively.  
Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either  
individual addresses or address ranges.  
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the  
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses  
for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.  
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must  
delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by  
specifying both the start address and end address.  
Example  
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.  
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19  
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30  
Console#  
show management  
This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management  
access to the switch through various protocols.  
Syntax  
show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}  
all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.  
http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.  
snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.  
telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console#show management all-client  
Management Ip Filter  
Http-Client:  
Start ip address  
End ip address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
Snmp-Client:  
Start ip address  
End ip address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
Telnet-Client:  
Start ip address  
End ip address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
Console#  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Web Server Commands  
Table 4-12 Web Server Commands  
Function  
Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface  
Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip http port  
GC  
ip http server  
ip http secure-server  
ip http secure-port  
Enables HTTPS/SSL for encrypted communications  
Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS/SSL  
GC  
GC  
ip http port  
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.  
Use the no form to use the default port.  
Syntax  
ip http port port-number  
no ip http port  
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
80  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip http port 769  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip http server  
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use  
the no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip http server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ip http server  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip http secure-server  
This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the  
Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection)  
to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip http secure-server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.  
However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the  
same UDP port.  
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in  
your browser: https://device[:port_number]  
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:  
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.  
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the  
connection.  
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting  
data.  
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.  
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x and  
Netscape Navigator 4.x or later versions.  
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:  
Table 4-13 HTTPS System Support  
Web Browser  
Operating System  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP  
Netscape Navigator 4.76 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6  
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site  
Certificate” on page 3-49. Also refer to the copy command on page 4-64.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ip http secure-server  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
copy tftp https-certificate (4-64)  
ip http secure-port  
This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL connection to  
the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.  
Syntax  
ip http secure-port port_number  
no ip http secure-port  
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
443  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.  
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the  
HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:  
https://device:port_number  
Example  
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Telnet Server Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip telnet port  
ip telnet server  
Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface  
Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet  
GC  
GC  
ip telnet port  
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface. Use the  
no form to use the default port.  
Syntax  
ip telnet port port-number  
no ip telnet port  
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
23  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip telnet port 123  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip telnet server  
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet. Use the  
no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip telnet server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip telnet server  
Console(config)#  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
Related Commands  
Secure Shell Commands  
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix  
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows  
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote  
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.  
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure  
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide  
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.  
When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch uses a public-key  
that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access  
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and  
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the  
network arrives unaltered.  
This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server. However,  
note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when  
using this protocol to configure the switch.  
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.  
Table 4-14 Secure Shell Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip ssh server  
ip ssh timeout  
Enables the SSH server on the switch  
Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server  
Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client  
GC  
GC  
GC  
ip ssh  
authentication-retries  
ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size  
GC  
copy tftp public-key  
delete public-key  
Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE  
Deletes the public key for the specified user  
PE  
PE  
ip ssh crypto host-key Generates the host key  
generate  
ip ssh crypto zeroize  
ip ssh save host-key  
disconnect  
Clear the host key from RAM  
PE  
PE  
PE  
Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory  
Terminates a line connection  
show ip ssh  
Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE  
for authentication timeout and retries  
show ssh  
Displays the status of current SSH sessions  
PE  
PE  
show public-key  
show users  
Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host  
Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type PE  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key  
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the  
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote  
authentication server, as specified by the authentication login command on  
page 4-70. If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must  
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the  
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password  
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and  
enable the SSH server.  
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:  
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate  
command to create a host public/private key pair.  
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically  
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.  
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management  
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known  
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:  
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254  
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233  
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206  
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545  
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117  
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key  
command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client’s granted  
management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured  
locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 4-27.)  
The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys. The current  
firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown  
in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key:  
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880  
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199  
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938  
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671  
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19  
4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the  
authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.  
5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH  
server on the switch.  
6. Configure Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts  
to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a  
session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management Commands  
4
corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access. The  
following exchanges take place during this process:  
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.  
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.  
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random  
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.  
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the  
decrypted bytes back to the switch.  
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the  
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an  
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.  
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be  
given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the  
known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.  
ip ssh server  
This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no  
form to disable this service.  
Syntax  
[no] ip ssh server  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of  
client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.  
• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first  
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client  
to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.  
• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.  
Example  
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#ip ssh server  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip ssh timeout  
This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to restore  
the default setting.  
Syntax  
ip ssh timeout seconds  
no ip ssh timeout  
seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.  
(Range: 1-120)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the  
client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been  
established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout  
command for vty sessions.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh authentication-retries  
This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to  
reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
ip ssh authentication-retries count  
no ip ssh authentication-retries  
count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the  
interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)  
Default Setting  
3
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh server-key size  
This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default  
setting.  
Syntax  
ip ssh server-key size key-size  
no ip ssh server-key size  
key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)  
Default Setting  
768 bits  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.  
• The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512  
Console(config)#  
delete public-key  
This command deletes the specified user’s public key.  
Syntax  
delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]  
• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
dsa – DSA public key type.  
rsa – RSA public key type.  
Default Setting  
Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#delete public-key admin dsa  
Console#  
ip ssh crypto host-key generate  
This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).  
Syntax  
ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]  
dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.  
rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.  
Default Setting  
Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the ip ssh  
save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash memory.  
• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known  
hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually  
create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it.  
• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption  
method with the client trying to connect to it.  
Example  
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh crypto zeroize  
This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).  
Syntax  
ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]  
dsa – DSA key type.  
rsa – RSA key type.  
Default Setting  
Clears both the DSA and RSA key.  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use the no  
ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash memory.  
• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.  
Example  
Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh save host-key  
This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory.  
Syntax  
ip ssh save host-key [dsa | rsa]  
dsa – DSA key type.  
rsa – RSA key type.  
Default Setting  
Saves both the DSA and RSA key.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show ip ssh  
This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client  
access to the SSH server.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show ip ssh  
SSH Enabled - version 1.99  
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3  
Server key size: 768 bits  
Console#  
show ssh  
This command displays the current SSH server connections.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ssh  
Connection Version State  
Username Encryption  
admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
0
2.0  
Session-Started  
Console#  
Table 4-15 show ssh - display description  
Field  
Description  
Session  
Version  
State  
The session number. (Range: 0-3)  
The Secure Shell version number.  
The authentication negotiation state.  
(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started, Session-Started)  
Username  
Encryption  
The user name of the client.  
The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.  
Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES  
Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the client-to-server (ctos)  
and server-to-client (stoc):  
aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1  
aes192-cbc-hmac-sha1  
aes256-cbc-hmac-sha1  
3des-cbc-hmac-sha1  
blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1  
aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
aes192-cbc-hmac-md5  
aes256-cbc-hmac-md5  
3des-cbc-hmac-md5  
blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5  
Terminology:  
DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)  
3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key)  
aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key)  
blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key)  
cbc – cypher-block chaining  
sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes)  
md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
show public-key  
This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.  
Syntax  
show public-key [user [username]| host]  
username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
Default Setting  
Shows all public keys.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is  
entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are  
displayed.  
• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key  
(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 35), and  
the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first  
field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital  
Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.  
Example  
Console#show public-key host  
Host:  
RSA:  
1024 35  
1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868  
5443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627257141  
3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861  
5717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767  
16709574804776117  
DSA:  
ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/Dg0h2Hxc  
YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW/a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFfAKxl5fwFfv  
JlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw  
bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZvH+/p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR  
2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfT/yyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNOxrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm  
iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy  
DbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF/+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2  
o/dVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7  
w0W  
Console#  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Event Logging Commands  
Table 4-16 Event Logging Commands  
Function  
Command  
logging on  
Mode Page  
Controls logging of error messages  
GC  
GC  
logging history  
Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on  
severity  
logging host  
Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC  
messages  
logging facility  
logging trap  
Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages  
GC  
GC  
Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on  
severity  
clear logging  
show logging  
Clears messages from the logging buffer  
Displays the state of logging  
PE  
PE  
logging on  
This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error  
messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.  
Syntax  
[no] logging on  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory. You  
can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages  
that are stored.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging on  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
logging history  
This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity.  
The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.  
Syntax  
logging history {flash | ram} level  
no logging history {flash | ram}  
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on  
power reset).  
level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected  
level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)  
Table 4-17 Logging Levels  
Level Severity Name  
Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
debugging  
informational  
notifications  
warnings  
errors  
Debugging messages  
Informational messages only  
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start  
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)  
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)  
critical  
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free  
memory error - resource exhausted)  
1
0
alerts  
Immediate action needed  
System unusable  
emergencies  
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.  
Default Setting  
Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)  
RAM: warnings (level 7 - 0)  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority (i.e.,  
numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging history ram 0  
Console(config)#  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
logging host  
This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging  
messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.  
Syntax  
[no] logging host host_ip_address  
host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP  
addresses.  
• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3  
Console(config)#  
logging facility  
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. Use the  
no form to return the type to the default.  
Syntax  
[no] logging facility type  
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to  
dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)  
Default Setting  
23  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See  
RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the  
switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to  
store messages in the corresponding database.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging facility 19  
Console(config)#  
4-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
logging trap  
This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or  
limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity. Use this  
command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to  
disable remote logging.  
Syntax  
logging trap [level]  
no logging trap  
level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the  
selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on page 4-45.)  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Level 3 - 0  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets  
the minimum severity level to be saved.  
• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but  
restores the minimum severity level to the default.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging trap 4  
Console(config)#  
clear logging  
This command clears messages from the log buffer.  
Syntax  
clear logging [flash | ram]  
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on  
power reset).  
Default Setting  
Flash and RAM  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear logging  
Console#  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
show logging  
This command displays the logging configuration, along with any system and event  
messages stored in memory.  
Syntax  
show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}  
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on  
power reset).  
sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page 4-52).  
trap - Displays settings for the trap function.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for  
flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is  
“debugging” (i.e., default level 7 - 0), and lists one sample error.  
Console#show logging flash  
Syslog logging: Enable  
History logging in FLASH: level errors  
Console#show logging ram  
Syslog logging: Enable  
History logging in RAM: level debugging  
[0] 0:0:5 1/1/1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails."  
level: 3, module: 13, function: 0, and event no.: 0  
Console#  
Table 4-18 show logging flash - display description  
Field  
Description  
Syslog logging  
Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.  
History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.  
History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.  
Messages  
Any system and event messages stored in memory.  
4-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
The following example displays settings for the trap function.  
Console#show logging trap  
Syslog logging: Enable  
REMOTELOG status: disable  
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7  
REMOTELOG level type: Debugging messages  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 1.2.3.4  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
Console#  
Table 4-19 show logging trap - display description  
Description  
Field  
Syslog logging  
REMOTELOG status  
Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.  
Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command.  
REMOTELOG  
facility type  
The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging  
facility command.  
REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in  
the logging trap command.  
REMOTELOG  
server IP address  
The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.  
Related Commands  
SMTP Alert Commands  
These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert  
messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.  
Table 4-20 SMTP Alert Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
logging sendmail host  
logging sendmail level  
SMTP servers to receive alert messages  
Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages  
Email address used for “From” field of alert messages  
GC  
GC  
GC  
logging sendmail  
source-email  
logging sendmail  
destination-email  
Email recipients of alert messages  
GC  
logging sendmail  
Enables SMTP event handling  
GC  
show logging sendmail  
Displays SMTP event handler settings  
NE, PE  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
logging sendmail host  
This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages. Use the no  
form to remove an SMTP server.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail host ip_address  
ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert  
messages for event handling.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing. However, you  
must enter a separate command to specify each server.  
• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email  
alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.  
• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent  
mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command.  
If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to  
send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic  
interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a  
connection.)  
Example  
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.19  
Console(config)#  
logging sendmail level  
This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.  
Syntax  
logging sendmail level level  
level - One of the system message levels (page 4-45). Messages sent  
include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)  
Default Setting  
Level 7  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Command Usage  
The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or  
higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using  
Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)  
Example  
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0.  
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 3  
Console(config)#  
logging sendmail source-email  
This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.  
Syntax  
logging sendmail source-email email-address  
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.  
(Range: 1-41 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the  
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.  
Example  
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0.  
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email bill@this-company.com  
Console(config)#  
logging sendmail destination-email  
This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to  
remove a recipient.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address  
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.  
(Range: 1-41 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must  
enter a separate command to specify each recipient.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email ted@this-company.com  
Console(config)#  
logging sendmail  
This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this  
function.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#logging sendmail  
Console(config)#  
show logging sendmail  
This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show logging sendmail  
SMTP servers  
-----------------------------------------------  
192.168.1.19  
SMTP minimum severity level: 7  
SMTP destination email addresses  
-----------------------------------------------  
ted@this-company.com  
SMTP source email address: bill@this-company.com  
SMTP status: Enable  
Console#  
4-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Time Commands  
The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers  
(NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log  
to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the  
switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.  
Table 4-21 Time Commands  
Command  
sntp client  
Function  
Mode Page  
Accepts time from specified time servers  
Specifies one or more time servers  
Sets the interval at which the client polls for time  
Shows current SNTP configuration settings  
Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock  
Sets the system date and time  
GC  
sntp server  
sntp poll  
GC  
GC  
show sntp  
NE, PE  
GC  
clock timezone  
calendar set  
show calendar  
PE  
Displays the current date and time setting  
NE, PE  
sntp client  
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or  
SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to  
disable SNTP client requests.  
Syntax  
[no] sntp client  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and  
times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting  
from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).  
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the  
sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the  
interval set via the sntp poll command.  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19  
Console(config)#sntp poll 60  
Console(config)#sntp client  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show sntp  
Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002  
Poll interval: 60  
Current mode: unicast  
SNTP status : Enabled  
SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
Current server: 137.92.140.80  
Console#  
Related Commands  
sntp server  
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are  
issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the  
current list.  
Syntax  
sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]  
ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP).  
(Range: 1 - 3 addresses)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time  
updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in  
the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization  
requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.  
Example  
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19  
Console#  
4-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Related Commands  
sntp poll  
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is  
set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.  
Syntax  
sntp poll seconds  
no sntp poll  
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)  
Default Setting  
16 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode.  
Example  
Console(config)#sntp poll 60  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show sntp  
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP  
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending  
time synchronization requests (when the switch is set to SNTP client mode),  
and the current SNTP mode (i.e., client or broadcast).  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show sntp  
Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002  
Poll interval: 16  
Current mode: unicast  
SNTP status : Enabled  
SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
Current server: 137.92.140.80  
Console#  
clock timezone  
This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.  
Syntax  
clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc | after-utc}  
name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29 characters)  
hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 1-12 hours)  
minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)  
before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.  
after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal  
Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s  
prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to  
your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time  
zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.  
Example  
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
calendar set  
This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on  
your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time  
server.  
Syntax  
calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}  
hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0 - 23)  
min - Minute. (Range: 0 - 59)  
sec - Second. (Range: 0 - 59)  
day - Day of month. (Range: 1 - 31)  
month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august |  
september | october | november | december  
year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001 - 2101)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, February 1st, 2002.  
Console#calendar set 15:12:34 1 February 2002  
Console#  
show calendar  
This command displays the system clock.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show calendar  
15:12:34 February 1 2002  
Console#  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
System Status Commands  
Table 4-22 System Status Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
show startup-config  
Displays the contents of the configuration file (stored in flash  
memory) that is used to start up the system  
PE  
show running-config  
show system  
Displays the configuration data currently in use  
Displays system information  
PE  
NE, PE  
NE, PE  
show users  
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user  
name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients  
show version  
Displays version information for the system  
NE, PE  
show startup-config  
This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is  
used to start up the system.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to  
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in  
non-volatile memory.  
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group  
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,  
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following  
information:  
- SNMP community strings  
- Users (names and access levels)  
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)  
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface  
- Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)  
- IP address configured for VLANs  
- Routing protocol configuration settings  
- Spanning tree settings  
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet  
4-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show startup-config  
building startup-config, please wait.....  
!
!
username admin access-level 15  
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3  
!
username guest access-level 0  
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4  
!
enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca  
!
snmp-server community public ro  
snmp-server community private rw!  
!
vlan database  
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active  
!
interface vlan 1  
ip address dhcp  
!
line console  
!
line vty  
!
end  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show running-config  
This command displays the configuration information currently in use.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to  
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in  
non-volatile memory.  
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group  
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,  
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following  
information:  
- SNMP community strings  
- Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)  
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface  
- Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)  
- IP address configured for VLANs  
- Routing protocol configuration settings  
- Spanning tree settings  
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet  
Example  
Console#show running-config  
building running-config, please wait.....  
!
SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
!
!
snmp-server community private rw  
snmp-server community public ro  
!
!
username admin access-level 15  
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3  
username guest access-level 0  
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4  
enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca  
!
vlan database  
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active  
!
spanning-tree mst-configuration  
!
interface ethernet 1/1  
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged  
switchport native vlan 1  
.
.
.
!
interface vlan 1  
ip address 10.1.0.1 255.255.255.0  
!
!
!
no map IP precedence  
no map IP DSCP  
!
!
!
line console  
!
line vty  
!
end  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management Commands  
4
show system  
This command displays system information.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to “Displaying  
• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates  
“FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.  
Example  
Console#show system  
System description: 8 SFP ports + 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2/L3/L4 managed  
standalone switch  
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.57  
System information  
System Up time: 0 days, 1 hours, 23 minutes, and 44.61 seconds  
System Name  
: [NONE]  
System Location  
System Contact  
MAC address  
: [NONE]  
: [NONE]  
: 00-30-f1-47-58-3a  
: enable  
Web server  
Web server port  
Web secure server  
: 80  
: enable  
Web secure server port : 443  
Telnet server  
Telnet port  
Jumbo Frame  
POST result  
: enable  
: 23  
: Disabled  
DUMMY Test 1.................PASS  
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS  
DRAM Test....................PASS  
Timer Test...................PASS  
PCI Device 1 Test............PASS  
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS  
Done All Pass.Port 12 link-up notification.  
Console#  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
show users  
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP  
address of Telnet client.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to  
the Line (i.e., session) index number.  
Example  
Console#show users  
Username accounts:  
Username Privilege Public-Key  
-------- --------- ----------  
admin  
guest  
steve  
15  
0
15  
None  
None  
RSA  
Online users:  
Line  
Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.  
----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------  
0
* 1  
2
console  
VTY 0  
SSH 1  
admin  
admin  
steve  
0:14:14  
0:00:00  
0:00:06  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.19  
Web online users:  
Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).  
----------- -------------- -------- ------------------  
HTTP 192.168.1.19 admin 0:00:00  
1
Console#  
show version  
This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
detailed information on the items displayed by this command.  
4-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show version  
Unit1  
Serial number  
: A322043872  
: R01  
: 12  
Hardware version  
Number of ports  
Main power status  
: up  
Redundant power status : down  
Agent (master)  
Unit ID  
: 1  
Loader version  
: 2.1.0.0  
Boot ROM version  
: 2.0.2.1  
Operation code version : 1.0.2.5  
Console#  
Frame Size Commands  
Table 4-23 Frame Size Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
jumbo frame  
Enables support for jumbo frames  
GC  
jumbo frame  
This command enables support for jumbo frames. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] jumbo frame  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data  
transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes. Compared to  
standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames  
significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol  
encapsulation fields.  
• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a  
computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is  
operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes  
must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex  
connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo  
frames.  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
• Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm  
control to 64 packets per second. (See the switchport broadcast command  
Example  
Console(config)#jumbo frame  
Console(config)#  
Flash/File Commands  
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.  
Table 4-24 Flash/File Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
copy  
Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE  
memory or a TFTP server  
delete  
Deletes a file or code image  
PE  
PE  
PE  
GC  
dir  
Displays a list of files in flash memory  
Displays the files booted  
whichboot  
boot system  
Specifies the file or image used to start up the system  
copy  
This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file  
between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system  
code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be  
downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file  
transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the  
network connection.  
Syntax  
copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp}  
copy running-config {file | startup-config | tftp}  
copy startup-config {file | running-config | tftp}  
copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config | https-certificate |  
public-key}  
file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.  
running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current  
running configuration.  
startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.  
tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.  
https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the  
switch.  
- public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP  
4-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Flash/File Commands  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.  
• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter  
of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file  
names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the  
switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)  
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two  
operation code files.  
• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on  
available memory.  
• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the  
factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.  
• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the  
destination.  
• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP  
server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware,  
or contact your distributor for help.  
• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see “Replacing the Default  
Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-49. For information on configuring the  
switch to use HTTPS/SSL for a secure connection, see “ip http secure-server”  
Example  
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on  
the TFTP server:  
Console#copy file tftp  
Choose file type:  
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1  
Source file name: startup  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99  
Destination file name: startup.01  
TFTP completed.  
Success.  
Console#  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.  
Console#copy running-config file  
destination file name: startup  
Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#  
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:  
Console#copy tftp startup-config  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99  
Source configuration file name: startup.01  
Startup configuration file name [startup]:  
Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#  
This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It  
then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:  
Console#copy tftp https-certificate  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19  
Source certificate file name: SS-certificate  
Source private file name: SS-private  
Private password: ********  
Success.  
Console#reload  
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y  
This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from an TFTP server.  
Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured  
locally on the switch.  
Console#copy tftp public-key  
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19  
Choose public key type:  
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1  
Source file name: steve.pub  
Username: steve  
TFTP Download  
Success.  
Write to FLASH Programming.  
Success.  
Console#  
4-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash/File Commands  
4
delete  
This command deletes a file or image.  
Syntax  
delete filename  
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.  
• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.  
Example  
This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory.  
Console#delete test2.cfg  
Console#  
Related Commands  
dir  
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.  
Syntax  
dir [boot-rom | config | opcode [:filename]]  
The type of file or image to display includes:  
boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.  
config - Switch configuration file.  
opcode - Run-time operation code image file.  
filename - Name of the file or image. If this file exists but contains errors,  
information on this file cannot be shown.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all  
files.  
• File information is shown below:  
Table 4-25 File Directory Information  
Description  
Column Heading  
file name  
file type  
The name of the file.  
File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.  
Shows if this file is used when the system is started.  
The length of the file in bytes.  
startup  
size  
Example  
The following example shows how to display all file information:  
Console#dir  
file name  
file type startup size (byte)  
-------------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------  
diag_0060 Boot-Rom image  
run_01642 Operation Code  
run_0200 Operation Code  
Y
N
Y
N
Y
111360  
1074304  
1083008  
2574  
Factory_Default_Config.cfg  
startup  
Config File  
Config File  
2710  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
Total free space:  
0
Console#  
whichboot  
This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See  
the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by  
this command.  
Console#whichboot  
file name  
file type startup size (byte)  
----------------- -------------- ------- -----------  
diag_0060 Boot-Rom image  
run_0200 Operation Code  
Y
Y
Y
111360  
1083008  
2710  
startup  
Config File  
Console#  
4-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Flash/File Commands  
4
boot system  
This command specifies the file or image used to start up the system.  
Syntax  
boot system {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename  
The type of file or image to set as a default includes:  
boot-rom - Boot ROM.  
config - Configuration file.  
opcode - Run-time operation code.  
The colon (:) is required.  
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• A colon (:) is required after the specified file type.  
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.  
Example  
Console(config)#boot system config: startup  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Authentication Commands  
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for  
management access using local or remote authentication methods. You can also  
enable port-based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802.1x.  
Table 4-26 Authentication Commands  
Command Group  
Authentication Sequence  
RADIUS Client  
Function  
Page  
Defines logon authentication method and precedence  
Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server  
Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS+ server  
Configures secure addresses for a port  
TACACS+ Client  
Port Security  
Port Authentication  
Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1x  
Authentication Sequence  
Table 4-27 Authentication Sequence Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
authentication login  
authentication enable  
Defines logon authentication method and precedence  
GC  
GC  
Defines the authentication method and precedence for  
command mode change  
authentication login  
This command defines the login authentication method and precedence. Use the no  
form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}  
no authentication login  
local - Use local password.  
radius - Use RADIUS server password.  
tacacs - Use TACACS server password.  
Default Setting  
Local  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort  
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that  
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the  
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.  
4-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Authentication Commands  
4
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level  
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and  
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.  
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate  
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication login  
radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is  
verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is  
attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available,  
the local user name and password is checked.  
Example  
Console(config)#authentication login radius  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-27)  
authentication enable  
This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when  
changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the  
enable command (see page 4-21). Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}  
no authentication enable  
local - Use local password only.  
radius - Use RADIUS server password only.  
tacacs - Use TACACS server password.  
Default Setting  
Local  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort  
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that  
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the  
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.  
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level  
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and  
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.  
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate  
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication  
enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS  
server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then  
4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
authentication is attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server  
is not available, the local user name and password is checked.  
Example  
Console(config)#authentication enable radius  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (4-28)  
RADIUS Client  
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication  
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to  
RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a  
database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for  
each user or group that require management access to a switch.  
Table 4-28 RADIUS Client Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
radius-server host  
radius-server port  
radius-server key  
radius-server retransmit  
radius-server timeout  
show radius-server  
Specifies the RADIUS server  
Sets the RADIUS server network port  
Sets the RADIUS encryption key  
Sets the number of retries  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC  
Shows the current RADIUS settings PE  
radius-server host  
This command specifies the RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
radius-server host host_ip_address  
no radius-server host  
host_ip_address - IP address of server.  
Default Setting  
10.1.0.1  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server host 192.168.1.25  
Console(config)#  
4-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Authentication Commands  
4
radius-server port  
This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
radius-server port port_number  
no radius-server port  
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication  
messages. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
1812  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server port 181  
Console(config)#  
radius-server key  
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
radius-server key key_string  
no radius-server key  
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.  
Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server key green  
Console(config)#  
4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
radius-server retransmit  
This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
radius-server retransmit number_of_retries  
no radius-server retransmit  
number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate  
logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1 - 30)  
Default Setting  
2
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5  
Console(config)#  
radius-server timeout  
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the  
RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
radius-server timeout number_of_seconds  
no radius-server timeout  
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply  
before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
5
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10  
Console(config)#  
show radius-server  
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Authentication Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show radius-server  
Server IP address: 10.1.0.1  
Communication key with radius server:  
Server port number: 1812  
Retransmit times: 2  
Request timeout: 5  
Console#  
TACACS+ Client  
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon  
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control  
access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server  
contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege  
levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.  
Table 4-29 TACACS+ Client Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
tacacs-server host  
tacacs-server port  
tacacs-server key  
show tacacs-server  
Specifies the TACACS+ server  
Specifies the TACACS+ server network port  
Sets the TACACS+ encryption key  
Shows the current TACACS+ settings  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
tacacs-server host  
This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
tacacs-server host host_ip_address  
no tacacs-server host  
host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.  
Default Setting  
10.11.12.13  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25  
Console(config)#  
4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
tacacs-server port  
This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
tacacs-server port port_number  
no tacacs-server port  
port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication  
messages. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
49  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181  
Console(config)#  
tacacs-server key  
This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
tacacs-server key key_string  
no tacacs-server key  
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the  
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.  
(Maximum length: 20 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green  
Console(config)#  
4-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication Commands  
4
show tacacs-server  
This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show tacacs-server  
Remote TACACS server configuration:  
Server IP address: 10.11.12.13  
Communication key with TACACS server: green  
Server port number: 49  
Console#  
Port Security Commands  
These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When using port  
security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it  
has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source  
addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be  
authorized to access the network. The port will drop any incoming frames with a  
source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another  
port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port,  
the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by  
disabling the port and sending a trap message.  
Table 4-30 Port Security Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
port security  
Configures a secure port  
IC  
mac-address-table static  
show mac-address-table  
Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN  
Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database  
GC  
PE  
4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
port security  
This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any  
keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to  
restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum  
number of allowed addresses.  
Syntax  
port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}  
| max-mac-count address-count]  
no port security [action | max-mac-count]  
action - Response to take when port security is violated.  
- shutdown - Disable port only.  
- trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.  
- trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.  
• max-mac-count  
- address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be  
learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024)  
Default Setting  
Status: Disabled  
Action: None  
Maximum Addresses: 0  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on  
the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only  
incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static  
address table will be accepted.  
• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the number of  
addresses, and then use the port security command to enable security on  
the port.  
• Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port security  
and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.  
• You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac-address-table  
static command.  
• A secure port has the following restrictions:  
- Cannot use port monitoring.  
- Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.  
- Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.  
- Cannot be a trunk port.  
• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled  
using the no shutdown command.  
4-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Authentication Commands  
4
Example  
The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a  
security violation to issue a trap message:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#port security action trap  
Related Commands  
802.1x Port Authentication  
The switch supports IEEE 802.1x (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents  
unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for  
authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server  
using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).  
Table 4-31 802.1x Port Authentication Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type  
GC  
GC  
GC  
dot1x default  
Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values  
dot1x max-req  
Sets the maximum number of times that the switch  
retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client  
before it times out the authentication session  
dot1x port-control  
Sets dot1x mode for a port interface  
IC  
dot1x operation-mode  
dot1x re-authenticate  
dot1x re-authentication  
dot1x timeout quiet-period  
Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port  
Forces re-authentication on specific ports  
Enables re-authentication for all ports  
IC  
PE  
GC  
GC  
Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max  
Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to  
acquire a new client  
dot1x timeout re-authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must GC  
be re-authenticated  
dot1x timeout tx-period  
Sets the time period during an authentication session that GC  
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet  
show dot1x  
Shows all dot1x related information  
PE  
4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
authentication dot1x default  
This command sets the default authentication server type. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
authentication dot1x default radius  
no authentication dot1x  
Default Setting  
RADIUS  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#authentication dot1x default radius  
Console(config)#  
dot1x default  
This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default  
values.  
Syntax  
dot1x default  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x default  
Console(config)#  
dot1x max-req  
This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an  
EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication  
session. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
dot1x max-req count  
no dot1x max-req  
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)  
Default  
2
4-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Authentication Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x max-req 2  
Console(config)#  
dot1x port-control  
This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore  
the default.  
Syntax  
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}  
no dot1x port-control  
auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the  
RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.  
force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either  
dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients,  
either dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
Default  
force-authorized  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto  
Console(config-if)#  
4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
dot1x operation-mode  
This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an  
802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to  
single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the  
default maximum count.  
Syntax  
dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count count]}  
no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]  
single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.  
• multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.  
• max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.  
- count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.  
(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)  
Default  
Single-host  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the  
dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command (page 4-105).  
• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass  
authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access. Similarly, a  
port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails  
re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10  
Console(config-if)#  
dot1x re-authenticate  
This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.  
Syntax  
dot1x re-authenticate [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
4-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Authentication Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#dot1x re-authenticate  
Console#  
dot1x re-authentication  
This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports. Use the no  
form to disable re-authentication.  
Syntax  
[no] dot1x re-authentication  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x re-authentication  
Console(config)#  
dot1x timeout quiet-period  
This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count  
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to  
reset the default.  
Syntax  
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds  
no dot1x timeout quiet-period  
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default  
60 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350  
Console(config)#  
4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
dot1x timeout re-authperiod  
This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be  
re-authenticated.  
Syntax  
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds  
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod  
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default  
3600 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300  
Console(config)#  
dot1x timeout tx-period  
This command sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session  
before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to reset to the default value.  
Syntax  
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds  
no dot1x timeout tx-period  
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default  
30 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300  
Console(config)#  
4-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication Commands  
4
show dot1x  
This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a  
specific interface.  
Syntax  
show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]  
• statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.  
• interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the following information:  
Global 802.1X Parameters – Displays the global port access control  
parameters that can be configured for this switch as described in the  
preceding pages, including reauth-enabled (page 4-83), reauth-period  
(page 4-84), quiet-period (page 4-83), tx-period (page 4-84), and max-req  
(page 4-80). It also displays the following global parameters which are set  
to a fixed value, including the following items:  
- supp-timeout  
- server-timeout  
- reauth-max  
– Supplicant timeout.  
– Server timeout.  
– Maximum number of reauthentication attempts.  
802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for  
each interface, including the following items:  
- Status  
- Mode  
– Administrative state for port access control.  
– Dot1x port control mode (page 4-81).  
- Authorized  
– Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).  
802.1X Port Details – Displays detailed port access control settings for each  
interface as described in the preceding pages, including administrative  
status for port access control, Operation mode (page 4-82), Max count  
(page 4-82), and Port Control (page 4-81). It also displays the following  
information:  
- Status  
– Authorization status (authorized or unauthorized).  
– MAC address of authorized client.  
- Supplicant  
- Current Identifier – Current unit among multiple hosts  
Authenticator State Machine  
- State  
– Current state (including initialize, disconnected,  
connecting, authenticating, authenticated, aborting,  
held, force_authorized, force_unauthorized).  
– Number of times connecting state is re-entered.  
- Reauth Count  
4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Backend State Machine  
- State  
– Current state (including request, response,  
success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).  
– Number of EAP Request packets sent to the  
Supplicant without receiving a response.  
- Request Count  
- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success,  
Failure or Request packet received from the  
Authentication Server.  
Reauthentication State Machine  
- State  
– Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).  
Example  
Console#show dot1x  
Global 802.1X Parameters  
reauth-enabled: yes  
reauth-period: 300  
quiet-period:  
tx-period:  
supp-timeout:  
350  
300  
30  
server-timeout: 30  
reauth-max:  
2
max-req:  
2
802.1X Port Summary  
Port Name  
1/1  
Status  
disabled  
disabled  
Operation Mode  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
Mode  
ForceAuthorized  
ForceAuthorized  
Authorized  
yes  
1/2  
n/a  
.
.
.
1/11  
1/12  
disabled  
disabled  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
ForceAuthorized  
Auto  
yes  
yes  
802.1X Port Details  
802.1X is disabled on port 1  
.
.
.
802.1X is enabled on port 12  
Status  
Authorized  
Operation mode  
Single-Host  
Max count  
5
Port-control  
Supplicant  
Auto  
00-e0-29-94-34-65  
Current Identifier 4  
Authenticator State Machine  
State  
Authenticated  
Reauth Count  
0
Backend State Machine  
State  
Idle  
Request Count  
0
Identifier(Server) 3  
Reauthentication State Machine  
State  
Initialize  
Console#  
4-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Access Control List Commands  
4
Access Control List Commands  
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,  
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based  
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add  
the required rules, specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are  
checked, and then bind the list to a specific port.  
Access Control Lists  
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,  
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress  
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as  
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no  
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match  
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.  
There are three filtering modes:  
• Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source IP address.  
• Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source or destination  
IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the TCP protocol  
is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.  
• MAC ACL mode (MAC-ACL) filters packets based on the source or destination  
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).  
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:  
• This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering. However, you can  
only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering, and one  
IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering. In other words, only four  
ACLs can be bound to an interface – Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC  
ACL and Egress MAC ACL.  
• When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter, all entries in the ACL  
must be deny rules. Otherwise, the bind operation will fail.  
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.  
• The maximum number of ACLs is also 32.  
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound the  
ports should not exceed 20.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set  
the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.  
• The switch does not support the explicit “deny any any” rule for the egress IP ACL  
or the egress MAC ACLs. If these rules are included in ACL, and you attempt to  
bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking, the bind operation will fail.  
• Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination-mac-known packets, not for multicast,  
broadcast, or destination-mac-unknown packets.  
4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:  
1. User-defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports.  
2. User-defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports.  
3. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
4. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
5. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
6. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
7. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.  
Masks for Access Control Lists  
You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked. The  
switch includes two system default masks that pass/filter packets matching the  
permit/deny the rules specified in an ingress ACL. You can also configure up to  
seven user-defined masks for an ACL. A mask must be bound exclusively to one of  
the basic ACL types (i.e., Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL or  
Egress MAC ACL), but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type.  
Table 4-32 Access Control List Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
IP ACLs  
Configures ACLs based on IP addresses, TCP/UDP port number,  
protocol type, and TCP control code  
MAC ACLs  
Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and  
Ethernet type  
ACL Information  
Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port 4-112  
IP ACLs  
Table 4-33 IP ACL Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
access-list ip  
permit, deny  
permit, deny  
Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode  
Filters packets matching a specified source IP address  
GC  
STD-ACL  
EXT-ACL  
Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including  
source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP port number,  
protocol type, and TCP control code  
show ip access-list  
Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs  
PE  
access-list ip  
mask-precedence  
Changes to the mode for configuring access control masks GC  
mask  
Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules  
IP-Mask  
show access-list ip  
mask-precedence  
Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs  
PE  
ip access-group  
Adds a port to an IP ACL  
IC  
show ip access-group  
map access-list ip  
Shows port assignments for IP ACLs  
PE  
IC  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for  
packets matching an ACL rule  
4-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Access Control List Commands  
4
Table 4-33 IP ACL Commands (Continued)  
Function  
show map access-list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
Command  
Mode  
Page  
match access-list ip  
Changes the 802.1p priority, IP Precedence, or DSCP  
Priority of a frame matching the defined rule (i.e., also called  
packet marking)  
IC  
show marking  
Displays the current configuration for packet marking  
PE  
access-list ip  
This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or  
extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.  
Syntax  
[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl_name  
standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP  
address.  
extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or  
destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• An egress ACL must contain all deny rules.  
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,  
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.  
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.  
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the  
exact text of a previously configured rule.  
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.  
Example  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-90  
4-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
permit, deny (Standard ACL)  
This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for  
packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.  
Syntax  
[no] {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}  
any – Any source IP address.  
source – Source IP address.  
bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.  
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Standard ACL  
Command Usage  
• New rules are appended to the end of the list.  
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from  
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate  
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the  
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP  
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.  
Example  
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and  
another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
Related Commands  
4-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
permit, deny (Extended ACL)  
This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for  
packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source or  
destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes. Use the no form to remove a rule.  
Syntax  
[no] {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]  
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}  
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}  
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]  
[source-port sport [bitmask]] [destination-port dport [port-bitmask]]  
[no] {permit | deny} tcp  
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}  
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}  
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]  
[source-port sport [bitmask]] [destination-port dport [port-bitmask]]  
[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]  
protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)  
source – Source IP address.  
destination – Destination IP address.  
address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.  
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.  
• precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)  
• tos – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)  
dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)  
24  
sport – Protocol source port number. (Range: 0-65535)  
dport – Protocol24 destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)  
port-bitmask – Decimal number representing the port bits to match.  
(Range: 0-65535)  
control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag  
bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)  
flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Extended ACL  
24. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.  
4-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.  
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from  
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate  
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the  
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP  
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.  
• You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However, if  
DSCP is used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.  
• The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an equivalent bit  
mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the  
equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit.  
The following bits may be specified:  
- 1 (fin) – Finish  
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize  
- 4 (rst) – Reset  
- 8 (psh) – Push  
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement  
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer  
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the  
following flags set:  
- SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”  
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”  
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”  
Example  
This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet  
10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0)  
equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination  
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
destination-port 80  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP  
control code set to “SYN.”  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
control-flag 2 2  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
4-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Access Control List Commands  
4
Related Commands  
show ip access-list  
This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.  
Syntax  
show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl_name]  
standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.  
extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip access-list standard  
IP standard access-list david:  
permit host 10.1.1.21  
permit 168.92.0.0 0.0.15.255  
Console#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-90  
access-list ip mask-precedence  
This command changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control  
masks. Use the no form to delete the mask table.  
Syntax  
[no] access-list ip mask-precedence {in | out}  
in – Ingress mask for ingress ACLs.  
out – Egress mask for egress ACLs.  
Default Setting  
Default system mask: Filter inbound packets according to specified IP ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs.  
• The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by  
order of the rules, but instead by the order of the masks; i.e., the first mask  
that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or  
set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.  
Example  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#  
Related Commands  
mask (IP ACL)  
This command defines a mask for IP ACLs. This mask defines the fields to check in  
the IP header. Use the no form to remove a mask.  
Syntax  
[no] mask [protocol]  
{any | host | source-bitmask}  
{any | host | destination-bitmask}  
[precedence] [tos] [dscp]  
[source-port [port-bitmask]] [destination-port [port-bitmask]]  
[control-flag [flag-bitmask]]  
protocol – Check the protocol field.  
any – Any address will be matched.  
host – The address must be for a host device, not a subnetwork.  
source-bitmask – Source address of rule must match this bitmask.  
• destination-bitmask – Destination address of rule must match this bitmask.  
• precedence – Check the IP precedence field.  
tos – Check the TOS field.  
• dscp – Check the DSCP field.  
• source-port – Check the protocol source port field.  
• destination-port – Check the protocol destination port field.  
• port-bitmask – Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask.  
(Range: 0-65535)  
• control-flag – Check the field for control flags.  
flag-bitmask – Control flags of rule must match this bitmask. (Range: 0-63)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Access Control List Commands  
4
Command Mode  
IP Mask  
Command Usage  
• Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a  
match is found. The order in which these packets are checked is determined  
by the mask, and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered.  
• First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping  
an ACL to an interface.  
• If you enter dscp, you cannot enter tos or precedence. You can enter both  
tos and precedence without dscp.  
• Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination  
port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes.  
Example  
This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules. Each rule is checked in  
order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries. The first entry matching  
a mask is applied to the inbound packet.  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#  
This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules  
are entered into the ACL. In the following example, packets with the source address  
10.1.1.1 are dropped because the “deny 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255” rule has the  
higher precedence according the “mask host any” entry.  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard A2  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-std-acl)#deny 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255  
Console(config-std-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#  
4-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to  
the IP host 171.69.198.102, and permit access to any others.  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard A2  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit any  
Console(config-std-acl)#deny host 171.69.198.102  
Console(config-std-acl)#end  
Console#show access-list  
IP standard access-list A2:  
deny host 171.69.198.102  
permit any  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group A2 in  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show access-list  
IP standard access-list A2:  
deny host 171.69.198.102  
permit any  
Console#  
This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets  
leaving network 171.69.198.0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23.  
Console(config)#access-list ip extended A3  
Console(config-ext-acl)#deny host 171.69.198.5 any  
Console(config-ext-acl)#deny 171.69.198.0 255.255.255.0 any source-port 23  
Console(config-ext-acl)#end  
Console#show access-list  
IP extended access-list A3:  
deny host 171.69.198.5 any  
deny 171.69.198.0 255.255.255.0 any source-port 23  
Console#config  
Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence out  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any source-port  
Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/15  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group A3 out  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show access-list  
IP extended access-list A3:  
deny 171.69.198.0 255.255.255.0 any source-port 23  
deny host 171.69.198.5 any  
IP egress mask ACL:  
mask 255.255.255.0 any source-port  
Console#  
4-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Access Control List Commands  
4
This is a more comprehensive example. It denies any TCP packets in which the  
SYN bit is ON, and permits all other packets. It then sets the ingress mask to check  
the deny rule first, and finally binds port 1 to this ACL. Note that once the ACL is  
bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in which the rules are  
displayed is determined by the associated mask.  
Switch(config)#access-list ip extended 6  
Switch(config-ext-acl)#permit any any  
Switch(config-ext-acl)#deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2  
Switch(config-ext-acl)#end  
Console#show access-list  
IP extended access-list A6:  
permit any any  
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2  
Console#configure  
Switch(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in  
Switch(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask protocol any any control-flag 2  
Switch(config-ip-mask-acl)#end  
Console#sh access-list  
IP extended access-list A6:  
permit any any  
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2  
IP ingress mask ACL:  
mask protocol any any control-flag 2  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group A6 in  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show access-list  
IP extended access-list A6:  
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2  
permit any any  
IP ingress mask ACL:  
mask protocol any any control-flag 2  
Console#  
show access-list ip mask-precedence  
This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs.  
Syntax  
show access-list ip mask-precedence [in | out]  
in – Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs.  
out – Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show access-list ip mask-precedence  
IP ingress mask ACL:  
mask host any  
mask 255.255.255.0 any  
Console#  
4-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
ip access-group  
This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.  
Syntax  
[no] ip access-group acl_name {in | out}  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.  
out – Indicates that this list applies to egress packets.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.  
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the  
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.  
Example  
Console(config)#int eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group standard david in  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show ip access-group  
This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip access-group  
Interface ethernet 1/2  
IP standard access-list david  
Console#  
4-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
Related Commands  
map access-list ip  
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule. The  
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it  
is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map access-list ip acl_name cos cos-value  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
Command Usage  
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule.  
• A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the  
output queues as shown in the following table. For information on mapping the  
CoS values to output queues, see queue cos-map on page 4-210.  
Table 4-34 Mapping CoS Values to IP ACLs  
Priority  
Queue  
0
1
1
2
2
0
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
show map access-list ip  
This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface.  
(The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.)  
Syntax  
show map access-list ip [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show map access-list ip  
Access-list to COS of Eth 1/4  
Access-list ALS1 cos 0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
match access-list ip  
This command changes the IEEE 802.1p priority, IP Precedence, or DSCP Priority  
of a frame matching the defined ACL rule. (This feature is commonly referred to as  
ACL packet marking.) Use the no form to remove the ACL marker.  
Syntax  
match access-list ip acl_name  
[set priority priority] {set tos tos_value | set dscp dscp_value}  
no match access-list ip acl_name  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
priority – Class of Service value in the IEEE 802.1p priority tag.  
(Range: 0-7; 7 is the highest priority)  
• tos_value – IP Precedence value. (Range: 0-7)  
dscp_value – Differentiated Services Code Point value. (Range: 0-63)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Access Control List Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities  
based on an ACL rule.  
• Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802.1p priority tag. This tag is  
also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag. To specify this  
priority, use the set priority keywords.  
• The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS)  
octet. The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or  
six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. To specify the  
IP precedence priority, use the set tos keywords. To specify the DSCP  
priority, use the set dscp keywords. Note that the IP frame header can include  
either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type.  
• The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP  
Priority, and then 802.1p priority.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12  
Console(config-if)#match access-list ip bill set dscp 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show marking  
This command displays the current configuration for packet marking.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show marking  
Interface ethernet 1/12  
match access-list IP bill set DSCP 0  
match access-list MAC a set priority 0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
MAC ACLs  
Table 4-35 MAC ACL Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
access-list mac  
permit, deny  
Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode  
Filters packets matching a specified source and  
destination address, packet format, and Ethernet type  
MAC-ACL  
show mac access-list  
Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs  
PE  
access-list mac  
mask-precedence  
Changes to the mode for configuring access control masks GC  
mask  
Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules  
MAC-Mask 4-106  
show access-list mac  
mask-precedence  
Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs  
PE  
mac access-group  
Adds a port to a MAC ACL  
IC  
show mac access-group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs  
PE  
map access-list mac  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for IC  
packets matching an ACL rule  
show map access-list mac Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
match access-list mac  
Changes the 802.1p priority of a frame matching the  
defined rule (i.e., also called packet marking)  
IC  
show marking  
Displays the current configuration for packet marking  
PE  
access-list mac  
This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode.  
Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.  
Syntax  
[no] access-list mac acl_name  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• An egress ACL must contain all deny rules.  
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,  
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.  
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.  
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the  
exact text of a previously configured rule.  
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.  
4-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Access Control List Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#access-list mac jerry  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-103  
permit, deny (MAC ACL)  
This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a  
specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or  
Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.  
Syntax  
[no]  
{
{
{
permit deny}  
|
any  
any  
|
|
host source | source address-bitmask}  
host destination | destination address-bitmask}  
[vid vid vid-bitmask] [ethertype protocol [protocol-bitmask]]  
Note:- The default is for Ethernet II packets.  
[no]  
[no]  
[no]  
[no]  
{
{
{
permit deny} tagged-eth2  
|
any  
any  
|
|
host source | source address-bitmask}  
host destination | destination address-bitmask}  
[vid vid vid-bitmask] [ethertype protocol [protocol-bitmask]]  
{
{
{
permit deny} untagged-eth2  
any  
any  
|
|
|
host source | source address-bitmask}  
host destination | destination address-bitmask}  
[ethertype protocol [protocol-bitmask]]  
{
{
{
permit deny} tagged-802.3  
any  
any  
|
|
|
host source | source address-bitmask}  
host destination | destination address-bitmask}  
[vid vid vid-bitmask]  
{
{
{
permit deny} untagged-802.3  
any  
any  
|
|
|
host source | source address-bitmask}  
host destination | destination address-bitmask}  
tagged-eth2 – Tagged Ethernet II packets.  
untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.  
tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.  
untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.  
any – Any MAC source or destination address.  
host – A specific MAC address.  
source – Source MAC address.  
4-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.  
address-bitmask25 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal format).  
• vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4095)  
vid-bitmask25  
protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 600-fff hex.)  
protocol-bitmask25 – Protocol bitmask. (Range: 600-fff hex.  
VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4095)  
)
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
MAC ACL  
Command Usage  
• New rules are added to the end of the list.  
• The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.  
• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few  
of the more common types include the following:  
- 0800 - IP  
- 0806 - ARP  
- 8137 - IPX  
Example  
This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address  
00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.  
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
Related Commands  
show mac access-list  
This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.  
Syntax  
show mac access-list [acl_name]  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
25. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.  
4-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show mac access-list  
MAC access-list jerry:  
permit any 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800  
Console#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-103  
access-list mac mask-precedence  
This command changes to MAC Mask mode used to configure access control  
masks. Use the no form to delete the mask table.  
Syntax  
[no] access-list ip mask-precedence {in | out}  
in – Ingress mask for ingress ACLs.  
out – Egress mask for egress ACLs.  
Default Setting  
Default system mask: Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or  
set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.  
• A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs.  
• The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by  
order of the rules, but instead by the order of the masks; i.e., the first mask  
that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet.  
Example  
Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence in  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#  
Related Commands  
4-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
mask (MAC ACL)  
This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs. This mask defines the fields to check  
in the packet header. Use the no form to remove a mask.  
Syntax  
[no] mask [pktformat]  
{any | host | source-bitmask} {any | host | destination-bitmask}  
[vid [vid-bitmask]] [ethertype [ethertype-bitmask]]  
pktformat – Check the packet format field. (If this keyword must be used in  
the mask, the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match.)  
any – Any address will be matched.  
host – The address must be for a single node.  
source-bitmask – Source address of rule must match this bitmask.  
• destination-bitmask – Destination address of rule must match this bitmask.  
• vid – Check the VLAN ID field.  
vid-bitmask – VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask.  
• ethertype – Check the Ethernet type field.  
ethertype-bitmask – Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
MAC Mask  
Command Usage  
• Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL.  
• Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a  
match is found. The order in which these packets are checked is determined  
by the mask, and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered.  
• First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before  
mapping an ACL to an interface.  
4-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Access Control List Commands  
4
Example  
This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port. You  
can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask.  
Console(config)#access-list mac M4  
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any any  
Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-eth2 00-11-11-11-11-11  
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid 3  
Console(config-mac-acl)#end  
Console#show access-list  
MAC access-list M4:  
permit any any  
deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3  
Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence in  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#mask pktformat ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group M4 in  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show access-list  
MAC access-list M4:  
deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3  
permit any any  
MAC ingress mask ACL:  
mask pktformat host any vid  
Console#  
This example creates an Egress MAC ACL.  
Console(config)#access-list mac M5  
Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-802.3 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any  
Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-eth2 00-11-11-11-11-11  
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806  
Console(config-mac-acl)#end  
Console#show access-list  
MAC access-list M5:  
deny tagged-802.3 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any  
deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806  
Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence out  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#mask pktformat ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid  
Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group M5 out  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show access-list  
MAC access-list M5:  
deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806  
deny tagged-802.3 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any  
MAC ingress mask ACL:  
mask pktformat host any vid ethertype  
Console#  
4-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
show access-list mac mask-precedence  
This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs.  
Syntax  
show access-list mac mask-precedence [in | out]  
in – Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs.  
out – Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show access-list mac mask-precedence  
MAC egress mask ACL:  
mask pktformat host any vid ethertype  
Console#  
Related Commands  
mac access-group  
This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.  
Syntax  
mac access-group acl_name {in | out}  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.  
out – Indicates that this list applies to egress packets.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.  
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the  
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in  
Console(config-if)#  
4-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
Related Commands  
show mac access-group  
This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show mac access-group  
Interface ethernet 1/5  
MAC access-list M5 out  
Console#  
Related Commands  
map access-list mac  
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule. The  
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it  
is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map access-list mac acl_name cos cos-value  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule.  
• A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the  
output queues as shown below.  
Table 4-36 Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACLs  
Priority  
Queue  
0
1
1
2
2
0
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
4-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#int eth 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map access-list mac M5 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show map access-list mac  
This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current  
interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an  
ACL rule.)  
Syntax  
show map access-list mac [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show map access-list mac  
Access-list to COS of Eth 1/5  
Access-list M5 cos 0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Access Control List Commands  
4
match access-list mac  
This command changes the IEEE 802.1p priority of a Layer 2 frame matching the  
defined ACL rule. (This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking.)  
Use the no form to remove the ACL marker.  
Syntax  
match access-list mac acl_name set priority priority  
no match access-list mac acl_name  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
priority – Class of Service value in the IEEE 802.1p priority tag.  
(Range: 0-7; 7 is the highest priority)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities  
based on an ACL rule.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12  
Console(config-if)#match access-list mac a set priority 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ACL Information  
Table 4-37 ACL Information Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
PE  
Page  
show access-list  
show access-group  
Show all ACLs and associated rules  
Shows the ACLs assigned to each port  
PE  
show access-list  
This command shows all ACLs and associated rules, as well as all the user-defined  
masks.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in  
which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.  
Example  
Console#show access-list  
IP standard access-list david:  
permit host 10.1.1.21  
permit 168.92.0.0 0.0.15.255  
IP extended access-list bob:  
permit 10.7.1.1 0.0.0.255 any  
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80  
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2  
MAC access-list jerry:  
permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800  
IP extended access-list A6:  
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2  
permit any any  
IP ingress mask ACL:  
mask protocol any any control-flag 2  
Console#  
show access-group  
This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Executive  
Example  
Console#show access-group  
Interface ethernet 1/2  
IP standard access-list david  
MAC access-list jerry  
Console#  
4-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SNMP Commands  
4
SNMP Commands  
Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers.  
SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity,  
authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas of  
the MIB tree. To use these commands, first configure an SNMP engine ID, specify  
read and write access views for the MIB tree, configure SNMP user groups with the  
required security model (i.e., SNMP v1, v2c or v3) and security level (i.e.,  
authentication and privacy), and then assign SNMP users to these groups, along  
with their specific authentication and privacy passwords.  
Table 4-38 SNMP Commands  
Command  
snmp-server  
show snmp  
Function  
Mode Page  
Enables the SNMP agent  
Displays the status of SNMP communications  
GC  
NE, PE  
GC  
snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to  
SNMP commands  
snmp-server contact  
snmp-server location  
snmp-server host  
Sets the system contact string  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
Sets the system location string  
Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation  
snmp-server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP  
notifications)  
snmp-server engine-id  
show snmp engine-id  
snmp-server view  
show snmp view  
snmp-server group  
show snmp group  
snmp-server user  
show snmp user  
snmp ip filter  
Sets the SNMP engine ID  
Shows the SNMP engine ID  
Adds an SNMP view  
GC  
PE  
GC  
PE  
GC  
PE  
GC  
PE  
Shows the SNMP views  
Adds an SNMP group, mapping users to views  
Shows the SNMP groups  
Adds a user to an SNMP group  
Shows the SNMP users  
Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access to GC  
the switch via SNMP  
snmp-server  
This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients  
(i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3). Use the no form to disable the server.  
Syntax  
[no] snmp-server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
4-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server  
Console(config)#  
show snmp  
This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command provides information on the community access strings, counter  
information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not  
SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps  
command.  
Example  
Console#show snmp  
SNMP traps:  
Authentication: enable  
Link-up-down: enable  
SNMP communities:  
1. private, and the privilege is read-write  
2. public, and the privilege is read-only  
0 SNMP packets input  
0 Bad SNMP version errors  
0 Unknown community name  
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied  
0 Encoding errors  
0 Number of requested variables  
0 Number of altered variables  
0 Get-request PDUs  
0 Get-next PDUs  
0 Set-request PDUs  
0 SNMP packets output  
0 Too big errors  
0 No such name errors  
0 Bad values errors  
0 General errors  
0 Response PDUs  
0 Trap PDUs  
SNMP logging: disabled  
SNMP ip filter group:  
Console#  
4-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP Commands  
4
snmp-server community  
This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string. Use the no  
form to remove the specified community string.  
Syntax  
snmp-server community string [ro|rw]  
no snmp-server community string  
string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to  
the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive;  
Maximum number of strings: 5)  
ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only  
able to retrieve MIB objects.  
rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able  
to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
Default Setting  
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to  
retrieve MIB objects.  
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both  
retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw  
Console(config)#  
snmp-server contact  
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the  
system contact information.  
Syntax  
snmp-server contact string  
no snmp-server contact  
string - String that describes the system contact information.  
(Maximum length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul  
Console(config)#  
4-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
snmp-server location  
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the  
location string.  
Syntax  
snmp-server location text  
no snmp-server location  
text - String that describes the system location.  
(Maximum length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SNMP Commands  
4
snmp-server host  
This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol  
notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.  
Syntax  
snmp-server host host-addr community-string  
[version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}} [udp-port port]]  
no snmp-server host host-addr  
host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).  
(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)  
community-string - Password-like community string sent with the  
notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts. Although you can set this  
string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that  
you define this string using the snmp-server community command prior  
to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 32  
characters)  
version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1, 2c or  
3 traps.  
auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no  
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network  
Management Protocol” on page 3-35 for further information about these  
authentication and encryption options.  
port - Host UDP port to use. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 162)  
Default Setting  
Host Address: None  
SNMP Version: 1  
UDP Port: 162  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.  
In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at  
least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you  
must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.  
• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the  
snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps  
command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to  
receive notifications, at least one snmp-server enable traps command and  
the snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled.  
• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable  
traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.  
• The switch can send SNMP Version 1, 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP  
address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station  
4-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP  
version, the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.  
• If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the community string is  
interpreted as an SNMP user name. If you use the V3 “auth” or “priv” options,  
the user name must first be defined with the snmp-server user command.  
Otherwise, the authentication password and/or privacy password will not  
exist, and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host. However, if  
you specify a V3 host with the “noauth” option, an SNMP user account will be  
generated, and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host.  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
snmp-server enable traps  
This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol  
traps (SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications.  
Syntax  
[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]  
authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure traps.  
link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down traps.  
Default Setting  
Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications  
controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send  
SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps  
command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication  
and link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a  
keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.  
• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the  
snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to  
specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send  
notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down  
Console(config)#  
4-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
Related Commands  
snmp-server engine-id  
This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine. Use the  
no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
snmp-server engine-id local engineid-string  
no snmp-server engine-id local  
engineid-string - String identifying the engine ID.  
(Range: 1-26 hexadecimal characters)  
Default Setting  
A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC  
address.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on this switch.  
This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The  
engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the  
security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets.  
• Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID. In other  
words, the value “1234” is equivalent to “1234” followed by 22 zeroes.  
• A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This  
is referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engine ID is deleted or  
changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all  
existing users (page 4-124).  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 12345  
Console(config)#  
show snmp engine-id  
This command shows the SNMP engine ID.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows the default engine ID.  
Console#show snmp engine-id  
Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672  
Local SNMP engineBoots: 1  
Console#  
4-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-39 show snmp engine-id - display description  
Field  
Description  
Local SNMP engineID  
String identifying the engine ID.  
Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has (re-)initialized since the snmp EngineID  
was last configured.  
snmp-server view  
This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB. Use the  
no form to remove an SNMP view.  
Syntax  
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}  
no snmp-server view view-name  
• view-name - Name of an SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
oid-tree - Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree. Wild cards can  
be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. (Refer to the  
examples.)  
• included - Defines an included view.  
• excluded - Defines an excluded view.  
Default Setting  
defaultview (includes access to the entire MIB tree)  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Views are used in the snmp-server group command to restrict user access  
to specified portions of the MIB tree.  
• The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.  
Examples  
This view includes MIB-2.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included  
Console(config)#  
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, ifDescr. The wildcard is used to select  
all the index values in this table.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.2 included  
Console(config)#  
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the mask selects all index entries.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.* included  
Console(config)#  
4-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
show snmp view  
This command shows information on the SNMP views.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show snmp view  
View Name: mib-2  
Subtree OID: 1.2.2.3.6.2.1  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: permanent  
Row Status: active  
View Name: defaultview  
Subtree OID: 1  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: permanent  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Table 4-40 show snmp view - display description  
Field  
Description  
View Name  
Subtree OID  
View Type  
Storage Type  
Row Status  
Name of an SNMP view.  
A branch in the MIB tree.  
Indicates if the view is included or excluded.  
The storage type for this entry.  
The row status of this entry.  
snmp-server group  
This command adds an SNMP group, mapping SNMP users to SNMP views. Use  
the no form to remove an SNMP group.  
Syntax  
snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}}  
[read readview] [write writeview]  
no snmp-server group groupname  
• groupname - Name of an SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)  
v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.  
• auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no  
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network  
Management Protocol” on page 3-35 for further information about these  
authentication and encryption options.  
readview - Defines the view for read access. (1-64 characters)  
writeview - Defines the view for write access. (1-64 characters)  
4-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
26  
27  
Default groups: public (read only), private (read/write)  
readview - Every object belonging to the Internet OID space (1.3.6.1).  
writeview - Nothing is defined.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• A group sets the access policy for the assigned users.  
• When authentication is selected, the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as  
specified in the snmp-server user command.  
• When privacy is selected, the DES 56-bit algorithm is used for data encryption.  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth write daily  
Console(config)#  
26. No view is defined.  
27. Maps to the defaultview.  
4-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP Commands  
4
show snmp group  
Four default groups are provided – SNMPv1 read-only access and read/write  
access, and SNMPv2c read-only access and read/write access.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show snmp group  
Group Name: r&d  
Security Model: v3  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: daily  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: permanent  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: public  
Security Model: v1  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: none  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: public  
Security Model: v2c  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: none  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: private  
Security Model: v1  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: defaultview  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: private  
Security Model: v2c  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: defaultview  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
4-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-41 show snmp group - display description  
Field  
Description  
groupname  
security model  
readview  
Name of an SNMP group.  
The SNMP version.  
The associated read view.  
The associated write view.  
The associated notify view.  
The storage type for this entry.  
The row status of this entry.  
writeview  
notifyview  
storage-type  
Row Status  
snmp-server user  
This command adds a user to an SNMP group, restricting the user to a specific  
SNMP Read and a Write View. Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP  
group.  
Syntax  
snmp-server user username groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 [encrypted]  
[auth {md5 | sha} auth-password [priv des56 priv-password]]  
no snmp-server user username  
username - Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.  
• groupname - Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned.  
v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.  
encrypted - Accepts the password as encrypted input.  
• auth - Uses SNMPv3 with authentication.  
md5 | sha - Uses MD5 or SHA authentication.  
auth-password - Authentication password. Enter as plain text if the  
encrypted option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.  
(A minimum of eight characters is required.)  
priv des56 - Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption.  
priv-password - Privacy password. Enter as plain text if the encrypted  
option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests  
from the password. You should therefore configure the engine ID with the  
snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration command.  
• SNMP passwords are localized using the authoritative SNMP engine ID.  
4-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace  
priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#  
show snmp user  
This command shows information on SNMP users.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show snmp user  
EngineId: 01000000000000000000000000  
User Name: steve  
Authentication Protocol: md5  
Privacy Protocol: des56  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Table 4-42 show snmp user - display description  
Field  
Description  
EngineId  
String identifying the engine ID.  
Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.  
The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3.  
The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3.  
The storage type for this entry.  
User Name  
Authentication Protocol  
Privacy Protocol  
Storage Type  
Row Status  
The row status of this entry.  
snmp ip filter  
This command sets the IP addresses of clients that are allowed management  
access to the switch via SNMP. Use the no form the remove an IP address.  
Syntax  
[no] snmp ip filter ip_address subnet_mask  
ip_address - An IP address indicating a client or group of clients that are  
allowed SNMP access to the switch.  
subnet_mask - An address bitmask of decimal numbers that represent the  
address bits to match.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are  
allowed access to the switch via SNMP management software.  
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four decimal  
integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses “1”  
bits to indicate “match” and “0” bits to indicate “ignore.”  
• If the IP is the address of a single management station, the bitmask should be  
set to 255.255.255.255. Otherwise, an IP address group is specified by the  
bitmask.  
• The default setting is null, which allows all IP groups SNMP access to the  
switch. If one IP address is configured, IP filtering is enabled and only  
addresses in the specified IP group will have SNMP access.  
• IP filtering does not affect management access to the switch using the web  
interface or Telnet.  
Example  
The following example enables SNMP IP filtering on the switch and allows SNMP  
management access to client IP 10.1.2.3, and client IP group 10.1.3.0 to 10.1.3.255.  
Console(config)#snmp ip filter 10.1.2.3 255.255.255.255  
Console(config)#snmp ip filter 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
show snmp (4-114)  
DHCP Commands  
These commands are used to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
(DHCP) client, relay, and server functions. You can configure any VLAN interface to  
be automatically assigned an IP address via DHCP. This switch can be configured to  
relay DHCP client configuration requests to a DHCP server on another network, or  
you can configure this switch to provide DHCP service directly to any client.  
Table 4-43 DHCP Commands  
Command Group  
DHCP Client  
Function  
Page  
Allows interfaces to dynamically acquire IP address information  
Relays DHCP requests from local hosts to a remote DHCP server  
Configures DHCP service using address pools or static bindings  
DHCP Relay  
DHCP Server  
DHCP Client  
Table 4-44 DHCP Client Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip dhcp client-identifier Specifies the DHCP client identifier for this switch  
IC  
ip dhcp restart client  
Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request  
PE  
4-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DHCP Commands  
4
ip dhcp client-identifier  
This command specifies the DCHP client identifier for the current interface. Use the  
no form to remove this identifier.  
Syntax  
ip dhcp client-identifier {text text | hex hex}  
no ip dhcp client-identifier  
text - A text string. (Range: 1-15 characters)  
hex - The hexadecimal value.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
This command is used to include a client identifier in all communications with  
the DHCP server. The identifier type depends on the requirements of your  
DHCP server.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 2  
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp client-identifier hex 00-00-e8-66-65-72  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
ip dhcp restart client  
This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface  
that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command.  
• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.  
• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the  
network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new  
domain.  
4-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console#ip dhcp restart client  
Console#show ip interface  
Vlan 1 is up, addressing mode is DHCP  
Interface address is 192.168.1.54, mask is 255.255.255.0, Primary  
MTU is 1500 bytes  
Proxy ARP is disabled  
Split horizon is enabled  
Console#  
Related Commands  
DHCP Relay  
Table 4-45 DHCP Relay Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip dhcp restart relay  
ip dhcp relay server  
Enables DHCP relay agent  
Specifies DHCP server addresses for relay  
IC  
IC  
ip dhcp restart relay  
This command enables DHCP relay for the specified VLAN. Use the no form to  
disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] ip dhcp relay  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
This command is used to configure DHCP relay functions for host devices  
attached to the switch. If DHCP relay service is enabled, and this switch sees  
a DHCP request broadcast, it inserts its own IP address into the request so  
the DHCP server will know the subnet where the client is located. Then, the  
switch forwards the packet to the DHCP server on another network. When the  
server receives the DHCP request, it allocates a free IP address for the DHCP  
client from its defined scope for the DHCP client’s subnet, and sends a DHCP  
response back to the DHCP relay agent (i.e., this switch). This switch then  
broadcasts the DHCP response received from the server to the client.  
4-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DHCP Commands  
4
Example  
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp relay  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip interface  
Vlan 1 is up, addressing mode is Dhcp  
Interface address is 10.1.0.254, mask is 255.255.255.0, Primary  
MTU is 1500 bytes  
Proxy ARP is disabled  
Split horizon is enabled  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip dhcp relay server  
This command specifies the addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the switch’s  
DHCP relay agent. Use the no form to clear all addresses.  
Syntax  
ip dhcp relay server address1 [address2 [address3 ...]]  
no ip dhcp relay server  
address - IP address of DHCP server. (Range: 1-3 addresses)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Usage Guidelines  
• You must specify the IP address for at least one DHCP server. Otherwise, the  
switch’s DHCP relay agent will not forward client requests to a DHCP server.  
• To start DHCP relay service, enter the ip dhcp restart relay command.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp relay server 10.1.0.99  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
DHCP Server  
Table 4-46 DHCP Server Commands  
Function  
Enables the DHCP server feature on this switch  
Command  
Mode Page  
service dhcp  
GC  
ip dhcp  
excluded-address  
Specifies IP addresses that a DHCP server should not assign to GC  
DHCP clients  
ip dhcp pool  
network  
Configures a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server  
GC  
Configures the subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool DC  
default-router  
domain-name  
dns-server  
Specifies the default router list for a DHCP client  
Specifies the domain name for a DHCP client  
DC  
DC  
Specifies the Domain Name Server (DNS) servers available to a DC  
DHCP client  
next-server  
Configures the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client DC  
bootfile  
Specifies a default boot image for a DHCP client  
DC  
netbios-name-server  
Configures NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) DC  
name servers available to Microsoft DHCP clients  
netbios-node-type  
lease  
Configures NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients  
Sets the duration an IP address is assigned to a DHCP client  
DC  
DC  
host*  
Specifies the IP address and network mask to manually bind to a DC  
DHCP client  
client-identifier*  
Specifies a client identifier for a DHCP client  
DC  
DC  
PE  
hardware-address*  
clear ip dhcp binding  
Specifies the hardware address of a DHCP client  
Deletes an automatic address binding from the DHCP server  
database  
show ip dhcp binding  
Displays address bindings on the DHCP server  
PE, NE 4-140  
*These commands are used for manually binding an address to a client.  
service dhcp  
This command enables the DHCP server on this switch. Use the no form to disable  
the DHCP server.  
Syntax  
[no] service dhcp  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
If the DHCP server is running, you must restart it to implement any  
configuration changes.  
4-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DHCP Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#service dhcp  
Console(config)#  
ip dhcp excluded-address  
This command specifies IP addresses that the DHCP server should not assign to  
DHCP clients. Use the no form to remove the excluded IP addresses.  
Syntax  
[no] ip dhcp excluded-address low-address [high-address]  
low-address - An excluded IP address, or the first IP address in an excluded  
address range.  
high-address - The last IP address in an excluded address range.  
Default Setting  
All IP pool addresses may be assigned.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip dhcp excluded-address 10.1.0.19  
Console(config)#  
ip dhcp pool  
This command configures a DHCP address pool and enter DHCP Pool  
Configuration mode. Use the no form to remove the address pool.  
Syntax  
[no] ip dhcp pool name  
name - A string or integer. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
Default Setting  
DHCP address pools are not configured.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Usage Guidelines  
After executing this command, the switch changes to DHCP Pool  
Configuration mode, identified by the (config-dhcp)# prompt.  
• From this mode, first configure address pools for the network interfaces (using  
the network command). You can also manually bind an address to a specific  
client (with the host command) if required. You can configure up to 8 network  
address pools, and up to 32 manually bound host address pools (i.e., listing  
one host address per pool). However, note that any address specified in a  
4-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
host command must fall within the range of a configured network address  
pool.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip dhcp pool R&D  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
network  
This command configures the subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool.  
Use the no form to remove the subnet number and mask.  
Syntax  
network network-number [mask]  
no network  
network-number - The IP address of the DHCP address pool.  
mask - The bit combination that identifies the network (or subnet) and the  
host portion of the DHCP address pool.  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Usage Guidelines  
• When a client request is received, the switch first checks for a network  
address pool matching the gateway where the request originated (i.e., if the  
request was forwarded by a relay server). If there is no gateway in the client  
request (i.e., the request was not forwarded by a relay server), the switch  
searches for a network pool matching the interface through which the client  
request was received. It then searches for a manually configured host address  
that falls within the matching network pool. If no manually configured host  
address is found, it assigns an address from the matching network address  
pool. However, if no matching address pool is found the request is ignored.  
• This command is valid for DHCP network address pools only. If the mask is  
not specified, the class A, B, or C natural mask is used (see page 3-216). The  
DHCP server assumes that all host addresses are available. You can exclude  
subsets of the address space by using the ip dhcp excluded-address  
command.  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#network 10.1.0.0 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
4-132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DHCP Commands  
4
default-router  
This command specifies default routers for a DHCP pool. Use the no form to  
remove the default routers.  
Syntax  
default-router address1 [address2]  
no default-router  
address1 - Specifies the IP address of the primary router.  
address2 - Specifies the IP address of an alternate router.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Usage Guidelines  
The IP address of the router should be on the same subnet as the client. You  
can specify up to two routers. Routers are listed in order of preference  
(starting with address1 as the most preferred router).  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#default-router 10.1.0.54 10.1.0.64  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
domain-name  
This command specifies the domain name for a DHCP client. Use the no form to  
remove the domain name.  
Syntax  
domain-name domain  
no domain-name  
domain - Specifies the domain name of the client.  
(Range: 1-32 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#domain-name sample.com  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
4-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
dns-server  
This command specifies the Domain Name System (DNS) IP servers available to a  
DHCP client. Use the no form to remove the DNS server list.  
Syntax  
dns-server address1 [address2]  
no dns-server  
address1 - Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.  
address2 - Specifies the IP address of the alternate DNS server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Usage Guidelines  
• If DNS IP servers are not configured for a DHCP client, the client cannot  
correlate host names to IP addresses.  
• Servers are listed in order of preference (starting with address1 as the most  
preferred server).  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#dns-server 10.1.1.253 192.168.3.19  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
next-server  
This command configures the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. Use  
the no form to remove the boot server list.  
Syntax  
[no] next-server address  
address - Specifies the IP address of the next server in the boot process,  
which is typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#next-server 10.1.0.21  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
4-134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DHCP Commands  
4
bootfile  
This command specifies the name of the default boot image for a DHCP client. This  
file should placed on the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server specified with  
the next-server command. Use the no form to delete the boot image name.  
Syntax  
bootfile filename  
no bootfile  
filename - Name of the file that is used as a default boot image.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#bootfile wme.bat  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
netbios-name-server  
This command configures NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS)  
name servers that are available to Microsoft DHCP clients. Use the no form to  
remove the NetBIOS name server list.  
Syntax  
netbios-name-server address1 [address2]  
no netbios-name-server  
address1 - Specifies IP address of primary NetBIOS WINS name server.  
address2 - Specifies IP address of alternate NetBIOS WINS name server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Usage Guidelines  
Servers are listed in order of preference (starting with address1 as the most  
preferred server).  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#netbios-name-server 10.1.0.33 10.1.0.34  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
4-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
netbios-node-type  
This command configures the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients. Use  
the no form to remove the NetBIOS node type.  
Syntax  
netbios-node-type type  
no netbios-node-type  
type - Specifies the NetBIOS node type:  
• broadcast  
hybrid (recommended)  
• mixed  
• peer-to-peer  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#netbios-node-type hybrid  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
lease  
This command configures the duration that an IP address is assigned to a DHCP  
client. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
lease {days [hours][minutes] | infinite}  
no lease  
days - Specifies the duration of the lease in numbers of days.  
(Range: 0-364)  
hours - Specifies the number of hours in the lease. A days value must be  
supplied before you can configure hours. (Range: 0-23)  
minutes - Specifies the number of minutes in the lease. A days and hours  
value must be supplied before you can configure minutes. (Range: 0-59)  
infinite - Specifies that the lease time is unlimited. This option is normally  
used for addresses manually bound to a BOOTP client via the host  
command.  
4-136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DHCP Commands  
4
Default Setting  
One day  
Command Modes  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Example  
The following example leases an address to clients using this pool for 7 days.  
Console(config-dhcp)#lease 7  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
host  
Use this command to specify the IP address and network mask to manually bind to a  
DHCP client. Use the no form to remove the IP address for the client.  
Syntax  
host address [mask]  
no host  
address - Specifies the IP address of a client.  
mask - Specifies the network mask of the client.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Usage Guidelines  
• Host addresses must fall within the range specified for an existing network pool.  
• When a client request is received, the switch first checks for a network  
address pool matching the gateway where the request originated (i.e., if the  
request was forwarded by a relay server). If there is no gateway in the client  
request (i.e., the request was not forwarded by a relay server), the switch  
searches for a network pool matching the interface through which the client  
request was received. It then searches for a manually configured host address  
that falls within the matching network pool.  
• When searching for a manual binding, the switch compares the client identifier  
for DHCP clients, and then compares the hardware address for DHCP or  
BOOTP clients.  
• If no manual binding has been specified for a host entry with the  
client-identifier or hardware-address commands, then the switch will  
assign an address from the matching network pool.  
• If the mask is unspecified, DHCP examines its address pools. If no mask is  
found in the pool database, the Class A, B, or C natural mask is used (see  
page 3-216). This command is valid for manual bindings only.  
4-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
• The no host command only clears the address from the DHCP server  
database. It does not cancel the IP address currently in use by the host.  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#host 10.1.0.21 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
client-identifier  
This command specifies the client identifier of a DHCP client. Use the no form to  
remove the client identifier.  
Syntax  
client-identifier {text text | hex hex}  
no client-identifier  
text - A text string. (Range: 1-15 characters)  
hex - The hexadecimal value.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Command Usage  
• This command identifies a DHCP client to bind to an address specified in the  
host command. If both a client identifier and hardware address are configured  
for a host address, the client identifier takes precedence over the hardware  
address in the search procedure.  
• BOOTP clients cannot transmit a client identifier. To bind an address to a  
BOOTP client, you must associate a hardware address with the host entry.  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#client-identifier text steve  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
4-138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DHCP Commands  
4
hardware-address  
This command specifies the hardware address of a DHCP client. This command is  
valid for manual bindings only. Use the no form to remove the hardware address.  
Syntax  
hardware-address hardware-address type  
no hardware-address  
hardware-address - Specifies the MAC address of the client device.  
type - Indicates the following protocol used on the client device:  
- ethernet  
- ieee802  
- fddi  
Default Setting  
If no type is specified, the default protocol is Ethernet.  
Command Mode  
DHCP Pool Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command identifies a DHCP or BOOTP client to bind to an address  
specified in the host command. BOOTP clients cannot transmit a client  
identifier. To bind an address to a BOOTP client, you must associate a  
hardware address with the host entry.  
Example  
Console(config-dhcp)#hardware-address 00-e0-29-94-34-28 ethernet  
Console(config-dhcp)#  
Related Commands  
clear ip dhcp binding  
This command deletes an automatic address binding from the DHCP server  
database.  
Syntax  
clear ip dhcp binding {address | * }  
address - The address of the binding to clear.  
* - Clears all automatic bindings.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Usage Guidelines  
• An address specifies the client’s IP address. If an asterisk (*) is used as the  
address parameter, the DHCP server clears all automatic bindings.  
• Use the no host command to delete a manual binding.  
• This command is normally used after modifying the address pool, or after  
moving DHCP service to another device.  
Example.  
Console#clear ip dhcp binding *  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show ip dhcp binding  
This command displays address bindings on the DHCP server.  
Syntax  
show ip dhcp binding [address]  
address - Specifies the IP address of the DHCP client for which bindings  
will be displayed.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip dhcp binding  
IP  
MAC  
Lease Time  
Start  
(dd/hh/mm/ss)  
--------------- ----------------- ------------------ -----------  
192.1.3.21 00-00-e8-98-73-21 86400 Dec 25 08:01:57 2002  
Console#  
4-140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DNS Commands  
4
DNS Commands  
These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System (DNS) services.  
You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping  
table, configure default domain names, or specify one or more name servers to use  
for domain name to address translation.  
Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is  
specified with the ip name-server command and domain lookup is enabled with the  
Table 4-47 DNS Commands  
Command  
ip host  
Function  
Mode Page  
Creates a static host name-to-address mapping  
Deletes entries from the host name-to-address table  
Defines a default domain name for incomplete host names  
GC  
PE  
GC  
clear host  
ip domain-name  
ip domain-list  
ip name-server  
Defines a list of default domain names for incomplete host names GC  
Specifies the address of one or more name servers to use for host GC  
name-to-address translation  
ip domain-lookup  
show hosts  
Enables DNS-based host name-to-address translation  
Displays the static host name-to-address mapping table  
Displays the configuration for DNS services  
Displays entries in the DNS cache  
GC  
PE  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show dns  
show dns cache  
clear dns cache  
Clears all entries from the DNS cache  
ip host  
This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an  
IP address. Use the no form to remove an entry.  
Syntax  
[no] ip host name address1 [address2 address8]  
• name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
address1 - Corresponding IP address.  
address2 address8 - Additional corresponding IP addresses.  
Default Setting  
No static entries  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via  
multiple IP addresses. If more than one IP address is associated with a host  
name using this command, a DNS client can try each address in succession,  
until it establishes a connection with the target device.  
Example  
This example maps two address to a host name.  
Console(config)#ip host rd5 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show hosts  
Hostname  
rd5  
Inet address  
10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55  
Alias  
Console#  
clear host  
This command deletes entries from the DNS table.  
Syntax  
clear host {name | *}  
• name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
* - Removes all entries.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example clears all static entries from the DNS table.  
Console(config)#clear host *  
Console(config)#  
ip domain-name  
This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host  
names (i.e., host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted  
notation). Use the no form to remove the current domain name.  
Syntax  
ip domain-name name  
no ip domain-name  
name - Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the  
host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
4-142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DNS Commands  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip domain-name sample.com  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS disabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
Name Server List:  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip domain-list  
This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete  
host names (i.e., host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted  
notation). Use the no form to remove a name from this list.  
Syntax  
[no] ip domain-list name  
name - Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the  
host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time.  
• When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch,  
it will work through the domain list, appending each domain name in the list to  
the host name, and checking with the specified name servers for a match.  
• If there is no domain list, the domain name specified with the ip domain-name  
command is used. If there is a domain list, the default domain name is not used.  
4-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list.  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.jp  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.uk  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS disabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.jp  
.sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip name-server  
This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for  
name-to-address resolution. Use the no form to remove a name server from this list.  
Syntax  
[no] ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2 server-address6]  
server-address1 - IP address of domain-name server.  
server-address2 server-address6 - IP address of additional  
domain-name servers.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a  
response is received, or the end of the list is reached with no response.  
4-144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DNS Commands  
4
Example  
This example adds two domain-name servers to the list and then displays the list.  
Console(config)#ip domain-server 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS disabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.jp  
.sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip domain-lookup  
This command enables DNS host name-to-address translation. Use the no form to  
disable DNS.  
Syntax  
[no] ip domain-lookup  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• At least one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS.  
• If all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled.  
4-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration.  
Console(config)#ip domain-lookup  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS enabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.jp  
.sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show hosts  
This command displays the static host name-to-address mapping table.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same  
address(es) as a previously configured entry.  
Console#show hosts  
Hostname  
rd5  
Inet address  
10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55  
Alias  
1.rd6  
Console#  
4-146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DNS Commands  
4
show dns  
This command displays the configuration of the DNS server.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS enabled  
Default Domain Name:  
sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
sample.com.jp  
sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
show dns cache  
This command displays entries in the DNS cache.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show dns cache  
NO  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
FLAG  
TYPE  
IP  
TTL  
893  
898  
298  
298  
298  
298  
298  
298  
298  
DOMAIN  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
10.2.44.96  
10.2.44.3  
pttch_pc.accton.com.tw  
ahten.accton.com.tw  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.com  
66.218.71.84  
66.218.71.83  
66.218.71.81  
66.218.71.80  
66.218.71.89  
66.218.71.86  
POINTER TO:7  
7
8
Console#  
Table 4-48 show dns cache - display description  
Field  
NO  
Description  
The entry number for each resource record.  
The flag is always “4” indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable.  
FLAG  
TYPE  
This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the  
owner, and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to  
the same IP address as an existing entry.  
IP  
The IP address associated with this record.  
The time to live reported by the name server.  
The domain name associated with this record.  
TTL  
DOMAIN  
4-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
clear dns cache  
This command clears all entries in the DNS cache.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear dns cache  
Console#show dns cache  
NO  
FLAG  
TYPE  
IP  
TTL  
DOMAIN  
Console#  
4-148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interface Commands  
4
Interface Commands  
These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an  
Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.  
Table 4-49 Interface Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
interface  
Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC  
mode  
description  
Adds a description to an interface configuration  
IC  
speed-duplex  
Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC  
when autonegotiation is disabled  
negotiation  
capabilities  
Enables autonegotiation of a given interface  
IC  
IC  
Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in  
autonegotiation  
flowcontrol  
media-type  
shutdown  
Enables flow control on a given interface  
Force port type selected for combination ports  
Disables an interface  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
switchport broadcast  
packet-rate  
Configures the broadcast storm control threshold  
clear counters  
Clears statistics on an interface  
PE  
show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface  
NE, PE 4-157  
NE, PE 4-158  
show interfaces  
counters  
Displays statistics for the specified interfaces  
show interfaces  
switchport  
Displays the administrative and operational status of an  
interface  
NE, PE 4-159  
interface  
This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode.  
Use the no form to remove a trunk.  
Syntax  
interface interface  
no interface port-channel channel-id  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
To specify port 4, enter the following command:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4  
Console(config-if)#  
description  
This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the  
description.  
Syntax  
description string  
no description  
string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached  
to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
The following example adds a description to port 4.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4  
Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3  
Console(config-if)#  
speed-duplex  
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when  
autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}  
no speed-duplex  
1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
4-150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Interface Commands  
4
Default Setting  
• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.  
• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is  
1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex  
command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on  
the selected interface.  
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the  
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To set the  
speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be  
specified in the capabilities list for an interface.  
Example  
The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half  
Console(config-if)#no negotiation  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
negotiation  
This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to  
disable autonegotiation.  
Syntax  
[no] negotiation  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings  
for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is  
disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex  
and flowcontrol commands.  
4-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will  
also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.  
Example  
The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#negotiation  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
capabilities  
This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during  
autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised  
capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.  
Syntax  
[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol |  
symmetric}  
1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
flowcontrol - Supports flow control  
symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives  
pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine  
the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch  
ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames.)  
Default Setting  
• 100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full  
• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full  
• 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH: 1000full  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch  
will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command.  
When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link  
attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.  
4-152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Interface Commands  
4
Example  
The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half, 100full and  
flow control.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full  
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
flowcontrol  
This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.  
Syntax  
[no] flowcontrol  
Default Setting  
Flow control enabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or  
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,  
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for  
full-duplex operation.  
• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol  
command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on  
the selected interface.  
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the  
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To enable  
flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the  
capabilities list for any port  
• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually  
required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may  
degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.  
4-153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example enables flow control on port 5.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol  
Console(config-if)#no negotiation  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (4-152)  
media-type  
This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 8 - 12. Use the no  
form to restore the default mode.  
Syntax  
media-type mode  
no media-type  
mode  
- copper-forced - Always uses the built-in RJ-45 port.  
- copper-preferred-auto - Uses the built-in RJ-45 port if both combination  
types are functioning and the RJ-45 port has a valid link.  
- sfp-forced - Always uses the SFP port (even if module not installed).  
- sfp-preferred-auto - Uses SFP port if both combination types are  
functioning and the SFP port has a valid link.  
Default Setting  
sfp-preferred-auto  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Example  
This forces the switch to use the built-in RJ-45 port for the combination port 8.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/8  
Console(config-if)#media-type copper-forced  
Console(config-if)#  
shutdown  
This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no  
form.  
Syntax  
[no] shutdown  
4-154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Interface Commands  
4
Default Setting  
All interfaces are enabled.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior  
(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been  
resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.  
Example  
The following example disables port 5.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#shutdown  
Console(config-if)#  
switchport broadcast packet-rate  
This command configures broadcast storm control. Use the no form to disable  
broadcast storm control.  
Syntax  
switchport broadcast packet-rate rate  
no switchport broadcast  
rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., packets per second.  
(Range: 500 - 262143)  
Default Setting  
Enabled for all ports  
Packet-rate limit: 500 packets per second  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold, packets above that  
threshold are dropped.  
• This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected  
interface. However, the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the  
switch.  
4-155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per  
second:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600  
Console(config-if)#  
clear counters  
This command clears statistics on an interface.  
Syntax  
clear counters interface  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base  
value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session.  
However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics  
displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.  
Example  
The following example clears statistics on port 5.  
Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5  
Console#  
4-156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interface Commands  
4
show interfaces status  
This command displays the status for an interface.  
Syntax  
show interfaces status [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Shows the status for all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a  
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Displaying  
Example  
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5  
Information of Eth 1/5  
Basic information:  
Port type: 1000T  
Mac address: 00-00-AB-CD-00-01  
Configuration:  
Name:  
Port admin: Up  
Speed-duplex: Auto  
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full,  
Broadcast storm: Enabled  
Broadcast storm limit: 500 packets/second  
Flow control: Disabled  
Lacp: Disabled  
Port security: Disabled  
Max MAC count: 0  
Port security action: None  
Combo forced mode: None  
Current status:  
Link status: Up  
Port operation status: Up  
Operation speed-duplex: 1000full  
Flow control type: None  
Console#show interfaces status vlan 1  
Information of VLAN 1  
MAC address: 00-00-AB-CD-00-00  
Console#  
4-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
show interfaces counters  
This command displays interface statistics.  
Syntax  
show interfaces counters [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
Shows the counters for all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a  
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Showing Port  
Example  
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7  
Ethernet 1/7  
Iftable stats:  
Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550  
Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5  
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0  
Error input: 0, Error output: 0  
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0  
Extended iftable stats:  
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064  
Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1  
Ether-like stats:  
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0  
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0  
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0  
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0  
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0  
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0  
Symbol errors: 0  
RMON stats:  
Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338  
Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064  
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0  
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0  
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0  
Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139  
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 49, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 0  
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0  
Console#  
4-158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Interface Commands  
4
show interfaces switchport  
This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified  
interfaces.  
Syntax  
show interfaces switchport [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
Shows all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.  
Example  
This example shows the configuration setting for port 4.  
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/4  
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 500 packets/second  
LACP status: Disabled  
Ingress rate limit: disable,1000M bits per second  
Egress rate limit: disable,1000M bits per second  
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid  
Ingress rule: Disabled  
Acceptable frame type: All frames  
Native VLAN: 1  
Priority for untagged traffic: 0  
Gvrp status: Disabled  
Allowed Vlan:  
Forbidden Vlan:  
Console#  
1(u),  
Table 4-50 show interfaces switchport - display description  
Description  
Field  
Broadcast threshold  
Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also  
shows the threshold level (page 4-155).  
LACP status  
Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled  
(page 4-164).  
Ingress/Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit (page 4-162).  
VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page 4-192).  
4-159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-50 show interfaces switchport - display description (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Ingress rule  
Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-193).  
Acceptable frame type  
Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only  
(page 4-192).  
Native VLAN  
Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-194).  
Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page 4-207).  
Gvrp status  
Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled (page 4-204).  
Allowed Vlan  
Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)” indicates untagged and  
“(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-195).  
Forbidden Vlan  
Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP (page 4-196).  
Mirror Port Commands  
This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.  
Table 4-51 Mirror Port Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
port monitor  
Configures a mirror session  
Shows the configuration for a mirror port  
IC  
show port monitor  
PE  
port monitor  
This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror  
session.  
Syntax  
port monitor interface [rx | tx | both]  
no port monitor interface  
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)  
- unit - Switch (unit 1).  
- port - Port number.  
rx - Mirror received packets.  
tx - Mirror transmitted packets.  
both - Mirror both received and transmitted packets.  
Default Setting  
No mirror session is defined. When enabled, the default mirroring is for both  
received and transmitted packets.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)  
4-160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Mirror Port Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time  
analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the  
destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely  
unobtrusive manner.  
• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.  
• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may  
be dropped from the monitor port.  
• You can create multiple mirror sessions, but all sessions must share the same  
destination port. However, you should avoid sending too much traffic to the  
destination port from multiple source ports.  
Example  
The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 both  
Console(config-if)#  
show port monitor  
This command displays mirror information.  
Syntax  
show port monitor [interface]  
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)  
unit - Switch (unit 1).  
port - Port number.  
Default Setting  
Shows all sessions.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port,  
and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX, RX/TX).  
4-161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show port monitor  
Port Mirroring  
-------------------------------------  
Destination port(listen port):Eth1/1  
Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/6  
Mode  
:RX/TX  
Console#  
Rate Limit Commands  
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic  
transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at  
the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within  
the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of  
traffic are dropped.  
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is  
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to  
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded  
without any changes.  
Table 4-52 Rate Limit Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
rate-limit  
Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port  
rate-limit  
This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface. Use this command  
without specifying a rate to restore the default rate. Use the no form to restore the  
default status of disabled.  
Syntax  
rate-limit {input | output} [rate]  
no rate-limit {input | output}  
input – Input rate  
output – Output rate  
rate – Maximum value in Mbps. (Range: 1 to 1000 Mbps)  
Default Setting  
1000 Mbps  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
4-162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 600  
Console(config-if)#  
Link Aggregation Commands  
Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the  
bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link  
between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have  
to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches  
have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to six trunks. For example, a  
trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of  
4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.  
Table 4-53 Link Aggregation Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
Manual Configuration Commands  
interface port-channel  
channel-group  
Configures a trunk and enters interface  
GC  
configuration mode for the trunk  
Adds a port to a trunk  
IC (Port Channel) 4-164  
Dynamic Configuration Command  
lacp  
Configures LACP for the current interface  
IC (Ethernet)  
NE, PE  
Trunk Status Display Command  
show interfaces status  
port-channel  
Shows trunk information  
Guidelines for Creating Trunks  
General Guidelines –  
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network  
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.  
• A trunk can have up to eight ports.  
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.  
• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including  
communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN  
assignments, and CoS settings.  
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to,  
added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.  
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the  
specified port-channel.  
4-163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
channel-group  
This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.  
Syntax  
channel-group channel-id  
no channel-group  
channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
The current port will be added to this trunk.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco  
EtherChannel standard.  
• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.  
• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.  
Example  
The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:  
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1  
Console(config-if)#  
lacp  
This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the  
current interface. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] lacp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex,  
either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.  
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned  
the next available port-channel ID.  
4-164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk  
will be activated automatically.  
• If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP  
enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be  
enabled if one of the active links fails.  
Example  
The following shows LACP enabled on ports 10-12. Because LACP has also been  
enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status  
port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1  
Information of Trunk 1  
Basic information:  
Port type: 1000T  
Mac address: 00-00-e8-00-00-0b  
Configuration:  
Name:  
Port admin status: Up  
Speed-duplex: Auto  
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full,  
Flow control status: Disabled  
Port security: Disabled  
Max MAC count: 0  
Current status:  
Created by: lacp  
Link status: Up  
Operation speed-duplex: 1000full  
Flow control type: None  
Member Ports: Eth1/10, Eth1/11, Eth1/12,  
Console#  
4-165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
Address Table Commands  
These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified  
addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.  
Table 4-54 Address Table Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN  
clear mac-address-table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE  
dynamic  
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database  
PE  
mac-address-table  
aging-time  
Sets the aging time of the address table  
GC  
show mac-address-table Shows the aging time for the address table  
aging-time  
PE  
mac-address-table static  
This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no  
form to remove an address.  
Syntax  
mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface  
vlan vlan-id [action]  
no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id  
mac-address - MAC address.  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
action -  
- delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.  
- permanent - Assignment is permanent.  
Default Setting  
No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Address Table Commands  
4
Command Usage  
The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within  
a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC  
Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:  
• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given  
interface link is down.  
• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.  
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be  
ignored and will not be written to the address table.  
• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is  
removed with the no form of this command.  
Example  
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface  
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset  
clear mac-address-table dynamic  
This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and  
clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic  
show mac-address-table  
This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.  
Syntax  
show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface]  
[vlan vlan-id] [sort {address | vlan | interface}]  
mac-address - MAC address.  
mask - Bits to match in the address.  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.  
4-167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each  
interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:  
- Learned - Dynamic address entries  
- Permanent - Static entry  
- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset  
• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit  
mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC  
address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0”  
means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of  
00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of  
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”  
• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.  
Example  
Console#show mac-address-table  
Interface MAC Address  
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------  
Eth 1/ 1 00-e0-29-94-34-de 1 Delete-on-reset  
Console#  
VLAN Type  
mac-address-table aging-time  
This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form  
to restore the default aging time.  
Syntax  
mac-address-table aging-time seconds  
no mac-address-table aging-time  
seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-1000000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)  
Default Setting  
300 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.  
4-168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100  
Console(config)#  
show mac-address-table aging-time  
This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show mac-address-table aging-time  
Aging time: 300 sec.  
Console#  
Spanning Tree Commands  
This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)  
globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected interface.  
Table 4-55 Spanning Tree Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
Page  
spanning-tree  
spanning-tree mode  
Enables the spanning tree protocol  
Configures STP, RSTP or MSTP mode  
spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time  
spanning-tree hello-time  
spanning-tree max-age  
spanning-tree priority  
Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time  
Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age  
Configures the spanning tree bridge priority  
Configures the path cost method for RSTP/MSTP  
spanning-tree  
path-cost method  
spanning-tree  
Configures the transmission limit for RSTP/MSTP  
Changes to MSTP configuration mode  
GC  
GC  
transmission-limit  
spanning-tree  
mst-configuration  
mst vlan  
mst priority  
name  
Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance  
MST  
MST  
MST  
Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance  
Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree  
revision  
Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning MST  
tree  
max-hops  
Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST  
region before a BPDU is discarded  
4-169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-55 Spanning Tree Commands (Continued)  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
spanning-tree  
spanning-disabled  
Disables spanning tree for an interface  
IC  
spanning-tree cost  
Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface  
Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface  
Enables fast forwarding for edge ports  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
spanning-tree port-priority  
spanning-tree edge-port  
spanning-tree portfast  
spanning-tree link-type  
spanning-tree mst cost  
Sets an interface to fast forwarding  
Configures the link type for RSTP/MSTP  
Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST  
Configures the priority of an instance in the MST  
spanning-tree mst  
port-priority  
spanning-tree  
Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format  
PE  
PE  
protocol-migration  
show spanning-tree  
Shows spanning tree configuration for the common  
spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge), a selected interface, or  
an instance within the multiple spanning tree  
show spanning-tree mst  
configuration  
Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration  
PE  
spanning-tree  
This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the  
no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree  
Default Setting  
Spanning tree is enabled.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable  
network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or  
routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is,  
an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only  
one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup  
links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.  
4-170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Example  
This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:  
Console(config)#spanning-tree  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree mode  
This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp | mstp}  
no spanning-tree mode  
stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)  
mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)  
Default Setting  
rstp  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Spanning Tree Protocol  
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.  
- This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple  
VLANs are implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN  
members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus  
isolating group members. When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend  
selecting the MSTP option.  
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring  
the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of  
protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:  
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration  
delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge  
and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.  
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an  
RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration  
delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.  
4-171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Command Line Interface  
4
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  
- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must  
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration,  
allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.  
- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible  
VLAN instance assignments.  
- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes  
stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the  
system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.  
Example  
The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree forward-time  
This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this  
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree forward-time seconds  
no spanning-tree forward-time  
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)  
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].  
Default Setting  
15 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait  
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is  
required because every device must receive information about topology  
changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to  
listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding  
state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20  
Console(config)#  
4-172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
spanning-tree hello-time  
This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree hello-time time  
no spanning-tree hello-time  
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).  
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].  
Default Setting  
2 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device  
transmits a configuration message.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree max-age  
This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this  
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree max-age seconds  
no spanning-tree max-age  
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)  
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].  
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].  
Default Setting  
20 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without  
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device  
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at  
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last  
4-173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If  
it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports  
attached to the network.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree priority  
This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the  
no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree priority priority  
no spanning-tree priority  
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535)  
(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288,  
16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152,  
53248, 57344, 61440)  
Default Setting  
32768  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated  
port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.  
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC  
address will then become the root device.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree pathcost method  
This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and  
Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}  
no spanning-tree pathcost method  
long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.  
short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.  
4-174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Default Setting  
Long method  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.  
Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media,  
and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Note that path cost  
(page 4-180) takes precedence over port priority (page 4-180).  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree transmission-limit  
This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of  
consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree transmission-limit count  
no spanning-tree transmission-limit  
count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)  
Default Setting  
3
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree mst-configuration  
This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) configuration mode.  
Default Setting  
• No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance.  
• The region name is set the switch’s MAC address.  
4-175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Related Commands  
mst vlan  
This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance. Use the no form to remove  
the specified VLANs. Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all  
VLANs.  
Syntax  
[no] mst instance_id vlan vlan-range  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-63)  
vlan-range - Range of VLANs. (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
none  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances. MSTP  
generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple  
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing  
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and  
allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.  
• By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MSTI 0) that  
connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up  
to 58 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general  
area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges  
within the same MSTI Region (page 4-177) with the same set of instances,  
and the same instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also,  
note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all  
regions to the Common Spanning Tree.  
4-176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 2-5  
Console(config-mstp)#  
mst priority  
This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance. Use the no form  
to restore the default.  
Syntax  
mst instance_id priority priority  
no mst instance_id priority  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-64)  
priority - Priority of the a spanning tree instance.  
(Range: 0-61440 in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384,  
20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344,  
61440)  
Default Setting  
32768  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
• MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the  
specified instance. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lowest numerical  
value) becomes the MSTI root device. However, if all devices have the same  
priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root  
device.  
• You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority  
of 0, or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 priority 4096  
Console(config-mstp)#  
name  
This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which  
this switch is located. Use the no form to clear the name.  
Syntax  
name name  
name - Name of the spanning tree.  
4-177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
Switch’s MAC address  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
The MST region name and revision number (page 4-178) are used to  
designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device  
such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the  
same region must be configured with the same MST instances.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#name R&D  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Related Commands  
revision  
This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree  
configuration of this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
revision number  
number - Revision number of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
0
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
The MST region name (page 4-177) and revision number are used to  
designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device  
such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the  
same region must be configured with the same MST instances.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#revision 1  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Related Commands  
4-178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
max-hops  
This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a  
BPDU is discarded. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
max-hops hop-number  
hop-number - Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree.  
(Range: 1-40)  
Default Setting  
20  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols.  
Therefore, the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never  
changed. However, each spanning tree instance within a region, and the  
internal spanning tree (IST) that connects these instances use a hop count to  
specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU. Each  
bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU. When  
the hop count reaches zero, the message is dropped.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30  
Console(config-mstp)#  
spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use  
the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
Console(config-if)#  
4-179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
spanning-tree cost  
This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree cost cost  
no spanning-tree cost  
cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-200,000,000))  
The recommended range is:  
• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
Default Setting  
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best  
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports  
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower  
media.  
• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.  
• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-174) is set to short, the  
maximum value for path cost is 65,535.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50  
Console(config-if)#  
spanning-tree port-priority  
This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree port-priority priority  
no spanning-tree port-priority  
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)  
4-180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Default Setting  
128  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree  
Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with  
the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in  
the spanning tree.  
• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest  
numeric identifier will be enabled.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree edge-port  
This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree edge-port  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that  
is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot  
cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree  
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for  
devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding  
database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address  
tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to  
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes  
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port  
should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.  
• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast.  
4-181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree portfast  
This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast  
forwarding.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree portfast  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the  
selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and Learning states, and  
proceed straight to Forwarding.  
• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through  
the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard  
convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for  
end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related  
timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for  
ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for  
an end-node device.)  
• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only included  
for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may  
be removed for future software versions.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#bridge-group 1 portfast  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
spanning-tree link-type  
This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple  
Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}  
no spanning-tree link-type  
auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.  
point-to-point - Point-to-point link.  
shared - Shared medium.  
Default Setting  
auto  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly  
one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.  
• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the  
duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while  
a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.  
• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate  
a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden. Since MSTP is an extension of  
RSTP, this same restriction applies.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point  
spanning-tree mst cost  
This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple  
Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree mst instance_id cost cost  
no spanning-tree mst instance_id cost  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.  
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
cost - Path cost for an interface. (Range: 1-200,000,000)  
The recommended range is -  
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
4-183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Each spanning-tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs.  
• This command is used by the multiple spanning-tree algorithm to determine  
the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned  
to interfaces attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to  
interfaces with slower media.  
• Path cost takes precedence over interface priority.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 cost 50  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree mst port-priority  
This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the  
Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority priority  
no spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.  
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
priority - Priority for an interface. (Range: 0-240 in steps of 16)  
Default Setting  
128  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple  
spanning-tree. If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same, the  
4-184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
interface with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as  
an active link in the spanning tree.  
• Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority, the interface  
with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree protocol-migration  
This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected  
interface.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree protocol-migration interface  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or  
Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected  
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the  
spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually  
re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e.,  
RSTP or STP-compatible).  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree protocol-migration  
Console(config-if)#  
4-185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
show spanning-tree  
This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree (CST) or for  
an instance within the multiple spanning tree (MST).  
Syntax  
show spanning-tree [interface | mst instance_id]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree.  
(Range: 0-64, no leading zeroes)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the  
spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree  
(CST) and for every interface in the tree.  
• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree  
configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree (CST).  
• Use the show spanning-tree mst instance_id command to display the  
spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree  
(MST).  
• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree information,”  
items displayed for specific interfaces, see “Displaying Interface Settings” on  
4-186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show spanning-tree  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode  
Spanning tree enable/disable  
Instance  
:MSTP  
:enable  
:0  
Vlans configuration  
Priority  
:1-4094  
:32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.)  
Bridge Max Age (sec.)  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)  
Root Hello Time (sec.)  
Root Max Age (sec.)  
Root Forward Delay (sec.)  
Max hops  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:2  
:20  
:15  
:20  
Remaining hops  
:20  
Designated Root  
:32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
Current root port  
Current root cost  
Number of topology changes  
:1  
:200000  
:1  
Last topology changes time (sec.):22  
Transmission limit  
Path Cost Method  
:3  
:long  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status  
Role  
: enable  
: root  
State  
: forwarding  
External path cost  
Internal path cost  
Priority  
: 100000  
: 100000  
: 128  
Designated cost  
Designated port  
Designated root  
Designated bridge  
Fast forwarding  
: 200000  
: 128.24  
: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
: 32768.0.0030F1552000  
: disable  
Forward transitions : 1  
Admin edge port  
Oper edge port  
Admin Link type  
Oper Link type  
: enable  
: disable  
: auto  
: point-to-point  
Spanning Tree Status : enable  
.
.
.
Console#  
4-187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
show spanning-tree mst configuration  
This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show spanning-tree mst configuration  
Mstp Configuration Information  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
Configuration name:00 30 f1 8f d5 50  
Revision level:0  
Instance VLANs  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
Console#  
VLAN Commands  
A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but  
communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section  
describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how  
VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected  
interface.  
Table 4-56 VLAN Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
Editing VLAN Groups  
Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state  
Configuring VLAN  
Interfaces  
Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress 4-191  
tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP  
Displaying VLAN  
Information  
Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses  
Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports  
Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol-based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 4-199  
4-188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VLAN Commands  
4
Editing VLAN Groups  
Table 4-57 Commands for Editing VLAN Groups  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
Page  
vlan database  
Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete GC  
VLANs  
vlan  
Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state  
VC  
vlan database  
This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take  
effect immediately.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete VLANs.  
After finishing configuration changes, you can display the VLAN settings by  
entering the show vlan command.  
• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode  
and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are  
written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by  
entering the show running-config command.  
Example  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Related Commands  
4-189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
vlan  
This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or  
delete a VLAN.  
Syntax  
vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}]  
no vlan vlan-id [name | state]  
vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.  
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.  
media ethernet - Ethernet media type.  
state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.  
- active - VLAN is operational.  
- suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.  
Default Setting  
By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.  
Command Mode  
VLAN Database Configuration  
Command Usage  
no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.  
no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.  
no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state (i.e., active).  
• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.  
Example  
The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5. The VLAN  
is activated by default.  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Related Commands  
4-190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VLAN Commands  
4
Configuring VLAN Interfaces  
Table 4-58 Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces  
Function  
Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC  
Command  
Mode  
Page  
interface vlan  
switchport mode  
Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface  
Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface  
IC  
IC  
switchport  
acceptable-frame-types  
switchport ingress-filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
switchport native vlan  
switchport allowed vlan  
switchport gvrp  
Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface  
Configures the VLANs associated with an interface  
Enables GVRP for an interface  
switchport forbidden vlan  
switchport priority default  
Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface  
Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames  
interface vlan  
This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to  
configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.  
Syntax  
interface vlan vlan-id  
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to  
VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
switchport mode  
This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form  
to restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport mode {trunk | hybrid}  
no switchport mode  
trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct  
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify  
the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN  
(i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.  
hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged  
or untagged frames.  
Default Setting  
All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the  
switchport mode to hybrid:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
switchport acceptable-frame-types  
This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}  
no switchport acceptable-frame-types  
all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.  
tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.  
Default Setting  
All frame types  
4-192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
VLAN Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged  
are assigned to the default VLAN.  
Example  
The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged  
frames:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
switchport ingress-filtering  
This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore  
the default.  
Syntax  
[no] switchport ingress-filtering  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.  
• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except  
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).  
• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.  
• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as  
GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such  
as GMRP.  
4-193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable  
ingress filtering:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering  
Console(config-if)#  
switchport native vlan  
This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port. Use the no  
form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport native vlan vlan-id  
no switchport native vlan  
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
Default Setting  
VLAN 1  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this  
VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged  
member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an  
untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.  
• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid, the  
PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.  
Example  
The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#  
4-194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN Commands  
4
switchport allowed vlan  
This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form  
to restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |  
remove vlan-list}  
no switchport allowed vlan  
add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.  
remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.  
vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no  
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading  
zeros. (Range: 1-4094).  
Default Setting  
All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.  
The default frame type is untagged.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at  
least one VLAN as untagged.  
• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only  
assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.  
• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter  
used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or  
remove the tag from a frame on egress.  
• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the  
connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs  
as an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one  
VLAN as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the  
interface.  
• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that  
interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that  
interface.  
Example  
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as  
tagged VLANs for port 1:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged  
Console(config-if)#  
4-195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
switchport forbidden vlan  
This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of  
forbidden VLANs.  
Syntax  
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}  
no switchport forbidden vlan  
add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.  
remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.  
vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no  
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading  
zeros. (Range: 1-4094).  
Default Setting  
No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the  
specified interface via GVRP.  
• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then  
you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.  
Example  
The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3  
Console(config-if)#  
4-196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN Commands  
4
Displaying VLAN Information  
Table 4-59 Commands for Displaying VLAN Information  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
show vlan  
Shows VLAN information  
NE, PE 4-197  
NE, PE 4-157  
NE, PE 4-159  
show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface  
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an  
interface  
show vlan  
This command shows VLAN information.  
Syntax  
show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name]  
id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.  
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.  
vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.  
Default Setting  
Shows all VLANs.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:  
Console#show vlan id 1  
VLAN Type  
Name  
Status  
Ports/Channel groups  
---- ------- ---------------- --------- ----------------------------------  
1 Static  
DefaultVlan  
Active Eth1/ 1 Eth1/ 2 Eth1/ 3 Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5  
Eth1/ 6 Eth1/ 7 Eth1/ 8 Eth1/ 9 Eth1/10  
Eth1/11 Eth1/12  
Console#  
4-197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Configuring Private VLANs  
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the  
assigned VLAN. This section describes commands used to configure private VlANs.  
Table 4-60 Private VLAN Commands  
Command  
pvlan  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
Enables and configured private VLANS  
Displays the configured private VLANS  
show pvlan  
PE  
pvlan  
This command enables or configures a private VLAN. Use the no form to disable the  
private VLAN.  
Syntax  
pvlan [up-link interface-list down-link interface-list]  
no pvlan  
up-link – Specifies an uplink interface.  
down-link – Specifies a downlink interface.  
Default Setting  
No private VLANs are defined.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• A private VLAN provides port-based security and isolation between ports  
within the VLAN. Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to,  
and from, the uplink port.  
• Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same  
switch.  
• Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private  
VLAN. Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN.  
Example  
This example enables the private VLAN, and then sets port 12 as the uplink and  
ports 1-8 as the downlinks.  
Console(config)#pvlan  
Console(config)#pvlan up-link ethernet 1/12 down-link ethernet 1/1-8  
Console(config)#  
4-198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VLAN Commands  
4
show pvlan  
This command displays the configured private VLAN.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show pvlan  
Private VLAN status: Enabled  
Up-link port:  
Ethernet 1/12  
Down-link port:  
Ethernet 1/1-8  
Console#  
Configuring Protocol-based VLANs  
The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped  
into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic  
between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a  
specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of  
VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.  
To avoid these problems, you can configure this switch with protocol-based VLANs  
that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol.  
When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined  
based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets.  
Table 4-61 Protocol-based VLAN Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
protocol-vlan protocol-group Create a protocol group, specifying the supported protocols GC  
protocol-vlan protocol-group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN  
IC  
show protocol-vlan  
protocol-group  
Shows the configuration of protocol groups  
PE  
show interfaces  
Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the PE  
protocol-vlan protocol-group corresponding VLAN  
To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps:  
1. First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use (page 4-190).  
Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each  
major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this time.  
2. Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN  
using the protocol-vlan protocol-group command (General Configuration  
mode).  
3. Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the  
protocol-vlan protocol-group command (Interface Configuration mode).  
4-199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Groups)  
This command creates a protocol group, or to add specific protocols to a group. Use  
the no form to remove a protocol group.  
Syntax  
protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id [{add | remove} frame-type frame  
protocol-type protocol]  
no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id  
group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)  
frame - Frame type used by this protocol. (Options: ethernet, rfc_1042,  
snap_8021h, snap_other, llc_other)  
protocol - Protocol type. The only option for the llc_other frame type is  
ipx_raw. The options for all other frames types include: ip, arp, rarp.  
Default Setting  
No protocol groups are configured.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following creates protocol group 1, and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and  
ARP protocol types:  
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet  
protocol-type ip  
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet  
protocol-type arp  
Console(config)#  
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Interfaces)  
This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface. Use the  
no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface.  
Syntax  
protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan vlan-id  
no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan  
group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)  
vlan-id - VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded.  
(Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
No protocol groups are mapped for any interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
4-200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VLAN Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• When creating a protocol-based VLAN, only assign interfaces via this  
command. If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands  
(such as vlan on page 4-190), these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol  
type into the associated VLAN.  
• When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN, it is  
processed in the following manner:  
- If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules  
applied to tagged frames.  
- If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is  
forwarded to the appropriate VLAN.  
- If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is  
forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface.  
Example  
The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol  
type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 vlan 2  
Console(config-if)#  
show protocol-vlan protocol-group  
This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups.  
Syntax  
show protocol-vlan protocol-group [group-id]  
group-id - Group identifier for a protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)  
Default Setting  
All protocol groups are displayed.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet:  
Console#show protocol-vlan protocol-group  
ProtocolGroup ID  
------------------ ------------- ---------------  
ethernet 08 00  
Frame Type  
Protocol Type  
1
Console#  
4-201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group  
This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected  
interfaces.  
Syntax  
show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
The mapping for all interfaces is displayed.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol  
group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2:  
Console#show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group  
Port  
---------- ------------------ -----------  
Eth 1/1 vlan2  
Console#  
ProtocolGroup ID  
VLAN ID  
1
4-202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
4
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN  
information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across  
the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces  
and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings  
for the Bridge Extension MIB.  
Table 4-62 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
PE  
Page  
bridge-ext gvrp  
show bridge-ext  
switchport gvrp  
switchport forbidden vlan  
show gvrp configuration  
garp timer  
Enables GVRP globally for the switch  
Shows the global bridge extension configuration  
Enables GVRP for an interface  
IC  
Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface  
IC  
Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE, PE 4-205  
Sets the GARP timer for the selected function  
Shows the GARP timer for the selected function  
IC  
show garp timer  
NE, PE 4-206  
bridge-ext gvrp  
This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] bridge-ext gvrp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to  
register VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be  
enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which  
extend beyond the local switch.  
Example  
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp  
Console(config)#  
4-203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
show bridge-ext  
This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3-14 for a description of the displayed  
items.  
Example  
Console#show bridge-ext  
Max support vlan numbers: 255  
Max support vlan ID: 4094  
Extended multicast filtering services: No  
Static entry individual port: Yes  
VLAN learning: IVL  
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes  
Local VLAN capable: Yes  
Traffic classes: Enabled  
Global GVRP status: Disabled  
GMRP: Disabled  
Console#  
switchport gvrp  
This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] switchport gvrp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp  
Console(config-if)#  
4-204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
4
show gvrp configuration  
This command shows if GVRP is enabled.  
Syntax  
show gvrp configuration [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/7  
Eth 1/ 7:  
Gvrp configuration: Disabled  
Console#  
garp timer  
This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no  
form to restore the timers’ default values.  
Syntax  
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value  
no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}  
• {join | leave | leaveall} - Which timer to set.  
timer_value - Value of timer.  
Ranges:  
join: 20-1000 centiseconds  
leave: 60-3000 centiseconds  
leaveall: 500-18000 centiseconds  
Default Setting  
• join: 20 centiseconds  
• leave: 60 centiseconds  
• leaveall: 1000 centiseconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
4-205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register  
or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The  
default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access  
method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are  
experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.  
• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.  
• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:  
- leave >= (2 x join)  
- leaveall > leave  
Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to  
the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show garp timer  
This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.  
Syntax  
show garp timer [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
Shows all GARP timers.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1  
Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:  
Join timer: 20 centiseconds  
Leave timer: 60 centiseconds  
Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds  
Console#  
4-206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Priority Commands  
4
Related Commands  
Priority Commands  
The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets  
have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion.  
This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a  
port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority  
queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each  
queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.  
Table 4-63 Priority Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
Priority (Layer 2)  
Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights,  
and maps class of service tags to hardware queues  
Priority (Layer 3 and 4)  
Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP DSCP tags to class of  
service values  
Priority Commands (Layer 2)  
Table 4-64 Priority Commands (Layer 2)  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
queue mode  
Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted  
Round-Robin (WRR)  
GC  
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames  
IC  
IC  
IC  
PE  
queue bandwidth  
Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues  
Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues  
Shows the current queue mode  
queue cos map  
show queue mode  
show queue bandwidth  
show queue cos-map  
Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE  
Shows the class-of-service map  
PE  
PE  
showinterfacesswitchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an  
interface  
4-207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
queue mode  
This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin  
(WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the  
default value.  
Syntax  
queue mode {strict | wrr}  
no queue mode  
strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all  
traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.  
wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using  
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 for queues 0 - 7 respectively.  
Default Setting  
Weighted Round Robin  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that  
requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower  
priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing  
that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative  
weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the  
switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This  
prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.  
Example  
The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:  
Console(config)#queue mode strict  
Console(config)#  
4-208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Priority Commands  
4
switchport priority default  
This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to  
restore the default value.  
Syntax  
switchport priority default default-priority-id  
no switchport priority default  
default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.  
The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.  
Default Setting  
The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on  
the interface is zero.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to  
accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This  
priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming  
frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority  
bits will be used.  
• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is configured to use  
Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with the show queue  
bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are  
tagged with the input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the  
appropriate priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress  
ports is zero. Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will  
be placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an  
untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all  
VLAN tags prior to transmission.)  
Example  
The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5  
4-209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
queue bandwidth  
This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the eight class of  
service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default weights.  
Syntax  
queue bandwidth weight1...weight4  
no queue bandwidth  
weight1...weight4 - The ratio of weights for queues 0 - 7 determines the  
weights used by the WRR scheduler. (Range: 1 - 15)  
Default Setting  
Weights 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 are assigned to queues 0 - 7 respectively.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling  
weights.  
Example  
This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues:  
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
queue cos-map  
This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues (i.e.,  
hardware output queues 0 - 7). Use the no form set the CoS map to the default  
values.  
Syntax  
queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]  
no queue cos-map  
queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.  
Ranges are 0 to 7, where 7 is the highest priority queue.  
cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a  
space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7,  
where 7 is the highest priority.  
4-210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Priority Commands  
4
Default Setting  
This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues, with  
Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate traffic classes  
are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according  
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below.  
Table 4-65 Default CoS Priority Levels  
Queue  
0
2
1
0
2
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Priority  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.  
• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one-to-one  
mapping:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show queue mode  
This command shows the current queue mode.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#sh queue mode  
Wrr status: Enabled  
Console#  
show queue bandwidth  
This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth allocation for  
the eight priority queues.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show queue bandwidth  
Information of Eth 1/1  
Queue ID Weight  
-------- ------  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
.
.
.
Console#  
show queue cos-map  
This command shows the class of service priority map.  
Syntax  
show queue cos-map [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Priority Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
CoS Value  
: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7  
Console#  
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)  
Table 4-66 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)  
Function  
Enables TCP/UDP class of service mapping  
Command  
Mode Page  
map ip port  
GC  
IC  
map ip port  
Maps TCP/UDP socket to a class of service  
Enables IP precedence class of service mapping  
Maps IP precedence value to a class of service  
Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping  
Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service  
map ip precedence  
map ip precedence  
map ip dscp  
GC  
IC  
GC  
IC  
map ip dscp  
map access-list ip  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for  
packets matching an ACL rule  
IC  
map access-list mac  
show map ip port  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for  
packets matching an ACL rule  
IC  
Shows the IP port map  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map  
show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map  
show map access-list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
show map access-list mac Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
map ip port (Global Configuration)  
Use this command to enable IP port mapping (i.e., class of service mapping for  
TCP/UDP sockets). Use the no form to disable IP port mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map ip port  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
4-213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example shows how to enable TCP/UDP port mapping globally:  
Console(config)#map ip port  
Console(config)#  
map ip port (Interface Configuration)  
This command sets IP port priority (i.e., TCP/UDP port priority). Use the no form to  
remove a specific setting.  
Syntax  
map ip port port-number cos cos-value  
no map ip port port-number  
port-number - 16-bit TCP/UDP port number. (Range: 0-65535)  
cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
map ip precedence (Global Configuration)  
This command enables IP precedence mapping (i.e., IP Type of Service). Use the  
no form to disable IP precedence mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map ip precedence  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Priority Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these  
priority types will automatically disable the other type.  
Example  
The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally:  
Console(config)#map ip precedence  
Console(config)#  
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration)  
This command sets IP precedence priority (i.e., IP Type of Service priority). Use the  
no form to restore the default table.  
Syntax  
map ip precedence ip-precedence-value cos cos-value  
no map ip precedence  
precedence-value - 3-bit precedence value. (Range: 0-7)  
cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
The list below shows the default priority mapping.  
Table 4-67 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values  
IP Precedence Value  
CoS Value  
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a  
one-to-one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard,  
and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.  
• This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
4-215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
map ip dscp (Global Configuration)  
This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point  
mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map ip dscp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these  
priority types will automatically disable the other type.  
Example  
The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:  
Console(config)#map ip dscp  
Console(config)#  
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)  
This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point  
priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.  
Syntax  
map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value  
no map ip dscp  
dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-255)  
cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)  
4-216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Priority Commands  
4
Default Setting  
The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the  
DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.  
Table 4-68 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values  
IP DSCP Value  
CoS Value  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10, 12, 14, 16  
18, 20, 22, 24  
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36  
38, 40, 42  
48  
46, 56  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according  
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently  
mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.  
• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
show map ip port  
This command shows the IP port priority map.  
Syntax  
show map ip port [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
4-217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0:  
Console#show map ip port  
TCP port mapping status: disabled  
Port  
--------- -------- ---  
Eth 1/ 5 80  
Console#  
Port no. COS  
0
Related Commands  
show map ip precedence  
This command shows the IP precedence priority map.  
Syntax  
show map ip precedence [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Priority Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/5  
Precedence mapping status: disabled  
Port  
Precedence COS  
--------- ---------- ---  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Console#  
Related Commands  
show map ip dscp  
This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.  
Syntax  
show map ip dscp [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1  
DSCP mapping status: disabled  
Port  
DSCP COS  
--------- ---- ---  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
61  
62  
63  
0
0
0
Console#  
Related Commands  
Multicast Filtering Commands  
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any  
attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports  
containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then  
propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to  
ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.  
Note that IGMP query can be enabled globally at Layer 2, or enabled for specific  
VLAN interfaces at Layer 3. (Layer 2 query is disabled if Layer 3 query is enabled.)  
Table 4-69 Multicast Filtering Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
IGMP Snooping  
Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment, 4-221  
sets the IGMP version, displays current snooping and query settings,  
and displays the multicast service and group members  
IGMP Query (Layer 2)  
Static Multicast Routing  
IGMP (Layer 3)  
Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4-224  
Configures static multicast router ports  
Configures the IGMP protocol used with multicast routing  
4-220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
IGMP Snooping Commands  
Table 4-70 IGMP Snooping Commands  
Function  
Enables IGMP snooping  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip igmp snooping  
GC  
GC  
GC  
PE  
PE  
ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group  
ip igmp snooping version  
show ip igmp snooping  
Configures the IGMP version for snooping  
Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration  
Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list  
show mac-address-table  
multicast  
ip igmp snooping  
This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following example enables IGMP snooping.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping vlan static  
This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the port.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
ip-address - IP address for multicast group  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12 ethernet 1/5  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping version  
This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore  
the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2}  
no ip igmp snooping version  
1 - IGMP Version 1  
2 - IGMP Version 2  
Default Setting  
IGMP Version 2  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are legacy  
devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will also have to  
configure this switch to use Version 1.  
• Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2, including ip igmp  
query-max-response-time and ip igmp query-timeout.  
Example  
The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1  
Console(config)#  
show ip igmp snooping  
This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Command Usage  
description of the displayed items.  
Example  
The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:  
Console#show ip igmp snooping  
Service status: Enabled  
Querier status: Enabled  
Query count: 2  
Query interval: 125 sec  
Query max response time: 10 sec  
Router port expire time: 300 sec  
IGMP snooping version: Version 2  
Console#  
show mac-address-table multicast  
This command shows known multicast addresses.  
Syntax  
show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id] [user | igmp-snooping]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4094)  
user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.  
igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected  
options.  
Example  
The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for  
VLAN 1:  
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping  
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type  
---- --------------- ------------ -------  
1
224.1.2.3  
Eth1/11  
IGMP  
Console#  
4-223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)  
Table 4-71 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)  
Function  
Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip igmp snooping querier  
ip igmp snooping  
query-count  
Configures the query count  
Configures the query interval  
Configures the report delay  
Configures the query timeout  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
ip igmp snooping  
query-interval  
ip igmp snooping  
query-max-response-time  
ip igmp snooping  
router-port-expire-time  
ip igmp snooping querier  
This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping querier  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is  
responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping query-count  
This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping query-count count  
no ip igmp snooping query-count  
count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been  
no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the  
multicast group. (Range: 2-10)  
4-224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Default Setting  
2 times  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a  
multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a number of queries  
defined by this command, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer  
is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query-max-  
response-time. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not  
responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip igmp snooping query-interval  
This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds  
no ip igmp snooping query-interval  
seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query  
messages. (Range: 60-125)  
Default Setting  
125 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100  
Console(config)#  
4-225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time  
This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds  
no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time  
seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-30)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.  
• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response is  
expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of queries  
defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client has not  
responded, a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this  
command. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded,  
then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time  
This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds  
no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time  
seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before  
it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving  
query packets) to have expired.  
(Range: 300-500)  
4-226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Default Setting  
300 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
Static Multicast Routing Commands  
Table 4-72 Static Multicast Routing Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip igmp snooping vlan  
mrouter  
Adds a multicast router port  
GC  
show ip igmp snooping  
mrouter  
Shows multicast router ports  
PE  
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter  
This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to  
remove the configuration.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
Default Setting  
No static multicast router ports are configured.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be  
able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known  
multicast router/switch connected over the network to an interface (port or  
trunk) on your router, you can manually configure that interface to join all the  
current multicast groups.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11  
Console(config)#  
show ip igmp snooping mrouter  
This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned  
multicast router ports.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic.  
Example  
The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type  
---- ------------------- -------  
1
Eth 1/11 Static  
2
Eth 1/12 Dynamic  
Console#  
4-228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
IGMP Commands (Layer 3)  
Table 4-73 IGMP Commands (Layer 3)  
Function  
Enables IGMP for the specified interface  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip igmp  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
ip igmp robustval  
ip igmp query-interval  
ip igmp max-resp-interval  
Configures the expected packet loss  
Configures frequency for sending host query messages  
Configures the maximum host response time  
ip igmp  
last-memb-query-interval  
Configures frequency for sending group-specific host query IC  
messages  
ip igmp version  
Configures IGMP version used on this interface  
Displays the IGMP configuration for specified interfaces  
Deletes entries from the IGMP cache  
IC  
show ip igmp interface  
clear ip igmp group  
show ip igmp groups  
NE, PE 4-233  
NE, PE 4-234  
Displays detailed information for IGMP groups  
ip igmp  
This command enables IGMP on a VLAN interface. Use the no form of this  
command to disable IGMP on the specified interface.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
IGMP query can be enabled globally at Layer 2 via the ip igmp snooping  
command, or enabled for specific VLAN interfaces at Layer 3 via the ip igmp  
command. (Layer 2 query is disabled if Layer 3 query is enabled.)  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip igmp interface  
Vlan 1 is up  
IGMP is enable, version is 2  
Robustness variable is 2  
Query interval is 125 sec  
Query Max Response Time is 10 sec, Last Member Query Interval is 1 sec  
Querier is 10.1.0.253  
Console#  
4-229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
ip igmp robustval  
This command specifies the robustness (i.e., expected packet loss) for this  
interface. Use the no form of this command to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip igmp robustval robust-value  
no ip igmp robustval  
robust-value - The robustness of this interface. (Range: 1-255)  
Default Setting  
2
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
The robustness value is used in calculating the appropriate range for other  
IGMP variables, such as the Group Membership Interval (ip igmp  
last-memb-query-interval, page 4-232), as well as the Other Querier Present  
Interval, and the Startup Query Count (RFC 2236).  
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp robustval 3  
Console(config-if)#  
ip igmp query-interval  
This command configures the frequency at which host query messages are sent.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp query-interval seconds  
no ip igmp query-interval  
seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query  
messages. (Range: 1-255)  
Default Setting  
125 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
4-230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• Multicast routers send host query messages to determine the interfaces that  
are connected to downstream hosts requesting a specific multicast service.  
Only the designated multicast router for a subnet sends host query messages,  
which are addressed to the multicast address 224.0.0.1.  
• For IGMP Version 1, the designated router is elected according to the  
multicast routing protocol that runs on the LAN. But for IGMP Version 2, the  
designated querier is the lowest IP-addressed multicast router on the subnet.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp query-interval 100  
Console(config-if)#  
ip igmp max-resp-interval  
This command configures the maximum response time advertised in IGMP queries.  
Use the no form of this command to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp max-resp-interval seconds  
no ip igmp max-resp-interval  
seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 1-255)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.  
• This command defines how long any responder (i.e., client or router) still in the  
group has to respond to a query message before the router deletes the group.  
• By varying the Maximum Response Interval, you can tune the burstiness of  
IGMP messages passed on the subnet; where larger values make the traffic  
less bursty, as host responses are spread out over a larger interval.  
• The number of seconds represented by the maximum response interval must  
be less than the Query Interval (page 4-230).  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds:  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-resp-interval 20  
Console(config-if)#  
4-231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
ip igmp last-memb-query-interval  
This command configures the last member query interval. Use the no form of this  
command to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp last-memb-query-interval seconds  
no ip igmp last-memb-query-interval  
seconds - The report delay for the last member query. (Range: 1-255)  
Default Setting  
1 second  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• A multicast client sends an IGMP leave message when it leaves a group. The  
router then checks to see if this was the last host in the group by sending an  
IGMP query and starting a timer based on this command. If no reports are  
received before the timer expires, the group is deleted.  
• This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced  
value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 10 seconds:  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp last-memb-query-interval 10  
Console(config-if)#  
ip igmp version  
This command configures the IGMP version used on an interface. Use the no form  
of this command to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp version {1 | 2}  
no ip igmp version  
1 - IGMP Version 1  
2 - IGMP Version 2  
Default Setting  
IGMP Version 2  
4-232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• All routers on the subnet must support the same version. However, the  
multicast hosts on the subnet may support either IGMP version 1 or 2.  
• The switch must be set to version 2 to enable the ip igmp max-resp-interval  
Example  
The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 on the selected interface:  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp version 1  
Console(config-if)#  
show ip igmp interface  
This command shows the IGMP configuration for a specific VLAN interface or for all  
interfaces.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp interface [vlan vlan-id]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following example shows the IGMP configuration for VLAN 1, as well as the  
device currently serving as the IGMP querier for this multicast service.  
Console#show ip igmp interface vlan 1  
Vlan 1 is up  
IGMP is enable, version is 2  
Robustness variable is 2  
Query interval is 125 sec  
Query Max Response Time is 10 sec, Last Member Query Interval is 1 sec  
Querier is 10.1.0.253  
Console#  
4-233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
clear ip igmp group  
This command deletes entries from the IGMP cache.  
Syntax  
clear ip igmp group [group-address | interface vlan vlan-id]  
• group-address - IP address of the multicast group.  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Deletes all entries in the cache if no options are selected.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Enter the address for a multicast group to delete all entries for the specified  
group. Enter the interface option to delete all multicast groups for the specified  
interface. Enter no options to clear all multicast groups from the cache.  
Example  
The following example clears all multicast group entries for VLAN 1:  
Console#clear ip igmp group interface vlan 1  
Console#  
show ip igmp groups  
This command displays information on multicast groups active on this switch.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp groups [group-address | interface vlan vlan-id]  
• group-address - IP address of the multicast group.  
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Displays information for all known groups.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command displays information for multicast groups learned via IGMP,  
not static groups.  
• If the switch receives an IGMP Version 1 Membership Report, it sets a timer  
to note that there are Version 1 hosts present which are members of the group  
for which it heard the report.  
4-234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
• If there are Version 1 hosts present for a particular group, the switch will ignore  
any Leave Group messages that it receives for that group.  
Example  
The following shows the IGMP groups currently active on VLAN 1:  
Console#show ip igmp groups vlan 1  
GroupAddress  
--------------- --------------- --------------- -------- -------- ---------  
234.5.6.8 10.1.5.19 7068 220  
Console#  
InterfaceVlan  
Lastreporter  
Uptime  
Expire  
V1Timer  
1
0
Table 4-74 show ip igmp groups - display description  
Description  
Field  
GroupAddress IP multicast group address with subscribers directly attached or downstream from this  
switch.  
InterfaceVlan  
The interface on this switch that has received traffic directed to the multicast group  
address.  
Lastreporter  
The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for this multicast  
group address on this interface. If no membership report has been received, this object has  
the value 0.0.0.0.  
Uptime  
Expire  
The time elapsed since this entry was created.  
The time remaining before this entry will be aged out. (The default is 260 seconds.)  
V1Timer  
The time remaining until the switch assumes that there are no longer any IGMP Version 1  
members on the IP subnet attached to this interface. (The default is 400 seconds.)  
4-235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
IP Interface Commands  
There are no IP addresses assigned to this router by default. You must manually  
configure a new address to manage the router over your network or to connect the  
router to existing IP subnets. You may also need to a establish a default gateway  
between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another  
network segment (if routing is not enabled).  
This section includes commands for configuring IP interfaces, the Address  
Resolution Protocol (ARP) and Proxy ARP. These commands are used to connect  
subnetworks to the enterprise network.  
Table 4-75 IP Interface Commands  
Command Group  
Function  
Page  
Basic IP Configuration Configures the IP address for interfaces and the gateway router  
Address Resolution  
Protocol (ARP)  
Configures static, dynamic and proxy ARP service  
Basic IP Configuration  
Table 4-76 Basic IP Configuration Commands  
Function  
Sets the IP address for the current interface  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip address  
IC  
ip default-gateway  
Defines the default gateway through which this router can reach GC  
other subnetworks  
show ip interface  
show ip redirects  
ping  
Displays the IP settings for this device  
PE  
PE  
Displays the default gateway configured for this device  
Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the  
network  
NE,PE 4-239  
ip address  
This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use  
the no form to restore the default IP address.  
Syntax  
ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp} [secondary]  
no ip address  
ip-address - IP address  
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies  
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.  
dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.  
secondary - Specifies a secondary IP address.  
4-236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
IP Interface Commands  
4
Default Setting  
IP address: 0.0.0.0  
Netmask: 255.0.0.0  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• If this router is directly connected to end node devices (or connected to end  
nodes via shared media) that will be assigned to a specific subnet, then you  
must create a router interface for each VLAN that will support routing. The  
router interface consists of an IP address and subnet mask. This interface  
address defines both the network number to which the router interface is  
attached and the router’s host number on that network. In other words, a  
router interface address defines the network and subnetwork numbers of the  
segment that is connected to that interface, and allows you to send IP packets  
to or from the router.  
• Before you configure any network interfaces on this router, you should first  
create a VLAN for each unique user group, or for each network application  
and its associated users. Then assign the ports associated with each of these  
VLANs.  
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access  
over the network or to connect the router to existing IP subnets. You can  
manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an  
address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four  
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not  
be accepted by the configuration program.  
• An interface can have only one primary IP address, but can have many  
secondary IP addresses. In other words, you will need to specify secondary  
addresses if more than one IP subnet can be accessed via this interface.  
• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not function until  
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests will be broadcast  
periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and  
DHCP values can include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask).  
• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp  
restart client command, or by rebooting the router.  
Notes: 1. Each VLAN group can be assigned its own IP interface address.  
Therefore, if routing is enabled, you can manage the router via any of  
these IP addresses.  
2. Before you can change the primary IP address on an interface, you  
must first clear the current address with the no form of this command.  
4-237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
ip default-gateway  
This command specifies the default gateway for destinations not found in the local  
routing tables. Use the no form to remove a default gateway.  
Syntax  
ip default-gateway gateway  
no ip default-gateway  
gateway - IP address of the default gateway  
Default Setting  
No static route is established.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The gateway specified in this command is only valid if routing is disabled with  
the no ip routing command. If IP routing is disabled, you must define a  
gateway if the target device is located in a different subnet.  
If routing is enabled, you must define the gateway with the ip route  
command.  
Example  
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.254  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Interface Commands  
4
show ip interface  
This command displays the settings of an IP interface.  
Default Setting  
All interfaces  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip interface  
Vlan 1 is up, addressing mode is User  
Interface address is 10.1.0.254, mask is 255.255.255.0, Primary  
MTU is 1500 bytes  
Proxy ARP is disabled  
Split horizon is enabled  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show ip redirects  
This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip redirects  
ip default gateway 10.1.0.254  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ping  
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.  
Syntax  
ping host [count count][size size]  
host - IP address or IP alias of the host.  
count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)  
size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)  
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified  
because the router adds header information.  
4-239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
This command has no default for the host.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.  
• The following are some results of the ping command:  
- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,  
depending on network traffic.  
- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout”  
appears in ten seconds.  
- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that  
the destination is unreachable.  
- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry  
in the route table.  
• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.  
Example  
Console#ping 10.1.0.9  
Type ESC to abort.  
PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 0 ms  
Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:  
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)  
Approximate round trip times:  
Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 10 ms, Average = 8 ms  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Interface Commands  
4
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)  
Table 4-77 Address Resolution Protocol Commands  
Function  
Command  
arp  
Mode Page  
Adds a static entry in the ARP cache  
GC  
GC  
PE  
arp-timeout  
clear arp-cache  
show arp  
Sets the time a dynamic entry remains in the ARP cache  
Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache  
Displays entries in the ARP cache  
NE, PE 4-242  
ip proxy-arp  
Enables proxy ARP service  
arp  
This command adds a static entry in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.  
Use the no form to remove an entry from the cache.  
Syntax  
arp ip-address hardware-address  
no arp ip-address  
ip-address - IP address to map to a specified hardware address.  
hardware-address - Hardware address to map to a specified IP address.  
(The format for this address is xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.)  
Default Setting  
No default entries  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The ARP cache is used to map 32-bit IP addresses into 48-bit hardware (i.e.,  
Media Access Control) addresses. This cache includes entries for hosts and  
other routers on local network interfaces defined on this router.  
• The maximum number of static entries allowed in the ARP cache is 128.  
• You may need to enter a static entry in the cache if there is no response to an  
ARP broadcast message. For example, some applications may not respond  
to ARP requests or the response arrives too late, causing network operations  
to time out.  
Example  
Console(config)#arp 10.1.0.19 01-02-03-04-05-06  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
clear arp-cache  
show arp  
4-241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
arp-timeout  
This command sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the Address Resolution  
Protocol (ARP) cache. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
arp-timeout seconds  
no arp-timeout  
seconds - The time a dynamic entry remains in the ARP cache.  
(Range: 300-86400; 86400 is one day)  
Default Setting  
1200 seconds (20 minutes)  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
Use the show arp command to display the current cache timeout value.  
Example  
This example sets the ARP cache timeout for 15 minutes (i.e., 900 seconds).  
Console(config)#arp-timeout 900  
Console(config)#  
clear arp-cache  
This command deletes all dynamic entries from the Address Resolution Protocol  
(ARP) cache.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example clears all dynamic entries in the ARP cache.  
Console#clear arp-cache  
This operation will delete all the dynamic entries in ARP Cache.  
Are you sure to continue this operation (y/n)?y  
Console#  
show arp  
Use this command to display entries in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)  
cache.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
4-242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IP Interface Commands  
4
Command Usage  
This command displays information about the ARP cache. The first line shows  
the cache timeout. It also shows each cache entry, including the  
corresponding IP address, MAC address, type (static, dynamic, other), and  
VLAN interface. Note that entry type “other” indicates local addresses for this  
router.  
Example  
This example displays all entries in the ARP cache.  
Console#show arp  
Arp cache timeout: 1200 (seconds)  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
Type  
Interface  
--------------- ----------------- --------- -----------  
10.1.0.0 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
10.1.0.254 00-00-ab-cd-00-00  
10.1.0.255 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff  
123.20.10.123 02-10-20-30-40-50  
345.30.20.23 09-50-40-30-20-10  
other  
other  
other  
static  
dynamic  
1
1
1
2
3
Total entry : 5  
Console#  
ip proxy-arp  
This command enables proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). Use the no form  
to disable proxy ARP.  
Syntax  
[no] ip proxy-arp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
Proxy ARP allows a non-routing device to determine the MAC address of a  
host on another subnet or network.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#ip proxy-arp  
Console(config-if)#  
4-243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
IP Routing Commands  
After you configure network interfaces for this router, you must set the paths used to  
send traffic between different interfaces. If you enable routing on this device, traffic  
will automatically be forwarded between all of the local subnetworks. However, to  
forward traffic to devices on other subnetworks, you can either configure fixed paths  
with static routing commands, or enable a dynamic routing protocol that exchanges  
information with other routers on the network to automatically determine the best  
path to any subnetwork.  
This section includes commands for both static and dynamic routing. These  
commands are used to connect between different local subnetworks or to connect  
the router to the enterprise network.  
Table 4-78 IP Routing Commands  
Command Group  
Function  
Page  
Global Routing  
Configuration  
Configures global parameters for static and dynamic routing, displays the 4-244  
routing table, and statistics for protocols used to exchange routing  
information  
Routing Information  
Protocol (RIP)  
Configures global and interface specific parameters for RIP  
Open Shortest Path First Configures global and interface specific parameters for OSPF  
(OSPF)  
Global Routing Configuration  
Table 4-79 Global Routing Configuration Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip routing  
Enables static and dynamic IP routing  
Configures static routes  
GC  
GC  
PE  
PE  
PE  
PE  
ip route  
clear ip route  
show ip route  
show ip host-route  
show ip traffic  
Deletes specified entries from the routing table  
Displays specified entries in the routing table  
Displays displays the interface associated with known routes  
Displays statistics for IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP protocols  
ip routing  
This command enables IP routing. Use the no form to disable IP routing.  
Syntax  
[no] ip routing  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
IP Routing Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• The command affects both static and dynamic unicast routing.  
• If IP routing is enabled, all IP packets are routed using either static routing or  
dynamic routing via RIP or OSPF, and other packets for all non-IP protocols  
(e.g., NetBuei, NetWare or AppleTalk) are switched based on MAC  
addresses. If IP routing is disabled, all packets are switched, with filtering and  
forwarding decisions based strictly on MAC addresses.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip routing  
Console(config)#  
ip route  
This command configures static routes. Use the no form to remove static routes.  
Syntax  
ip route {destination-ip netmask | default} {gateway} [metric metric]  
no ip route {destination-ip netmask | default | *}  
destination-ip – IP address of the destination network, subnetwork, or host.  
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies  
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
default – Sets this entry as the default route.  
gateway – IP address of the gateway used for this route.  
metric – Selected RIP cost for this interface. (Range: 1-5, default: 1)  
* – Removes all static routing table entries.  
Default Setting  
No static routes are configured.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You can configure up to 2000 static routes.  
• Static routes take precedence over dynamically learned routes.  
• Static routes are included in RIP updates periodically sent by the router.  
Example  
This example forwards all traffic for subnet 192.168.1.0 to the router 192.168.5.254,  
using the default metric of 1.  
Console(config)#ip route 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.5.254  
Console(config)#  
4-245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
clear ip route  
This command removes dynamically learned entries from the IP routing table.  
Syntax  
clear ip route {network [netmask] | *}  
network – Network or subnet address.  
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies  
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
* – Removes all dynamic routing table entries.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command only clears dynamically learned routes.  
• Use the no ip address command to remove a local interface.  
• Use the no ip route command to remove a static route.  
Example  
Console#clear ip route 10.1.5.0  
Console#  
show ip route  
This command displays information in the IP routing table.  
Syntax  
show ip route [config | address [netmask]]  
config – Displays all static routing entries.  
address – IP address of the destination network, subnetwork or host for  
which routing information is to be displayed.  
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies  
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If the address is specified without the netmask parameter, the router displays  
all routes for the corresponding natural class address (page 4-250).  
4-246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show ip route  
Ip Address  
Netmask  
Next Hop  
Protocol Metric Interface  
--------------- --------------- --------------- ---------- ------ ---------  
0.0.0.0  
10.2.48.2  
10.2.5.6  
10.3.9.1  
0.0.0.0  
255.255.252.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
10.2.48.102  
10.2.48.16  
10.2.8.12  
static  
local  
RIP  
0
0
1
2
1
1
2
3
10.2.9.254 OSPF-intra  
Total entry: 4  
Console#  
Table 4-80 show ip route - display description  
Description  
Field  
Ip Address  
IP address of the destination network, subnetwork, or host. Note that the address 0.0.0.0  
indicates the default gateway for this router.  
Netmask  
Next Hop  
Protocol  
Metric  
Network mask for the associated IP subnet.  
IP address of the next hop (or gateway) used for this route.  
The protocol which generated this route information. (Values: static, local, RIP, OSPF)  
Cost for this interface.  
Interface  
VLAN interface through which this address can be reached.  
show ip host-route  
This command displays the interface associated with known routes.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip host-route  
Total count: 0  
IP address  
Mac address  
VLAN  
Port  
--------------------  
192.168.1.250  
10.2.48.2  
--------------------  
00-00-30-01-01-01  
00-00-30-01-01-02  
00-00-30-01-01-03  
00-00-30-01-01-04  
------  
------  
3
1
1
2
1
1
2
3
10.2.5.6  
10.3.9.1  
Console#  
Table 4-81 show ip host-route - display description  
Description  
Field  
Ip address  
Mac address  
VLAN  
IP address of the destination network, subnetwork, or host.  
The physical layer address associated with the IP address.  
The VLAN that connects to this IP address.  
Port  
The port that connects to this IP address.  
4-247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
show ip traffic  
This command displays statistics for IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP protocols.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
For a description of the information shown by this command, see “Displaying  
Example  
Console#show ip traffic  
IP statistics:  
Rcvd: 5 total, 5 local destination  
0 checksum errors  
0 unknown protocol, 0 not a gateway  
Frags: 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts  
0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment  
Sent: 9 generated  
0 no route  
ICMP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 checksum errors, 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo  
5 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench  
0 parameter, 0 timestamp  
Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply  
0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp  
0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem  
UDP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port  
Sent: 0 total  
TCP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors  
Sent: 0 total  
ARP statistics:  
Rcvd: 0 requests, 1 replies  
Sent: 1 requests, 0 replies  
Console#  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)  
Table 4-82 Routing Information Protocol Commands  
Command  
router rip  
timers basic  
network  
Function  
Mode Page  
Enables the RIP routing protocol  
GC  
Sets basic timers, including update, timeout, garbage collection RC  
Specifies the network interfaces that are to use RIP routing RC  
neighbor  
version  
Defines a neighboring router with which to exchange information RC  
Specifies the RIP version to use on all network interfaces (if not RC  
already specified with a receive version or send version command)  
ip rip receive version  
ip rip send version  
ip split-horizon  
Sets the RIP receive version to use on a network interface  
Sets the RIP send version to use on a network interface  
Enables split-horizon or poison-reverse loop prevention  
IC  
IC  
IC  
4-248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IP Routing Commands  
4
Table 4-82 Routing Information Protocol Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip rip authentication key Enables authentication for RIP2 packets and specifies keys  
ip ripauthentication mode Specifies the type of authentication used for RIP2 packets  
IC  
IC  
show rip globals  
show ip rip  
Displays global configuration settings and statistics for RIP  
PE  
Displays RIP configuration information for each network interface PE  
router rip  
This command enables Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing for all IP  
interfaces on the router. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] router rip  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Usage  
• RIP is used to specify how routers exchange routing table information.  
• This command is also used to enter router configuration mode.  
Example  
Console(config)#router rip  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
timers basic  
This command configures the RIP update timer, timeout timer, and garbage-  
collection timer. Use the no form to restore the defaults.  
Syntax  
timers basic update-seconds  
no timers basic  
update-seconds – Sets the update timer to the specified value, sets the  
timeout time value to 6 times the update time, and sets the garbage-  
collection timer to 4 times the update time.  
(Range for update timer: 15-60 seconds)  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
4-249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
Update: 30 seconds  
Timeout: 180 seconds  
Garbage collection: 120 seconds  
Command Usage  
• The update timer sets the rate at which updates are sent. This is the  
fundamental timer used to control all basic RIP processes.  
• The timeout timer is the time after which there have been no update  
messages that a route is declared dead. The route is marked inaccessible  
(i.e., the metric set to infinite) and advertised as unreachable. However,  
packets are still forwarded on this route.  
• After the timeout interval expires, the router waits for an interval specified by  
the garbage-collection timer before removing this entry from the routing table.  
This timer allows neighbors to become aware of an invalid route prior to  
purging it.  
• Setting the update timer to a short interval can cause the router to spend an  
excessive amount of time processing updates.  
• These timers must be set to the same values for all routers in the network.  
Example  
This example sets the update timer to 40 seconds. The timeout timer is  
subsequently set to 240 seconds, and the garbage-collection timer to 160 seconds.  
Console(config-router)#timers basic 15  
Console(config-router)#  
network  
This command specifies the network interfaces that will be included in the RIP  
routing process. Use the no form to remove an entry.  
Syntax  
[no] network subnet-address  
subnet-address – IP address of a network directly connected to this router.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
No networks are specified.  
4-250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• RIP only sends updates to interfaces specified by this command.  
• Subnet addresses are interpreted as class A, B or C, based on the first field  
in the specified address. In other words, if a subnet address nnn.xxx.xxx.xxx  
is entered, the first field (nnn) determines the class:  
0 - 127 is class A, and only the first field in the network address is used.  
128 - 191 is class B, and the first two fields in the network address are used.  
192 - 223 is class C, and the first three fields in the network address are used.  
Example  
This example includes network interface 10.1.0.0 in the RIP routing process.  
Console(config-router)#network 10.1.0.0  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
neighbor  
This command defines a neighboring router with which this router will exchange  
routing information. Use the no form to remove an entry.  
Syntax  
[no] neighbor ip-address  
ip-address - IP address to map to a specified hardware address.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
No neighbors are defined.  
Command Usage  
This command can be used to configure a static neighbor with which this  
router will exchange information, rather than relying on broadcast messages  
generated by the RIP protocol.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#neighbor 10.2.0.254  
Console(config-router)#  
4-251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
version  
This command specifies a RIP version used globally by the router. Use the no form  
to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
version {1 | 2}  
no version  
1 - RIP Version 1  
2 - RIP Version 2  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
RIP Version 1  
Command Usage  
• When this command is used to specify a global RIP version, any VLAN  
interface not previously set by the ip rip receive version or ip rip send  
version command will be set to the following values:  
- RIP Version 1 configures the unset interfaces to send RIPv1 compatible  
protocol messages and receive either RIPv1 or RIPv2 protocol messages.  
- RIP Version 2 configures the unset interfaces to use RIPv2 for both sending  
and receiving protocol messages.  
• When the no form of this command is used to restore the default value, any  
VLAN interface not previously set by the ip rip receive version or ip rip send  
version command will be set to the default send or receive version.  
Example  
This example sets the global version for RIP to send and receive version 2 packets.  
Console(config-router)#version 2  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
4-252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
ip rip receive version  
This command specifies a RIP version to receive on an interface. Use the no form to  
restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip rip receive version {none | 1 | 2 | 1 2}  
no ip rip receive version  
none - Does not accept incoming RIP packets.  
1 - Accepts only RIPv1 packets.  
2 - Accepts only RIPv2 packets.  
1 2 - Accepts RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
The default depends on the setting specified with the version command:  
Global RIPv1 - RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets  
Global RIPv2 - RIPv2 packets  
Command Usage  
• Use this command to override the global setting specified by the RIP version  
command.  
• You can specify the receive version based on these options:  
- Use “none” if you do not want to add any dynamic entries to the routing table  
for an interface. (For example, you may only want to allow static routes for  
a specific interface.)  
- Use “1” or “2” if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or RIPv2,  
respectively.  
- Use “1 2” if some routers in the local network are using RIPv2, but there are  
still some older routers using RIPv1.  
Example  
This example sets the interface version for VLAN 1 to receive RIPv1 packets.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip rip receive version 1  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip rip send version  
This command specifies a RIP version to send on an interface. Use the no form to  
restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip rip send version {none | 1 | 2 | v2-broadcast}  
no ip rip send version  
none - Does not transmit RIP updates.  
1 - Sends only RIPv1 packets.  
2 - Sends only RIPv2 packets.  
v2-broadcast - Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
The default depends on the setting specified with the version command:  
Global RIPv1 - Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2  
Global RIPv2 - RIPv2 packets  
Command Usage  
• Use this command to override the global setting specified by the RIP version  
command.  
You can specify the receive version based on these options:  
- Use “none” to passively monitor route information advertised by other  
routers attached to the network.  
- Use “1” or “2” if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or RIPv2,  
respectively.  
- Use “v2-broadcast” to propagate route information by broadcasting to other  
routers on the network using RIPv2, instead of multicasting as normally  
required by RIPv2. (Using this mode allows RIPv1 routers to receive these  
protocol messages, but still allows RIPv2 routers to receive the additional  
information provided by RIPv2, including subnet mask, next hop and  
authentication information.)  
Example  
This example sets the interface version for VLAN 1 to send RIPv1 packets.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip rip send version 1  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
ip split-horizon  
This command enables split-horizon or poison-reverse (a variation) on an interface.  
Use the no form to disable split-horizon.  
Syntax  
ip split-horizon [poison-reverse]  
no ip split-horizon  
poison-reverse - Enables poison-reverse on the current interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
split-horizon  
Command Usage  
• Split horizon never propagates routes back to an interface from which they  
have been acquired.  
• Poison reverse propagates routes back to an interface port from which they  
have been acquired, but sets the distance-vector metrics to infinity. (This  
provides faster convergence.)  
Example  
This example propagates routes back to the source using poison-reverse.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip split-horizon poison-reverse  
Console(config-if)#  
ip rip authentication key  
This command enables authentication for RIPv2 packets and to specify the key that  
must be used on an interface. Use the no form to prevent authentication.  
Syntax  
ip rip authentication key key-string  
no ip rip authentication  
key-string - A password used for authentication.  
(Range: 1-16 characters, case sensitive)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
No authentication  
Command Usage  
• This command can be used to restrict the interfaces that can exchange RIPv2  
routing information. (Note that this command does not apply to RIPv1.)  
4-255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
• For authentication to function properly, both the sending and receiving  
interface must be configured with the same password.  
Example  
This example sets an authentication password of “small” to verify incoming routing  
messages and to tag outgoing routing messages.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip rip authentication key small  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
ip rip authentication mode  
This command specifies the type of authentication that can be used on an interface.  
Note that the current firmware version only supports a simple password. Use the no  
form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip rip authentication mode {text}  
no ip rip authentication mode  
text - Indicates that a simple password will be used.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
No authentication  
Command Usage  
• The password to be used for authentication is specified in the ip rip  
authentication key command (page 4-255).  
• This command requires the interface to exchange routing information with  
other routers based on an authorized password. (Note that this command only  
applies to RIPv2.)  
• For authentication to function properly, both the sending and receiving  
interface must be configured with the same password or authentication key.  
Example  
This example sets the authentication mode to plain text.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip rip authentication mode text  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing Commands  
4
show rip globals  
This command displays global configuration settings for RIP.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show rip globals  
RIP Process: Enabled  
Update Time in Seconds: 30  
Number of Route Change: 0  
Number of Queries: 1  
Console#  
Table 4-83 show rip globals - display description  
Field  
Description  
RIP Process  
Indicates if RIP has been enabled or disabled.  
Update Time in Seconds  
The interval at which RIP advertises known route information.  
(Default: 30 seconds)  
Number of Route Changes  
Number of Queries  
Number of times routing information has changed.  
Number of router database queries received by this router.  
show ip rip  
This command displays information about interfaces configured for RIP.  
Syntax  
show ip rip {configuration | status | peer}  
configuration - Shows RIP configuration settings for each interface.  
status - Shows the status of routing messages on each interface.  
peer - Shows information on neighboring routers, along with information  
about the last time a route update was received, the RIP version used by  
the neighbor, and the status of routing messages received from this  
neighbor.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show ip rip configuration  
Interface  
SendMode  
ReceiveMode  
Poison  
Authentication  
--------------- --------------- ------------- -------------- ------------------  
10.1.0.253 rip1Compatible  
10.1.1.253 rip1Compatible  
Console#show ip rip status  
RIPv1Orv2  
RIPv1Orv2  
SplitHorizon  
SplitHorizon  
noAuthentication  
noAuthentication  
Interface  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
SendUpdates  
--------------- --------------- -------------- ---------------  
10.1.0.253  
10.1.1.253  
0
0
0
0
13  
13  
Console#show ip rip peer  
Peer  
UpdateTime  
Version  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
--------------- ------------ --------- --------------- --------------  
10.1.0.254  
10.1.1.254  
1625  
1625  
2
2
0
0
0
0
Console#  
Table 4-84 show ip rip - display description  
Description  
Field  
show ip rip configuration  
Interface  
IP address of the interface.  
SendMode  
ReceiveMode  
Poison  
RIP version sent on this interface (none, RIPv1, RIPv2, or RIPv2-broadcast)  
RIP version received on this interface (none, RIPv1, RIPv2, RIPv1 or RIPv2)  
Shows if split-horizon, poison-reverse, or no protocol message loopback  
prevention method is in use.  
Authentication  
show ip rip status  
Interface  
Shows if authentication is set to simple password or none.  
IP address of the interface.  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
SendUpdates  
show ip rip peer  
Peer  
Number of bad RIP packets received.  
Number of bad routes received.  
Number of route changes.  
IP address of a neighboring RIP router.  
UpdateTime  
Version  
Last time a route update was received from this peer.  
Whether RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets were received from this peer.  
Number of bad RIP packets received from this peer.  
Number of bad routes received from this peer.  
RcvBadPackets  
RcvBadRoutes  
4-258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)  
Table 4-85 Open Shortest Path First Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
General Configuration  
router ospf  
Enables or disables OSPF  
GC  
RC  
RC  
router-id  
Sets the router ID for this device  
compatible rfc1583  
Calculates summary route costs using RFC 1583 (OSPFv1)  
default-information  
originate  
Generates a default external route into an autonomous system RC  
timers spf  
Configures the hold time between consecutive SPF calculations RC  
Route Metrics and Summaries  
area range  
Summarizes routes advertised by an ABR  
RC  
area default-cost  
summary-address  
redistribute  
Sets the cost for a default summary route sent into a stub or NSSA RC  
Summarizes routes advertised by an ASBR  
RC  
RC  
Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another  
Area Configuration  
network area  
Assigns specified interface to an area  
RC  
RC  
RC  
area stub  
Defines a stubby area that cannot send or receive LSAs  
Defines a not-so-stubby that can import external routes  
area nssa  
area virtual-link  
Interface Configuration  
ip ospf authentication  
Defines a virtual link from an area border routers to the backbone RC  
Specifies the authentication type for an interface  
IC  
IC  
IC  
ip ospf authentication-key Assigns a simple password to be used by neighboring routers  
ip ospf  
message-digest-key  
Enables MD5 authentication and sets the key for an interface  
ip ospf cost  
Specifies the cost of sending a packet on an interface  
IC  
IC  
ip ospf dead-interval  
Sets the interval at which hello packets are not seen before  
neighbors declare the router down  
ip ospf hello-interval  
ip ospf priority  
Specifies the interval between sending hello packets  
IC  
Sets the router priority used to determine the designated router IC  
ip ospf retransmit-interval Specifies the time between resending a link-state advertisement IC  
ip ospf transmit-delay  
Display Information  
show ip ospf  
Estimates time to send a link-state update packet over an interface IC  
Displays general information about the routing processes  
PE  
show ip ospf  
border-routers  
Displays routing table entries for Area Border Routers (ABR) and PE  
Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBR)  
show ip ospf database Shows information about different LSAs in the database  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show ip ospf interface  
show ip ospf neighbor  
Displays interface information  
Displays neighbor information  
4-259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-85 Open Shortest Path First Commands (Continued)  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
show ip ospf  
summary-address  
Displays all summary address redistribution information  
PE  
show ip ospf virtual-links Displays parameters and the adjacency state of virtual links  
PE  
router ospf  
This command enables Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing for all IP interfaces  
on the router. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] router ospf  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Usage  
• OSPF is used to specify how routers exchange routing table information.  
• This command is also used to enter router configuration mode.  
Example  
Console(config)#router ospf  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
router-id  
This command assigns a unique router ID for this device within the autonomous  
system. Use the no form to use the default router identification method (i.e., the  
lowest interface address).  
Syntax  
router-id ip-address  
no router-id  
ip-address - Router ID formatted as an IP address.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
Lowest interface address  
4-260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• The router ID must be unique for every router in the autonomous system.  
Using the default setting based on the lowest interface address ensures that  
each router ID is unique. Also, note that you cannot set the router ID to 0.0.0.0  
or 255.255.255.255.  
• If this router already has registered neighbors, the new router ID will be used  
when the router is rebooted, or manually restarted by entering the no router  
ospf followed by the router ospf command.  
• If the priority values of the routers bidding to be the designated router or  
backup designated router for an area are equal, the router with the highest ID  
is elected.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#router-id 10.1.1.1  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
compatible rfc1583  
This command calculates summary route costs using RFC 1583 (OSPFv1). Use the  
no form to calculate costs using RFC 2328 (OSPFv2).  
Syntax  
[no] compatible rfc1583  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
RFC 1583 compatible  
Command Usage  
All routers in an OSPF routing domain should use the same RFC for  
calculating summary routes.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#compatible rfc1583  
Console(config-router)#  
4-261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
default-information originate  
This command generates a default external route into an autonomous system. Use  
the no form to disable this feature.  
Syntax  
default-information originate [always] [metric interface-metric]  
[metric-type metric-type]  
no default-information originate  
always - Always advertise a default route to the local AS regardless of  
whether the router has a default route. (See “ip route” on page 4-245.)  
interface-metric - Metric assigned to the default route.  
(Range: 1-65535; Default: 10)  
metric-type - External link type used to advertise the default route.  
(Options: Type 1, Type 2; Default: Type 2)  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Usage  
• The metric for the default external route is used to calculate the path cost for  
traffic passed from other routers within the AS out through the ASBR.  
• When you use this command to redistribute routes into a routing domain (i.e.,  
an Autonomous System, this router automatically becomes an Autonomous  
System Boundary Router (ASBR). However, an ASBR does not, by default,  
generate a default route into the routing domain.  
- If you use the always keyword, the router will advertise itself as a default  
external route into the AS, even if a default external route does not actually  
exist. (To define a default route, use the ip route command.)  
- If you do not use the always keyword, the router can only advertise a  
default external route into the AS if the redistribute command is used to  
import external routes via RIP or static routing, and such a route is known.  
• Type 1 route advertisements add the internal cost to the external route metric.  
Type 2 routes do not add the internal cost metric. When comparing Type 2  
routes, the internal cost is only used as a tie-breaker if several Type 2 routes  
have the same cost.  
Example  
This example assigns a metric of 20 to the default external route advertised into an  
autonomous system, sending it as a Type 2 external metric.  
Console(config-router)#default-information originate metric 20  
metric-type 2  
Console(config-router)#  
4-262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing Commands  
4
Related Commands  
timers spf  
This command configures the hold time between making two consecutive shortest  
path first (SPF) calculations. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
timers spf spf-holdtime  
no timers spf  
spf-holdtime - Minimum time between two consecutive SPF calculations.  
(Range: 0-65535 seconds)  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Usage  
• Setting the SPF holdtime to 0 means that there is no delay between  
consecutive calculations.  
• Using a low value allows the router to switch to a new path faster, but uses  
more CPU processing time.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#timers spf 20  
Console(config-router)#  
4-263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
area range  
This command summarizes the routes advertised by an Area Border Router (ABR).  
Use the no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] area area-id range ip-address netmask [advertise | not-advertise]  
area-id - Identifies an area for which the routes are summarized.  
(The area ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
ip-address - Base address for the routes to summarize.  
netmask - Network mask for the summary route.  
advertise - Advertises the specified address range.  
not-advertise - The summary is not sent, and the routes remain hidden  
from the rest of the network.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Usage  
• This command can be used to advertise routes between areas.  
• If routes are set to be advertised, the router will issue a Type 3 summary LSA  
for each address range specified with this command.  
• This router supports up 64 summary routes for area ranges.  
Example  
This example creates a summary address for all area routes in the range of 10.2.x.x.  
Console(config-router)#area 10.2.0.0 range 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 advertise  
Console(config-router)#  
area default-cost  
This command specifies a cost for the default summary route sent into a stub or  
not-so-stubby area (NSSA) from an Area Border Router (ABR). Use the no form to  
remove the assigned default cost.  
Syntax  
area area-id default-cost cost  
no area area-id default-cost  
area-id - Identifier for a stub or NSSA, in the form of an IP address.  
cost - Cost for the default summary route sent to a stub or NSSA.  
(Range: 0-65535)  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
4-264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing Commands  
4
Default Setting  
1
Command Usage  
• If you enter this command for a normal area, it will changed to a stub.  
• If the default cost is set to “0,” the router will not advertise a default route into  
the attached stub or NSSA.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#area 10.3.9.0 default-cost 10  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
summary-address  
This command aggregates routes learned from other protocols. Use the no form to  
remove a summary address.  
Syntax  
[no] summary-address summary-address netmask  
summary-address - Summary address covering a range of addresses.  
netmask - Network mask for the summary route.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Usage  
• An Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) can redistribute routes  
learned from other protocols by advertising an aggregate route into all  
attached autonomous systems.  
• This router supports up 16 Type-5 summary routes.  
Example  
This example creates a summary address for all routes contained in 192.168.x.x.  
Console(config-router)#summary-address 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
4-265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
redistribute  
This command imports external routing information from other routing domains (i.e.,  
protocols) into the autonomous system. Use the no form to disable this feature.  
Syntax  
[no] redistribute [rip | static] [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value]  
rip - External routes will be imported from the Routing Information Protocol  
into this Autonomous System.  
static - Static routes will be imported into this Autonomous System.  
metric-value - Metric assigned to all external routes for the specified  
protocol. (Range: 1-65535: Default: 10)  
• type-value  
1 - Type 1 external route  
2 - Type 2 external route (default) - Routers do not add internal route  
metric to external route metric.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
redistribution - none  
protocol - RIP and static  
metric-value - 0  
type-metric - 2  
Command Usage  
• This router supports redistribution for both RIP and static routes.  
• When you redistribute external routes into an OSPF autonomous system  
(AS), the router automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary  
router (ASBR). If the redistribute command is used in conjunction with the  
default-information originate command to generate a “default” external  
route into the AS, the metric value specified in this command supersedes the  
metric specified in the default-information originate command.  
• Metric type specifies the way to advertise routes to destinations outside the  
AS via External LSAs. Specify Type 1 to add the internal cost metric to the  
external route metric. In other words, the cost of the route from any router  
within the AS is equal to the cost associated with reaching the advertising  
ASBR, plus the cost of the external route. Specify Type 2 to only advertise the  
external route metric.  
Example  
This example redistributes routes learned from RIP as Type 1 external routes.  
Console(config-router)#redistribute rip metric-type 1  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
4-266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing Commands  
4
network area  
This command defines an OSPF area and the interfaces that operate within this  
area. Use the no form to disable OSPF for a specified interface.  
Syntax  
[no] network ip-address netmask area area-id  
ip-address - Address of the interfaces to add to the area.  
netmask - Network mask of the address range to add to the area.  
area-id - Area to which the specified address or range is assigned. An  
OSPF area identifies a group of routers that share common routing  
information. (The area ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Usage  
• An area ID uniquely defines an OSPF broadcast area. The area ID 0.0.0.0  
indicates the OSPF backbone for an autonomous system. Each router must  
be connected to the backbone via a direct connection or a virtual link.  
• Set the area ID to the same value for all routers on a network segment using  
the network mask to add one or more interfaces to an area.  
• Be sure to include the primary address for an interface in the network area,  
otherwise, OSPF will not operate for any secondary addresses covered by the  
command.  
• An interface can only be assigned to a single area. If an address range is  
overlapped in subsequent network area commands, the router will implement  
the address range for the area specified in first command, and ignore the  
overlapping ranges in subsequent commands. However, note that if a more  
specific address range is removed from an area, the interface belonging to  
that range may still remain active if a less specific address range covering that  
area has been specified.  
• This router supports up to 64 OSPF router interfaces, and up to 16 total areas  
(either normal transit areas, stubs, or NSSAs).  
Example  
This example creates the backbone 0.0.0.0 covering class B addresses 10.1.x.x,  
and a normal transit area 10.2.9.0 covering the class C addresses 10.2.9.x.  
Console(config-router)#network 10.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 area 0.0.0.0  
Console(config-router)#network 10.2.9.0 255.255.255.0 area 10.1.0.0  
Console(config-router)#  
4-267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
area stub  
This command defines a stub area. To remove a stub, use the no form without the  
optional keyword. To remove the summary attribute, use the no form with the  
summary keyword.  
Syntax  
[no] area area-id stub [summary]  
area-id - Identifies the stub area.  
(The area ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
summary - Makes an Area Border Router (ABR) send a summary link  
advertisement into the stub area. (Default: no summary)  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
No stub is configured.  
Command Usage  
• All routers in a stub must be configured with the same area ID.  
• Routing table space is saved in a stub by blocking Type-4 AS summary LSAs  
and Type 5 external LSAs. The default setting for this command completely  
isolates the stub by blocking Type-3 summary LSAs that advertise the default  
route for destinations external to the local area or the autonomous system.  
• Use the area default-cost command to specify the cost of a default summary  
route sent into a stub by an ABR.  
• This router supports up to 16 total areas (either normal transit areas, stubs, or  
NSSAs).  
Example  
This example creates a stub area 10.2.0.0, and assigns all interfaces with class B  
addresses 10.2.x.x to the stub.  
Console(config-router)#area 10.2.0.0 stub  
Console(config-router)#network 10.2.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 10.2.0.0  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
4-268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing Commands  
4
area nssa  
This command defines a not-so-stubby area (NSSA). To remove an NSSA, use the  
no form without any optional keywords. To remove an optional attribute, use the no  
form without the relevant keyword.  
Syntax  
[no] area area-id nssa [no-redistribution] [default-information-originate]  
area-id - Identifies the NSSA.  
(The area ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
no-redistribution - Use this keyword when the router is an NSSA Area  
Border Router (ABR) and you want the redistribute command to import  
routes only into normal areas, and not into the NSSA. In other words, this  
keyword prevents the NSSA ABR from advertising external routing  
information (learned via routers in other areas) into the NSSA.  
default-information-originate - When the router is an NSSA Area Border  
Router (ABR) or an NSSA Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR),  
this parameter causes it to generate Type-7 default LSA into the NSSA.  
This default provides a route to other areas within the AS for an NSSA ABR,  
or to areas outside the AS for an NSSA ASBR.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
No NSSA is configured.  
Command Usage  
• All routers in a NSSA must be configured with the same area ID.  
• An NSSA is similar to a stub, because when the router is an ABR, it can  
send a default route for other areas in the AS into the NSSA using the default-  
information-originate keyword. However, an NSSA is different from a stub,  
because when the router is an ASBR, it can import a default external AS route  
(for routing protocol domains adjacent to the NSSA but not within the OSPF  
AS) into the NSSA using the default-information-originate keyword.  
• External routes advertised into an NSSA can include network destinations  
outside the AS learned via OSPF, the default route, static routes, routes  
imported from other routing protocols such as RIP, and networks directly  
connected to the router that are not running OSPF.  
NSSA external LSAs (Type 7) are converted by any ABR adjacent to the NSSA  
into external LSAs (Type-5), and propagated into other areas within the AS.  
• Also, note that unlike stub areas, all Type-3 summary LSAs are always  
imported into NSSAs to ensure that internal routes are always chosen over  
Type-7 NSSA external routes.  
• This router supports up to 16 total areas (either normal transit areas, stubs, or  
NSSAs).  
4-269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This example creates a stub area 10.3.0.0, and assigns all interfaces with class B  
addresses 10.3.x.x to the NSSA. It also instructs the router to generate external  
LSAs into the NSSA when it is an NSSA ABR or NSSA ASBR.  
Console(config-router)#area 10.3.0.0 nssa default-information-originate  
Console(config-router)#network 10.3.0.0 255.255.0.0 area 10.2.0.0  
Console(config-router)#  
area virtual-link  
This command defines a virtual link. To remove a virtual link, use the no form with no  
optional keywords. To restore the default value for an attribute, use the no form with  
the required keyword.  
Syntax  
[no] area area-id virtual-link router-id  
[authentication [message-digest | null ]] [hello-interval seconds]  
[retransmit-interval seconds] [transmit-delay seconds] [dead-interval  
seconds] [[authentication-key key] | [message-digest-key key-id md5  
key]]  
no area area-id  
area-id - Identifies the transit area for the virtual link.  
(The area ID must be in the form of an IP address.)  
router-id - Router ID of the virtual link neighbor. This must be an Area  
Border Router (ABR) that is adjacent to both the backbone and the transit  
area at the other end of the virtual link.  
authentication - Specifies the authentication mode. If no optional  
parameters follow this keyword, then plain text authentication is used along  
with the password specified by the authentication-key. If message-digest  
authentication is specified, then the message-digest-key and md5  
parameters must also be specified. If the null option is specified, then no  
authentication is performed on any OSPF routing protocol messages.  
message-digest - Specifies message-digest (MD5) authentication.  
null - Indicates that no authentication is used.  
hello-interval seconds - Specifies the transmit delay between sending  
hello packets. Setting the hello interval to a smaller value can reduce the  
delay in detecting topological changes, but will increase the routing traffic.  
This value must be the same for all routers attached to an autonomous  
system. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 10 seconds)  
retransmit-interval seconds - Specifies the interval at which the ABR  
retransmits link-state advertisements (LSA) over the virtual link. The  
retransmit interval should be set to a conservative value that provides an  
adequate flow of routing information, but does not produce unnecessary  
protocol traffic. However, note that this value should be larger for virtual  
links. (Range: 1-3600 seconds; Default: 5 seconds)  
transmit-delay seconds - Estimates the time required to send a link-state  
update packet over the virtual link, considering the transmission and  
4-270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing Commands  
4
propagation delays. LSAs have their age incremented by this amount  
before transmission. This value must be the same for all routers attached  
to an autonomous system. (Range: 1-3600 seconds; Default: 1 seconds)  
dead-interval seconds - Specifies the time that neighbor routers will wait  
for a hello packet before they declare the router down. This value must be  
the same for all routers attached to an autonomous system.  
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 4 x hello interval, or 40 seconds)  
authentication-key key - Sets a plain text password (up to 8 characters)  
that is used by neighboring routers on a virtual link to generate or verify the  
authentication field in protocol message headers. A separate password can  
be assigned to each network interface. However, this key must be the same  
for all neighboring routers on the same network (i.e., autonomous system).  
This key is only used when authentication is enabled for the backbone.  
message-digest-key key-id md5 key - Sets the key identifier and  
password to be used to authenticate protocol messages passed between  
neighboring routers and this router when using message digest (MD5)  
authentication. The key-id is an integer from 1-255, and the key is an  
alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long. If MD5 authentication is used  
on a virtual link, then it must be enabled on all routers within an autonomous  
system; and the key identifier and key must also be the same for all routers.  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Default Setting  
area-id: None  
router-id: None  
hello-interval: 10 seconds  
retransmit-interval: 5 seconds  
transmit-delay: 1 second  
dead-interval: 40 seconds  
authentication-key: None  
message-digest-key: None  
Command Usage  
• All areas must be connected to a backbone area (0.0.0.0) to maintain routing  
connectivity throughout the autonomous system. If it not possible to physically  
connect an area to the backbone, you can use a virtual link. A virtual link can  
provide a logical path to the backbone for an isolated area. You can specify  
up to 32 virtual links on this router.  
• Any area disconnected from the backbone must include the transit area ID  
and the router ID for a virtual link neighbor that is adjacent to the backbone.  
• This router supports up 64 virtual links.  
4-271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This example creates a virtual link using the defaults for all optional parameters.  
Console(config-router)#network 10.4.0.0 0.255.255.0.0 area 10.4.0.0  
Console(config-router)#area 10.4.0.0 virtual-link 10.4.3.254  
Console(config-router)#  
This example creates a virtual link using MD5 authentication.  
Console(config-router)#network 10.4.0.0 0.255.255.0.0 area 10.4.0.0  
Console(config-router)#area 10.4.0.0 virtual-link 10.4.3.254  
message-digest-key 5 md5 ld83jdpq  
Console(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
ip ospf authentication  
This command specifies the authentication type used for an interface. Enter this  
command without any optional parameters to specify plain text (or simple password)  
authentication. Use the no form to restore the default of no authentication.  
Syntax  
ip ospf authentication [message-digest | null]  
no ip ospf authentication  
message-digest - Specifies message-digest (MD5) authentication.  
null - Indicates that no authentication is used.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
No authentication  
Command Usage  
• Before specifying plain-text password authentication for an interface,  
configure a password with the ip ospf authentication-key command. Before  
specifying MD5 authentication for an interface, configure the message-digest  
key-id and key with the ip ospf message-digest-key command.  
• The plain-text authentication-key, or the MD5 key-id and key, must be used  
consistently throughout the autonomous system.  
Example  
This example enables message-digest authentication for the specified interface.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf authentication message-digest  
Console(config-if)#  
4-272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
Related Commands  
ip ospf authentication-key  
This command assigns a simple password to be used by neighboring routers. Use  
the no form to remove the password.  
Syntax  
ip ospf authentication-key key  
no ip ospf authentication-key  
key - Sets a plain text password. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
No password  
Command Usage  
• Before specifying plain-text password authentication for an interface,  
configure a password with the ip ospf authentication-key command. Before  
specifying MD5 authentication for an interface, configure the message-digest  
key-id and key with the ip ospf message-digest-key command.  
• A different password can be assigned to each network interface basis, but the  
password must be used consistently on all neighboring routers throughout a  
network (i.e., autonomous system).  
Example  
This example sets a password for the specified interface.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf authentication-key badboy  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
ip ospf message-digest-key  
This command enables message-digest (MD5) authentication on the specified  
interface and to assign a key-id and key to be used by neighboring routers. Use the  
no form to remove an existing key.  
Syntax  
ip ospf message-digest-key key-id md5 key  
no ip ospf message-digest-key key-id  
key-id - Index number of an MD5 key. (Range: 1-255)  
key - Alphanumeric password used to generate a 128 bit message digest  
or “fingerprint.” (Range: 1-16 characters)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
MD5 authentication is disabled.  
Command Usage  
• Normally, only one key is used per interface to generate authentication  
information for outbound packets and to authenticate incoming packets.  
Neighbor routers must use the same key identifier and key value.  
• When changing to a new key, the router will send multiple copies of all  
protocol messages, one with the old key and another with the new key. Once  
all the neighboring routers start sending protocol messages back to this router  
with the new key, the router will stop using the old key. This rollover process  
gives the network administrator time to update all the routers on the network  
without affecting the network connectivity. Once all the network routers have  
been updated with the new key, the old key should be removed for security  
reasons.  
Example  
This example sets a message-digest key identifier and password.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf message-digest-key 1 md5 aiebel  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
ip ospf cost  
This command explicitly sets the cost of sending a packet on an interface. Use the  
no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip ospf cost cost  
no ip ospf cost  
cost - Link metric for this interface. Use higher values to indicate slower  
ports. (Range: 1-65535)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
1
Command Usage  
Interface cost reflects the port speed. This router uses a default cost of 1 for  
all ports. Therefore, if you install a Gigabit module, you may have to reset the  
cost for all of the 100 Mbps ports to a value greater than 1.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf cost 10  
Console(config-if)#  
ip ospf dead-interval  
This command sets the interval at which hello packets are not seen before  
neighbors declare the router down. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip ospf dead-interval seconds  
no ip ospf dead-interval  
seconds - The maximum time that neighbor routers can wait for a hello  
packet before declaring the transmitting router down. This interval must be  
set to the same value for all routers on the network. (Range: 1-65535)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
40, or four times the interval specified by the ip ospf hello-interval command.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf dead-interval 50  
Console(config-if)#  
4-275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
ip ospf hello-interval  
This command specifies the interval between sending hello packets on an interface.  
Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip ospf hello-interval seconds  
no ip ospf hello-interval  
seconds - Interval at which hello packets are sent from an interface. This  
interval must be set to the same value for all routers on the network.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Usage  
Hello packets are used to inform other routers that the sending router is still  
active. Setting the hello interval to a smaller value can reduce the delay in  
detecting topological changes, but will increase routing traffic.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf hello-interval 5  
Console(config-if)#  
ip ospf priority  
This command sets the router priority used when determining the designated router  
(DR) and backup designated router (BDR) for an area. Use the no form to restore  
the default value.  
Syntax  
ip ospf priority priority  
no ip ospf priority  
priority - Sets the interface priority for this router. (Range: 0-255)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
1
4-276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• Set the priority to zero to prevent a router from being elected as a DR or BDR.  
If set to any value other than zero, the router with the highest priority will  
become the DR and the router with the next highest priority becomes the  
BDR. If two or more routers are tied with the same highest priority, the router  
with the higher ID will be elected.  
• If a DR already exists for an area when this interface comes up, the new router  
will accept the current DR regardless of its own priority. The DR will not  
change until the next time the election process is initiated.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf priority 5  
Console(config-if)#  
ip ospf retransmit-interval  
This command specifies the time between resending link-state advertisements  
(LSAs). Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds  
no ip ospf retransmit-interval  
seconds - Sets the interval at which LSAs are retransmitted from this  
interface. (Range: 1-65535)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
5 seconds  
Command Usage  
A router will resend an LSA to a neighbor if it receives no acknowledgment.  
The retransmit interval should be set to a conservative value that provides an  
adequate flow of routing information, but does not produce unnecessary  
protocol traffic. Note that this value should be larger for virtual links.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf retransmit-interval 7  
Console(config-if)#  
4-277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip ospf transmit-delay  
This command sets the estimated time to send a link-state update packet over an  
interface. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip ospf transmit-delay seconds  
no ip ospf transmit-delay  
seconds - Sets the estimated time required to send a link-state update.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Default Setting  
1 second  
Command Usage  
LSAs have their age incremented by this delay before transmission. When  
estimating the transmit delay, consider both the transmission and propagation  
delays for an interface. Set the transmit delay according to link speed, using  
larger values for lower-speed links. The transmit delay must be the same for  
all routers attached to an autonomous system.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip ospf transmit-delay 6  
Console(config-if)#  
show ip ospf  
This command shows basic information about the routing configuration.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip ospf  
Routing Process with ID 10.1.1.253  
Supports only single TOS(TOS0) route  
It is an area border and autonomous system boundary router  
Redistributing External Routes from,  
rip with metric mapped to 10  
Number of area in this router is 2  
Area 0.0.0.0 (BACKBONE)  
Number of interfaces in this area is 1  
SPF algorithm executed 19 times  
Area 10.1.0.0  
Number of interfaces in this area is 4  
SPF algorithm executed 19 times  
Console#  
4-278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IP Routing Commands  
4
Table 4-86 show ip ospf - display description  
Field  
Description  
Routing Process with ID  
Router ID  
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) route Type of service is not supported, so you can only assign one cost  
per interface  
It is an router type  
The types displayed include internal, area border, or autonomous  
system boundary routers  
Number of areas in this router  
Area identifier  
The number of configured areas  
The area address, and area type if backbone, NSSA or stub  
The number of interfaces attached to this area  
Number of interfaces  
SPF algorithm executed  
The number of times the shortest path first algorithm has been  
executed for this area  
show ip ospf border-routers  
This command shows entries in the routing table that lead to an Area Border Router  
(ABR) or Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR).  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip ospf border-routers  
Destination  
Next Hop  
Cost  
Type RteType  
Area  
SPF No  
--------------- --------------- ------ ----- -------- --------------- -------  
10.1.1.252  
10.2.6.252  
10.1.1.253  
10.2.9.253  
0
0
ABR  
ASBR  
INTRA  
INTER  
10.1.0.0  
10.2.0.0  
3
7
Console#  
Table 4-87 show ip ospf border-routers - display description  
Field  
Description  
Destination  
Next Hop  
Cost  
Identifier for the destination router  
IP address of the next hop toward the destination  
Link metric for this route  
Type  
Router type of the destination; either ABR, ASBR or both  
Route type; either intra-area or interarea route (INTRA or INTER)  
The area from which this route was learned  
RteType  
Area  
SPF No  
The number of times the shortest path first algorithm has been executed for this  
route  
4-279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
show ip ospf database  
This command shows information about different OSPF Link State Advertisements  
(LSAs) stored in this router’s database.  
Syntax  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [asbr-summary] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [asbr-summary] [link-state-id] [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [asbr-summary] [link-state-id] [self-originate] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [database-summary]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [external] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [external] [link-state-id] [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [external] [link-state-id] [self-originate] [ip-address]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [network] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [network] [link-state-id] [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [network] [link-state-id] [self-originate] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [nssa-external] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [nssa-external] [link-state-id] [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [nssa-external] [link-state-id] [self-originate] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [router] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [[router] [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [router] [self-originate] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [self-originate] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [summary] [link-state-id]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [summary] [link-state-id] [adv-router [ip-address]]  
show ip ospf [area-id] database [summary] [link-state-id] [self-originate] [link-state-id]  
area-id - Area defined for which you want to view LSA information.  
(This item must be entered in the form of an IP address.)  
adv-router - IP address of the advertising router. If not entered, information  
about all advertising routers is displayed.  
ip-address - IP address of the specified router. If no address is entered,  
information about the local router is displayed.  
asbr-summary - Shows information about Autonomous System Boundary  
Router summary LSAs.  
link-state-id - The network portion described by an LSA. The link-state-id  
entered should be:  
- An IP network number for Type 3 Summary and External LSAs  
- A Router ID for Router, Network, and Type 4 AS Summary LSAs  
Also, note that when an Type 5 ASBR External LSA is describing a default  
route, its link-state-id is set to the default destination (0.0.0.0).  
self-originate - Shows LSAs originated by this router.  
database-summary - Shows a count for each LSA type for each area  
stored in the database, and the total number of LSAs in the database.  
external - Shows information about external LSAs.  
network - Shows information about network LSAs.  
nssa-external - Shows information about NSSA external LSAs.  
router - Shows information about router LSAs.  
summary - Shows information about summary LSAs.  
4-280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Examples  
The following shows output for the show ip ospf database command.  
Console#show ip ospf database  
Displaying Router Link States(Area 10.1.0.0)  
Link ID  
ADV Router  
Age  
Seq#  
Checksum  
--------------- --------------- ------ ----------- -----------  
10.1.1.252  
10.1.1.253  
10.1.1.252  
10.1.1.253  
26 0X80000005  
23 0X80000002  
0X89A1  
0X8D9D  
Displaying Net Link States(Area 10.1.0.0)  
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq#  
--------------- --------------- ------ ----------- -----------  
10.1.1.252 10.1.1.252 28 0X80000001 0X53E1  
Console#  
Checksum  
Table 4-88 show ip ospf database - display description  
Field  
Description  
Link ID  
ADV Router  
Age  
Router ID  
Advertising router ID  
Age of LSA (in seconds)  
Seq#  
Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs)  
Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA  
Checksum  
4-281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
The following shows output when using the asbr-summary keyword.  
Console#show ip ospf database asbr-summary  
OSPF Router with id(10.1.1.253)  
Displaying Summary ASB Link States(Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 433  
Options: (No TOS-capability)  
LS Type: Summary Links (AS Boundary Router)  
Link State ID: 192.168.5.1 (AS Boundary Router's Router ID)  
Advertising Router: 192.168.1.5  
LS Sequence Number: 80000002  
LS Checksum: 0x51E2  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Metric: 1  
Console#  
Table 4-89 show ip ospf asbr-summary - display description  
Field  
Description  
OSPF Router id  
LS age  
Router ID  
Age of LSA (in seconds)  
Options  
Optional capabilities associated with the LSA  
Summary Links - LSA describes routes to AS boundary routers  
Interface address of the autonomous system boundary router  
Advertising router ID  
LS Type  
Link State ID  
Advertising Router  
LS Sequence Number  
LS Checksum  
Length  
Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs)  
Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA  
The length of the LSA in bytes  
Network Mask  
Metrics  
Address mask for the network  
Cost of the link  
4-282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing Commands  
4
The following shows output when using the database-summary keyword.  
Console#show ip ospf database database-summary  
Area ID (10.1.0.0)  
Router  
Network  
Sum-Net  
1
Sum-ASBR  
0
External-AS  
0
External-Nssa  
0
2
1
Total LSA Counts : 4  
Console#  
Table 4-90 show ip ospf database-summary - display description  
Field  
Description  
Area ID  
Area identifier  
Router  
Number of router LSAs  
Network  
Number of network LSAs  
Sum-Net  
Sum-ASBR  
External-AS  
External-Nssa  
Number of summary LSAs  
Number of summary ASBR LSAs  
Number of autonomous system external LSAs  
Number of NSSA external network LSAs  
Total LSA Counts  
Total number of LSAs  
4-283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
The following shows output when using the external keyword.  
Console#show ip ospf database external  
OSPF Router with id(192.168.5.1) (Autonomous system 5)  
Displaying AS External Link States  
LS age: 433  
Options: (No TOS-capability)  
LS Type: AS External Link  
Link State ID: 10.1.1.253 (External Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.1.2.254  
LS Sequence Number: 80000002  
LS Checksum: 0x51E2  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Metric Type: 2 (Larger than any link state path)  
Metric: 1  
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0  
External Route Tag: 0  
Console#  
Table 4-91 show ip ospf external - display description  
Field  
Description  
OSPF Router id  
LS age  
Router ID  
Age of LSA (in seconds)  
Optional capabilities associated with the LSA  
Options  
LS Type  
AS External Links - LSA describes routes to destinations outside the AS (including  
default external routes for the AS)  
Link State ID  
Advertising Router  
LS Sequence Number  
LS Checksum  
Length  
IP network number (External Network Number)  
Advertising router ID  
Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs)  
Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA  
The length of the LSA in bytes  
Network Mask  
Metric Type  
Address mask for the network  
Type 1 or Type 2 external metric (see “redistribute” on page 4-266)  
Cost of the link  
Metrics  
Forward Address  
Forwarding address for data to be passed to the advertised destination  
(If set to 0.0.0.0, data is forwarded to the originator of the advertisement)  
External Route Tag  
32-bit field attached to each external route  
(Not used by OSPF; may be used to communicate other information between  
boundary routers as defined by specific applications)  
4-284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing Commands  
4
The following shows output when using the network keyword.  
Console#show ip ospf database network  
OSPF Router with id(10.1.1.253)  
Displaying Net Link States(Area 10.1.0.0)  
Link State Data Network (Type 2)  
-------------------------------  
LS age: 433  
Options: Support External routing capability  
LS Type: Network Links  
Link State ID: 10.1.1.252 (IP interface address of the Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 10.1.1.252  
LS Sequence Number: 80000002  
LS Checksum: 0x51E2  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Attached Router: 10.1.1.252  
Attached Router: 10.1.1.253  
Console#  
Table 4-92 show ip ospf network - display description  
Field  
Description  
OSPF Router id  
LS age  
Router ID  
Age of LSA (in seconds)  
Options  
Optional capabilities associated with the LSA  
Network Link - LSA describes the routers attached to the network  
Interface address of the designated router  
Advertising router ID  
LS Type  
Link State ID  
Advertising Router  
LS Sequence Number  
LS Checksum  
Length  
Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs)  
Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA  
The length of the LSA in bytes  
Network Mask  
Attached Router  
Address mask for the network  
List of routers attached to the network; i.e., fully adjacent to the designated router,  
including the designated router itself  
4-285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
The following shows output when using the router keyword.  
Console#show ip ospf database router  
OSPF Router with id(10.1.1.253)  
Displaying Router Link States(Area 10.1.0.0)  
Link State Data Router (Type 1)  
-------------------------------  
LS age: 233  
Options: Support External routing capability  
LS Type: Router Links  
Link State ID: 10.1.1.252 (Originating Router's Router ID)  
Advertising Router: 10.1.1.252  
LS Sequence Number: 80000011  
LS Checksum: 0x7287  
Length: 48  
Router Role: Area Border Router  
Number of Links: 1  
-------------------------------------------------------  
Link ID: 10.1.7.0 (IP Network/Subnet Number)  
Link Data: 255.255.255.0 (Network's IP address mask)  
Link Type: Connection to a stub network  
Number of TOS metrics: 0  
Metrics: 1  
Console#  
Table 4-93 show ip ospf router - display description  
Field  
Description  
OSPF Router id  
LS age  
Router ID  
Age of LSA (in seconds)  
Options  
Optional capabilities associated with the LSA  
Router Link - LSA describes the router's interfaces.  
Router ID of the router that originated the LSA  
Advertising router ID  
LS Type  
Link State ID  
Advertising Router  
LS Sequence Number  
LS Checksum  
Length  
Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs)  
Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA  
The length of the LSA in bytes  
Router Role  
Description of router type, including:  
None, AS Boundary Router, Area Border Router, or Virtual Link  
Number of Links  
Link ID  
Number of links described by the LSA  
Link type and corresponding Router ID or network address  
Link Data  
• Router ID for transit network  
• Network's IP address mask for stub network  
• Neighbor Router ID for virtual link  
Link Type  
4-286  
Link-state type, including transit network, stub network, or virtual link  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing Commands  
4
Table 4-93 show ip ospf router - display description (Continued)  
Description  
Number of TOS metrics Type of Service metric – This router only supports TOS 0 (or normal service)  
Metrics Cost of the link  
Field  
The following shows output when using the summary keyword.  
Console#show ip ospf database summary  
OSPF Router with id(10.1.1.253)  
Displaying Summary Net Link States(Area 10.1.0.0)  
Link State Data Summary (Type 3)  
-------------------------------  
LS age: 686  
Options: Support External routing capability  
LS Type: Summary Links(Network)  
Link State ID: 10.2.6.0 (The destination Summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.1.1.252  
LS Sequence Number: 80000003  
LS Checksum: 0x3D02  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Metric: 1  
Console#  
Table 4-94 show ip ospf summary - display description  
Field  
Description  
OSPF Router id  
LS age  
Router ID  
Age of LSA (in seconds)  
Options  
Optional capabilities associated with the LSA  
Summary Links - LSA describes routes to networks  
Router ID of the router that originated the LSA  
Advertising router ID  
LS Type  
Link State ID  
Advertising Router  
LS Sequence Number  
LS Checksum  
Length  
Sequence number of LSA (used to detect older duplicate LSAs)  
Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA  
The length of the LSA in bytes  
Network Mask  
Metrics  
Destination network’s IP address mask  
Cost of the link  
4-287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
show ip ospf interface  
This command displays summary information for OSPF interfaces.  
Syntax  
show ip ospf interface [vlan vlan-id]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip ospf interface vlan 1  
Vlan 1 is up  
Interface Address 10.1.1.253, Mask 255.255.255.0, Area 10.1.0.0  
Router ID 10.1.1.253, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1  
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State BDR, Priority 1  
Designated Router id 10.1.1.252, Interface address 10.1.1.252  
Backup Designated router id 10.1.1.253, Interface addr 10.1.1.253  
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Retransmit 5  
Console#  
Table 4-95 show ip ospf interface - display description  
Field  
Description  
Vlan  
VLAN ID and Status of physical link  
IP address of OSPF interface  
Network mask for interface address  
OSPF area to which this interface belongs  
Router ID  
Interface Address  
Mask  
Area  
Router ID  
Network Type  
Cost  
Includes broadcast, non-broadcast, or point-to-point networks  
Interface transmit cost  
Transmit Delay  
State  
Interface transmit delay (in seconds)  
• Disabled – OSPF not enabled on this interface  
• Down – OSPF is enabled on this interface, but interface is down  
• Loopback – This is a loopback interface  
• Waiting – Router is trying to find the DR and BDR  
• DR – Designated Router  
• BDR – Backup Designated Router  
• DRother – Interface is on a multiaccess network, but is not the DR or BDR  
Priority  
Router priority  
Designated Router  
Designated router ID and respective interface address  
Backup designated router ID and respective interface address  
Backup Designated  
Router  
Timer intervals  
Configuration settings for timer intervals, including Hello, Dead and Retransmit  
4-288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing Commands  
4
show ip ospf neighbor  
This command displays information about neighboring routers on each interface  
within an OSPF area.  
Syntax  
show ip ospf neighbor  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip ospf neighbor  
ID  
--------------- ------ ---------------- ---------------  
10.1.1.252 FULL/DR 10.1.1.252  
Pri  
State  
Address  
1
Console#  
Table 4-96 show ip ospf neighbor - display description  
Field  
ID  
Description  
Neighbor’s router ID  
Pri  
Neighbor’s router priority  
OSPF state and identification flag  
State  
States include:  
Down – Connection down  
Attempt – Connection down, but attempting contact (for non-broadcast networks)  
Init – Have received Hello packet, but communications not yet established  
Two-way – Bidirectional communications established  
ExStart – Initializing adjacency between neighbors  
Exchange – Database descriptions being exchanged  
Loading – LSA databases being exchanged  
Full – Neighboring routers now fully adjacent  
Identification flags include:  
D – Dynamic neighbor  
S – Static neighbor  
DR – Designated router  
BDR – Backup designated router  
Address  
IP address of this interface  
4-289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
show ip ospf summary-address  
This command displays all summary address information.  
Syntax  
show ip ospf summary-address  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows a summary address and associated network mask.  
Console#show ip ospf summary-address  
10.1.0.0/255.255.0.0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf virtual-links  
This command displays detailed information about virtual links.  
Syntax  
show ip ospf virtual-links  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip ospf virtual-links  
Virtual Link to router 10.1.1.253 is up  
Transit area 10.1.1.0  
Transmit Delay is 1 sec  
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Retransmit 5  
Console#  
Table 4-97 show ip ospf virtual-links - display description  
Field  
Description  
Virtual Link to router  
Transit area  
OSPF neighbor and link state (up or down)  
Common area the virtual link crosses to reach the target router  
Estimated transmit delay (in seconds) on the virtual link  
Configuration settings for timer intervals, including Hello, Dead and Retransmit  
Transmit Delay  
Timer intervals  
Related Commands  
4-290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
Multicast Routing Commands  
This router uses IGMP snooping and query to determine the ports connected to  
downstream multicast hosts, and to propagate this information back up through the  
multicast tree to ensure that requested services are forwarded through each  
intermediate node between the multicast server and its hosts, and also to filter traffic  
from all of the other interfaces that do not require these services.  
Multicast routers use snooping and query messages, along with a multicast routing  
protocol to deliver IP multicast packets across different subnetworks. This router  
supports both the Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) and  
Protocol Independent Multicasting (PIM). (Note that you should enable IGMP for any  
interface that is using multicast routing.)  
Table 4-98 Multicast Routing Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
Static Multicast Routing  
Configures static multicast router ports  
General Multicast Routing Enables IP multicast routing globally; also displays the IP multicast  
routing table created from static and dynamic routing information  
DVMRP Multicast Routing Configures global and interface settings for DVMRP  
PIM-DM Multicast Routing Configures global and interface settings for PIM-DM  
Static Multicast Routing Commands  
Table 4-99 Static Multicast Routing Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip igmp snooping vlan  
mrouter  
Adds a multicast router port  
GC  
show ip igmp snooping  
mrouter  
Shows multicast router ports  
PE  
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter  
This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to  
remove the configuration.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is device 1.  
- port - Port number.  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-6)  
4-291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
No static multicast router ports are configured.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be  
able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known  
multicast router/switch connected over the network to an interface (port or  
trunk) on your router, you can manually configure that interface to join all the  
current multicast groups.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11  
Console(config)#  
show ip igmp snooping mrouter  
This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned  
multicast router ports.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic.  
Example  
The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type  
---- ------------------- -------  
1
2
Eth 1/11 Static  
Eth 1/12 Dynamic  
Console#  
4-292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
General Multicast Routing Commands  
Table 4-100 General Multicast Routing Commands  
Function  
Enables IP multicast routing  
Shows the IP multicast routing table  
Command  
Mode Page  
ip multicast-routing  
show ip mroute  
GC  
PE  
ip multicast-routing  
This command enables IP multicast routing. Use the no form to disable IP multicast  
routing.  
Syntax  
[no] ip multicast-routing  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command is used to enable multicast routing globally for the router. You  
also need to globally enable a specific multicast routing protocol using the  
router dvmrp or router pim command, and then specify the interfaces that  
will support multicast routing using the ip dvmrp or ip pim dense-mode  
commands.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip multicast-routing  
Console(config)#  
show ip mroute  
This command displays the IP multicast routing table.  
Syntax  
show ip mroute [group-address source] [summary]  
group-address - An IP multicast group address with subscribers directly  
attached or downstream from this router.  
• source - The IP subnetwork at the root of the multicast delivery tree. This  
subnetwork contains a known multicast source.  
summary - Displays summary information for each entry in the IP multicast  
routing table.  
4-293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays information for multicast routing. If no optional  
parameters are selected, detailed information for each entry in the multicast  
address table is displayed. If you select a multicast group and source pair,  
detailed information is displayed only for the specified entry. If the summary  
option is selected, an abbreviated list of information for each entry is displayed  
on a single line.  
Example  
This example shows detailed multicast information for a specified group/source pair  
Console#show ip mroute 224.0.255.3 192.111.46.8  
IP Multicast Forwarding is enabled.  
IP Multicast Routing Table  
Flags: P - Prune, F - Forwarding  
(192.111.46.0, 255.255.255.0, 224.0.255.3)  
Owner: DVMPR  
Upstream Interface: vlan1  
Upstream Router: 148.122.34.9  
Downstream: vlan2(P), vlan3(F)  
Console#  
Table 4-101 show ip mroute - display description  
Field  
Description  
Source and netmask  
Group address  
Owner  
Subnetwork containing the IP multicast source.  
IP multicast group address for a requested service.  
The associated multicast protocol (i.e., DVMRP or PIM-DM).  
Interface leading to the upstream neighbor.  
Upstream Interface  
Upstream Router  
IP address of the multicast router immediately upstream for this group.  
Downstream interface  
and flags  
The interface(s) on which multicast subscribers have been recorded. The flags  
associated with each interface indicate prune (P) if the downstream interface has  
been recently terminated or forwarding (F) if the interface is still active.  
4-294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
This example lists all entries in the multicast table in summary form:  
Console#show ip mroute summary  
IP Multicast Forwarding is enabled.  
IP Multicast Routing Table (Summary)  
Flags: P - Prune UP  
Group  
Source  
Source Mask  
Interface Owner  
Flags  
--------------- --------------- --------------- ---------- ------- ------  
224.1.1.1  
224.2.2.2  
10.1.0.0  
10.1.0.0  
255.255.0.0  
255.255.0.0  
vlan1  
vlan1  
DVMRP  
DVMRP  
P
--  
Console#  
DVMRP Multicast Routing Commands  
Table 4-102 DVMRP Multicast Routing Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
router dvmrp  
probe-interval  
nbr-timeout  
Enables DVMRP and enters router configuration mode  
Sets the interval for sending neighbor probe messages  
GC  
RC  
RC  
Sets the delay before declaring an attached neighbor  
router down  
report-interval  
Sets the interval for propagating the complete set of routing RC  
tables to other neighbor routers  
flash-update-interval  
prune-lifetime  
Sets the interval for sending updates about changes to  
network topology  
RC  
Defines how long a prune state remains in effect for a  
source-routed multicast tree  
RC  
default-gateway  
ip dvmrp  
Configures the default gateway for IP multicast routing  
Enables DVMRP on the specified interface  
RC  
IC  
ip dvmrp metric  
Sets the metric used when establishing reverse paths to IC  
some networks on directly attached interfaces  
clear ip dvmrp route  
show router dvmrp  
Clears all dynamic routes in the multicast routing table  
Displays global DVMRP configuration settings  
Displays DVMRP routing information  
PE  
NE, PE 4-301  
NE, PE 4-302  
NE, PE 4-303  
show ip dvmrp route  
show ip dvmrp neighbor  
show ip dvmrp interface  
Displays DVMRP neighbor information  
Displays DVMRP configuration settings for the interfaces NE, PE 4-303  
router dvmrp  
This command enables Distance-Vector Multicast Routing (DVMRP) globally for the  
router and to enter router configuration mode. Use the no form to disable DVMRP  
multicast routing.  
Syntax  
[no] router dvmrp  
4-295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command enables DVMRP globally for the router and enters router  
configuration mode. Make any changes necessary to the global DVMRP  
parameters. Then specify the interfaces that will support DVMRP multicast  
routing using the ip dvmrp command, and set the metric for each interface.  
Example  
Console(config)#router dvmrp  
Console(config-router)#end  
Console#show router dvmrp  
Admin Status  
: enable  
: 10  
Probe Interval  
Nbr expire  
: 35  
Minimum Flash Update Interval  
prune lifetime  
: 5  
: 7200  
route report  
: 60  
Default Gateway  
Metric of Default Gateway  
: 0.0.0.0  
: 0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
probe-interval  
This command sets the interval for sending neighbor probe messages to the  
multicast group address for all DVMRP routers. Use the no form to restore the  
default value.  
Syntax  
probe-interval seconds  
no probe-interval  
seconds - Interval between sending neighbor probe messages.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
4-296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
Command Usage  
Probe messages are sent to neighboring DVMRP routers from which this  
device has received probes, and is used to verify whether or not these  
neighbors are still active members of the multicast tree.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#probe-interval 30  
Console(config-router)#  
nbr-timeout  
This command sets the interval to wait for messages from a DVMRP neighbor  
before declaring it dead. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
nbr-timeout seconds  
no nbr-timeout  
seconds - Interval before declaring a neighbor dead. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
35 seconds  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command is used for timing out routes, and for setting the children and  
leaf flags.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#nbr-timeout 40  
Console(config-router)#  
report-interval  
This command specifies how often to propagate the complete set of routing tables to  
other neighbor DVMRP routers. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
report-interval seconds  
no report-interval  
seconds - Interval between sending the complete set of routing tables.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
60 seconds  
4-297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Example  
Console(config-router)#report-interval 90  
Console(config-router)#  
flash-update-interval  
This command specifies how often to send trigger updates, which reflect changes in  
the network topology. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
flash-update-interval seconds  
no flash-update-interval  
seconds - Interval between sending flash updates when network topology  
changes have occurred. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
5 seconds  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Example  
Console(config-router)#flash-update-interval 10  
Console(config-router)#  
prune-lifetime  
This command specifies how long a prune state will remain in effect for a multicast  
tree. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
prune-lifetime seconds  
no prune-lifetime  
seconds - Prune state lifetime. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
7200 seconds  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the prune state lifetime. After the prune state expires, the  
router will resume flooding multicast traffic from the multicast source device.  
4-298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config-router)#prune-lifetime 5000  
Console(config-router)#  
default-gateway  
This command specifies the default DVMRP gateway for IP multicast traffic. Use the  
no form to remove the default gateway.  
Syntax  
default-gateway ip-address  
no default-gateway  
ip-address - IP address of the default DVMRP gateway.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Router Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The specified interface advertises itself as a default route to neighboring  
DVMRP routers. It advertises the default route out through its other interfaces.  
Neighboring routers on the other interfaces return Poison Reverse messages  
for the default route back to the router. When the router receives these  
messages, it records all the downstream routers for the default route.  
• When multicast traffic with an unknown source address (i.e., not found in the  
route table) is received on the default upstream route interface, the router  
forwards this traffic out through the other interfaces (with known downstream  
routers). However, when multicast traffic with an unknown source address is  
received on another interface, the router drops it because only the default  
upstream interface can forward multicast traffic from an unknown source.  
Example  
Console(config-router)#default-gateway 10.1.0.253  
Console(config-router)#  
ip dvmrp  
This command enables DVMRP on the specified interface. Use the no form to  
disable DVMRP on this interface.  
Syntax  
ip dvmrp  
no ip dvmrp  
4-299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
To fully enable DVMRP, you need to enable multicast routing globally for the  
router with the ip multicast-routing command (page 4-293), enable DVMRP  
globally for the router with the router dvmrp command (page 4-295), and also  
enable DVMRP for each interface that will participate in multicast routing with  
the ip dvmrp command.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip dvmrp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip dvmrp interface  
Vlan 1 is up  
DVMRP is enabled  
Metric is 1  
Console#  
ip dvmrp metric  
This command configures the metric used in selecting the reverse path to networks  
connected directly to an interface on this router. Use the no form to restore the  
default value.  
Syntax  
ip dvmrp metric interface-metric  
no ip dvmrp metric  
interface-metric - Metric used to select the best reverse path.  
(Range: 1-31)  
Default Setting  
1
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
The DVMRP interface metric is used to choose the best reverse path when  
there are multiple paths to the same upstream destination. The lower cost path  
is the preferred path.  
4-300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip dvmrp metric 2  
Console(config-if)#  
clear ip dvmrp route  
This command clears all dynamic routes learned by DVMRP.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
As shown below, this command clears everything from the route table except for the  
default route.  
Console#clear ip dvmrp route  
clear all ip dvmrp route  
Console#show ip dvmrp route  
Source  
Mask  
Upstream_nbr  
Interface Metric UpTime Expire  
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------- ------ ------ ------  
10.1.0.0  
Console#  
255.255.255.0  
10.1.0.253  
vlan1  
1
1840  
0
show router dvmrp  
This command displays the global DVMRP configuration settings.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the global DVMRP settings described in the  
preceding pages:  
• Admin Status, router dvmrp, (page 4-295)  
• Probe Interval (page 4-296)  
• Nbr Expire (page 4-297)  
• Minimum Flash Update Interval (page 4-298)  
• Prune Lifetime (page 4-298)  
• Route Report (page 4-297  
• Default Gateway (page 4-299)  
• Metric of Default Gateway (page 4-300)  
4-301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The default settings are shown in the following example:  
Console#show route dvmrp  
Admin Status  
Probe Interval  
: enable  
: 10  
Nbr expire  
: 35  
Minimum Flash Update Interval  
: 5  
prune lifetime  
route report  
: 7200  
: 60  
Default Gateway  
Metric of Default Gateway  
Console#  
: 0.0.0.0  
: 1  
show ip dvmrp route  
This command displays all entries in the DVMRP routing table.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
DMVRP routes are shown in the following example:  
Console#show ip dvmrp route  
Source  
Mask  
Upstream_nbr  
Interface Metric UpTime Expire  
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------- ------ ------ ------  
10.1.0.0  
10.1.1.0  
10.1.8.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
10.1.0.253  
10.1.1.253  
10.1.0.254  
vlan1  
vlan2  
vlan1  
1 84438  
1 84987  
2 19729  
0
0
97  
Console#  
Table 4-103 show ip dvmrp route - display description  
Description  
Field  
Source  
IP subnetwork that contains a multicast source, an upstream router, or an outgoing  
interface connected to multicast hosts.  
Mask  
Subnet mask that is used for the source address. This mask identifies the host address  
bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
Upstream_nbr  
The IP address of the network device immediately upstream for one or more multicast  
groups.  
Interface  
Metric  
The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor.  
The metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors.  
The time elapsed since this entry was created.  
UpTime  
Expire  
The time remaining before this entry will be aged out.  
4-302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
show ip dvmrp neighbor  
This command displays all of the DVMRP neighbor routers.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip dvmrp neighbor  
Address  
---------------- --------------- -------- -------- -------------  
10.1.0.254 vlan1 79315 32  
Interface  
Uptime  
Expire  
Capabilities  
6
Console#  
Table 4-104 show ip dvmrp neighbor - display description  
Description  
Field  
Address  
Interface  
Uptime  
The IP address of the network device immediately upstream for this multicast delivery tree.  
The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor.  
The time since this device last became a DVMRP neighbor.  
The time remaining before this entry will be aged out.  
Expire  
Capabilities  
The neighboring router’s capabilities may include:  
Leaf (bit 0) -  
Prune (bit 1) -  
Neighbor has only one interface with neighbors.  
Neighbor supports pruning.  
Generation ID (bit 2) - Neighbor sends its Generation ID in probe messages.  
Mtrace (bit 3) -  
SNMP (bit 4) -  
Netmask - (bit 5) -  
Neighbor can handle multicast trace requests.  
Neighbor is SNMP capable.  
Neighbor will accept network masks appended to the prune,  
graft, and graft acknowledgement messages.  
Reserved (bit 6 and 7) - Reserved for future use.  
show ip dvmrp interface  
This command displays the DVMRP configuration for interfaces which have enabled  
DVMRP.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip dvmrp interface  
Vlan 1 is up  
DVMRP is enabled  
Metric is 1  
Console#  
4-303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
PIM-DM Multicast Routing Commands  
Table 4-105 PIM-DM Multicast Routing Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode Page  
router pim  
Enables PIM globally for the router  
GC  
IC  
ip pim dense-mode  
ip pim hello-interval  
ip pim hello-holdtime  
Enables PIM on the specified interface  
Sets the interval between sending PIM hello messages  
IC  
Sets the time to wait for hello messages from a neighboring IC  
PIM router before declaring it dead  
ip pim trigger-hello-interval Sets the maximum time before sending a triggered PIM  
Hello message  
IC  
ip pim join-prune-holdtime Configures the hold time for the prune state  
IC  
ip pim graft-retry-interval  
Configures the time to wait for a Graft acknowledgement IC  
before resending a Graft message  
ip pim max-graft-retries  
Configures the maximum number of times to resend a Graft IC  
message if it has not been acknowledged  
show router pim  
Displays the global PIM configuration settings  
Displays information about interfaces configured for PIM NE, PE 4-309  
Displays information about PIM neighbors NE, PE 4-310  
NE, PE 4-309  
show ip pim interface  
show ip pim neighbor  
router pim  
This command enables Protocol-Independent Multicast - Dense Mode (PIM-DM)  
globally for the router and to enter router configuration mode. Use the no form to  
disable PIM-DM multicast routing.  
Syntax  
[no] router pim  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command enables PIM-DM globally for the router. You also need to  
enable PIM-DM for each interface that will support multicast routing using the  
ip pim dense-mode command (page 4-305), and make any changes  
necessary to the multicast protocol parameters.  
4-304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#router pim  
Console#show router pim  
Admin Status: Enabled  
Console#  
ip pim dense-mode  
This command enables PIM-DM on the specified interface. Use the no form to  
disable PIM-DM on this interface.  
Syntax  
[no] ip pim dense-mode  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• To fully enable PIM-DM, you need to enable multicast routing globally for the  
router with the ip multicast-routing command (page 4-293), enable PIM-DM  
globally for the router with the router pim command (page 4-304), and also  
enable PIM-DM for each interface that will participate in multicast routing with  
the ip pim dense-mode command.  
• If you enable PIM on an interface, you should also enable IGMP on that  
interface.  
• Dense-mode interfaces are subject to multicast flooding by default, and are  
only removed from the multicast routing table when the router determines that  
there are no group members or downstream routers, or when a prune  
message is received from a downstream router.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip pim dense-mode  
Console#show ip pim interface  
Vlan 1 is up  
PIM is enabled, mode is Dense.  
Internet address is 10.1.0.253.  
Hello time interval is 30 sec, trigger hello time interval is 5 sec.  
Hello holdtime is 105 sec.  
Join/Prune holdtime is 210 sec.  
Graft retry interval is 3 sec, max graft retries is 2.  
DR Internet address is 10.1.0.253, neighbor count is 0.  
Console#  
4-305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
ip pim hello-interval  
This command configures the frequency at which PIM hello messages are  
transmitted. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip pim hello-interval seconds  
no pim hello-interval  
seconds - Interval between sending PIM hello messages.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
30 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
Hello messages are sent to neighboring PIM routers from which this device  
has received probes, and are used to verify whether or not these neighbors  
are still active members of the multicast tree.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip pim hello-interval 60  
Console(config-if)#  
ip pim hello-holdtime  
This command configures the interval to wait for hello messages from a neighboring  
PIM router before declaring it dead. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip pim hello-holdtime seconds  
no ip pim hello-interval  
seconds - The hold time for PIM hello messages. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
105 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
The ip pim hello-holdtime should be 3.5 times the value of ip pim  
4-306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip pim hello-holdtime 210  
Console(config-if)#  
ip pim trigger-hello-interval  
This command configures the maximum time before transmitting a triggered PIM  
Hello message after the router is rebooted or PIM is enabled on an interface. Use  
the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip pim triggerr-hello-interval seconds  
no ip pim triggerr-hello-interval  
seconds - The maximum time before sending a triggered PIM Hello  
message. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
5 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• When a router first starts or PIM is enabled on an interface, the hello-interval  
is set to random value between 0 and the trigger-hello-interval. This prevents  
synchronization of Hello messages on multi-access links if multiple routers are  
powered on simultaneously.  
• Also, if a Hello message is received from a new neighbor, the receiving router  
will send its own Hello message after a random delay between 0 and the  
trigger-hello-interval.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip pim triggerr-hello-interval 10  
Console(config-if)#  
ip pim join-prune-holdtime  
This command configures of the hold time for the prune state. Use the no form to  
restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip pim join-prune-holdtime seconds  
no ip pim join-prune-holdtime  
seconds - The hold time for the prune state. (Range: 0-65535)  
4-307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
210 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
The multicast interface that first receives a multicast stream from a particular  
source forwards this traffic to all other PIM interfaces on the router. If there are  
no requesting groups on that interface, the leaf node sends a prune message  
upstream and enters a prune state for this multicast stream. The prune state is  
maintained until the join-prune-holdtime timer expires or a graft message is  
received for the forwarding entry.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip pim join-prune-holdtime 60  
Console(config-if)#  
ip pim graft-retry-interval  
This command configures the time to wait for a Graft acknowledgement before  
resending a Graft. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip pim graft-retry-interval seconds  
no ip pim graft-retry-interval  
seconds - The time before resending a Graft. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
3 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
A graft message is sent by a router to cancel a prune state. When a router  
receives a graft message, it must respond with an graft acknowledgement  
message. If this acknowledgement message is lost, the router that sent the  
graft message will resend it a number of times (as defined by the ip pim  
max-graft-retries command).  
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip pim graft-retry-interval 9  
Console(config-if)#  
4-308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Routing Commands  
4
ip pim max-graft-retries  
This command configures the maximum number of times to resend a Graft message  
if it has not been acknowledged. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
ip pim max-graft-retries retries  
no ip pim graft-retry-interval  
retries - The maximum number of times to resend a Graft.  
(Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
2
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Example  
Console(config-if)#ip pim max-graft-retries 5  
Console(config-if)#  
show router pim  
This command displays the global PIM configuration settings.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show router pim  
Admin Status: Enabled  
Console#  
show ip pim interface  
This command displays information about interfaces configured for PIM.  
Syntax  
show ip pim interface vlan-id  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the PIM settings for the specified interface as  
described in the preceding pages. It also shows the address of the designated  
PIM router and the number of neighboring PIM routers.  
4-309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show ip pim interface 1  
Vlan 1 is up  
PIM is enabled, mode is Dense.  
Internet address is 10.1.0.253.  
Hello time interval is 30 sec, trigger hello time interval is 5 sec.  
Hello holdtime is 105 sec.  
Join/Prune holdtime is 210 sec.  
Graft retry interval is 3 sec, max graft retries is 2.  
DR Internet address is 10.1.0.254, neighbor count is 1.  
Console#  
show ip pim neighbor  
This command displays information about PIM neighbors.  
Syntax  
show ip pim neighbor [ip-address]  
ip-address - IP address of a PIM neighbor.  
Default Setting  
Displays information for all known PIM neighbors.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip pim neighbor  
Address  
--------------- ---------------- -------- -------- -------  
10.1.0.254 17:38:16 00:01:25 Dense  
VLAN Interface  
Uptime  
Expire  
Mode  
1
Console#  
Table 4-106 show ip pim neighbor - display description  
Description  
IP address of the next-hop router.  
Field  
Address  
VLAN Interface Interface number that is attached to this neighbor.  
Uptime  
Expire  
Mode  
The duration this entry has been active.  
The time before this entry will be removed.  
PIM mode used on this interface. (Only Dense Mode is supported.)  
4-310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
Router Redundancy Commands  
Router redundancy protocols use a virtual IP address to support a primary router  
and multiple backup routers. The backup routers can be configured to take over the  
workload if the master router fails, or can also be configured to share the traffic load.  
The primary goal of router redundancy is to allow a host device which has been  
configured with a fixed gateway to maintain network connectivity in case the primary  
gateway goes down.  
Table 4-107 Router Redundancy Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
Virtual Router Redundancy Configures interface settings for VRRP  
Protocol  
Hot Standby Router  
Protocol  
Configures interface settings for HSRP  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands  
To configure VRRP, select an interface on one router in the group to serve as the  
master virtual router. This physical interface is used as the virtual address for the  
router group. Now set the same virtual address and a priority on the backup routers,  
and configure an authentication string. You can also enable the preempt feature  
which allows a router to take over as the master router when it comes on line.  
Table 4-108 VRRP Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
vrrp ip  
Enables VRRP and sets the IP address of the virtual router IC  
vrrp authentication key  
Configures a key used to authenticate VRRP packets  
received from other routers  
IC  
IC  
vrrp priority  
Sets the priority of this router in the VRRP group  
vrrp timers advertise  
Sets the interval between successive advertisements by IC  
the master virtual router  
vrrp preempt  
Configures the router to take over as master virtual router IC  
for a VRRP group if it has a higher priority than the current  
master virtual router  
show vrrp  
Displays VRRP status information  
PE  
show vrrp interface  
show vrrp router counters  
Displays VRRP status information for the specified interface PE  
Displays VRRP statistics  
PE  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show vrrp interface counters Displays VRRP statistics for the specified interface  
clear vrrp router counters Clears VRRP router statistics  
clear vrrp interface counters Clears VRRP interface statistics  
4-311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Command Line Interface  
4
vrrp ip  
This command enables the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) on an  
interface and specify the IP address of the virtual router. Use the no form to disable  
VRRP on an interface and remove the IP address from the virtual router.  
Syntax  
[no] vrrp group ip ip-address [secondary]  
group - Identifies the virtual router group. (Range: 1-255)  
ip-address - The IP address of the virtual router.  
secondary - Specifies additional secondary IP addresses assigned to the  
current VLAN interface that are supported by this VRRP group.  
Default Setting  
No virtual router groups are configured.  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• The interfaces of all routers participating in a virtual router group must be  
within the same IP subnet.  
• The IP address assigned to the virtual router must already be configured on  
the router that will be the Owner. In other words, the IP address specified in  
this command must already exist on one, and only one, router in the virtual  
router group, and the network mask for the virtual router address is derived  
from the Owner. The Owner will also assume the role of the Master virtual  
router in the group.  
• If you have multiple secondary addresses configured on the current VLAN  
interface, you can use this command with the secondary keyword to add any  
secondary address that will be supported by the virtual router.  
• VRRP is enabled as soon as this command is entered. If you need to  
customize any of the other parameters for VRRP such as authentication,  
priority, or advertisement interval, then first configure these parameters before  
enabling VRRP.  
Example  
This example creates VRRP group 1 using the primary interface for VLAN 1 as the  
VRRP group Owner, and also adds a secondary interface as a member of the group.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 ip 192.168.1.6  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 ip 192.168.2.6 secondary  
Console(config-if)#  
4-312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
vrrp authentication  
This command specifies the key used to authenticate VRRP packets received from  
other routers. Use the no form to prevent authentication.  
Syntax  
vrrp group authentication key  
no vrrp group authentication  
group - Identifies the virtual router group. (Range: 1-255)  
key - Authentication string. (Range: 1-8 alphanumeric characters)  
Default Setting  
No key is defined.  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• All routers in the same VRRP group must be configured with the same  
authentication key.  
• When a VRRP packet is received from another router in the group, its  
authentication key is compared to the string configured on this router. If the  
keys match, the message is accepted. Otherwise, the packet is discarded.  
• Plain text authentication does not provide any real security. It is supported  
only to prevent a misconfigured router from participating in VRRP.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 authentication bluebird  
Console(config-if)#  
vrrp priority  
This command sets the priority of this router in a VRRP group. Use the no form to  
restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
vrrp group priority level  
no vrrp group priority  
group - Identifies the VRRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
level - Priority of this router in the VRRP group. (Range: 1-254)  
Default Setting  
100  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
4-313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• A router that has a physical interface with the same IP address as that used  
for the virtual router will become the master virtual router. The backup router  
with the highest priority will become the master router if the current master  
fails. When the original master router recovers, it will take over as the active  
master router again.  
• If two or more routers are configured with the same VRRP priority, the router  
with the higher IP address is elected as the new master router if the current  
master fails.  
• If the backup preempt function is enabled with the vrrp preempt command,  
and a backup router with a priority higher than the current acting master  
comes on line, this backup router will take over as the new acting master.  
However, note that if the original master (i.e., the owner of the VRRP IP  
address) comes back on line, it will always resume control as the master.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 priority 1  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
vrrp timers advertise  
This command sets the interval at which the master virtual router sends  
advertisements communicating its state as the master. Use the no form to restore  
the default interval.  
Syntax  
vrrp group timers advertise interval  
no vrrp group timers advertise  
group - Identifies the VRRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
interval - Advertisement interval for the master virtual router.  
(Range: 1-255 seconds)  
Default Setting  
1 second  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• VRRP advertisements from the current master virtual router include  
information about its priority and current state as the master.  
4-314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
• VRRP advertisements are sent to the multicast address 224.0.0.8. Using a  
multicast address reduces the amount of traffic that has to processed by  
network devices that are not part of the designated VRRP group.  
• If the master router stops sending advertisements, backup routers will bid to  
become the master router based on priority. The dead interval before  
attempting to take over as the master is three times the hello interval plus half  
a second  
Example  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 timers advertise 5  
Console(config-if)#  
vrrp preempt  
This command configures the router to take over as the master virtual router for a  
VRRP group if it has a higher priority than the current acting master router. Use the  
no form to disable preemption.  
Syntax  
vrrp group preempt [delay seconds]  
no vrrp group preempt  
group - Identifies the VRRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
seconds - The time to wait before issuing a claim to become the master.  
(Range: 0-120 seconds)  
Default Setting  
Preempt: Enabled  
Delay: 0 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• If preempt is enabled, and this backup router has a priority higher than the  
current acting master, it will take over as the new master. However, note that  
if the original master (i.e., the owner of the VRRP IP address) comes back on  
line, it will always resume control as the master.  
• The delay can give additional time to receive an advertisement message from  
the current master before taking control. If the router attempting to become the  
master has just come on line, this delay also gives it time to gather information  
for its routing table before actually preempting the currently active router.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#vrrp 1 preempt delay 10  
Console(config-if)#  
4-315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
show vrrp  
This command displays status information for VRRP.  
Syntax  
show vrrp [brief | group]  
brief - Displays summary information for all VRRP groups on this router.  
group - Identifies a VRRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
Defaults  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use this command without any keywords to display the full listing of status  
information for all VRRP groups configured on this router.  
• Use this command with the brief keyword to display a summary of status  
information for all VRRP groups configured on this router.  
• Specify a group number to display status information for a specific group  
Example  
This example displays the full listing of status information for all groups.  
Console#show vrrp  
Vlan 1 - Group 1,  
state  
Master  
Virtual IP address  
Virtual MAC address  
Advertisement interval  
Preemption  
192.168.1.6  
00-00-5E-00-01-01  
5 sec  
enabled  
Min delay  
10 sec  
Priority  
1
Authentication  
Authentication key  
Master Router  
Master priority  
Master Advertisement interval  
Master down interval  
Console#  
SimpleText  
bluebird  
192.168.1.6  
255  
5 sec  
15  
4-316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
Table 4-109 show vrrp - display description  
Description  
Field  
State  
VRRP role of this interface (master or backup)  
Virtual address that identifies this VRRP group  
Virtual IP  
address  
Virtual MAC  
address  
Virtual MAC address derived from the owner of the virtual IP address  
Interval at which the master virtual router advertises its role as the master  
Advertisement  
interval  
Preemption  
Min delay  
Shows whether or not a higher priority router can preempt the current acting master  
Delay before a router with a higher priority can preempt the current acting master  
Priority of this router  
Priority  
Authentication  
Authentication mode used to verify VRRP packets  
Authentication  
key  
Key used to authenticate VRRP packets received from other routers  
Master Router  
Master priority  
IP address of the router currently acting as the VRRP group master  
The priority of the router currently acting as the VRRP group master  
The advertisement interval configured on the VRRP master.  
Master  
Advertisement  
interval  
Master down  
interval  
The down interval configured on the VRRP master  
(This interval is used by all the routers in the group regardless of their local settings)  
This example displays the brief listing of status information for all groups.  
Console#show vrrp brief  
Interface  
Grp  
State  
Virtual addr  
Int  
Pre  
Prio  
----------------------------------------------------------------  
vlan 1  
1
Master  
192.168.1.6  
5
E
1
Console#  
Table 4-110 show vrrp brief - display description  
Description  
Field  
Interface  
Grp  
VLAN interface  
VRRP group  
State  
Virtual addr  
Int  
VRRP role of this interface (master or backup)  
Virtual address that identifies this VRRP group  
Interval at which the master virtual router advertises its role as the master  
Shows whether or not a higher priority router can preempt the current acting master  
Priority of this router  
Pre  
Prio  
4-317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
show vrrp interface  
This command displays status information for the specified VRRP interface.  
Syntax  
show vrrp interface vlan vlan-id [brief]  
vlan-id - Identifier of configured VLAN interface. (Range: 1-4094)  
brief - Displays summary information for all VRRP groups on this router.  
Defaults  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example displays the full listing of status information for VLAN 1.  
Console#show vrrp interface vlan 1  
Vlan 1 - Group 1,  
state  
Master  
Virtual IP address  
Virtual MAC address  
Advertisement interval  
Preemption  
192.168.1.6  
00-00-5E-00-01-01  
5 sec  
enabled  
Min delay  
10 sec  
Priority  
1
Authentication  
Authentication key  
Master Router  
Master priority  
Master Advertisement interval  
Master down interval  
Console#  
SimpleText  
bluebird  
192.168.1.6  
1
5 sec  
15  
* Refer to “show vrrp” on page 4-316 for a description of the display items.  
show vrrp router counters  
This command displays counters for errors found in VRRP protocol packets.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Note that unknown errors indicate VRRP packets received with an unknown or  
unsupported version number.  
Console#show vrrp router counters  
Total Number of VRRP Packets with Invalid Checksum : 0  
Total Number of VRRP Packets with Unknown Error  
Total Number of VRRP Packets with Invalid VRID  
Console#  
: 0  
: 0  
4-318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
show vrrp interface counters  
This command displays counters for VRRP protocol events and errors that have  
occurred for the specified group and interface.  
show vrrp group interface vlan interface counters  
group - Identifies a VRRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
interface - Identifier of configured VLAN interface. (Range: 1-4094)  
Defaults  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show vrrp 1 interface vlan 1 counters  
Total Number of Times Transitioned to MASTER  
: 6  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 5  
: 0  
: 0  
Total Number of Received Advertisements Packets  
Total Number of Received Error Advertisement Interval Packets  
Total Number of Received Authentication Failures Packets  
Total Number of Received Error IP TTL VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Priority 0 VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Sent Priority 0 VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Invalid Type VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Error Address List VRRP Packets  
Total Number of Received Invalid Authentication Type VRRP Packets : 0  
Total Number of Received Mismatch Authentication Type VRRP Packets : 0  
Total Number of Received Error Packet Length VRRP Packets  
Console#  
: 0  
* Refer to “Displaying VRRP Group Statistics” on page 3-185 for a description of the display items.  
clear vrrp router counters  
This command clears VRRP system statistics.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear vrrp router counters  
Console#  
clear vrrp interface counters  
This command clears VRRP system statistics for the specified group and interface.  
clear vrrp group interface interface counters  
group - Identifies a VRRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
interface - Identifier of configured VLAN interface. (Range: 1-4094)  
4-319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Defaults  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear vrrp 1 interface 1 counters  
Console#  
Hot Standby Router Protocol Commands  
To configure HSRP, add the interface for each router that will participate in the virtual  
router group, set the priorities, and configure an authentication string. The HSRP  
protocol will automatically select the master and standby router based on the priority  
settings. You can also enable the preempt feature which allows a router to take over  
as the master router when it comes on line. HSRP also allows you to specify a set of  
interfaces that dynamically change the router priority based on their availability.  
Table 4-111 HSRP Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
standby ip  
Enables HSRP  
IC  
IC  
standby priority  
standby preempt  
Sets the priority of this router in the HSRP group  
Configures the router to take over as master virtual router IC  
for an HSRP group if it has a higher priority than the current  
master virtual router  
standby authentication  
standby timers  
Configures a key used to authenticate HSRP packets  
received from other routers  
IC  
Sets the time between the master and standby router  
sending hello packets, and the time before other routers  
declare the active master router or standby router down  
IC  
standby track  
Configures an interface so that the HSRP priority changes IC  
based on the availability of other interfaces on this router  
show standby  
Displays HSRP status information  
PE  
PE  
show standby interface  
Displays HSRP status information for the specified  
interface  
4-320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
standby ip  
This command enables the Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) on an interface  
and specify the IP address of the virtual router. Use the no form to disable HSRP on  
an interface and remove the IP address for the virtual router.  
Syntax  
standby [group] ip [ip-address [secondary]]  
no standby [group] ip [ip-address]  
group - Identifies the virtual router group. (Range: 0-255)  
ip-address - The designated IP address of the virtual router.  
secondary - Specifies additional IP addresses supported by this group.  
Default Setting  
Group number: 0  
Virtual router groups: none configured  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• The designated IP address must be configured on at least one router in the  
virtual router group. If an IP address is specified in this command, that  
address is used as the designated address for the virtual group. If an IP  
address is not specified, the designated address is learned through the  
exchange of HSRP messages. Note that the designated address cannot be  
the same as a physical address.  
• The subnet mask for the physical interface on which the designated address  
is configured is used as the subnet mask of the designated address. The  
interfaces of all routers participating in a virtual router group must be within the  
same IP subnet.  
• Configuring a new designated address on the current master router will  
override the designated address currently is use.  
• If you have multiple secondary addresses configured on the current VLAN  
interface, you can use this command with the secondary keyword to add any  
secondary address that will be supported by the virtual router.  
• HSRP is enabled once the designated address and priority are configured,  
and the master and standby routers are elected based on highest priority. If  
you need to customize any of the other parameters for HSRP such as  
authentication, tracking, or advertisement interval, then first configure these  
parameters before enabling HSRP.  
4-321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This example creates HSRP group 1 for VLAN 1, and also adds a secondary  
interface as a member of the group.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 ip 192.168.1.7  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 ip 192.168.2.6 secondary  
Console(config-if)#  
standby priority  
This command sets the priority of this router in a HSRP group. Use the no form to  
restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
standby [group] priority level  
no standby [group] priority  
group - Identifies the HSRP group. (Range: 0-255)  
level - Priority of this router in the HSRP group. (Range: 1-255)  
Default Setting  
Group number: 0  
Priority: 100  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• The router with the highest priority is elected as the master virtual router. The  
router with the next highest priority is elected as the standby router. The  
standby router will become the master router if the current master fails. When  
the original master router recovers, it will become the active master router  
again if the configured priorities have not been changed.  
• If two or more routers are configured with the same HSRP priority, the router  
with the higher IP address is elected as the new master router if the current  
master fails.  
• The priority setting takes precedence over authentication. In other words, if a  
router with a higher priority than any other router comes on line, but is not  
configured with the standby authentication command, or is configured with  
the wrong string, it will still take over as the active master.  
• The HSRP priority can change dynamically if an interface is configured with  
the standby track command and another interface on the router fails or  
comes back on line.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 priority 10  
Console(config-if)#  
4-322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
Related Commands  
standby preempt  
This command configures the router to take over as the master virtual router for an  
HSRP group if it has higher priority than the current master virtual router. Use the no  
form to disable preemption.  
Syntax  
standby [group] preempt [delay seconds]  
no standby [group] preempt [delay]  
group - Identifies the HSRP group. (Range: 0-255)  
seconds - The time to wait before issuing a claim to become the master.  
(Range: 0-3600 seconds)  
Default Setting  
Group number: 0  
Preempt: Disabled  
Delay: 0 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• If preempt is enabled, and this router has a priority higher than the current  
acting master, it will take over as the new master. If preempt is not enabled,  
this router will only take over if it has the highest priority in the group and the  
current master stops sending hello messages or sends other messages  
indicating that it is no longer acting as the designated router.  
• The delay can give additional time to receive an advertisement message from  
the current master before taking control. If the router attempting to become the  
master has just come on line, this delay also gives it time to gather information  
for its routing table before actually preempting the currently active router.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 preempt delay 10  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
standby authentication  
This command specifies the key used to authenticate HSRP packets received from  
other routers. Use the no form to delete an authentication string.  
Syntax  
standby [group] authentication string  
no standby [group] authentication  
group - Identifies the HSRP group. (Range: 0-255)  
string - Authentication string. (Range: 1-8 alphanumeric characters)  
Default Setting  
Group number: 0  
String: not defined  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• All routers in the same HSRP group must be configured with the same  
authentication string. The authentication string is sent unencrypted in all  
HSRP messages.  
• When an HSRP packet is received from another router in the group, its  
authentication string is compared to the string configured on this router. If the  
strings match, the message is accepted. Otherwise, the packet is discarded.  
If the authentication strings do not match, this router will not be able to learn  
the designated address for the group and timer values from other routers.  
However, even if authentication fails, this cannot prevent a router from taking  
over as the master router if it has the highest priority in the group.  
• Priority takes precedence over authentication. In other words, if a router is  
configured with the standby priority command to have the highest priority in  
the group, but does not have an authentication string, or is configured with the  
wrong string, it will still take over as the active master.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 authentication bluebird  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
standby timers  
This command sets the time between the master and standby router sending hello  
packets, and the time before other routers declare the active master router or  
standby router down. Use the no form to restore the default timer values.  
Syntax  
standby [group] timers hellotime holdtime  
no standby [group] timers  
group - Identifies the HSRP group. (Range: 0-255)  
hellotime - Advertisement interval for the master and standby virtual router.  
(Range: 1-254 seconds)  
holdtime - Time before the master or standby router is declared down.  
(Range: hellotime+1 to 255 seconds)  
Default Setting  
Group number: 0  
Hellotime: 3 seconds  
Holdtime: 10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• HSRP advertisements from the master and standby virtual router include  
information about their priority, timer values, and current state as the master  
or standby router.  
• Routers on which the timer settings have not been configured can learn the  
current timer values from the master or standby router. Timers configured on  
the master router always override any other timer settings. All routers in an  
HSRP group should be configured with the same timer values.  
• If the master router stops sending advertisements, backup routers will bid to  
become the master based on priority. The hold time before declaring a router  
dead should be normally be set to a value 3 times or more than the hello time.  
• HSRP advertisements are sent to the multicast address 224.0.0.2. Using a  
multicast address reduces the amount of traffic that has to processed by  
network devices that are not part of the designated HSRP group.  
Example  
This example sets the timers for group 1 to 6 seconds for the hello time, and 18  
seconds for the hold time.  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 timers 6 18  
Console(config-if)#  
4-325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
standby track  
This command configures an interface so that the HSRP priority changes based on  
the availability of other IP interfaces on this router. Use the no form to disable  
tracking.  
Syntax  
standby [group] track vlan vlan-id [interface-priority]  
no standby [group] track vlan vlan-id  
group - Identifies the HSRP group. (Range: 0-255)  
vlan-id - VLAN configured with an IP address. (Range: 1-4094)  
interface-priority - Amount by which the HSRP router priority is  
decremented (or incremented) when the interface goes down (or comes  
back up). (Range: 1-255)  
Default Setting  
Group number: 0  
Interface priority: 10  
Command Mode  
Interface (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
• This command adjusts the HSRP router priority based on the availability of its  
IP interfaces. When a tracked interface goes down, the HSRP router priority  
decreases by the specified value, and increases by the same value when it  
comes back up. You can specify up to 32 interfaces to be tracked.  
• If you specify a VLAN interface that has not been configured with an IP  
address, this command will not affect the HSRP router priority.  
• If you configure multiple tracked interfaces, and also set the interface priority,  
the effect on HSRP router priority is cumulative when one or more interfaces  
go up or down. However, if you configure multiple tracked interfaces, but do  
not set the interface priority, HSRP router priority will only be changed by the  
default interface priority value of 10; i.e., the effect is not cumulative.  
Example  
This example tracks the VLAN 2 IP interface, and sets the amount by which to adjust  
the HSRP router priority on the VLAN 1 interface to 5.  
Console(config)interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#standby 1 track vlan 2 5  
Console(config-if)#  
4-326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
show standby  
This command displays status information for HSRP.  
Syntax  
show standby [active | init | listen | standby] [brief]  
• active - Displays HSRP groups in the active state.  
• init - Displays HSRP groups in the initial state.  
• listen - Displays HSRP groups in the listen or learn state.  
• standby - Displays HSRP groups in the standby or speak state.  
brief - Displays summary information for all HSRP groups on this router.  
Defaults  
Displays detailed information for each group.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example displays the full listing of status information for all groups.  
Console#show standby  
Vlan 1 - Group 1  
Local State is Active, priority 5 (confgd 10), may preempt  
Preemption delayed for 10 secs  
Hellotime 6 sec, holdtime 18 sec  
Next hello sent in 0: 0: 5  
Host standby IP address is 192.168.1.7 configured  
Active router is local  
Standby router is unknown  
Standby virtual mac address is 0- 0- C- 7-AC- 1  
Authentication text "bluebird"  
Tracking interface states for 1 interfaces, 0 up  
Down  
Vlan2  
5
Console#  
Table 4-112 show standby - display description  
Field  
Description  
State of the local router:  
Local state  
Active - Current master router.  
Standby - Designated backup router next in line to take over as the master router.  
Speak - Router is sending packets to claim the master or standby role.  
Init - Router is not ready to participate in HSRP. A router may be in this state because  
the associated interface is not up, the interface is in an HSRP group on other routers  
in the network that were learned via snooping, or a local group has been configured  
without a specified IP interface.  
Listen - Router is not in the active nor standby state. If no messages are received from  
the active or standby router, it will start to speak.  
Learn - Router is not in the active nor standby state, nor does it have enough  
information to attempt to claim the master or standby roles.  
4-327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-112 show standby - display description (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
priority  
Priority of this router.  
may preempt  
Router will attempt to take over as the master router if its priority is higher.  
Delay before a router with higher priority can preempt the current acting master  
Preemption  
delayed  
Hellotime  
Interval at which this router advertises when acting as the master or standby router  
Next hello sent Time before the next hello packet will be sent  
Host standby IP IP address of the master router  
address  
Active router  
The master router can be “local” or an IP address. Local implies this router. If an address  
is display, it indicates the current active master router.  
Standby router The standby router can be “local” or an IP address. Local implies this router. If an address  
is display, it indicates the current standby router.  
Standby virtual The virtual MAC address for this HSRP group. This is always 0000.0C07.ACxy, where xy  
mac address  
is the hexadecimal value of the group number.  
Authentication  
text  
Key used to authenticate HSRP packets received from other routers.  
Tracking  
interface states  
List of interfaces that are being tracked and their corresponding states.  
This example displays the brief listing of status information for all groups.  
Console#show vrrp brief  
Interface Grp Prio P State  
Active addr  
Standby addr  
Group addr  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Vlan1  
1
5 T Active  
Local  
0.0.0.0  
192.168.1.7  
Console#  
Table 4-113 show standby brief - display description  
Description  
Field  
Interface  
Grp  
VLAN interface  
HSRP group  
Prio  
Priority of this router  
P
Shows whether or not a higher priority router can preempt the current acting master  
Local state as described in the preceding table  
Address of the master router  
State  
Active addr  
Standby addr  
Group addr  
Address of the standby router  
Address of the HSRP group  
4-328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Router Redundancy Commands  
4
show standby interface  
This command displays HSRP status information for the specified interface.  
Syntax  
show standby interface vlan vlan-id [group group] [active | init | listen |  
standby] [brief]  
vlan-id - Identifier of configured VLAN interface. (Range: 1-4094)  
group - Identifies the HSRP group. (Range: 0-255)  
• active - Displays HSRP groups in the active state.  
• init - Displays HSRP groups in the initial state.  
• listen - Displays HSRP groups in the listen or learn state.  
• standby - Displays HSRP groups in the standby or speak state.  
brief - Displays summary information for all HSRP groups on this router.  
Defaults  
Displays detailed information for each group.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example displays the full listing of status information for VLAN 1.  
Console#show standby interface vlan 1 group 1  
Vlan 1 - Group 1  
Local State is Active, priority 5 (confgd 10), may preempt  
Preemption delayed for 10 secs  
Hellotime 6 sec, holdtime 18 sec  
Next hello sent in 0: 0: 0  
Host standby IP address is 192.168.1.7 configured  
Active router is local  
Standby router is unknown  
Standby virtual mac address is 0- 0- C- 7-AC- 1  
Authentication text "bluebird"  
Tracking interface states for 1 interfaces, 0 up  
Down  
Console#show standby interface vlan 1 group 1 brief  
Interface Grp Prio P State Active addr Standby addr  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Vlan2  
5
Group addr  
Vlan1  
1
5 T Active  
Local  
0.0.0.0  
192.168.1.7  
Console#  
For a description of the displayed information, see the preceding “show standby” command.  
4-329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
4-330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Software Specifications  
Software Features  
Authentication  
Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1x), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security  
Access Control Lists  
IP, MAC (up to 32 lists)  
DHCP Client, Relay, Server  
DNS Server  
Port Configuration  
1000BASE-T: 10/100 Mbps at half/full duplex, 1000 Mbps at full duplex  
1000BASE-SX/LX - 1000 Mbps at full duplex (SFP),  
1000BASE-LH - 1000 Mbps at full duplex (SFP),  
100BASE-FX - 100 Mbps at full duplex (SFP)  
Flow Control  
Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3x  
Half Duplex: Back pressure  
Broadcast Storm Control  
Traffic throttled above a critical threshold  
Port Mirroring  
Multiple source ports, one destination port  
Rate Limits  
Input Limit  
Output limit  
Range (configured per port)  
Port Trunking  
Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)  
Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)  
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, IEEE 802.1s)  
VLAN Support  
Up to 255 groups; port-based, protocol-based, or tagged (802.1Q),  
GVRP for automatic VLAN learning, private VLANs  
Class of Service  
Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing  
(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),  
Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP Port, IP Precedence, IP DSCP  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Software Specifications  
A
Multicast Filtering  
IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)  
IGMP (Layer 3)  
Multicast Routing  
DVMRP, PIM-DM  
IP Routing  
ARP, Proxy ARP  
Static routes  
RIP, RIPv2 and OSPFv2 dynamic routing  
VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)  
HSRP (Hot Standby Router Protocol)  
Additional Features  
BOOTP client  
CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing)  
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)  
RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)  
SMTP Email Alerts  
Management Features  
In-Band Management  
Telnet, web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell  
Out-of-Band Management  
RS-232 DB-9 console port  
Software Loading  
TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band  
SNMP  
Management access via MIB database  
Trap management to specified hosts  
RMON  
Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)  
Standards  
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities  
IEEE 802.1p Priority tags  
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN  
IEEE 802.1v Protocol-based VLANs  
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication  
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet,  
IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management Information Bases  
A
IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex flow control (ISO/IEC 8802-3)  
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet,  
IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T  
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging  
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol  
ARP (RFC 826)  
DHCP Client (RFC 1541)  
DHCP Relay (RFC 951)  
DHCP Server (RFC 2131)  
DVMRP (RFC 1075)  
HSRP (RFC 2281)  
HTTPS  
ICMP (RFC 792)  
IGMP (RFC 1112)  
IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)  
OSPF (RFC 2328, 1587)  
PIM-DM (draft-ietf-idmr-pim-dm-06)  
RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)  
RIP (RFC 1058)  
RIPv2 (RFC 2453)  
RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)  
SNMP (RFC 1157)  
SNMPv2c (RFC 2571)  
SNTP (RFC 2030)  
SSH (Version 2.0)  
TFTP (RFC 1350)  
VRRP (RFC 2338)  
Management Information Bases  
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)  
DNS Resolver MIB (RFC 1612)  
DVMRP MIB  
Entity MIB (RFC 2737)  
Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665)  
Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)  
Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)  
IP Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)  
IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)  
Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)  
Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)  
IP MIB (RFC 2011)  
IP Multicasting related MIBs  
MAU MIB (RFC 2668)  
MIB II (RFC 1212, 1213)  
OSPF MIB (RFC 1850)  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software Specifications  
A
PIM MIB (RFC 2934)  
Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1x)  
Port Access Entity Equipment MIB  
Private MIB  
RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2621)  
RIP1 MIB (RFC 1058)  
RIP2 MIB (RFC 2453)  
RMON MIB (RFC 2819)  
RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial implementation)  
SNMP framework MIB (RFC 2571)  
SNMP-MPD MIB (RFC 2572)  
SNMP Target MIB, SNMP Notification MIB (RFC 2573)  
SNMP User-Based SM MIB (RFC 2574)  
SNMP View Based ACM MIB (RFC 2575)  
SNMP Community MIB (RFC 2576)  
TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB  
TCP MIB (RFC 2013)  
Trap (RFC 1215)  
UDP MIB (RFC 2012)  
VRRP MIB (RFC 2787)  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Troubleshooting  
Problems Accessing the Management Interface  
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart  
Symptom  
Action  
CannotconnectusingTelnet,  
web browser, or SNMP  
software  
Be sure the switch is powered up.  
Check network cabling between the management station and the switch.  
Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the  
port you are using has not been disabled.  
Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the  
management station is connected with a valid IP address, subnet mask  
and default gateway.  
Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as  
the switch’s IP interface to which it is connected.  
If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged  
VLAN group, your management station, and the ports connecting  
intermediate switches in the network, must be configured with the  
appropriate tag.  
If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum  
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting  
again at a later time.  
Cannot connect using  
Secure Shell  
If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded the maximum  
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting  
again at a later time.  
Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured  
on the switch, and that the SSH client software is properly configured on  
the management station.  
Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch, and exported this  
key to the SSH client.  
Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user,  
including user name, authentication level, and password.  
Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the switch (if public  
key authentication is used).  
Cannot access the on-board  
configuration program via a  
serial port connection  
Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,  
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and the baud rate set to any of the  
following (9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps).  
Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out  
connections provided in the Installation Guide.  
Forgot or lost the password  
Contact your local distributor.  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
B
Using System Logs  
If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you  
encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused  
by the switch, follow these steps:  
1. Enable logging.  
2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.  
3. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.  
4. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error.  
5. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a  
list of any error messages displayed.  
6. Contact your distributor’s service engineer.  
For example:  
Console(config)#logging on  
Console(config)#logging history flash 7  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.23  
.
.
.
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
Access Control List (ACL)  
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by  
checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.  
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)  
ARP converts between IP addresses and MAC (i.e., hardware) addresses. ARP is  
used to locate the MAC address corresponding to a given IP address. This allows  
the switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the corresponding MAC  
addresses to forward packets from one hop to the next.  
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)  
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP  
address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices  
system files, and the name of the boot file.  
Class of Service (CoS)  
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and  
then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the  
queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent  
blockage of lower-level queues. Priority may be set according to the port default, the  
packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or  
DSCP priority bit.  
Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)  
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based  
on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of  
forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then  
into the output queues.  
Domain Name Service (DNS)  
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.  
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP)  
A distance-vector-style routing protocol used for routing multicast datagrams  
through the Internet. DVMRP combines many of the features of RIP with Reverse  
Path Forwarding (RPF).  
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)  
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP  
network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration  
options.  
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)  
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network  
access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and  
password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an authentication server  
(e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1x  
Port Authentication standard.  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)  
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register  
necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined  
in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network.  
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)  
GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and  
propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so  
that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN  
containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration  
Protocol.  
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)  
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP  
requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE  
802.1p standard.  
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)  
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.  
Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)  
This protocol allows hosts to connect to a single virtual router and to maintain  
connectivity even if the actual first hop gateway they are using fails.  
IEEE 802.1D  
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the  
Spanning Tree Protocol.  
IEEE 802.1Q  
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It  
allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a  
standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks.  
Glossary-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
IEEE 802.1p  
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The  
standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches  
to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.  
IEEE 802.1s  
An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) which provides  
independent spanning trees for VLAN groups.  
IEEE 802.1x  
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first  
enter a user ID and password for authentication.  
IEEE 802.3ac  
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.  
IEEE 802.3x  
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on  
full-duplex links.  
IGMP Snooping  
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast  
Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.  
IGMP Query  
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the  
device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to  
which they already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP  
address in the subnetwork.  
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)  
A network layer protocol that reports errors in processing IP packets. ICMP is also  
used by routers to feed back information about better routing choices.  
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)  
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast  
services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork,  
one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping  
track of group membership.  
In-Band Management  
Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.  
Glossary-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
IP Multicast Filtering  
A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.  
IP Precedence  
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits  
defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control  
packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The eight values are mapped one-to-one  
to the Class of Service categories by default, but may be configured differently to  
suit the requirements for specific network applications.  
Layer 2  
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related  
directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on  
MAC addresses.  
Layer 3  
Network layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This layer handles  
the routing functions for data moving from one open system to another.  
Link Aggregation  
See Port Trunk.  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)  
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on  
another device.  
Management Information Base (MIB)  
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that  
contains information about a specific device.  
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm  
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit  
machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a  
one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed  
string of digits, also called a message digest.  
Multicast Switching  
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for  
which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within  
the designated multicast VLAN group.  
Glossary-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Network Time Protocol (NTP)  
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time  
servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize  
local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.  
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)  
OSPF is a link-state routing protocol that functions better over a larger network such  
as the Internet, as opposed to distance-vector routing protocols such as RIP. It  
includes features such as unlimited hop count, authentication of routing updates,  
and Variable Length Subnet Masks (VLSM).  
Out-of-Band Management  
Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.  
Port Authentication  
See IEEE 802.1x.  
Port Mirroring  
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for  
troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target  
port to be studied unobstructively.  
Port Trunk  
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to  
create a single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical  
links.  
Private VLANs  
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the  
assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,  
uplink ports.  
Protocol-Independent Multicasting (PIM)  
This multicast routing protocol floods multicast traffic downstream, and calculates  
the shortest-path back to the multicast source network via reverse path forwarding.  
PIM uses the router’s IP routing table rather than maintaining a separate multicast  
routing table as with DVMRP. PIM - Sparse Mode is designed for networks where  
the probability of a multicast client is low, such as on a Wide Area Network. PIM -  
Dense Mode is designed for networks where the probability of a multicast client is  
high and frequent flooding of multicast traffic can be justified.  
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)  
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central  
server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.  
Glossary-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Remote Monitoring (RMON)  
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the  
polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic  
conditions, including specific error types.  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)  
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of  
that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)  
The RIP protocol seeks to find the shortest route to another device by minimizing the  
distance-vector, or hop count, which serves as a rough estimate of transmission  
cost. RIP-2 is a compatible upgrade to RIP. It adds useful capabilities for subnet  
routing, authentication, and multicast transmissions.  
Secure Shell (SSH)  
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can  
authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between  
management clients and the switch.  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)  
A standard host-to-host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP, port 25.  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network  
management services.  
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)  
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a  
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP  
server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)  
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in  
complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs  
data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of  
the network.  
Telnet  
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over  
TCP/IP.  
Glossary-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)  
TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central  
server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the network.  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)  
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the  
network layer protocol.  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)  
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.  
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)  
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as  
the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP  
packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that may be  
discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too  
complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.  
Virtual LAN (VLAN)  
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain  
regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN  
serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share  
information and resources as though located on the same LAN.  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)  
A protocol that uses a virtual IP address to support a primary router and multiple  
backup routers. The backups can be configured to take over the workload if the  
master fails or to load share the traffic. The primary goal of VRRP is to allow a host  
device which has been configured with a fixed gateway to maintain network  
connectivity in case the primary gateway goes down.  
XModem  
A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in 128-byte  
blocks and error-corrected.  
Glossary-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Glossary-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Numerics  
802.1x, port authentication 3-57, 4-79  
D
default gateway, configuration 3-16,  
default priority, ingress port 3-138,  
default settings, system 1-6  
A
acceptable frame type 3-132, 4-192  
ACL  
address pool 3-173, 4-131  
dynamic configuration 2-5  
relay service 3-169, 4-128  
DSCP  
DNS  
Extended IP 3-67, 4-87, 4-88, 4-91  
MAC 3-67, 4-87, 4-102,  
Standard IP 3-67, 4-87, 4-88, 4-90  
address table 3-101, 4-166  
aging time 3-104, 4-169  
ARP  
default domain name 3-164, 4-142  
displaying the cache 3-168  
domain name list 3-164, 4-141  
enabling lookup 3-164, 4-145  
name server list 3-164, 4-144  
static entries 3-166  
downloading software 3-20, 4-64  
DSCP  
configuration 3-200, 4-241  
description 3-199  
statistics 3-204, 4-248  
B
BOOTP 3-18, 4-236  
broadcast storm, threshold 3-93, 4-155  
mapping priorities 3-146, 3-149,  
C
CLI, showing commands 4-4  
community string 2-6, 3-36, 4-115  
configuration settings, saving or  
restoring 2-8, 3-22, 4-64  
console port, required connections 2-2  
CoS  
configuring 3-138, 4-207  
IP port priority 3-148, 4-213  
IP precedence 3-145, 4-214  
layer 3/4 priorities 3-144, 4-213  
queue mapping 3-140, 4-210  
queue mode 3-142, 4-208  
traffic class weights 3-142, 4-210  
DVMRP  
configuring 3-253, 4-295  
global settings 3-253, 4-295–4-299  
interface settings 3-256,  
neighbor routers 3-258, 4-303  
routing table 3-259, 4-302  
dynamic addresses, displaying 3-102,  
See DHCP  
E
edge port, STA 3-114, 3-116, 4-181  
event logging 4-44  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
snooping, configuring 3-154, 4-221  
ingress filtering 3-132, 4-193  
IP address  
setting 2-4, 3-15, 4-236  
IP port priority  
F
firmware  
displaying version 3-12, 4-62  
upgrading 3-20, 4-64  
G
mapping priorities 3-148, 4-214  
IP precedence  
GVRP  
gateway, default 3-16, 3-196, 4-238  
GVRP  
global setting 3-126, 4-203  
interface configuration 3-132, 4-204  
mapping priorities 3-145, 4-215  
IP routing 3-193, 4-244  
configuring interfaces 3-197, 4-236  
enabling or disabling 3-196, 4-244  
H
unicast protocols 3-195  
IP, statistics 3-205, 4-248  
hardware version, displaying 3-12,  
HSRP  
J
jumbo frame 4-63  
authentication 3-189, 4-324  
configuration settings 3-186, 4-320  
interface tracking 3-189, 4-326  
preemption 3-187, 3-188, 4-323  
timers 3-188, 4-325  
virtual address 3-187, 3-189, 4-321  
HTTPS 3-48, 4-32  
HTTPS, secure server 3-48, 4-32  
L
LACP  
configuration 4-163  
local parameters 3-90  
partner parameters 3-92  
protocol parameters 3-87, 4-163  
LACP  
link type, STA 3-114, 3-116, 4-183  
logging  
syslog traps 4-47  
I
IEEE 802.1D 3-104, 4-171  
to syslog servers 4-46  
log-in, Web interface 3-2  
logon authentication 3-44, 4-70  
RADIUS client 3-46, 4-72  
RADIUS server 3-46, 4-72  
TACACS+ client 3-46, 4-75  
TACACS+ server 3-46, 4-75  
logon authentication, sequence 3-46,  
IEEE 802.1s 4-171  
IEEE 802.1w 3-104, 4-171  
IEEE 802.1x 3-57, 4-79  
IGMP  
description of protocol 3-152  
groups, displaying 3-158, 4-223,  
Layer 2 3-153, 4-221  
Layer 3 3-160, 4-229  
query, Layer 2 3-154, 4-224  
query, Layer 3 3-160, 4-229  
services, displaying 3-163, 4-235  
M
main menu 3-4  
Management Information Bases  
(MIBs) A-3  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
mirror port, configuring 3-95, 4-160  
PIM-DM 3-260, 4-304  
configuring 3-260, 4-304  
global settings 3-117, 4-169  
interface settings 3-115, 4-170  
multicast filtering 3-152, 4-220  
multicast groups 3-158, 3-163, 4-223  
displaying 3-163, 4-223  
multicast routing 3-249, 4-291  
description 3-249  
global configuration 3-260, 4-304  
interface settings 3-261,  
neighbor routers 3-264, 4-310  
port authentication 3-57, 4-79  
port priority  
configuring 3-138, 4-207  
default ingress 3-138, 4-209  
port security, configuring 3-55, 4-77  
port, statistics 3-97, 4-158  
ports  
autonegotiation 3-81, 4-151  
broadcast storm threshold 3-93,  
general commands 4-293  
global settings 3-249, 4-293  
routing table 3-250, 4-293  
multicast services  
configuring 3-159, 4-221  
displaying 3-158, 4-223  
multicast, static router port 3-157,  
capabilities 3-81, 4-152  
duplex mode 3-81, 4-150  
flow control 3-81, 4-153  
forced selection on combo  
ports 3-80, 4-154  
speed 3-81, 4-150  
O
ports, configuring 3-78, 4-149  
ports, mirroring 3-95, 4-160  
priority, default port ingress 3-138,  
problems, troubleshooting B-1  
protocol migration 3-116, 4-185  
proxy ARP 3-199, 4-243  
area border router 3-224, 4-264  
AS summary route 3-241, 4-265  
autonomous system boundary  
router 3-225, 4-262  
backbone 3-227, 4-267  
default external route 3-225, 4-262  
general settings 3-224, 4-259  
normal area 3-227, 4-267  
Q
queue weights 3-142, 4-210  
redistributing external routes 3-242,  
R
RADIUS, logon authentication 3-46,  
transit area 3-227, 4-270  
virtual link 3-236, 4-270  
rate limits, setting 3-96, 4-162  
remote logging 4-47  
restarting the system 3-32, 4-23  
RIP  
P
password, line 4-13  
passwords 2-4  
configuring 3-213, 4-249–4-257  
description 3-195  
global settings 3-214, 4-249  
interface protocol settings 3-217,  
administrator setting 3-44, 4-27  
path cost 3-106, 3-113  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
specifying interfaces 3-216, 4-250  
statistics 3-220, 4-258  
router redundancy  
setting 3-20, 4-69  
static addresses, setting 3-101, 4-166  
static routes, configuring 3-211, 4-245  
statistics  
protocols 3-178, 4-311  
routing table, displaying 3-212, 4-246,  
global configuration 3-105, 4-171  
STP Also see STA  
system clock, setting 3-33, 4-53  
system software, downloading from  
server 3-20, 4-64  
S
secure shell 3-50, 4-35  
Secure Shell configuration 3-50, 4-38  
serial port  
configuring 4-11  
See SNMP  
T
SNMP 3-35  
TACACS+, logon authentication 3-46,  
community string 3-36, 4-115  
enabling traps 3-37, 4-118  
filtering IP addresses 4-125  
trap manager 3-37, 4-117  
software  
displaying version 3-12, 4-62  
downloading 3-20, 4-64  
specifications, software A-1  
SSH, configuring 3-50, 4-38  
global settings, configuring 3-108,  
global settings, displaying 3-105,  
interface settings 3-112, 3-120,  
path cost method 3-110, 4-174  
port priority 3-114, 4-180  
protocol migration 3-116, 4-185  
transmission limit 3-110, 4-175  
standards, IEEE A-2  
time, setting 3-33, 4-53  
traffic class weights 3-142, 4-210  
trap manager 2-7, 3-37, 4-117  
troubleshooting B-1  
trunk  
configuration 3-83, 4-163  
static 3-84, 4-164  
U
upgrading software 3-20, 4-64  
user account 3-44  
user password 3-44, 4-27, 4-28  
V
See VRRP  
adding static members 3-129,  
description 3-123  
displaying basic information 3-126,  
displaying port members 3-127,  
startup files  
creating 3-23, 4-64  
displaying 3-20, 4-58  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
egress mode 3-133, 4-192  
interface configuration 3-132,  
protocol message statistics 3-184,  
private 3-134, 4-198  
virtual address 3-179, 3-181, 4-312  
protocol 3-135, 4-199  
W
authentication 3-181, 4-313  
configuration settings 3-179, 4-311  
group statistics 3-185, 4-316  
preemption 3-180, 3-181, 4-315  
Web interface  
access requirements 3-1  
configuration buttons 3-3  
home page 3-2  
menu list 3-4  
panel display 3-3  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Index-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ES4612  
E092004-R01  
150000046400A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Land Pride Brush Cutter RC5020 User Manual
Lochinvar Heat Pump PS1000 User Manual
Logitech Mouse MX600 User Manual
Lumex Syatems Camping Equipment 763400A User Manual
Makita Grinder 9556NB User Manual
Makita Sander SA7000C User Manual
Maretron Computer Monitor ACM100 User Manual
Memorex Stereo System VX3610 User Manual
Metra Electronics Radio 99 9105 User Manual
Meyer Sound Speaker CQTM Series User Manual